JP7517047B2 - Cooking equipment - Google Patents

Description

This disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats food using multiple heating means.

Cooking appliances are broadly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One of them is the so-called "built-in type" which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "free-standing type" which is placed in a specific position on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small and portable "tabletop type" which is placed in a desired position on a dining table, etc.

Many "built-in" cooking appliances are equipped with multiple heat sources and are popular for their ability to handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to match the standards of general kitchen furniture, meaning there is much less freedom in design compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, and it is difficult to turn them into practical products.

A typical built-in type heating cooker has an induction heating unit located on the top plate at the top of the main body to expand the range of cooking options, and a heating chamber (also called a "grill chamber," but hereinafter referred to collectively as the "heating chamber") inside the main body that is heated by a heating element, and is configured to heat and cook food placed in the heating chamber (for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2).
A cooker equipped with a plurality of heat sources with different heating principles, such as that described in Patent Document 1, is called a composite cooker.

JP 2020-087506 A (page 20, FIG. 18) JP 2020-133994 A (page 26, FIG. 14)

As proposed in Patent Documents 1 and 2 above, when using heat sources in multiple locations, measures must be taken to prevent unintended heat sources from operating or stopping even if the user issues an incorrect operation command. If these measures are not sufficient, it may cause confusion for the user and may result in cooking failure. In other words, difficult technical problems must be overcome, such as linking multiple heat sources and informing or displaying the linking status of the heat sources to the user in a timely manner.

In particular, the input operation unit where the user inputs is generally installed facing upward on the main body so that it can be operated from above the main body (Patent Documents 1 and 2 above), but even if the number of heating sources increases, there is a restriction on the space (flat area) for installing the input keys (including the operation buttons), and it is not possible to install many input keys. Furthermore, if many input keys are installed, they may be crowded together, causing users to touch adjacent input keys, which may impair operability.
Under such constraints, the above-mentioned Patent Documents 1 and 2 are designed to automatically display an initial standby screen after the main power is turned on, before the user selects a "linked cooking menu" or a "composite cooking menu," thereby providing the user with reference information and assisting the user in inputting operations.

However, the above-mentioned Patent Documents 1 and 2 still have room for improvement in terms of notifying the user of the correct input key before starting the desired cooking.

The objective of this disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by improving user operability.

The cooking device according to the first disclosure includes:
A first heating means for heating the object to be heated by a heating section;
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources with different heating methods for cooking in a heating chamber located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
a notification means having a voice notification unit and a display unit;
a control unit that receives a command from the input operation unit,
The input operation unit includes a first cooking mode selection unit and a second cooking mode selection unit,
The first cooking mode selection unit selects an associated cooking mode in which cooking is performed in a predetermined order by using the first heating means and the second heating means having a plurality of heating sources having different heating methods in combination,
The second cooking mode selection unit selects a composite cooking mode in which cooking is performed by using a plurality of heating sources of the second heating means having different heating methods in combination ,
When a main power source is supplied, the control unit notifies the first information identifying the first cooking mode selection unit and the second information identifying the second cooking mode selection unit by the audio notification unit.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the second disclosure includes:
A main body having a heating chamber built therein and a top plate on an upper surface thereof;
An induction heating source that induction heats an object to be heated placed on a heating portion installed at a plurality of positions on the top plate from below the top plate;
An oven heat source for heating an object to be cooked placed inside the heating chamber;
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber;
a display means for displaying operation information of the induction heating source, the oven heating source, and the microwave heating source,
A control unit that controls the induction heating source, the oven heating source, the microwave heating source, and the display means;
An input operation unit that inputs a command from a user to the control unit,
The control unit, in the display means,
(1) Display the initial screen during standby,
(2) after displaying the standby initial screen, a guide screen is displayed on which first information specifying a first cooking mode selection section for selecting a first cooking mode and second information specifying a second cooking mode selection section for selecting a second cooking mode are displayed in a list form;
(3) A cooking menu or a control menu is displayed after a selection operation of the first cooking mode selection unit or the second cooking mode selection unit is performed.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the third disclosure includes:
A main body with a built-in heating chamber;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated that is placed in a location separate from the heating chamber;
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber;
A display means;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the display means;
An input operation unit that inputs a command from a user to the control unit,
The control unit, in the display means,
(1) Display the initial screen during standby,
(2) Then, first information specifying a first cooking mode selection unit for selecting the first cooking mode, second information specifying a second cooking mode selection unit for selecting the second cooking mode, and third information specifying a third cooking mode selection unit for selecting the third cooking mode are displayed in a list state;
(3) Furthermore, when the first cooking mode selection unit is selected, a first specific screen is displayed, when the second cooking mode selection unit is selected, a second specific screen is displayed, and when the third cooking mode selection unit is selected, a third specific screen is displayed.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

A cooking device according to a fourth disclosure includes:
The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated in at least two heating sections arranged on the left and right sides of the upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A display means for displaying information;
a control unit that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit has an individual operation unit corresponding to the heating unit and a shared operation unit corresponding to both the first heating means and the second heating means,
the display means includes an integrated display section corresponding to the common operation section and an individual display section corresponding to the individual operation section,
The input operation unit includes a first cooking mode selection unit and a second cooking mode selection unit,
After a main power source is supplied, the control unit displays, on the integrated display unit and the individual display unit, a standby initial screen that displays information common to the first heating means and the second heating means, and subsequently displays a guide screen instead of the standby initial screen;
The guidance screen displays first information specifying the first cooking mode selection unit and second information specifying the second cooking mode selection unit in a list state or in a switchable manner.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide variety of cooking methods by linking multiple heating means.

1 is a conceptual diagram showing a communication system between one house and the outside according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 1 . FIG. 2 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view 2 showing the configuration of a kitchen in one of the houses shown in FIG. 1 . 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of home appliances and a home gateway in one house shown in FIG. 1. 1 is a perspective view showing an entire kitchen furniture in which a built-in type combination heating cooker according to a first embodiment is installed. FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state of kitchen furniture before the heating cooker shown in FIG. 5 is installed. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of installing the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 in kitchen furniture. FIG. FIG. 6 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture and the cooking appliance in FIG. 5 . 9 is a schematic enlarged longitudinal sectional view showing a front part of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 . FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in FIG. 8 as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 . 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 11. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line Z-Z of FIG. 11, showing the flow of cooling air. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along the line W-W of FIG. 12. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line YY of FIG. 11. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line VV of FIG. 12. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device of FIG. 5 taken along line XX of FIG. 12. 6 is a cross-sectional view of a right-side essential part of the cooking device of FIG. 5 when installed in kitchen furniture. FIG. 6 is a simplified plan view for explaining an input operation unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a plan view of the front portion of the cooking device of FIG. 5 for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units. FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view showing a central operation unit (common operation unit) and an integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an enlarged plan view of a right operation unit and a right display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is an enlarged plan view of a left operation unit and a left display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. FIG. 25 is a simplified schematic diagram of the main components shown in FIG. 24. 25 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view taken along line S--S in FIG. 24. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle by enlarging the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 25. 4 is a simplified perspective view illustrating a positional relationship between the cooling air from the air outlet of the first cooling fan and an inverter circuit board. FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of the cooking device shown in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a block diagram 2 showing main control-related parts of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a block diagram 3 showing main control-related parts of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a main cooling air passage of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a circuit diagram showing details of an inverter circuit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a table showing the correspondence between the main (range grill) control menus and the display areas in the integrated display unit of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between a storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and a central operation unit. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the storage device of the integrated control device of the cooking device of FIG. 5 and the central operation unit. 6 is a table showing explanations of cooking menus in a combined cooking mode and an induction heating only cooking mode of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 1 for explaining a control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 3 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 4 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in time series. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 for explaining the control operation of the heating cooker of FIG. 5 in time series. 6 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fans of the cooking device in FIG. 5 and the types of cooking. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart showing the relationship between a cooling fan and cooking processes in the case of detecting an abnormality in the cooking appliance of FIG. 5 . 6 is a time chart showing the timings of starting and stopping operation of first to fourth cooling fans in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a time chart 2 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when coordinated cooking is performed in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a time chart 3 showing the timings of starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when both the induction heating source and the oven heating source are driven simultaneously in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a control operation when deep-fry cooking (automatic), which is a type of induction heating cooking, is performed in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit after the start-up of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start-up of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start-up of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start-up of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the operation of the left operating part of the cooking device in FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 for explaining the operation of the left operating unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 5 in a combined cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 5 in a combined cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing a display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 5 in a combined cooking mode. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 5 in a combined cooking mode. 6 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit in a composite cooking mode of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing input operations and steps when implementing a coordinated cooking mode, a composite cooking mode, and a single cooking mode. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between cooking steps in a coordinated cooking mode and a single cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode and the independent cooking mode. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys in an input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection of an integrated cooking mode to transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing, in time series, changes in the input function of the input operation unit and notifications from the start to the end of a heating operation in the coordinated cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing, in time series, the relationship between input operations and displays until a transition between a composite cooking mode and an associated cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in an integrated cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the combined cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between various cooking steps and operations in the combined cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 1 showing a notification operation of a cooking process in a coordinated cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of notifying the user of a cooking process in the combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing cooking steps in a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing cooking steps in a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a combined cooking mode in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 2 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 3 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 4 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 6 is a flowchart 5 showing the control operation of the integrated control device when a combined cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 6 is a plan view 1 showing the control operations of the input operation unit and the display unit (integrated display unit and left display unit) when the cooperative cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7A and 7B are plan and explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the central operation unit and the display operation of the integrated display unit when an integrated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . 7 is an explanatory diagram showing types of cooking menus in the coordinated cooking mode when the coordinated cooking mode is selected in the cooking device of FIG. 5 . FIG. 13 is a table showing the display contents of a first specific screen on the integrated display unit when the collaborative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when an integrated cooking mode is selected; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when the cooperative cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram 8 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "hamburger steak" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "fried chicken" in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when "fried chicken" is selected in the collaborative cooking mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a control operation of the integrated control device when an integrated cooking mode is selected. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between a refrigerator and a cooker during cooking in a coordinated cooking mode. FIG. 117 is a system explanatory diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator, the home gateway, and the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the integrated display unit and the input operation unit when cooking "fried chicken" in the collaborative cooking mode in the example shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the example shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 115. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after starting up the cooking appliance in the example shown in FIG. 115. 116 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway in the example shown in FIG. 115. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation of an integrated control device illustrating an example of using refrigerator inventory information. FIG. 121 is an enlarged plan view 1 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 120. 121 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operating section and the integrated display section of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 120. FIG. 121 is an enlarged plan view 3 showing the central operation unit and the integrated display unit of the cooking device in the example of FIG. 120. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing main control-related parts of a built-in type combined heating cooker according to a second embodiment. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from the selection of the cooperative cooking mode to the transition in the heating cooker of FIG. 127. 13 is a plan view of the front portion for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units in a cooking device according to a third embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection to transition of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker of FIG. 129. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the relationship between input keys in an input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., from selection to transition of an integrated cooking mode in a heating cooker according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13 is a simplified plan view of a built-in type combined heating cooker according to a fifth embodiment. A simplified oblique view of the main parts of the heating cooker shown in Figure 132. A simplified perspective view showing a modified example of the heating cooker shown in Figure 133. A list of various cooking modes of the heating cooker shown in Figure 132. An explanatory diagram showing the main cooling air ducts of the cooking device shown in Figure 132. FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the cooling air passage shown in FIG. 136. An enlarged plan view showing the central (shared) operating section and integrated display section in the cooking device shown in Figure 132. 133 is an enlarged plan view of the right operating section and right display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. 133 is an enlarged plan view of the left operating section and the left display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. A block diagram showing the main control-related parts of the heating cooker shown in Figure 132. 133 is a flowchart showing the operational steps from when the cooking device shown in FIG. 132 is started up until when the guide screen and the first to third specific screens are displayed. 13 is a plan view of the front portion of a cooking device according to a sixth embodiment for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units. FIG. A flowchart showing the operational steps from determining the object to be heated to switching to a dedicated mode and a normal mode in the heating cooker shown in Figure 141. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the overall control function of the cooking device according to the seventh embodiment. 146 is a simplified plan view showing an enlarged input operation section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operation steps and display steps for the heating cooker shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. A block diagram showing a part of the input operation unit and integrated control device of the heating cooker shown in Figure 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 7 showing the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. An explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the display operation of the integrated display section of the cooking device shown in Figure 145. An explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the cooking appliance shown in Figure 145 and an external information management device, etc. 147 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit and the display information of the integrated display unit and the left display unit in the cooking device of FIG. 145. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the front portion of a cooking device according to an eighth embodiment for explaining the arrangement of an input operation unit and various display units. FIG. 159 is a plan view 2 of the front portion of the cooking device for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units. FIG. 159 is a plan view 3 of the front portion of the cooking device for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units. This shows a modified example of the cooking device shown in Figure 159, and is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units.

(Definition)
"Home appliance" 400 refers to an electric appliance designed to be used mainly at home. Home appliance 400 includes induction heating cooker 1, refrigerator 401, television receiver 402, air conditioner 403, air purifier 404, ventilator 405, electric rice cooker (including electric rice cooker) 406, microwave oven 408, lighting equipment 409, and air purifier 410, which will be described later. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "refrigerator" includes both a refrigerator-freezer with a built-in freezer (freezer compartment) and a freezer with only a freezing function.

The "device identification information" of home appliance 400 is unique information for identifying home appliance 400. Specifically, it is important information required for information communication, such as the MAC address, manufacturer name, type name (model name), model number, and serial number of home appliance 400.

The "home gateway" 411 refers to an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 in one home and participates in coordinated operations. In addition to this, it also performs operations such as issuing command signals for operations (such as starting and stopping operation, changing conditions, etc.) to one home appliance 400, or acquiring information (also called "data") from one home appliance 400.

The home gateway 411 may have a power control function such as a peak cut function to manage the total power usage of a household for all or some of the home appliances 400, in which case it may be called a "power control device" or "integrated management device", etc.

The home gateway 411 has a function of acquiring information on the current state of the home appliance 400, such as whether the home appliance 400 is in operation, stopped, or in standby mode, from the home appliance 400 via a wired or wireless signal.
When wireless communication is used, the home gateway 411 is connected to the target home appliance 400 using the appliance identification information.

Even if the home gateway 411 functions as an "integrated management device" or "power command device" for one home appliance 400 (e.g., induction heating cooker 1), if it does not limit the power consumption of other home appliances (e.g., lighting fixture 409), it does not correspond to an "integrated management device" or "power command device". For example, even if the home gateway 411 acquires the operation information of the lighting fixture 409, it does not have the function of regulating the power consumption of the lighting fixture 409 itself so that the total power consumption, including the power consumption of the other home appliances 400, does not exceed the upper limit of the specified total power consumption. Therefore, from the perspective of the lighting fixture 409, the home gateway 411 does not correspond to either an integrated management device or a power command device.

Embodiment 1.
1 to 126 disclose a first embodiment. In this first embodiment, a built-in type combined (induction) heating cooker 1 is disclosed. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, it will be simply called a "heating cooker."
In each drawing, the symbol RT indicates the right direction of the cooking device 1, LE indicates the left direction, FT indicates the front, and BK indicates the rear.

In this embodiment 1, the "first heating means" HM1 refers to a means for heating the object N, which contains the food to be cooked, on the top plate 15, such as an induction heating source 9 or a gas burner (not shown) (described later). The object N is, for example, a metal pot or frying pan.

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object N placed on the top plate," it means that it includes both cases where the heated object N, such as a pot, is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 15 described below and heated, and cases where the heated object N is placed on a support member, such as a trivet, arranged above the top plate, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In this embodiment 1, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food to be cooked contained inside the heating chamber 113, which will be described later.

In the first embodiment, multiple heating sources with different heating principles are provided. The heating sources may be any of microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188, or a gas burner (burner) (not shown). In addition to microwave heating source 189, multiple heating sources that exert a heating effect by other heating principles may be provided. Furthermore, the second heating means may be a steam generator (boiler) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

In this embodiment 1, the term "induction heating cooker" refers to an appliance having a heating section that inductively heats the object to be heated N. When there are multiple heating sections, some of the heating sections may be heated using a method other than induction heating, such as a radiant electric heat source (sheath heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.).

In this embodiment 1, a "combined heating cooker" refers to a cooker that has multiple heating sources with different heating principles, such as a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 made up of an electric heater or the like, and that can cook in one heating chamber 113 using these two types of heating sources. The heating chamber 113 may also be heated by both an oven heating source 188 made up of an electric heater or the like and a gas burner (burner). Furthermore, an induction heating source may be used as a heating source for heating the heating chamber 113.

In this embodiment 1, the “heating means (hereinafter referred to as the “oven heating source”)” of the heating chamber 113 may be either a heating source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, or a heating source installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 113.
Alternatively, a heat generating member that becomes hot by induction heating may be disposed and used to heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 113 from the outside, or to heat the air inside the heating chamber 113.

For example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-74305 proposes a cooking device that is arranged in a heating chamber (grill chamber) and has a second heating body (induction heating coil) that heats a cooking tray on which food to be cooked is placed from below, and a third heating body (induction heating coil) that heats the food to be cooked from the side.

Furthermore, JP 2016-85996 A proposes a configuration in which an electrical insulator is provided below the heating chamber, an induction heating coil (also called an "IH coil") is provided in the space below the electrical insulator, and a cooking plate placed on the induction heating coil is induction heated. The cooking plate is made of a material that can be induction heated. For example, iron, stainless steel, carbon material with a carbon content of 90% or more, ceramic material containing Si (silicon) or FeSi (ferrosilicon) as a conductive material, etc. are used.

As a representative example of an induction heating method using a heat-generating component that becomes hot, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-071695 discloses a method in which a high-frequency current is supplied to an induction heating coil to generate a high-frequency magnetic flux in the induction heating coil, and the high-frequency magnetic flux is linked to a heater disposed in the heating chamber so that an induced current flows through the heater, and the food in the heating chamber is heated and cooked by Joule heat generated by the electrical resistance of the heater itself.

Furthermore, JP 2013-247048 A proposes placing an electrically closed circuit heater inside the heating chamber, linking this heater with high-frequency magnetic flux generated by an induction heating coil arranged outside the heating chamber, heating the heater to a high temperature and dissipating heat into the heating chamber. Note that the heater referred to here forms an electrically closed circuit, and is made by bending a round bar or pipe made of stainless steel, high-nickel alloy, etc. into a specified shape and joining both ends together by welding, brazing, etc. to form an endless shape.

A typical example of the induction heating coil (hereinafter referred to as "IH coil") in this embodiment 1 is one that is made by bundling about 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of about 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together and winding them into a spiral shape (for example, Japanese patent publication JP 2012-79580). Alternatively, there is also one that is made by winding about 1,000 to 1,500 pieces of wire of about 0.05 mm.

Another patent document, JP 2018-32551 A, proposes an induction heating cooker that uses a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material as an IH coil.
Any of these forms corresponds to the “IH coil” which is the main part of the induction heating source 9 .

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single cooked item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The "coordinated cooking" mentioned above refers to the use of multiple heating sources with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single dish, after microwave heating and preheating, the food to be cooked is moved to another location, and then heated with the IH coil 17L (described below) at the new location to complete the dish, this is a type of "coordinated cooking" as referred to here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 113 with a gas burner (burner), and then move the food onto the top plate 15 and heat it with the gas burner (burner) or induction heating source 9 to improve the cooking quality.

Coordinated cooking has been proposed in the form of a built-in cooking device in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5833699 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 5500944.

(Overall configuration and home appliance operation management system)
First, the operation management system for the home appliance 400 will be described.
In FIG. 1, HA indicates one house.
Although not shown, the inside of the house HA is actually divided into a number of living spaces by walls and doors, and one of these living spaces, the kitchen KT (see FIG. 2), is provided with home appliances 400 such as a refrigerator 401, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, and an electric rice cooker 406, as well as kitchen furniture 2. The living space may also include other rooms such as a "living room" and a "bathroom" as well as a room with a toilet, although these are not shown in FIG. 1. The living space may include other rooms.

All living spaces are supplied with electricity, for example 200V, from a commercial power source EP provided by an electric power company outside the house. This electricity is drawn into the house HA via a watt-hour meter 414.

415 is a power line (main line) connected to a commercial power source EP with a voltage of 200 V via a breaker BK. A television receiver (TV receiver) 402 capable of receiving various broadcasts, an air conditioner 403, a lighting fixture 409, an induction heating cooker 1, a microwave oven 408, an electric rice cooker 406, a home gateway 411, a wireless router 419, and an environment detection unit 413 are each connected to this power line 415.

The home gateway 410, the environment detection unit 413, the TV receiver 402, the air conditioner 403, the cooking device 1, the refrigerator 401, and the lighting fixture 409 are always connected to the power line 415 via a specified power cord. Note that there is more than one lighting fixture 409, but the others are not shown in the figure.

FIG. 1 will now be described.
416 is a wide area communications network (sometimes called a "communications network" or the "Internet").
This wide area communication network 416 is connected to the home gateway 411 via a wireless router 419 .

417 is an external server that transmits useful information to the home gateway 411 and the information and communication terminal device 418. For example, it may be a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider or an electric power company in a specific region, or it may be a server prepared by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. This external server may be a distributed processing type server known as a "cloud server." It is known that there are three types of "cloud computing" that uses cloud servers: "IaaS," "PaaS," and "SaaS."

The home gateway 411 can receive various content distribution services from an external server 417. This content includes recipe information (text and images) for various cooking methods.

Although not shown, the environmental sensor of the above-mentioned environmental detection unit 413 may be provided with additional temperature and humidity sensors that detect the temperature and humidity outside the house.

The external server 417 also functions as an information providing means for the home appliance 400. In other words, the external server 417 may be installed by an organization such as the manufacturer, distributor, repairer, or information service provider of the home appliance 400, either alone or in collaboration with two or more organizations, and provides various services related to the home appliance 400 to users via the wide area communication network 416.

The external server 417 may also be what is generally called a "Web server" (hereinafter referred to as a "Web server"). A Web server refers to a service program that provides display information of HTML and objects (images, etc.) to a Web browser of software on the information processing device (client) side that is the "information receiver" such as various information and communication terminal devices 418 and home gateway 410, in accordance with HTTP (a protocol used to exchange data such as HTML documents and images between Web servers and Web browsers), and a server computer on which the service operates.

The external server 417 stores and remembers control application software that enables remote control of the home gateway 411 from the house HA or a remote location. The remote control described above can be realized by accessing the external server 417 and downloading (reading) the control application software from an information and communication terminal device 418, which will be described in detail later, such as a device called a smartphone.

The information and communication terminal device 418 can be easily carried by the user to communicate calls and data (including e-mail information) indoors, outdoors, or anywhere on the go. It is a device that can download information from outdoor information sites via the wide area communication network 416, send and receive e-mail, and transmit remote control signals, but it can also be a device that cannot make calls, and such portable communication devices are collectively called information and communication terminal device 418. A small portable personal computer is also a type of information and communication terminal device 418.

The information communication terminal device 418 in the present embodiment 1 has a function of transmitting and receiving signals through short-range communication while being located within a few centimeters of (or may be in contact with) the input/output unit of each home appliance 400. Note that this short-range communication refers to an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviation: NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the home appliance 400 including the induction heating cooker 1 and the refrigerator 401 .
On the other hand, it is also possible for the information communication terminal device 418 to send control data (also called a "control command") to the NFC storage unit of the home appliance 400, and control the home appliance 400 in accordance with the control command.

In this embodiment 1, the information communication terminal device 418 is not able to directly remotely control the home appliances 400. Some of the home appliances 400, such as the cooking appliance 1, generate high heat, so remote control via the Internet, which is used by many people outside the house 413, is not adopted. Instead, it is possible to operate all the home appliances 400 via the home gateway 411 as an integrated information processing device.

As is clear from the above description, the home gateway 411 in this embodiment 1 is an information processing device that relays information between two or more home appliances 400 and allows them to operate in cooperation with each other. In addition to this, it also performs the operation of giving a command signal to one home appliance 400 or acquiring information (also called data) from one home appliance 400.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, the kitchen KT in the house HA is equipped with a range hood 422 (described below) and a ceiling-mounted air purifier 404.

413A is a sensor section of the environment detection section 413 of the home gateway 411. Although not shown in FIG. 1, this sensor section 413A has an environment sensor 453 (see FIG. 4) and a human presence sensor 452 (see FIG. 4) that detects the presence of a person (by infrared rays or ultrasonic waves). The environment detection section 413 will be described in detail later.

The "environmental information" refers to three types of information: temperature information about the atmosphere in the space (kitchen KT) where the cooker 1 and refrigerator 401 are used, dust scattering amount information, and light intensity information. The dust scattering amount information is the result of measuring the amount of dust (including pollen) present in the air.

Examples of "use of environmental information" include the following:
(1) When the temperature is high, the keep-warm function of the electric rice cooker 406 is operated continuously after the rice cooking process ends. Also, the target refrigeration temperature and the target freezing temperature of the refrigerator 401 are raised above the standard values.
(2) When the humidity is high, the air conditioner 403 is operated in the "dehumidification mode" or "cooling mode", or the ventilation device 405 is started. Alternatively, if the air conditioner 403 is in operation, its operating conditions (such as the target room temperature) are changed.
(3) When fine dust particles are dispersed in the air, the air cleaner 404 is operated, or the ventilation device 405 is started.
(4) When the amount of pollen dispersed is large, the air purifier 404 starts operating.
(5) When the amount of light (amount of visible light) is low, the lighting device 409 is turned on.

A "resident" refers to a person who resides in one of the houses HA shown in FIG. 1. Residents include blood relatives such as parents and children, brothers, and sisters. When using home appliance 400, the person is called a "user" regardless of whether they are a resident or not.

"Home" means a single dwelling HA managed by a specific manager, and may include an apartment building with multiple rooms and occupied by multiple families. In other words, such an apartment building is considered a home here if, like a single dwelling HA, the commercial power limit is centrally managed by a single power cut-off device (such as a single breaker BK or multiple power cut-off devices).

"Power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information on some signal related to power consumption that the home appliance 400 receives from the home gateway 411. This "power limit information on the home appliance side" refers to information including information on transmission commands such as the power reduction request signal AS1 and the power reduction command signal AS2 described below. This information includes information indicating the time when the signal was received (year, month, and time in seconds) and the meaning of the signal. For example, information such as "Transmission time: 17:00 on September 20, 2020, reduce the instantaneous maximum power consumption by 2%" regarding the power reduction command signal AS2 at a certain point in time for the cooking appliance 1.

In the case of the cooking appliance 1, for example, the power limit information on the home appliance side is stored in chronological order in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, and is not erased even when the main power switch 98 is turned ON or OFF. Turning the main power switch 98 ON and OFF is considered to be one cooking session, and at least several cooking sessions are stored and held. Anything beyond that is automatically erased in sequence.

Next, reference will be made to FIG.
2 shows an example of a hardware configuration to which the cooking appliance 1 and the home appliance operation management system of the present embodiment 1 are applied. The following description will be given taking the kitchen KT as an example of one living space.

In the kitchen KT to which the present embodiment 1 is applied, an air purifier 404 is installed on the ceiling surface (horizontal wall surface) 420, a refrigerator 401 with multiple freezer compartments 401A with different freezing temperatures and a refrigerator compartment 401B, a microwave oven 408, a built-in (induction) heating cooker 1 installed in the kitchen furniture 2, a range hood (a type of ventilation device 405) 422 installed directly above the heating cooker 1, and a home gateway 411 are installed. Note that the electric rice cooker 406, air conditioner 403, and lighting fixtures 409 described in FIG. 1 are not shown.

The refrigerator 401 has multiple freezer compartments 401A, allowing the freezer compartment to be selected with an appropriate freezing temperature (temperature range) for frozen foods (including processed foods) and fresh ingredients (meat, fish, etc.), such as -18°C±2°C, -10°C, or -2°C.

The freezing temperature and freezing temperature range also affect the maturation of fresh food ingredients (e.g., beef) when stored for a long period of time, so even in the same freezer, the freezing temperature and freezing temperature range can be changed as appropriate depending on the type of food ingredient.

The range hood 422 has an exhaust port 423 penetrating the ceiling surface 420, and one end of a duct 424 communicating with the outdoors is connected to this exhaust port 423.
Reference numeral 425 denotes a hood whose entire underside is open as an intake port 425A, and inside this hood is installed an electric exhaust fan 426. The range hood 422 is fixed to the ceiling surface 420, but a detailed description of the configuration will be omitted.

The operating status of the range hood 422 is sent to the central control unit 447 (described in detail later) of the home gateway 411 at any time. For this reason, the range hood 422 is provided with a transmitting unit (not shown) and a receiving unit (not shown) inside to transmit various operating information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of exhaust operation and the strength of operation (exhaust capacity). For example, the transmitting unit and receiving unit are integrated in hardware and provided as a communication unit 427. This communication unit 427 sends and receives information with the home gateway 411 via wireless communication or infrared communication.

When the electric fan 426 is rotated, it draws in air from the intake port 425A of the range hood 422, and also sucks in cooking odors and smoke, and exhausts the air outside the house HA through the duct 424. The range hood 422 receives an operation signal, such as an infrared signal, from the cooking appliance 1 and starts exhaust operation. This will be explained later.

In FIG. 2, arrow FF1 indicates the airflow rising from cooking device 1. FF2 indicates the exhaust airflow from duct 424. FF3 indicates the airflow moving sideways near ceiling surface 420. FF4 indicates the airflow blown out from air purifier 404.

A heat sensor (thermoelectromotive element) may be placed in the range hood 422 facing the cooking appliance 1. With this configuration, the range hood 422 itself detects when the cooking appliance 1 starts operating and controls the operation of the electric fan 426.

The ceiling-embedded air purifier 404 is installed by embedding it in the ceiling surface 420. Inside the box-shaped body 428 of the air purifier 404, a blower fan 429 and a filter 430 are provided.

431 is an air guide plate that covers the entire lower part of the air purifier 404. 432 is an intake port formed by the air guide plate 431 at one end (the side closer to the range hood 422). 433 is an air outlet formed by the air guide plate 431 at the end opposite the intake port 432.

The blower fan 429 draws in dirty air from the kitchen through the intake port 432, passes the purified air through the filter 430, and exhausts it from the exhaust port 433 toward the bottom of the kitchen KT. In this way, dust and odors in the air are removed, and the air in the room is purified.

434 is an odor sensor for the air purifier 404, and is positioned facing the entrance of the suction port 432. This detects odors in the air taken into the air purifier 404 during operation, and detects the degree of air pollution. The odor sensor 434 can be positioned anywhere in the air duct on the suction port 432 side, and in front of the filter 430, without any significant difference in effectiveness.

The odor sensor 434 detects the odor and the odor intensity is determined by an odor sensing unit (not shown) disposed inside the main body 428 of the air purifier 404, and the result is sent to the environment detection unit 413 of the home gateway 411 as needed. For this reason, the air purifier 404 is provided with a transmitter (not shown) and a receiver (not shown) for transmitting various information between the home gateway 411, such as the start and stop of air purifying operation and the odor intensity determination results. For example, the transmitter and receiver are integrated in hardware as a communication unit 435. The communication unit 435 transmits and receives information between the home gateway 411 and the air purifier 404 by wireless communication or infrared communication.

Air purifier 421 can detect odors when air purifier 404 is operating and an odor generated somewhere in kitchen KT reaches air purifier 404 from that location.

This air purifier 404 is generally configured with one or more filters 430 (multiple layers) with fine air passages to capture dust particles, pollen, etc. in the air. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 filters the oil smoke generated during cooking with edible oil (for example, deep-fried foods and tempura), the oil particles adhere to the surface of the filter 430 and combine to form an oil film.

The oil film described above reduces the filtering performance of the filter 430. In other words, the amount of air passing through the filter 430 decreases, leading to a situation in which the air purification ability of the air purifier 404 decreases. Therefore, an idea has already been proposed to avoid operating the air purifier 404 as much as possible when the exhaust gas generated by cooking contains oily smoke generated by cooking with oil (for example, Patent Document JP 2016-95126 A).

In FIG. 2, the refrigerator 401 is depicted as being installed near the right side of the kitchen furniture 2, but in an actual situation, it may be installed in a location different from that shown in FIG. 2. Also, multiple refrigerators 401 may be used, rather than just one.

412 is a main body case that forms the outer shell of the home gateway 411. This main body case 412 is fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 of the kitchen at a height that allows the resident to check the input operations and display.

445 is an alarm device fixed to the vertical wall surface 436 near the main body case 412, which will be described in detail later. 2D is a water supply inlet 2D installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the cooking appliance 1 and the range hood 422.
In Fig. 3, 440 is a temperature monitoring device for the cooking appliance 1. In this embodiment 1, this temperature monitoring device is configured as one component of the range hood 422 in terms of hardware. However, it may be configured as one component of the home gateway 411 in terms of hardware.

The temperature monitoring device 440 includes a temperature detection unit 441 and a communication unit 442. The temperature detection unit 441 includes an infrared sensor (not shown), a thermal imaging camera (not shown), and a temperature determination circuit 443.

As shown in FIG. 2, the temperature monitoring device 440 is a hardware component of the range hood 422, but is always powered regardless of the exhaust operation of the range hood 422. In other words, the temperature monitoring device 440 is constantly monitoring the temperature even when the range hood 422 is not in exhaust operation.

The temperature detection unit 441 divides the entire area of the top plate 15 (described later) into at least 64 areas (8 vertical × 8 horizontal) (hereinafter referred to as "detection areas") and detects the temperature of each area.

The detection area includes an induction heating section 17H of the cooking appliance 1, which will be described later.
The temperature monitoring device 440 repeatedly measures the temperature of the detection area at predetermined time intervals not only while the range hood 421 is in operation, but also while the range hood 421 is not in operation.

The temperature monitoring device 440 transmits the measured temperature monitoring information from the communication unit 442 to the home gateway 411. In addition to transmitting to the home gateway 411, a configuration in which the information is transmitted directly to the cooking appliance 1 may be adopted. In addition, the temperature measurement interval for obtaining the temperature monitoring information is not a fixed time (e.g., every 5 seconds), but is shortened in areas where the temperature is high.

When the light receiving unit 444 of the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal from the infrared transmitting unit 48 of the cooking appliance 1, the range hood 421 starts operating. The temperature monitoring device 440 starts acquiring temperature information of the top plate 15 of the cooking appliance 1 when the range hood 421 starts operating.

The temperature monitoring device 440 continues the temperature acquisition operation even after the range hood 421 receives an infrared signal (from the infrared transmission unit 48) indicating the end of operation of the cooking appliance 1. It continues acquiring temperature information at a specified time interval until the estimated temperature of the entire area of the top plate 15 falls below a predetermined temperature (e.g., 40°C). Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the interval of the temperature measurement operation becomes slower. Note that when the temperature falls below the specified temperature, the above-mentioned monitoring operation may be temporarily terminated, but the temperature monitoring operation is started again at least at the start of operation of the cooking appliance 1.

The cooking device 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, which will be described in detail later. 113 is a heating chamber formed inside the cooking device 1, and 114 is a door that can be opened and closed to cover the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

The heating cooker 1 has a top plate 15 that covers the upper surface, on which an object to be heated N, such as a pot or frying pan made of magnetic metal, is placed, and induction heating is performed by an IH coil 17. 16S is a bottom wall surface that divides the inside of the heating cooker 1 into two spaces, an upper space and an lower space.

CK is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 16S, in which the IH coil 17 is housed.

Next, Fig. 4 will be described. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the home gateway 411, the home appliances 400, and the temperature monitoring device 440. Among the home appliances 400, the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408 are subjected to power amount control from the home gateway 411.
For this reason, the home gateway 411 also functions as a power command device for the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408, but this has been explained above and will not be explained in detail here. Although not shown in Fig. 4, the air conditioner 403 is also a home appliance 400 subject to power amount control.

The power control unit 448 constantly obtains information on the amount of power used by the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1 and the microwave oven 408) and has the function of limiting the power consumption of the home appliances 400 so as not to exceed a preset total amount of power, and is already known as a HEMS (home energy management system).

When the power consumption control unit 448 receives information indicating a power reduction request or power reduction instruction from the outside via the communication unit 446, it performs an operation to reduce the power consumption of the target home appliances (e.g., the cooking appliance 1, the microwave oven 408, and the air conditioner 403) according to a predetermined priority order.

In this case, the information (command signal) received by the cooking device 1 is the power reduction request signal AS1, the power reduction command signal AS2, etc.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 includes an environment detection unit 413 that incorporates a human detection unit 413H that receives the detection output of a human detection sensor 452. The integrated environment detection unit 413 also receives detection results from a pollen sensor (not shown) and a sensor that detects the temperature and humidity in the kitchen in the form of data in a specified format. 453 is an environment sensor that measures the temperature, humidity, etc. of the kitchen KT.

The human presence sensor 452 detects (by infrared or the like) the presence of a person in the kitchen KT, particularly in the area in front of the cooking appliance 1 and in front of the door (not shown) of the refrigerator 401. One or more human presence sensors 452 are installed inside the kitchen KT.

For example, if the distance between the front of the cooking device 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401 is short, the human detection sensor 452 is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, facing the space between the front of the cooking device 1 and the refrigerator 401.

In addition, if there is a small distance between the front of the cooking appliance 1 and the door of the refrigerator 401, one human detection sensor 452 is installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, etc., facing the space near the front of the cooking appliance 1. The other human detection sensor 453 should be installed on the ceiling surface 420 of the kitchen KT, etc., facing the space in front of the door of the refrigerator 401.

A human detection sensor 452 may be attached to the lower end of the hood 425 of the range hood 422 to detect the presence of a user in front of the cooking appliance 1 .
As described above, the locations where the human detection sensors 452, 453 are installed may be appropriately determined taking into consideration the relative positions of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1 and the detection capabilities of the human detection sensors.

The human detection sensor 452 functions as one of the sensors of the environment detection unit 413, but it may also function as one of the sensors of a home presence detection device (not shown) for detecting the presence of a human inside the house HA, i.e., in the kitchen KT, etc. In that case, information from an unlocking sensor that detects that the front door (entrance) of the house HA has been unlocked may also be used by the home presence detection device. This can improve the accuracy of the process of determining whether someone is at home or not.

The input unit 449 can set various functions of the home gateway 411 by operating touch input keys formed on the liquid crystal display screen. One of the functions is to specify the home appliance 400 for which an upper limit on power consumption is to be set, and then to set the upper limit on power consumption and the time period during which the appliance can be used. For example, the user can input the maximum power consumption of the cooking appliance 1 as, for example, 4800W or 5400W.

The input unit 449 has a function for inputting information by operating touch input keys formed on the LCD display screen, as well as a function for inputting information by voice, and various desired functions can be input by the resident directing their voice into a microphone unit (not shown).

445 is an alarm device that issues an alarm to the occupants by means of sound or light. The central control unit 447 receives measurement data from the environment detection unit 413 and monitoring data from the temperature monitoring device 440, and transmits an alarm instruction signal to the alarm device 445. Note that since this alarm device 445 is not subject to control by the power consumption control unit 448, power is not restricted or cut off due to changes in the power consumption of the home appliance 400.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 further includes a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 446 , a central control unit 447 , and a storage device 450 .
The communication unit 446 is a communication unit capable of wireless communication or infrared communication with the home electric appliances 400 such as the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 individually.

In FIG. 4, the storage device 450 is a device that records a relatively large amount of information, such as the operation history information of the home gateway 411, the daily power control history information of the home appliance 400, and further the daily "environmental information" acquired by the environment detection unit 413. The storage device 450 is, for example, various semiconductor memories or HDDs.

The central control unit 447 contains a microcomputer that is the core of information processing, as well as ROM and RAM, and stores computer programs that regulate various operations.

In FIG. 4, 416 is a wide area communication network (Internet) that performs wireless communication via a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) 446 of the home gateway 411 and a wireless router 419.

In FIG. 4, the home gateway 411 has only one communication unit 446, but a communication unit (receiver/transmitter) for the home appliance 400 and a communication unit for the wireless router 419 may be provided separately. Also, a separate NFC communication unit may be provided to enable direct information exchange via wireless communication between the NFC (near field communication) provided in the information communication terminal 418.

451 is a schedule management unit. This schedule management unit has a calendar function and can store event schedule information for at least one month (maximum 31 days).

The schedule management function itself has already been proposed in many patent documents. In this embodiment 1, the input unit 449 can be used to register the scheduled date and scheduled start time (or time period) of an event (e.g., shopping, going out, etc.) for each resident.

When event information is stored in the schedule management unit 451, a notification is issued from the schedule management unit 451 at the stored date and time. The notification may be displayed on the liquid crystal display screen of the input unit 449 or be notified by a voice synthesizer (not shown). Alternatively, a notification may be sent to the information and communication terminal device 418 carried by the resident.

When a home appliance 400 such as a cooking appliance 1 is activated, a notification may be sent based on the event information registered from the schedule management unit 451.

(Overview of cooking appliances)
Next, the cooking device 1 according to the present embodiment 1 will be described with reference to Figs.
5, cooking appliance 1 is a built-in cooking appliance that is incorporated in kitchen furniture 2. Reference numeral 2A denotes an installation port formed in kitchen furniture 2. Cooking appliance 1 is supplied with AC power having a voltage of 200 V and a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz from a commercial power source 99, as described below.

As shown in Figs. 5 and 19, the cooking device 1 has two heating sections 17L and 17R on the left and right.
In FIG. 19, CL1 indicates a center line passing through the center point of the left and right sides of the upper unit 100 in the front-rear direction, and AL indicates the range of the top plate 15 exposed on the upper surface of the upper unit 100.

In FIG. 19, 17HR is a right heating section (corresponding to the "first heating section") provided in the range to the right of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this.
17HL is a left heating section (corresponding to the "second heating section") provided in the range to the left of the center line CL1, and induction heating can be performed directly above this. In this way, this cooking device 1 is a cooking device provided with two "heating ports" (heating sections) (two ports) on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

Alternatively, a third induction heating section may be provided between the right heating section (first heating section) 17HR and the left heating section (second heating section) 17HL so as to straddle the lateral center line CL1, thereby forming a three-burner (induction) heating cooker. Alternatively, one of the IH coils 17L, 17R (described in detail later) constituting the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL may be replaced with a radiant electric heat source such as a radiant heater or an infrared heater.
In the following description, when referring to the "induction heating unit," the reference symbol 17H is used.

As shown in Figures 5 and 19, circular position marks 17LS and 17RS are provided on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate the desired position for placing an object to be heated N (see Figure 3), such as a metal pan or plate (grill). The position marks 17LS and 17RS are printed on the upper surface of the top plate 15.

By looking at the position marks 17LS and 17RS, the user of the cooking device 1 can recognize that there are two induction heating sections 17H, one on the left and one on the right. The user can also recognize that there are two induction heating sections, one on the left and one on the right, by the voice guidance of the voice synthesizer (voice notification section) 95, which will be described later.

Directly below the position marks 17LS and 17RS are installed IH coils (induction heating coils) 17L and 17R, which will be described later. Note that the position marks 17LS and 17RS do not need to be circular, and may be, for example, a figure, a symbol such as "+", or letters that indicate only the center point of the desired position for placing the object to be heated N.

The position marks 17LS and 17RS are circular marks that indicate approximate positions where induction heating can be performed by the IH coils 17L and 17R, and are therefore drawn with a diameter slightly larger than the maximum outer diameter of the IH coils 17L and 17R.

In this embodiment 1, when the IH coils 17L and 17R are collectively referred to as IH coils, the reference symbol 17 is used. Therefore, when referring to an "IH coil" 17, it can refer to both the left IH coil 17L and the right IH coil 17R, or it can refer to either one of them.

In this embodiment 1, unless otherwise specified, the "induction heating source" 9 refers to a configuration including the IH coil 17 and inverter circuits 81R and 81L described below.

(Basics of Heat Source and Control Menu)
The cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is provided with three types of heating means with different heating principles. That is, the first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9 (first heating source), and the second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 (second heating source) and an oven heating source 188 (third heating source).

The three heat sources described above can be used as follows.
(1) The induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189 can be energized independently of one another, so that each heating source can perform cooking independently. This type of operation pattern is the "single cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

(2) By using the induction heating source 9 in combination with at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189, one cooking can be performed using two or more different locations. This type of operating pattern is the "linked cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

(3) The oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can be used together to cook one dish. This operating pattern is the "combined cooking mode" KM2. Note that the "operating pattern" referred to here includes cases where the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are operated in series, simultaneously, or with a time lag.

(4) The induction heating source 9 has dedicated input operation units. Specifically, it is a right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R and a left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L. By operating the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L, it is possible to start the induction heating operation, set the heating conditions (heat power, etc.), and stop the induction heating operation.
(5) The oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 do not have their own input operation units. They share the central operation unit 40M. For this reason, the central operation unit 40M may be called a "shared operation unit."

(6) There is no superiority or inferiority between the single cooking mode KM1, which uses any one of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189, and the linked cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2. The rule is that the cooking with the heating source that was started first takes priority. For this reason, for example, even if you try to select a linked cooking mode that uses the right heating section 17HR of the induction heating source 9, if the right heating section 17HR is already performing a single heating operation for another cooking, the right heating section 17HR cannot be used in the linked cooking mode. As a result, the heating sources are partially restricted in the linked cooking mode KM3.

(7) With regard to input operations, there is no superiority or inferiority between single heating cooking using any one of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 and the linked cooking mode and combined cooking mode. Therefore, for example, if you try to set the linked cooking mode KM3 and leave it halfway without switching to the linked cooking mode KM3 (for example, if you do not enter anything for 30 seconds), the input up to that point will be automatically canceled. Also, if, during this left-alone state, for example, input for the single cooking mode KM1 is performed from the right operation unit 40R of the induction heating source 9, you can proceed to induction heating cooking.

(8) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "first cooperative cooking mode" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1), and a "second cooperative cooking mode" in which at least one of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 is used in the first cooking step (cooking step 1). This will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.
The "first combined cooking mode" browns the surface of the food to seal in the juices, and then thoroughly cooks the food through to the center. This is suitable for cooking "hamburgers" and "roast beef."
The "second combined cooking mode" cooks the food thoroughly first and then deep-fries it for a short time, preserving the juiciness of the ingredients. This is suitable for dishes such as "tempura" and "fried chicken."

(9) The cooperative cooking mode KM3 has a "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in which the induction heating source 9 is used in the preheating process. Note that the case in which the preheating process is performed in the heating chamber 113 using the second heating means HM2 is also one form of the "cooperative preheating cooking mode", but this form is not described in detail in the first embodiment.

(Kitchen furniture 2)
As shown in Figures 5 to 8, the cooking appliance 1 is supported on the upper surface 2P of the rim of the installation opening 2A. In this embodiment 1, the kitchen furniture 2 is provided with a water tank 2CP that can temporarily store water coming out of a water supply opening 2D, as shown in Figure 6. 2B is a front opening formed at a predetermined position of the kitchen furniture 2. This front opening 2B is for exposing the front components (a door 114 and a front cover 112, which will be described later) of the cooking appliance 1 to the front when the cooking appliance 1 is installed.

If the size of the front opening 2B and the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 is standard, they are almost always pre-formed to standard dimensions, as standardization is being promoted by the industry. This will be explained in more detail later.

A typical method for assembling the cooking appliance 1 into the kitchen furniture 2 is as shown in Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an intermediate stage of the work of assembling the cooking appliance 1 into the kitchen furniture 2.
As shown in Figure 7, the cooking appliance 1 is placed into the installation opening 2A while tilting it so that its front side (the side facing you) is facing down, and then the rear side of the cooking appliance 1 is lowered as shown by the solid arrow BD, so that the cooking appliance 1 is placed on the peripheral portion of the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2.

Then, the screws are tightened to move (rotate) the fixing bracket (not shown) installed on the rear periphery of the lower unit 100 (described later), and the rear end of the fixing bracket is firmly pressed against the kitchen furniture 2 to complete the installation of the cooking appliance 1. Note that this type of installation method is already widely used, so a detailed explanation of the structure will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main body 110 of the cooking appliance 1 is integrated by stacking the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 one above the other, and is shipped from the manufacturer in this integrated form. Therefore, in the assembly work shown in FIG. 7, only the upper unit 100 is fixed (directly) to the kitchen furniture 2 with the above-mentioned screws. By removing the fixing brackets (not shown), the entire cooking appliance 1 can be removed from the kitchen furniture 2. This allows subsequent inspection and repair to be performed outside the kitchen furniture 2. Note that when only the upper unit 100 is referred to as the "main body", the reference number 10 is added to distinguish it.

In this embodiment 1, the "main body case" HC is a collective term for the upper case 16 that constitutes the outer shell of the upper unit 100 and the lower case 101 that constitutes the outer shell of the lower unit 200. The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 may be configured as an integrated case (housing).

The installation opening 2A formed in the kitchen furniture 2 has a rectangular planar shape as shown in Fig. 6. However, the four corners are arc-shaped.
The installation opening 2A has a width W1 of 560 mm to 564 mm and a front-rear dimension D1 of 460 mm to 464 mm.

5 and 6, reference numerals 3 and 4 denote surface materials constituting the surface of the kitchen furniture 2. Reference numerals 5 and 6 denote surface materials adjacent to both the left and right sides of the cooking appliance 1 when the cooking appliance 1 is incorporated in the kitchen furniture 2.
When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the front faces of these surface materials 3 to 6 are substantially flush with the front face of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, when the cooking appliance 1 is installed, the user can be presented with a design sense that the surface materials 3 to 6 and the cooking appliance 1 form a unified flat surface.

In Figure 7, 8 is a wall that divides the interior of the kitchen furniture 2 into multiple rooms vertically, and the lower part of this wall is often used, for example, as a storage room for kitchen utensils, food, etc. Note that the illustration of the wall 8 is omitted in Figure 6. Also, the wall 8 may be installed inside the kitchen furniture 2 so that it is removable.

When the cooking appliance 1 is installed in the kitchen furniture 2 with the above-described configuration, the entire front surface of the kitchen furniture 2 presents a substantially flat surface. When a user looks at the kitchen furniture 2, the front surface is designed so that it can be recognized as having a clean, unified design.

The kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be designed by the same manufacturer; kitchen furniture is often manufactured and sold by kitchen furniture or housing equipment manufacturers, while cooking appliance 1 is often manufactured and sold by home appliance manufacturers.

In Figures 5 and 6, 7 is a border printed on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5, and does not form physical irregularities on the front surface of the surface materials 3 to 5. Note that a thin, shiny metallic decorative plate or tape may be attached to indicate the presence of the border 7 and create a sense of luxury. Conversely, the border 7 may be omitted.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6 may be the same. Furthermore, these surface materials 3 to 6 do not have to move back and forth like doors or drawers. For example, they may always be fixed on the surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and not move at all.

The four types of surface materials 3 to 6, when unified in terms of the color and surface form (pattern, gloss, unevenness, etc.) of their front surfaces, enhance the sense of unified design of the kitchen furniture 2. For example, if the entire front surface of surface material 4 is unified in a single color or wood grain pattern, the front surface of surface material 3 can also be unified in the same single color or wood grain design.

Next, we will explain Figures 8 and 9. Figure 8 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the dimensional relationship between the kitchen furniture 2 and the cooking appliance 1 in Figure 1. Figure 9 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing an enlarged portion of the front of the kitchen furniture 2 shown in Figure 8.

In Japan, the standardization (commonization) of housing parts and materials for kitchen furniture 2, etc. is being promoted by the Japan Industrial Standards (JIS) as well as the Council for the Promotion of Standardization of Long-Term Use Housing Materials (abbreviated as Long-Term Use Housing Materials).

According to the "Long-term Use Component Standards for Built-in IH Cooking Heaters" established by the Nagajukyo, the conditions that the countertop (kitchen furniture 2) on which the IH cooking heater is to be installed must meet are as follows:
(1) The dimensions of the installation opening 2A are: width dimension W1 is 560 mm to 564 mm, and front-to-rear dimension D1 is 460 mm to 464 mm.
(2) The height dimension C1 of the front downward portion 2F is 40 mm or less.
(3) The depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D3 of the front downward slope portion 2F is 45 mm or less.
(4) The ceiling depth (front-to-back direction) dimension D2 of the front downward section 2F is 58 mm to 70 mm.

Furthermore, according to the "Long-Term Use Component Standards," the external dimensions of built-in IH cooking heaters (induction heating cookers) are specified as follows:
(1) The height dimension H2 from the bottom end of the top plate to the bottom end of the front panel is 215 mm to 223 mm.

The cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is designed to satisfy the various constraints as described above.
8, A1 is the dimension in the front-rear direction of the top plate 15 described later, which is 510 mm. A2 is the maximum dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the front cover 112 that covers the front surface of the main body 110 to the rearmost part of the main body 110, which is 498 mm. A3 is the dimension in the front-rear direction from the inclined portion 111 formed at the rear of the main body 110 to the front surface of the front cover 112, which is 451 mm.

The front cover 112 is formed by integral molding of plastic or metal. The front cover 112 is formed symmetrically, and has several protruding mounting legs 112P formed on the rear side where it is attached (see Figure 18). The mounting legs 112P are inserted into multiple vertically long fitting holes (not shown) formed in the front plate 101F of the lower case 101, and are slid slightly downward so that the mounting legs 112P engage with the fitting holes. In this state, the front cover 112 is fixed to the lower case 101 by a fixing device (not shown). This fixation prevents the front cover 112 from moving upwards, and the front cover 112 is attached to the lower case 101.

In FIG. 8, 113 is a heating chamber formed entirely from a thin metal plate, which will be described later, and is formed inside the lower unit 200. An opening 113A (see FIG. 15) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 113, through which a cooking utensil such as a frying pan (food to be heated N) or food to be cooked can be inserted and removed. The opening 113A is covered by a door 114, which can be opened and closed freely.

The front surface of the door 114 and the front surface of the front cover 112 are designed to be flush with each other. The door 114 is supported rotatably relative to the main body 110 by two hinges 176 (see FIG. 12) and two arms 116 (not shown) arranged on the left and right so that its front surface is flush with the front surface of the front cover 112 except for the handle portion 115. Therefore, the door 114 functions as a "front-opening" door that opens forward with the hinge 176 at its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation).

The front cover 112 is attached to the front of the cooking appliance 1 by a professional such as a retailer or installer after the cooking appliance 1 has been installed in the kitchen furniture 2. The door 114 is attached when the cooking appliance 1 is shipped from the factory, and cannot be removed later by anyone other than a professional, i.e., a household user. This prevents microwaves from leaking from inside the heating chamber 113 due to poor sealing of the door 114 after installation.

In FIG. 8, H1 is the maximum height dimension of the cooking device 1. In other words, it is the dimension from the upper surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom surface of the lower unit 200, which is 227 mm.

In FIG. 8, H2 is the height dimension from the bottom end of the top plate 15 to the bottom end of the front cover 112, which is 215 mm to 223 mm. H3 is the dimension from the top to the bottom end of the front cover 112 or the door 114, which is set to 171 mm. H4 is the height dimension of the top plate 15, which is 11 mm. By setting these dimensional relationships, when the cooking appliance 1 is installed, a front gap 302 (see FIG. 12), which will be described later, is ensured below the bottom surface of the door 114 and the bottom surface of the front cover 112.

Next, we will explain Figure 10. Figure 10 is a perspective view of the kitchen furniture shown in Figures 1 and 2. In this Figure 10, 2G is a step formed at both the left and right corners of the front opening 2B. This step is the part that faces closely to the front cover 112 of the lower unit 200 described later. W2 is the maximum width dimension of the installation space formed directly below the installation opening 2A. This maximum width dimension W2 is approximately 560 mm.

Next, the configuration of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figs.
FIG. 11 is a plan view of the cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 5. FIG. 12 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Z-Z line in FIG. 11. FIG. 13 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Z-Z line in FIG. 11, showing the flow of cooling air. FIG. 14 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the W-W line in FIG. 12. FIG. 15 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the Y-Y line in FIG. 11. FIG. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the V-V line in FIG. 12. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device 1 cut along the X-X line in FIG. 12. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the right main part of the cooking device 1 when it is installed in the kitchen furniture 2. FIG. 19 is a simplified plan view for explaining the input operation unit 40 of the cooking device 1. Fig. 20 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit 40 and various display units in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 21 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 22 is an enlarged plan view of the right operation unit 40R and the right display unit 31R of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 23 is an enlarged plan view of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 24 is a simplified cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit 100 of the cooking appliance 1.

(Characteristic overall configuration and functions of the cooking device)
Before going into a detailed description of the first embodiment, a brief overview of the cooking device 1 described in the first embodiment will be given below.

(1) A top plate 15 is placed on the upper surface of the main body case HC, and the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 can be induction heated by the induction heating source 9, which is one of the first heating means HM1.

(2) Inside the main body case HC, there is a heating chamber 113 whose front opening can be freely opened and closed by a door 114.

(3) In order to heat the food placed inside the heating chamber 113, at least one or both of a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188, which are one of the second heating means HM2, are provided.

(4) The main body case HC is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B, the upper space 300A is provided with an upper air passage AH, and the lower space 300B is provided with a lower air passage UH.

(5) Upper cooling fans 60, 61 are arranged in the upper air passage AH. Outside air is introduced into the upper air passage AH by the upper cooling fans 60, 61 without passing through the lower space 300B.

(6) A lower cooling fan 128 (lower cooling fan A) and a lower cooling fan 129 (lower cooling fan B) are arranged in the lower air passage UH. Outside air is introduced into the lower air passage UH by the lower cooling fans 128 and 129 without passing through the upper space 300A.

(7) The induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fans 60, 61, and the lower cooling fans 128, 129 are integrated and controlled by an integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC centrally controls individual control devices such as the IH control device 90, the microwave heating control device 130, and the heating chamber control device 159.

(8) Power is supplied to the integrated control device MC via a single main power operation unit (main power switch) 98 that is operated by the user.

(9) It has an input operation unit 40 that receives commands from the user, and the input operation unit 40 has a function of giving commands to the integrated control device MC to start and stop the heating and cooking operation.

(10) There are three types of cooking modes that the integrated control device MC executes: a single cooking mode KM1, a combined cooking mode KM2, and a coordinated cooking mode KM3.

(11) In the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, at least two things are specified: the multiple heating sources to be driven and the order in which the heating sources are driven.

(12) When any one of the three cooking modes is selected, a specific screen is displayed to inform the user of the cooking mode and control conditions before starting the heating operation (operation). The coordinated cooking mode KM3 is the first specific screen 30SP, the composite cooking mode KM2 is the second specific screen 30SC, and the single cooking mode KM1 is the third specific screen 30ST. However, when the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected with the shared operation unit 40M, the control menu displayed on the corresponding second specific screen 30SC exceptionally includes a control menu for single heating of the microwave heating source 189, etc. (e.g., "Microwave manual").

(13) Since the induction heating source 9 has a dedicated operation unit (individual operation unit), the user can first select a "control menu" (e.g., "boiling water") based on the heating source.

(14) The third specific screen ST is displayed only when the induction heating source 9 is selected (in the single cooking mode KM1). This is because the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected only by the induction heating source 9 using the dedicated individual operation units 40L and 40R.

(15) Microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 do not have dedicated operation units (individual operation units) and use shared operation unit 40M, so it is not possible to first select a control menu based on the heating source. In other words, microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 cannot select individual cooking mode KM1 based on the heating source.

(16) The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 share the second specific screen 30SC for the combined cooking mode KM2. Therefore, when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected on the shared operation unit 40M, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, and as a result of selecting a specific control menu (e.g., "Microwave manual" or "Warm") displayed on the second specific screen 30SC, the single cooking mode KM1 can ultimately be selected. Due to this configuration, the third specific screen 30ST is not displayed (exceptionally) even if the shared operation unit 40M is operated.

(17) The integrated control device MC has a function to detect abnormalities while the cooking device 1 is operating. There are several types of abnormalities that can be detected, but the main one is overheating of the upper space 300A that contains the induction heating source 9.

(18) During cooking operation, if the main power is shut off by the main power operation unit (main power switch) 98, all cooking operations and cooking processes in the cooking mode will stop, but if any upper cooling fans 60, 61 or lower cooling fans 128, 129 are operating, they will continue to operate for a limited time or depending on the temperature environment.

(19) The coordinated cooking mode KM3 is a cooking method in which one food item is heated in at least two different locations, the internal space of the heating chamber 113 and the space above the top plate 15, and the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 may be operated at different times or at the same time.

(20) Whether they are operated with a time difference or during the same time period, the control unit MC can execute a preheating process of preheating the object to be heated N with the induction heating source 9, or a preheating process of preheating the heating chamber 113 with the oven heating source 188 (this is called the "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" in the cooperative cooking mode KM3).

(21) When executing the cooperative cooking mode KM3, at least two cooking processes (cooking process 1 and cooking process 2) are performed, and the start of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 can be determined by the input operation unit 40. In addition, the cooking process 1 or cooking process 2 that has started can also be terminated midway by the input operation unit 40.

(22) When the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected by the input operation unit 40, it is possible to deselect (cancel) the collaborative cooking mode before execution begins.

(23) When the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed, the order of the preheating process, cooking process 1, and cooking process 2 is determined by the control program of the control unit MC before the execution of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is started.

(24) The preheating process can be terminated at any time by the input operation unit 40. The termination does not cancel the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3.

(25) The linked cooking mode KM3 can be stopped midway after the cooking process 1 has started. When cooking process 1 has ended (including when the user ends it at any time), the reservation (occupancy) relationship for the heating source (heating unit in the case of an induction heating source) used in cooking process 1 can be automatically released. Therefore, if the heating source used in cooking process 1 was the first heating means HM1 (e.g., the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9), the first heating means HM1 (the right heating unit 17HR of the induction heating source 9) can be used for another heating cooking.

(26) The upper air passage AH formed inside the upper space 300A by the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the lower air passage UH formed in the lower space 300B by the lower cooling fans 128, 129 have their respective outside air intakes located in different positions, so that outside air is introduced into the upper space 300A and the lower space 300B separately from outside the main body case HC, and then discharged to the outside separately.

(27) The lower cooling fans 128, 129 are operated in response to the operation of the induction heating source 9 or the microwave heating source 189, and cool the parts of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 that are to be cooled.

(28) When the integrated control device MC detects an abnormality in the range of the top plate 15 or the upper space 300A, etc. during execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and automatically stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1, if the second heating means HM2 has started a cooking process in the lower space 300B, the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 is also stopped. Then, the setting of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is canceled.

(29) There is a notification unit AN that notifies the operating status of the cooking device 1. The notification unit is provided with a display unit (integrated display unit 30) that displays an initial standby screen 30D that displays information immediately after the main power is turned on by the main power operation unit (main power switch) 98, and a first specific screen 30SP that displays information when the linked cooking mode KM3 is being executed.

(30) A case in which the food N is moved between (at least) two (left and right) heating sections 17HL, 17HR set on the top plate 15 and heated two or more times to complete cooking is not a coordinated cooking (mode). However, a form in which the food is moved to the heating chamber 113 midway through cooking to continue cooking (additional heating) is coordinated cooking.

(31) The input operation unit 40 for allowing a user to give instructions to the integrated control device MC includes:
The device may be provided with input keys that the user can touch from above the main body case HC, or may be a voice input device in which some input is performed by voice.

(32) The input operation unit 40, which the user directly touches to perform input operations, has specific input keys arranged thereon for selecting each of the single cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the linked cooking mode KM3.

(33) The input key 43MS for determining the selection of the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS for determining the selection of the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key 43MS. However, the input keys (43L1, 43R1 or 44L, 44R) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1 are present only on the individual operation units 40L, 40R of the induction heating source 9.

(34) The input key 43MS that determines the start of the cooking process using the second heating means in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MS that determines the start of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key.

(35) The input key 43MT that determines the end of the cooking process using the second heating means in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the input key 43MT that determines the end of the cooking process in the combined cooking mode KM2 are the same input key.

(36) The input key 43MT for deciding the end of the cooking process (end section) has a function of canceling the entire operation (i.e., all cooking processes) of the cooking mode being executed (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, the single cooking mode) when it is operated once or twice consecutively during the cooking process.
For example, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, if cooking step 1 is "microwave heating" and cooking step 2 is "induction heating," then in cooking step 1 (in the case of microwave heating), the input key 43MT is also used to stop heating. Therefore, in order to distinguish between stopping heating and canceling the entire cooking mode (all cooking steps), the input key 43MT is pressed to stop heating, and the input key 43MT is pressed once more to cancel.
In contrast, when cooking step 2 becomes "induction heating", stopping heating is input key 44L (or 43L1), so stopping heating can be distinguished from canceling the entire cooking mode (all cooking steps). Therefore, stopping heating is 44R (or 43R1), and canceling the cooking mode is 43MT (it is not necessary to press 43MT twice, but pressing it has no effect).
When cooking process 2 is "microwave heating", common operation unit 40M is used, so pressing input key 43MT once stops heating, and pressing it once more cancels the cooking mode (cancels everything).

(Upper unit 100)
In this embodiment 1, the upper unit 100 alone functions as the cooking appliance 1. For this reason, a commercial (AC) power source 99 is supplied only to the upper unit 100. However, a power cord 106 (not shown) for directly connecting to the commercial power source 99 via a plug 106A (not shown) is drawn from the lower unit 200 to the outside of the cooking appliance 1.

The upper unit 100 is composed of a box-shaped upper case (upper housing) 16 that forms the outer shell of the main body 10, a metal frame-shaped reinforcing plate (support frame) 22 (see FIG. 12) fixed to the top of the upper case, and a top plate 15 made of heat-resistant tempered glass or crystallized glass that is attached to the top surface of the reinforcing plate 22 so as to cover almost the entire upper surface except for the rear portion. In other words, the main body 10 of the upper unit 100 is equipped with the upper case 16 and top plate 15 that form the outer shell.

The upper case 16 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate such as a galvanized steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates together by spot welding, screws, or the like, into a box shape.
In the first embodiment, the upper case 16 is made of a single sheet of metal with its peripheral portion bent vertically to integrally form a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, a front vertical wall 16F, and (left and right) side vertical walls 16L and 16R, as will be described later. The bottom wall 16S also serves as a "partition wall", as will be described later.

The upper case 16 may be formed in a different form. For example, a single metal plate is pressed to form a "body" having three surfaces: a bottom wall (bottom wall surface) 16S, a rear wall 16B, and a front vertical wall 16F. Separately, two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are formed separately. These two side vertical walls 16L, 16R are then attached to the ends of the "body" by screws, spot welding, or the like, to finally form a box shape with an open top surface.

The top plate 15 is formed in a flat plate shape with a generally uniform overall thickness, and its entire underside is covered with a painted surface that is opaque to visible light. This means that the functional components below the top plate 15, such as the induction coil 17, cannot be seen from above the top plate 15.

The IH coil 17R on the right has a donut-shaped planar shape. The maximum heating power of this IH coil 17R is 3200 W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm.

The left IH coil 17L also has a doughnut shape. The maximum heating power of this IH coil 17L is 3200 W. The maximum outer dimension (diameter) is 168 mm. Note that the diameter may be enlarged to approximately 180 mm so that it can accommodate heated objects N such as large pots and frying pans. Figure 11 shows a case where the diameter of the left IH coil 17L is larger than that of the right IH coil 17R.

In FIG. 12, 18 is a long opening formed horizontally at the rear of the upper case 16, 19 is an exhaust cover installed above this opening, and has shutters or multiple through holes to allow ventilation. 20 is an exhaust port formed between the exhaust cover 19 and the opening 18.

In Figures 12 and 14, 22 is a metal reinforcing plate fixed to the upper rear end of the upper case 16, as described above. This reinforcing plate 22 has a length equal to the width of the rear edge of the upper case 16.

21 is a metal decorative frame fixed to the upper surface of the reinforcing plate 22. This decorative frame protrudes to the rear of the upper case 16 and is longer than the width of the upper case 16. In other words, when viewed from above, it appears to surround the rear and both left and right sides of the exhaust cover 19 (see Figure 11).

In Figures 11, 12 and 14, 25 is a metal decorative frame. This decorative frame 25 is installed to protect the left and right end faces and the front end face of the top plate 15 from external impacts.

26 is a ring-shaped cushioning material made of a highly elastic material, such as silicone rubber, which is attached to the entire underside of the decorative frames 21, 25. This allows the upper unit 100 to be placed on the kitchen furniture 2 via this cushioning material 26. Note that a single decorative frame 25 may be designed to surround three parts (sides) of the top plate 15, the left and right end faces and the front end face, or four parts (four surrounding sides) including the rear end face.

(Integrated display unit 30 and left and right display units 31L, 31R)
11 and 19, reference numeral 30 denotes an integrated display unit. The integrated display unit 30 is disposed in the front portion of the top plate 15 and below the center portion on the left and right.
The left and right display sections 31L and 31R are also provided on the left and right sides of the front portion of the top plate 15, respectively.

The right-side display unit 31R is a display unit corresponding to the right operation unit (first individual operation unit) 40R, and therefore may be referred to as the "first individual display unit."
Similarly, the left display unit 31L is a display unit corresponding to the left operation unit (second individual operation unit) 40L, and therefore may be referred to as a "second individual display unit."

The integrated display unit 30 is a display means used in the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 described below. In other words, it is also used during microwave cooking and oven cooking.

The integrated display unit 30 alternatively displays a first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 64) used in the linked cooking mode KM3, and a second specific screen 30SC (see FIG. 59) and a third specific screen 30ST (see FIG. 58) used in the combined cooking mode KM2. It also displays a standby initial screen 30Z (see FIGS. 52 to 56). The standby initial screen 30Z and the first to third specific screens 30SP, 30SC, and 30ST are not displayed simultaneously.

The integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are each mainly composed of a liquid crystal display screen (not shown), and the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R are installed on a horizontal operation board 41 that is installed long in the left-right direction.

The underside of the top plate 15 does not have a painted surface that blocks visible light as described above, corresponding to the position directly above the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R. Therefore, the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R can be seen from above the top plate 15.

The integrated display unit 30 displays common information and warnings for the cooking appliance 1. For example, it displays the selection result of the three types of heating sources for the cooking appliance 1, and caution and warning information showing the operating status of those heating sources. That is, the integrated display unit 30 is called the integrated display unit 30 because it may display information related to the induction heating source 17, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189.

The integrated display unit 30 also has the function of displaying the names of various cooking methods corresponding to the linked cooking mode KM3 described below, as well as their control conditions, etc.

Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 also has the function of displaying "inventory information" for the refrigerator 401, which will be described later.

(Right side display section 31R/left side display section 31L)
The left display unit 31L displays information related to the operation of the left IH coil 17L. For example, as described below, when setting timer cooking, the time can be set in one-minute increments and the set time can be displayed. It also displays the elapsed time since the start of heating and the "remaining time" until the timer setting time ends. Furthermore, when preheat cooking is selected, the automatically set temperature (default The display will show the temperature, current temperature, etc. Note that the "remaining time" will be displayed as 9 minutes 59 seconds when there are less than 10 minutes remaining, and the remaining time will be displayed in 1-second increments. .

Similarly, the right display unit 31R displays information related to the operation of the right-side IH coil 17R. This right display unit 31R basically displays information related to various control conditions such as the timer setting time, preheating temperature, and elapsed time for the right-side IH coil 17R, just like the left display unit 31L.

(Input Operation Unit 40)
19, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section. This input operation section 40 is disposed in a horizontally long strip shape along the front edge of the top plate 15.
The input operation unit 40 is disposed on the upper surface of an operation board 41 (see FIG. 24) which is long horizontally and disposed in a strip shape.

Various electronic components are mounted on the operation board 41. The operation board 41 is made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation properties. Behind the operation board 41 of the upper unit 100 is the central operation board 32 supported by a holder 50. The integrated control device MC, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the central operation board 32.

A flat auxiliary support plate (not shown) is installed below the operation board 41, overlapping the top and bottom of the operation board 41 with a gap between them. In other words, it has a two-layer (two sheets) structure with a gap between them, allowing as many electrical components and circuits as possible to be mounted.

F2 is a second air passage through which cooling air flows from the second cooling fan 61 described later, and is formed by the space between the cover 70 described later and the front vertical wall 16F located in front of the upper case 16 (see Figures 12 and 24).

In FIG. 12, 16B is the rear vertical wall of the upper case 16. The lower case 101 and the upper case 16, which will be described later, are integrated at multiple locations by screws 51.

As is clear from Figure 12, the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the upper end of the lower case 101 closely face each other within a range of about 20 mm to 30 mm in the vertical direction, and the facing parts are fastened and fixed by the screws 51. In addition to the screws 51, screws 51F (not shown) are also provided to fasten the facing parts of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, and the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are joined at multiple points.

16BX is a horizontal bend formed by bending the upper end of the rear vertical wall 16B further rearward BK. This horizontal bend 16BX and the flange 16A (see Figure 14) described below are positioned on the same horizontal line.

Because of the above configuration, when the kitchen furniture 2 supports both the upper case 16 and the lower case 101, the flange 16A and the horizontal bend 16BX may work together to function as a part that firmly supports such loads. In other words, the flange 16A, which is made by bending a metal plate in a series to increase its mechanical strength, and the horizontal bend 16BX support the upper case 16 itself, and as a result, a structure is realized in which the lower case 101 is also reliably supported. Note that in this embodiment 1, the horizontal bend 16BX does not directly contact the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2, as shown in FIG. 12.

In FIG. 12, 104 is a cavity that is large in both depth and area. This cavity 104 is the space from the lower surface of the bottom wall (bottom surface) 16S of the upper case 16 to the upper surface of the bottom plate 101U at the rear of the lower unit 200, which will be described later. BH indicates the depth (vertical direction) dimension of the cavity 104.

As is clear from the structure shown in FIG. 12, this embodiment 1 has a flat upper case 16 (forming the outer shell of the main body 10) whose upper opening is closed by the top plate 15. When this upper case 16 is placed on the lower case 101 (described below), the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 also serves as the ceiling surface of the lower case 101.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the opposing distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104 , a waveguide 123 constituting a part of a microwave heating device 120 (described later) is disposed long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113 .
Further, behind the waveguide 123, a case C154 for housing a power supply circuit board 127 on which circuit components for supplying power to the microwave heating control unit 130 are mounted is disposed elongated in the left-right direction.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is mainly composed of a microcomputer, and is mounted on the power supply circuit board 127 inside the case C154. In other words, the power supply circuit board 127 stored inside the case C also serves as a control board on which the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted. Although such a control board and power supply circuit board 127 may be provided separately, in this embodiment 1 they are integrated to minimize the installation space.

In FIG. 12, 101T is a front horizontal wall made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101. This front horizontal wall 101T is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F (see FIG. 15) of the lower case 101 backward.

198 is a connecting support bracket made of a metal plate and has a horizontal part 198H and a vertical part 198V. The horizontal part 198H is fixed to the front horizontal wall 101T of the lower case 101.

One or both of the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are box-shaped and made of thin metal plates, and by fastening the screws 51, 51F (not shown), the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 become a single, sturdy box-shaped structure.

In this embodiment 1, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are fitted together in a tight manner as described below.
That is, the vertical and horizontal dimensions (inner maximum vertical and horizontal dimensions) of the top opening of the lower case 101 are designed to be the same as the maximum width dimension D5 (not shown) in the front-rear direction and the maximum width dimension W4 (not shown) in the left-right direction of the upper case 16. Alternatively, they are only 0.2 mm larger (at most) than the maximum dimension D5 in the front-rear direction and the maximum dimension W4 in the left-right direction of the top opening of the lower case 101.

When a small force is applied outward to the upper ends of the left and right vertical walls 101L, 101R or the rear wall (rear vertical wall) 101B, the top opening of the lower case 101 widens slightly, allowing the upper case 16 to fit tightly (snugly) inside it.

In this embodiment 1, "fitting" does not necessarily mean a tight fit as in the above embodiment 1. The outer dimensions of the upper case 16 that is inserted inside may differ by up to about 1 mm from the inner dimensions (front-to-back and left-to-right directions) of the lower case 101 that is the outside, and they do not have to be tightly attached as a whole. Even if there is such a slight difference in dimensions, it is possible to make a strong main body case HC by fixing with screws 51, etc.

The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 form a single, sturdy box-shaped structure, which allows for a sturdy support structure for the door 114 (described below), which is beneficial in preventing microwave leakage between the door 114 and the periphery of the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In particular, the top plate 15 of the upper unit 100 is supported on the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2 and bears the entire load of the lower unit 200, so it is important that the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are constructed so that they do not warp or deform as a whole. Note that since the cushion 26 is attached to the entire bottom surface of the decorative frames 21 and 25, it is the cushion material 26 that actually comes into contact with the top surface of the lower kitchen unit 2.

In FIG. 12 , reference numeral 80 denotes an inverter circuit board, which is disposed horizontally in the center of the upper case 16 .
The inverter circuit board 80 has a rectangular planar shape that is long in the left-right direction. The inverter circuit board 80 has a length W16 of 316 mm and a length (width) W7 in the front-rear direction of 195 mm (see FIG. 25).

In FIG. 12, the holder 50 is made of an insulating material, such as a plastic material. The holder 50 has a size corresponding to the entire area of the input operation unit 40 and the range of the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31L, and is provided in a long strip shape in the left-right direction. The central operation board 32 is attached to the underside of the holder 50 so as to overlap it with a small gap.

(Inverter circuit board cooling structure)
Next, reference will be made to FIG. 25 to FIG.
Fig. 25 is a simplified horizontal cross-sectional view showing the flow of cooling air inside the upper unit of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 26 is a vertical cross-sectional view taken along line S-S in Fig. 24. Fig. 27 is an enlarged explanatory diagram showing the flow of cooling air and the cooling principle in the schematic diagram shown in Fig. 25. Fig. 28 is a simplified perspective view explaining the positional relationship between the cooling air from the air outlet of the first cooling fan 60 and the inverter circuit board 80.

When creating a circuit with various electronic components, this type of inverter circuit board 80 is formed by fixing components such as semiconductor integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, and transistors to an insulating substrate, and wiring between these components with copper foil. Because this is a complex and detailed process, it is currently mass-produced by mounting using automatic loading machines. Therefore, there are various restrictions on the shape and size of the board, and even when used in this type of heating cooker, the basic shape of the circuit board is square or rectangular. Therefore, in order to accommodate this type of inverter circuit board in the limited space inside the upper unit 100, it is necessary to devise a way to avoid interference and overlap with surrounding components. Furthermore, if the number of inverter circuits is increased, the number of components to be mounted also increases, and the area of the inverter circuit board 80 inevitably becomes larger.

The inverter circuit 81 mounted on the inverter circuit board 80 is composed of an inverter circuit 81L that supplies high-frequency power to the left IH coil 17L, and an inverter circuit 81R that supplies high-frequency power to the right IH coil 17R. These will be described later with reference to Figures 29, 30, and 33.

A total of four aluminum heat sinks (heat dissipation sinks) 82 are attached to the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. The heat sinks 82 are as shown in Figures 12, 15, and 26. That is, the heat sinks 82 are arranged in two rows, with two heat dissipation fins 82FN facing each other, and are installed close to each other, within a few mm to about 10 mm.

In FIG. 27, GP2 is a gap formed when the heat dissipation fins 82FN of two heat sinks 82 face each other. The size (front-to-back width) of this gap GP2 is the same across the entire left-to-right direction of the two front-to-rear rows of heat sinks 82. For example, it is 8 mm. To distinguish it from the (second) gap GP12 described below, this gap GP2 may be called the "first gap."

As can be seen from Figures 12 and 26, the heat sink (heat dissipation sink) 82 has power control switching elements 83 that form part of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R attached to the inclined surfaces on the opposing sides. Therefore, the heat generated during operation of the switching elements 83 can be cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2 that passes around the heat dissipation fins 82FN.

The power control switching elements 83 are, for example, IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors). The power control switching elements 83 on the inverter circuit 81L side are attached to the rear side of the heat sinks 82 arranged in two rows, front and rear.
The power control switching elements 83 on the other inverter circuit 81R side are attached to the front side of the heat sink 82 which has two rows, front and rear. It is to be noted that they may be attached to the opposite side.

In Figures 12 and 26, 70 is a cover that is integrally formed from a thin metal plate or plastic material and covers the entire upper part of the inverter circuit board 80. Both left and right ends of this cover 70 are open, and as shown in Figure 24, the left end surface of the cover 70 forms the inlet FI for the cooling airs RF1 and RF2 described below, and the right end surface of the cover 70 forms the outlet FO for the cooling airs RF1 and RF2.

The cover 70 is positioned so that a certain gap GP11 is maintained between it and the underside of the coil base 17C that supports the IH coils 17L and 17R (see FIG. 26). The gap GP11 is approximately 1 mm to a maximum of several mm in linear distance.

In this embodiment 1, the gap GP11 is 2 mm. This ensures a space of at least 5 mm between the bottom surfaces of the IH coils 17L, 17R and the top surface of the cover 70. This space reduces the magnetic effect of the IH coils 17L, 17R on the cover 70, and also has the effect of making it easier for cooling air to flow between the cover 70 and the bottom surfaces of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

The cover 70 is sized to ensure a certain gap GP12 with the uppermost surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In this embodiment 1, GP12 is 20 mm.
To distinguish it from the (first) gap GP2, this gap GP12 may be referred to as a "second gap."

In Fig. 26, H5 is the height dimension of the cover 70. H5 is 27 mm.
H6 is the height dimension of the heat sink 82 based on the bottom surface 16S of the upper case (upper housing) 16, and is 28 mm. H7 is the height dimension from the bottom surface 16S, and is 31 mm. Note that 71 is a support plate, which will be described later. An insulating sheet or a magnetic shielding sheet (such as a thin aluminum plate) may be placed between the upper surface of this support plate 71 and the cover 70 or the inverter circuit board 80.

In FIG. 26, H9 is the maximum height dimension of the IH coil installation space CK. In other words, it is the linear distance from the bottom surface of the top plate 15 to the bottom wall surface of the upper case 16. In this embodiment 1, this height dimension H9 is 44 mm or 44.5 mm.

The maximum height dimension H10 of the side wall surface of the upper case 16 described in Figures 16 and 17 is 40 mm. This height dimension H10 does not match the maximum height dimension H9 of the IH coil installation space CK because the top plate 15 is installed above the horizontal flange 16A, etc.

Since the cover 70 is located directly below the IH coil 17L and is in close proximity to it, if you want the cover 70 to have a magnetic shielding effect, it is best to make the cover 70 out of a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. If the cover 70 is made of iron or magnetic stainless steel, there is a concern that the cover 70 will heat up due to leakage magnetic flux and rise in temperature. Therefore, in this case, it is best to cover the top surface of the cover 70 with a non-magnetic metal. For example, you can use measures such as stacking aluminum sheets or attaching aluminum tape.

If the cover 70 is made of metal, it is even better to electrically connect it to the upper case 16. For example, the metal screws (not shown) for attaching the cover 70 can reach directly into the screw holes in the cover 70.

The upper case 16 is connected to the lower case 101 (described later) with metal screws or the like, and is also electrically connected to an earth terminal (not shown) provided on the lower case 101, so that noise is absorbed by the earth. In this way, the magnetic shielding effect of the cover 70 can be expected to provide a noise shielding effect for the various electrical components mounted on the inverter circuit board 80.

In addition, if the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, the cross-sectional shape of the cover 70 can be determined relatively freely. This has the advantage that the flow (direction) of the cooling air RF1 flowing through the first air passage F1 can also be adjusted. For example, a ribbed air direction plate or the like can be integrally formed on the underside of the cover 70 so that more cooling air RF1 flows toward a specific portion of the heat sink 82.

Next, the cover 70 will be described in more detail.
In FIG. 26, FH is the height dimension of all the heat sinks 82 (82F, 82B) themselves, which is 20 mm.
A gap GP12 of about 20 mm is secured between the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70, and the height of this gap GP12 also becomes the height of the first air passage F1.

The distance (gap) dimension GP13 between the upper surface of the ceiling of the cover 70 and the lower surface of the top plate 15 is approximately 13 mm. A series of hanging walls 70B are formed downward from both the front and rear edges of the cover 70.

The distance between the pair of hanging walls 70B at the front and rear, i.e., the dimension W9 of the space in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 26), is 205 mm. The lower end surface of the hanging wall 70B abuts against the upper surface of the support plate 71, but even if there is a small gap between the two, it does not interfere with the cooling air guiding effect.

In FIG. 26, GP16 is a gap formed between the top surface of the heat dissipation fin 82FN of the heat sink 82 and the ceiling surface of the cover 70. This gap GP16 is, for example, about 1 mm.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the first air passage F1 is formed between the gaps GP12, GP16 formed inside the cover 70 and the heat dissipation fins 82FN.
26, W7 is the width of the inverter circuit board 80 in the front-rear direction, which is 195 mm, and W9 is the distance between the opposing hanging walls 70B (the dimension of the space in the front-rear direction), which is 205 mm.

Next, referring back to FIG.
W10 indicates the distance from the right end face of the cover 70, i.e., the end face on the outlet side, to the lateral vertical wall 16R of the upper case 16. This distance W10 is about 110 mm, and since there is a space of this distance, the power supply circuit board 55 is disposed in this space.

25, 70A is a front cutout formed on the left edge, i.e., the inlet end, of the cover 70. This front cutout 70A is for guiding a part of the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 to the outside just before the cover 70.
A plurality of front cutout portions 70A may be formed.

In FIG. 25, GP14 indicates the gap between the first cooling fan 60 and the left end face of the cover 70. This gap GP14 is approximately 40 mm. Note that a gap GP15 (not shown) may also be provided between the second cooling fan 61 on the front side and the left end face of the cover 70. In FIG. 25, this gap GP15 is very small, so it is not shown.

In Figures 25 and 27, XB indicates the point where the "blowout line" FL1 (see Figure 27), which passes through the center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 60A, intersects with the partition wall 11.

The air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is inclined at a predetermined angle θ1 with respect to the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction. Note that the air outlet 60A may be inclined with respect to a straight line that crosses the partition wall 11 (corresponding to the reference line BL in FIG. 27) instead of the center line CL5 that crosses the center points of the IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction.

XF indicates the point (intersection) where the "blowout line" FL2, which passes through the center point of the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and is perpendicular to the tip surface of the air outlet 61A, intersects with the partition wall 11. These intersections XB and XF will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 27. Note that the blowout line FL1 and the blowout line FL2 are imaginary straight lines provided for the convenience of explaining this embodiment 1, and the cooling air does not actually flow along these blowout lines FL1 and FL2.

In FIG. 25, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined at a predetermined angle θ2 with respect to the center line CL5.
The installation distance W14 between the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 measured at the center point is 150 mm.

27, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the heat sink 82 (82B) are spaced apart by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD1. This linear distance LD1 is approximately 110 mm.
The air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 and the heat sink 82 (82F) are spaced apart by a linear distance (shortest distance) LD2, which is about 100 mm.

With the above-described configuration, the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is directed toward the first heat sink 82F and the second heat sink 82B from behind the straight line (reference line) BL that passes through the center of the gap GP2.
The air outlet 60A is inclined (at an angle θ1) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL.

Conversely, the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61 is inclined (at an angle θ2) with respect to the straight line (reference line) BL from the front direction thereof, with the straight line (reference line) BL in between.
The magnitude relationship between the angles θ1 and θ2 is "θ1>θ2", but they may be equal.

As can be seen in FIG. 27, in this embodiment 1, the two intersections XB and XF are not in the same position. They change depending on the positions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and the directions of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 and the air outlet 61A of the second cooling fan 61.

As shown in FIG. 28, the heat sinks 82 include 82F1 and 82F2 as heat sinks 82F on the front FR side. The heat sinks 82B include 82B1 and 82B2 as heat sinks 82B on the rear BK side. When viewed from the front side of the cooking appliance 1, of the two rows of heat sinks 82, the one on the front left side is sometimes called the "first front heat sink" 82F1, and the one installed a little further away on the front right side is sometimes called the "second front heat sink" 82F2.

As shown in FIG. 28, of the two rows of heat sinks 82, the one on the rear left side is sometimes called the "rear first heat sink" 82B1, and the one installed a short distance away on the rear right side is sometimes called the "rear second heat sink" 82B2.

Returning to the explanation of FIG.
Reference numeral 11 denotes a partition wall that is integrally formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling surface of the cover 70. When the cover 70 is injection molded from a plastic material, it can be formed integrally as described above, but a plate-like member separate from the cover 70 may also be used, in which case it will be referred to as the partition member 11. Hereinafter, for ease of explanation, it will be referred to as the "partition wall" 11 collectively.

The front and back surfaces (rear surface) of this partition wall 11 are flat over its entire length from the right end to the left end. This is to minimize the airflow resistance of the cooling airflows RF1 and RF2 flowing through the first airflow path F1. The thickness of the partition wall in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.0 mm.

It is desirable to form the partition wall 11 from a material with high electrical insulation properties (e.g., a plastic material). Note that the partition wall 11 is not shown in Figures 12, 13, and 15.

24 and 25, D6 is the maximum width dimension in the front-rear direction that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16. This dimension D6 is determined by the distance between a partition plate 52 (described later) and the front vertical wall 16F (see FIG. 12).
GP1 is a gap formed continuously in the lateral direction behind the partition plate 52 .

In Figures 24 and 25, D7 is the distance between the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 and the partition plate 52 (described later), and is the dimension that determines the size of the gap GP1 (see Figures 13 and 24). W8 is the maximum left-right dimension (width) that determines the size of the internal space of the upper case 16.

The two IH coils 17L and 17R are supported from below by a part called the coil base 17C (see Figure 12), which is made of heat-resistant plastic. The coil base 17C may be provided for each of the two IH coils 17L and 17R, or may be formed as a single structure common to both IH coils 17L and 17R.

The coil base 17C is placed directly on the top surface of the cover 70 and fixed to the cover 70 with fasteners such as screws. Alternatively, an elastic body such as a compression spring is interposed between the coil base 17C and the top surface of the cover 70, and the coil base 17C is supported in a manner that it is constantly pushed up toward the top plate 15. A detailed explanation of these support structures is omitted. In any case, the distance (opposition) between the IH coils 17L, 17R and the rear surface (lower surface) of the top plate 15 does not change over a long period of time. The coil base 17C has multiple large communication holes (not shown) formed in it to allow air to easily pass through in the vertical direction throughout the coil base.

Due to the above configuration, the distance between the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 and the IH coils 17L, 17R does not change during induction heating cooking. As a result, it is possible to suppress changes in the high-frequency voltage and high-frequency current generated in the inverter circuits 81L, 81R that supply high-frequency current to the IH coils 17L, 17R, and it is possible to stabilize the induction heating performance.

The IH coils 17L and 17R are located above a horizontal plane (hereinafter referred to as the "first horizontal plane HP1") that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, they exist on a second horizontal plane HP2 (see FIG. 15).

The cover 70 is positioned below the IH coils 17L and 17R and is not in contact with either the coil base 17C or the heat sink 82.

The cover 70 is fixed so as to be in close contact with the upper surface of a flat support plate 71 that is larger than the planar shape of the cover 70. A tunnel-shaped first air passage F1 that is long in the left-right direction is defined and formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, as shown in Figures 24 and 25. The support plate 71 is made of an insulating material, such as heat-resistant plastic.

In Figures 12 and 15, 102 is a metallic exhaust duct through which the exhaust flow from the lower unit 200 is guided. The outlet end 102E of this exhaust duct 102 passes through a gap GP1 formed between a partition plate 52 (described later) and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16 (see Figure 13). In other words, the exhaust duct 102 passes vertically through the gap GP1 like a chimney.

In FIG. 15, TS10 is a contact type temperature sensor such as a thermistor, which measures the temperature of the food to be cooked inside the heating chamber 113 and the ambient temperature around it.
This temperature sensor TS10 is installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the exhaust duct 102 so that the heat-sensing part is exposed to the inner space of the exhaust duct 102. Therefore, it is possible to accurately measure the temperature of the air (hot air inside the heating chamber 113 mixed with the cooling air RF6) flowing inside the exhaust duct 102. The cooling air RF6 may be referred to as "cooling air B" in the following description.

The temperature sensor TS10 is preferably installed close to the rear surface of the heating chamber 113, and is therefore located close to the communication port 174 formed at the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113.

The temperature sensor TS10 constantly measures the temperature not only when cooking by driving the oven heating source 188, but also when cooking by the microwave heating source 189 (for example, thawing frozen food) (in the cooking process of the combined cooking mode KM2 described below). The temperature detection data of this temperature sensor TS10 is input to the heating chamber control unit 159 (see FIG. 30). During microwave cooking, the food to be cooked may be heated and generate high-temperature steam, so the temperature of the steam may be detected by the temperature sensor TS10, and the temperature detection data may also be input to the microwave heating control unit 130 and used for microwave heating (stop) control by the microwave heating control unit 130.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 16A denotes a horizontal flange formed by bending the upper ends of the side vertical walls 16L, 16R of the upper case 16 outward at a right angle in a continuous manner.
Reference numeral 101A denotes a horizontal flange formed by bending outward at a right angle continuously from the upper end portions of side vertical walls 101L and 101R of a lower case 101, which will be described later.

The upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are arranged such that the flange 16A overlaps the flange 101A. In this overlapping state, the side wall of the upper case 16 and the side wall of the lower case 101 are fixed with the screws 51 (see FIG. 12) described above. Therefore, the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed into a strong integrated structure by the fixation with the screws 51 and the tight fixation of the flange 16A and the flange 101A. In other words, the total weight of the upper case 16 is supported by the top surface of the flange 101A of the lower case 101, so even if the upper case 16 and the lower case 101 are formed from thin metal plates, they can be made into a box-shaped structure with sufficient mechanical strength when integrated.

The means for fixing the flanges 16A and 101A in an overlapping state may not be the screws 51, but may be other fastening means such as bolts and nuts. The flanges 16A and 101A do not come into contact with the top surface of the kitchen furniture 2. As the flanges 16A and 101A are made of a hard material (metal), there is a concern that they may damage the kitchen furniture 2. Furthermore, if the flanges 16A and 101A come into contact with the kitchen furniture 2, the cushioning material 26 cannot be installed in a compressed state. If the cushioning material 26 is not in a tight contact state, there is a concern that the effect of preventing the intrusion of water, etc. will be lost.

Next, the gap between the main body case HC, which is the outer shell (housing) of the cooking appliance 1, and the kitchen furniture 2 will be described.
8 and 12 to 15, reference numeral 311 denotes a lower gap formed between the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 constituting the outer shell of the main body case HC and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 10 mm.

In FIG. 14, 301R denotes a right gap formed between the right side vertical wall 101R of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.
Reference numeral 301L denotes a left gap formed between the left side vertical wall 101L of the lower case 101 and the kitchen furniture 2, and has a size of about 5 mm.

In Figures 13 and 15, 302 is a front gap formed between the bottom surface of the door 114 or the bottom surface of the hinge portion 176 and the kitchen furniture 2 when the door 114 is closed, and is approximately 10 mm in size. Note that the position of the bottom surface of the front cover 112 is also aligned with the position of the bottom surface of the door 114 on the horizontal plane, so that a gap of the same size as the front gap 302 is also secured below the front cover 112.

The size of the front gap 302 changes depending on whether the door 114 is open or closed, but as shown in FIG. 12, it is sufficient that the size (e.g., about 5 mm to 10 mm) is ensured so that outside air can be sucked in when the door 114 is closed. Note that in the explanation of the cooking appliance 1, "outside air" refers to the air present outside the cooking appliance 1, and does not refer to the air outdoors of the house HA shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in Figures 12 to 15 and Figure 18, the lower gap 311, right gap 301R, left gap 301L, and front gap 302 are interconnected. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 starts operating and outside air is drawn in from the front gap 302, the drawn outside air is appropriately distributed to the lower gap 311, right gap 301R, and left gap 301L. Note that the gap 303 described in Figure 18 also communicates with each of the gaps 311, right gap 301R, left gap 301L, and front gap 302.

Next, referring back to FIG.
W3 is the maximum width dimension at the front portion of the cooking appliance 1. This width dimension W3 is larger than the maximum width dimension W2 (560 mm) of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2, and is, for example, 595 mm.

303 is a gap formed between the inner surface (right side surface) of the right wall material on the right side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2 and the right end surface of the front cover 112. This gap is provided to prevent the cooking appliance 1 from colliding with the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed. The size of the gap may be about 1 to 2 mm.

The left front cover 112 also has a gap similar to the gap 303 between it and the inner surface (left side surface) of the left wall material that exists on the left side of the installation space of the kitchen furniture 2. Note that the size of the gap 303 on the left and right may differ slightly depending on the installation of the cooking appliance 1. Also, depending on the type of kitchen furniture 2, an elastic sealing material (cushion material) may be placed on the step portion 2G (see Figure 10), and the kitchen furniture 2 may be installed in a state where the gap 303 is almost completely blocked, but even in such a state, there is no problem with the internal cooling function of the cooking appliance 1.

The front cover 112 extends outward beyond the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L as shown in FIG. 18. Therefore, when the cooking device 1 is installed, the front sides of the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are covered by the two front covers 112 on the left and right.

Since the front sides of the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are covered, when the user looks at the kitchen furniture 2 from the front side, the user does not get the impression that there is a large gap between the cooking appliance 1 and the kitchen furniture 2.

When the cooking appliance 1 is installed, the right gap 301R and the left gap 301L are secured, so that outside air can be reliably introduced into the upper air passage AH of the upper unit 100 and the lower air passage UH of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

In Figure 18, WS is the width dimension of the door 114 facing the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. This width dimension is necessary to prevent microwave leakage by tightly fitting the door 114 and the lower case 101, and also to form choke chambers 194 (described later) at the front, rear, left and right positions of the opening 113A (see Figure 11).

(First cooling fan 60, second cooling fan 61)
24, a first cooling fan 60 (upper cooling fan) and a second cooling fan 61 are installed near the side vertical wall 16L on the left side of the upper case 16. Rotating shafts 60T (not shown) at the centers of the rotors (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 extend in the vertical (perpendicular) direction, and the rotors rotate on one horizontal plane (first horizontal plane HP1).

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are centrifugal fans (blowers). This is because it takes into consideration the high static pressure and the large ventilation resistance in a space with a high mounting density. Generally, there are centrifugal fans of the type that have a single intake port and blow (discharge) in the full radial direction. However, the fan in this embodiment 1 is a type that blows in only one direction.

In FIG. 24, 60A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 60C of the first cooling fan 60, and 61A is an air outlet formed integrally with the fan case 61C of the second cooling fan 61.

The first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 cool the IH coil installation space CK inside the upper space 300A described below. Therefore, these two cooling fans 60 and 61 may be collectively referred to as the "upper cooling fans."

The air outlets 60A, 61A are directed toward the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the two air outlets 60A, 61A are both located above a common first horizontal plane (HP1) and directed to the right. Note that the "first horizontal plane" HP1 in this embodiment 1 refers to a plane that coincides with the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, as described above.

The first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 have exactly the same structure, shape, and "rated specifications," and are assumed to operate at the same rotation speed during normal induction heating operation. However, in this embodiment 1, the IH control unit 90 varies the rotation speed to change the amount of air blown. For example, the driving power applied to the IH coils 17L and 17R may be increased to increase the heating capacity, or when it is detected that the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40 is higher than normal, the rotation speed may be increased to increase the amount of air blown in order to improve the cooling effect. In addition, the first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 may be operated at different rotation speeds as a measure against "whining noise" as described below.

The rated specifications are, for example, rated voltage, operating voltage range, rated current, rated rotation speed, maximum air volume, maximum static pressure, sound pressure level, etc. By changing the applied voltage or the voltage application time (ON DUTY time) within the operating voltage range, the rotation speed can be changed.
In contrast to this, the present embodiment 1 employs a PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control method, which changes the duty cycle of the pulse width (ratio of H and L pulse widths) according to the magnitude of the input signal (DC level) to control the motor of the first cooling fan 60. This PWM control is also employed for the second cooling fan 61.

The first and second cooling fans 60 and 61 are configured with fan cases 60C and 61C surrounding the rotors (not shown), and a circular intake port (not shown) is provided on the underside of the fan case.

Directly below the intake ports (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, there is a vent hole 64 (see Figures 14 and 16) consisting of multiple round or elliptical holes. This vent hole 64 is formed in the bottom wall surface of the lower case 16. This vent hole 64 is connected to a vent hole 164 formed in the left side wall surface of the lower case 101, which will be described later. Therefore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can directly introduce outside air from outside the lower case 101 through the vent hole 164.

In FIG. 14, 165 is a recess (intake duct) that is provided to directly connect the vent 64 to the vent 164 of the lower case 101. This recess 165 is recessed from the left side by a certain depth (dimension) DP1. This dimension DP1 is 99 mm.

As shown in FIG. 14, the vertical center point of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60, the vertical center point of the heat sink 82, and the vertical center point of the electrical component 85 mounted on the top surface of the power supply circuit board 55 (described later) are located on a single horizontal line HL1. In other words, the cooling air RF1 blown out from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 is positioned so that it reaches the heat sink 82 and the electrical component 85 when it travels straight to the right. The horizontal plane determined by this horizontal line HL1 is above the first horizontal plane HP1.

In FIG. 14, AC power from a commercial AC power source 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55 via a filter circuit board 54, which will be described later. Then, AC is converted to DC in this power supply circuit board 55. For this reason, electrical components 85 such as a diode for converting AC to DC and a transformer 57 (not shown) are mounted on the power supply circuit board 55.

If the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80 rises abnormally, the IH control unit 90 that controls induction heating cooking reduces the amount of heat from the IH coils 17L and 17R. In addition to this operation, the amount of air blown per unit time by the first cooling fan 60 may be temporarily increased. The temperature of the heat sink 82 is detected by contact-type temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 (see Figure 24), such as thermistors, fixed in close contact with the surface of the heat sink 82.

If the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are made to have exactly the same structure, shape, and rated specifications, procurement costs during manufacturing can be reduced.
When cooling fans of the same specifications are arranged in parallel and operated, there is a high possibility that a humming noise will occur. For this reason, in this embodiment 1, as a measure against the humming noise, the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are controlled to be different values within a range where the humming noise is likely to occur. In other words, they are not always operated at different rotation speeds.

In FIG. 24, 52 is a metal partition plate that is installed laterally at the rear of the upper case 16 and is fixed to the upper case 16. This partition plate 52 is a vertically extending wall that divides the internal space of the upper case 16 into front and rear. Note that "dividing" does not mean a strict shielding that completely blocks the flow of air. It is sufficient to be able to prevent the cooling air from the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 from flowing rearward beyond the upper end surface of the partition plate 52 to some extent.

The upper air passage AH, which will be described later, is the air passage within the upper unit 100, extending from the vent hole 64 to the partition plate 52. The exhaust duct 102 from the lower unit 200 is present in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. Therefore, the lower air passage UH, which will be described later, does not pass through the upper passage AH, but is structured to be substantially connected to the outside of the cooking appliance 1.

In FIG. 24, reference numeral 52A denotes an exhaust window formed in the left half of the partition plate 52, and 52B denotes an exhaust window formed in the right half of the partition plate 52.
Reference numeral 53L denotes an exhaust port plate (on the left side) that is installed to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52A, and has a number of through holes 53L1 formed therein to allow cooling air to pass through toward the exhaust window 52A of the partition plate 52.

53R is an exhaust port plate (on the right side) that is installed to cover the front side of the exhaust window 52B, and has a number of through holes 53R1 formed therein, allowing cooling air to pass through toward the exhaust window 52B of the partition plate 52. The cooling air that passes through these exhaust windows 52A and 52B is released into the space outside the cooking appliance 1 via the exhaust cover 19.

In Fig. 24, LF is an exhaust port dimension indicating the range (width dimension) to the left of the partition plate 12 described later for exhaust gas exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R. This exhaust port dimension is determined by the formation range of the through hole 53L1 and the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A. When the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A is narrower than the formation range of the through hole 53L1 (the form shown in Fig. 24), the exhaust range LF (on the left side) is determined by the width dimension of the exhaust window 52A.
The width dimension of the right exhaust window 52B and the range in which the through hole 53R1 is formed are equal to each other.

In FIG. 24, 54 is a filter circuit board located in the right corner of the rear of the upper case 16. This filter circuit board removes noise from the power supply from the commercial power source 99 and supplies it to the output terminal side, and conversely prevents noise from flowing (backflowing) to the commercial (AC) power supply at the input terminal side, and is equipped with electrical components (not shown) such as resistors, inductors (choke coils), line capacitors, relays, and current fuses. The end of the power cable (not shown) connected to the commercial power source 99 via a plug is connected to this filter circuit board 54 via the inside of the lower unit 200, which will be described later.

The power supply circuit board 55 is located on the opposite side (right side) of the first cooling fan 60 across the inverter circuit board 80. In other words, the power supply circuit board 55 is located to the right of the outlet FO of the first air passage F1 formed between the inverter circuit board 80 and the cover 70, and is therefore cooled by the cooling air immediately after it leaves the first air passage F1.

In FIG. 24, CL3 is a center line passing through the center point of the left IH coil 17L in the front-rear direction, and CL4 is a center line passing through the center point of the right IH coil 17R in the front-rear direction.
CL5 is a center line that crosses the center points of the two IH coils 17L, 17R in the left-right direction. CL2 is a center line that passes through the rotation centers of the rotor blades (not shown) of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 in the front-rear direction. As is clear from Fig. 24, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are aligned in a straight line in the front-rear direction.

In FIG. 24, RF1 indicates the cooling air blown out from the first cooling fan 60. RF2 indicates the cooling air blown out from the second cooling fan 61.

RF3 indicates the cooling air after it leaves the outlet FO of the first air passage F1. RF4 indicates the cooling air after it passes through the second air passage F2. Note that the cooling air RF3 after it leaves the outlet FO and the cooling air RF4 after it passes through the second air passage F2 partially merge along the way. In other words, the cooling air RF3 and the cooling air RF4 merge before they reach the through holes 53L1 and 53R1 of the exhaust port plates 53L and 53R.

In FIG. 24, GP1 is a gap formed between the partition plate 52 and the rear vertical wall 16B of the upper case 16. The width of this gap GP1 in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 30 mm to 50 mm.

In Figures 24 and 25, 12 is a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52. 13 is also a partition plate, which is installed vertically in the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52.

The partition plate 12 divides the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52 into two spaces, left and right. On the left side of the partition plate 12, an exhaust duct 102 is vertically positioned from below. Also, on the right side of the partition plate 13, the end (exhaust port) of an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) that exhausts air after cooling the magnetron 122 of the lower unit 200 may be located. However, in this embodiment 1, such an exhaust duct 307 (not shown) is not located.

In Figures 24 and 25, 14 is a vertically installed plate-like or rib-shaped (protruding) partition wall. This partition wall 14 is integrally formed with or fixed to the upper surface of a support plate 29 (not shown) that is installed so as to overlap the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16.

The support plate 29 (not shown) is made of an electrically insulating plastic material like the support plate 71 .
The partition wall 14 is formed from the rear of the cover 70 to the front surface of the partition plate 52. However, the partition wall 14 does not extend vertically to a position where it contacts the lower surface of the top plate 15. In other words, although the partition wall 14 extends close to the lower surface of the top plate 15, the space behind the cover 70 is not completely divided into two, left and right, by the partition wall 14.

As shown in FIG. 25, a portion of the cooling air RF4 that is guided mainly through the first air passage F1 to the right side of the cover 70 is divided by the partition wall 14 into two cooling air flows RF4L and RF4L, and is guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

As shown in FIG. 25, a portion of the cooling air RF4 that is guided mainly via the first air passage F1 to the right side of the cover 70 can be divided into two cooling air flows RF4L and RF4L by the partition wall 14 and guided toward the exhaust windows 52A and 52B.

With the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 24, the cooling airflows RF4L, RF4R are exhausted from the installation space CK of the IH coils 17L, 17R through the exhaust windows 52A, 52B.
24 and 25, the cooling air exhausted from the right side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4R, and the cooling air exhausted from the left side of the partition wall 14 is indicated as RF4L. When these two cooling airs are to be collectively referred to, the reference symbol RF4 is used in the following description.

(Detailed configuration of input operation unit 40)
Next, returning to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the main part of the input operation unit 40 will be described.
In Figures 19 and 20, reference numeral 40 denotes an input operation section formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15, in which various input keys (touch-type keys) that enable input by utilizing a change in electrostatic capacitance when the user lightly touches the keys with a finger or the like, as described below, are arranged in a horizontal line.

The input operation unit 40 includes three parts: a right operation unit 40R, a central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M, and a left operation unit 40L. 98 is an operation button or operation key (touch input type) for a main power switch 97 that can supply and cut off the commercial power supply 99 described below.

This operation button or operation key 98 is located adjacent to the right end of the right operation unit 40R. The following description is based on the assumption that this operation button or operation key 98 is within the range of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

As described above, the right operation unit 40R is sometimes called an "individual operation unit" because it performs input operations only for the induction heating source 9. Similarly, the left operation unit 40L is sometimes called an "individual operation unit."
In contrast, the central operation unit 40M is sometimes called a "shared operation unit" because it is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This "shared operation unit" also includes a "cooperative operation unit" 40M for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later. These will be described in detail in FIG. 21.

The main power switch 97 is attached to the filter board 54 of the upper unit 100 as shown in Figures 24 and 25. The commercial power supply 99 is supplied to the power supply circuit board 55, the inverter circuit 81, and the power supply circuit section of the lower unit 200 (not shown in Figure 25).

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, a total of five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are arranged on the right operation unit 40R. These input keys 43R1 to 43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions as described below.

43R1 is an input key that selects heating with the right heating unit 17HR. It can also stop the operation of the right-side IH coil 17R that has started the heating operation. Therefore, when pressed once the first time, it performs the function of selecting the right heating unit 17HR, and when pressed once again, it has the function of instantly issuing a command to stop the heating operation. In this way, each time this input key 43R1 is touched, the content of the command to the IH control unit 90, which will be described later, automatically switches.

The input keys 44R, 44L (or 43R1, 43L1) may be referred to as a third selection means. That is, the left input key 44L (or 43L1) and the right input key 43R1, which will be described later, are means for selecting the "single (heating) cooking" mode that uses either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and for issuing a command to start the heating operation.

43R2 and 43R3 are a pair of input keys for designating the heating power (power consumption) during induction heating.
Of the two input keys 43R2, when the left input key 43R2 is touched, the heat is reduced by one level each time it is operated. For example, when the heat is 3200 W (rated maximum heat: heat level 9), touching this input key 43R2 once reduces the heat to 2500 W (heat level: 8).

When the right input key 42R3 is touched, the heat level is increased by one step each time. For example, if the heat level is 2500W (heat level 8), touching this input key 42R3 once selects 3200W (maximum rated heat level: heat level 9).

43R4 is an input key for selecting the timer cooking control menu. Timer cooking is a control method in which the user sets the cooking time and induction heating operation is performed only for the set time. For example, if 10 minutes is specified and timer cooking is started, a specified display is displayed on the right display unit 31R when 10 minutes have elapsed, and the voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) 95, described later, automatically notifies the user by voice that cooking is complete. Induction heating automatically stops when the set time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed, but the induction heating time can be extended by performing an extension operation before the set time has elapsed.

In this embodiment 1, the display units such as the integrated display unit 30 and the right display unit 31R, and the voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) 95 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit" AN.

44R is a touch-type input key for selecting the "control menu" of induction heating cooking, and each time it is touched, one of multiple control menus can be selected. In this induction heating cooking, a "control menu" is a control mode of the induction heating source 9, or in other words, a type of control, such as "boiling water," "boiling," "deep-frying (automatic cooking)," etc., as shown in FIG. 38. In other words, "boiling water," "stewing," "deep-frying," etc. are individual control menus. In addition, control conditions related to one control menu include, for example, the drive time (of the IH coil 17R) and the heat value. Even if the control menu is the same, the control conditions are not necessarily the same.

The "control menu" for the right heating unit 17HR is different from the names of the final food items or ingredients obtained by induction heating. For example, "hamburger steak" and "tempura" are names of food items and are not "control menus" as used here. In other words, the "control menu" can be said to be a general expression of the type of heating, cooking method, conditions, etc., until the cooking is completed.
The control menu for the induction heating source 9 may be referred to as an "IH control menu" to distinguish it from control menus for other heating sources.

Next, the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to Figures 20 and 23. The left operation unit 40L has a total of five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L.

43L1 is an input key for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL. After the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L has started, the operation can be stopped at any time. That is, when the key is pressed once at the beginning, the function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL is exhibited, and when the key is pressed once again after induction heating has started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.
The input key 43L1 may be called a third selection means.

43L2 and 43L3 are a pair of input keys that specify the heating power (power consumption) in the left heating unit 17HL, similar to the input keys 43R2 to 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R. As with the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R, each time they are touched, a specific heating power level one step higher or one step lower can be selected from the data table of specified heating power values.

43L4 is an input key for selecting timer cooking. Like the input key 43R4 on the right operation unit 40R, this input key 43L4 can specify the induction heating cooking time. Also, when timer cooking ends, like the input key 43R4, the end of timer cooking is displayed on the left display unit 31L and is also notified by the voice synthesizer (voice notification unit) 95.

44L is a touch-type input key that can select a "control menu" for induction heating cooking. As with the input key 44R of the right operation unit 40R, one control menu can be selected from multiple "control menus." Note that the control menu that can be selected with the left input key 44L is exactly the same as the control menu that can be selected with the right input key 44R.

In addition, in the cooking process using the induction heating source 9 in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the functions of the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 are transferred to the input keys 44L and 44R.

The five touch input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L arranged on the left operation section 40L are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction, as is clear from Figures 20 and 23.

20 and 21, a total of ten touch-type input keys are arranged on the central operation section 40M, and one or more input functions are assigned to these input keys.
The ten touch input keys will be described below.

The input key 43KP on the far left allows the user to set the various operations and displays of the entire cooking device 1 as desired.

When the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC, which will be described later, switches to a "function mode" and displays a "function setting menu" such as the one shown below on the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys)
(2) Setting the ventilation fan linkage mode (3) Setting the cleaning guide (setting the automatic notification function for when to clean the heating chamber 113 and exhaust cover 19)
(4) Peak cut setting (maximum power consumption can be selected from four levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W)
(5) Audio settings for audio guidance (6) Volume settings for audio guidance (7) Settings to prevent forgetting to remove food, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 113 (whether or not an alarm is required on the voice synthesizer 95 and integrated display unit 30)
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage limiting function of the home power control device)
(9) Setting the time unit for timer cooking (changing the 1-minute setting to 5-minute or 30-minute units) (10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (experienced) mode (11) Setting the type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 401 (12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu, identification information 330 to be displayed as default) of each cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu (e.g., "range grill", "pre-boil leafy vegetables") of the composite cooking mode KM2 (14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on (display priority between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2, etc.)
(15) A setting for preventing the automatic display of a guide screen 30SA (see FIGS. 54 and 55) described later and a setting for preventing the display contents of the guide screen 30SA from being announced by voice using the voice synthesizer 95.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for people (users) who are not familiar with using the cooking appliance 1. When the beginner mode is selected, the voice guidance in the voice synthesizer (voice notification unit) 95 becomes more detailed and polite. In addition, the number of voice guidance regarding input operations in the input operation unit 40 increases, and the amount of display information on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases.

When the beginner mode is set, particularly in the case of cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the amount of reference information (including additional information 331, described later) displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 increases in cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, or the content of the voice guidance in the voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) 95 increases. This enhances the function of supporting the user's input operations.

In addition, in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode", a setting not to display the guidance screen 30SA (see Figs. 54 and 55) may be automatically performed. In other words, in conjunction with switching from the "normal (expert) mode" to the "beginner mode", the guidance screen 30SA (see Figs. 54 and 55) will be displayed.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the cooking mode that is automatically displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is set to either the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2. Since both the linked cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2 use the same integrated display unit 30, the user can set the display of either one to take priority. This will be explained in more detail later.

When the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is opened after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 has been opened.
This function assumes that the user will be cooking using the heating chamber 113, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 30SP for the linked cooking mode KM3 or the second specific screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30.
The first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed immediately after the door 114 is opened after the standby initial screen (display screens 1, 2A, 2B: FIG. 46) described later is displayed.

After the "Function Setting Menu" is displayed on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, by "pressing and holding" (hereinafter referred to as "long press") a specific input key other than the input key 43KP on the central operation unit 40M, one setting menu from the "Function Setting Menu" can be selected, and the desired setting contents can be subsequently changed.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the input key 43KP are pressed and held simultaneously, one of the setting menus in the "function setting menu" described above can be called up and the desired setting can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state in which the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The integrated control device MC judges whether or not the state is a "long press" by comparing the timing of the touch input in the input operation unit 40 with a reference value. That is, the timing when the input keys (e.g., 43M1 and 43M2) in the central operation unit 40M are pressed simultaneously can be determined by the ON (when touched)-OFF (when not touched) signal transmitted from the input operation unit 40 to the integrated control device MC, and the integrated control device MC measures the time from the ON signal to the point when it changes to the OFF signal to judge whether or not it is a "long press."

The type (range) of inventory information obtained from the refrigerator 401 may be, for example, limited to only frozen foods or to only food ingredients that can be heated by the microwave heating source 189.

By pressing the input key 43KP to switch the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 to the "function mode," and then operating the touch-type input keys 43M1 to 43M3 (described later) located on the central operation unit 40M, the 14 individual functions defined in the "function setting menu" of the cooking device 1 can be individually changed.

When the control mode or control conditions (temperature, heat, time, etc.) of the microwave heating source 189 or oven heating source 188 are being selected on the integrated display unit 30, the input function of the input key 43KP is disabled so that the function mode is not switched. Therefore, the light-emitting unit 27M1 corresponding to the input key 43KP does not emit light during the setting of the control mode or control conditions (see FIG. 21).

For example, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking appliance 1 will be described. Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the user's home. In this way, the functions of the cooking appliance 1 can be changed according to the user's wishes and the usage environment (power situation of the home where it is installed). When such a peak cut value is set, the setting result is stored in the integrated control device MC or the power control unit 72, and is used to determine whether or not to allow the use of the linked cooking mode KM3 when the user selects the linked cooking mode KM3 as described below.

As shown in Fig. 21, the range of the central operation unit 40M includes a range called a shared operation unit or RG operation unit 40M2 that is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. The range of the central operation unit 40M is the range surrounded by a dashed line in Fig. 21.
On the other hand, the area of the central operation section 40M excluding the input keys 43KP is a cooperative operation section 40MC for executing a cooperative cooking mode, which will be described later.

In the following description, the "RG operation unit" 40M2 may be referred to as the "second operation unit" 40M2 because it also serves as the input operation unit for the microwave heating source 189 (second heating means).

Reference numeral 43MC denotes an input key for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, which is disposed at the left end of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and is made up of a touch key.
This input key 43MC is illuminated from below by a light-emitting diode (LED) or the like, so that the user can easily see the words "cooperative cooking" and the figure that indicates it. However, the input key 43MC is only illuminated and visible during the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, after all cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 are completed, the LED stops emitting light, indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not active.
The input key 43MC may be referred to as a "first cooking mode selection section" or a "first input key."

43M1 is an input key for selecting cooking in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. A combined cooking mode KM2 using both the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 can also be selected. In other words, this input key 43M1 is an input means (input key) for selecting the "combined cooking mode" KM2. When the input key 43M1 is operated, as described below, cooking can be performed using only either microwave heating or oven heating by executing the "combined cooking mode" KM2. The input key 43M1 may be called the "second cooking mode selection section" or the "second input key". The input key 43M1 may also be called the "third input key".

When the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 switches to a special display screen configuration. That is, the second specific screen 30SC used for the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed. This will be described later with reference to Figures 55 to 59.

When the input key 43MC is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays a special display screen so that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be executed. In other words, the display is switched to a configuration that displays the first specific screen 30SP. This will be described later with reference to Figs. 60, 86 to 113.

Here, we will explain how the input keys 43M1, 43M2, and 43M3 send input signals to the integrated control device MC. In other words, we will explain the operation of the input keys 43M1 and the like that constitute the "second cooking mode selection unit" described later.

The following description will be limited to the input key 43M1 as a representative example.
When the control menu information of the composite cooking mode KM2 is displayed on the second specific screen 30SC, if the user touches the input key 43M1, the number of touches is grasped by the integrated control device MC.

On the other hand, as explained in the section on input key 43KP, when a specific input key (e.g. 43M1) is "pressed and held," the integrated control device MC counts the time that has elapsed from the moment the touch surface of input key 43M1 is touched. For example, when the input key is "pressed and held" for six consecutive seconds, it is counted as "one input operation" after six seconds have elapsed, and then the elapsed time is counted again.

In this way, for example, if the touch is continued for 12 consecutive seconds, the integrated control device MC will determine that this is "two input operations."
Therefore, the integrated control device MC updates the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC in two stages, for example. In this way, even if the input key 43M1 is pressed only once (for 12 seconds), multiple commands are issued depending on the duration of the press, and the control menu, control conditions, etc. can be changed in a specified order. In the case of such a "long press," the alarm unit AN may sound some kind of alarm each time one period (for 6 seconds in the above example) has elapsed, to alert the user.

Note that not all input keys are permitted to be "pressed and held" as described above. If a "long press" is attempted, an alarm may be sounded by the notification unit AN, or an abnormal operation may be indicated by voice using the voice synthesizer (voice notification unit) 95.

In this embodiment 1, when selecting at least two of the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, the integrated control device MC allows the relevant input keys to be input "according to the operation time" as described above.

The display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 is a single LCD screen in terms of hardware, but as shown in Figure 21, it is divided into a maximum of three display areas 30L, 30M, and 30R by the display unit drive circuit 63.

Of the three display areas, display area 30L located on the left side will hereafter be referred to as the "first area." Display area 30M located in the center will hereafter be referred to as the "second area." Display area 30R located on the right side will hereafter be referred to as the "third area." Note that methods of dividing a single display screen into multiple areas in this way have been proposed in, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 5425171 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-172940, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

43M1 is a pair of input keys on the left and right for switching the screen displayed in the first area 30L of the display screen 30D after operating the input key 43MC. The information displayed in the first area 30L is selected by the display unit drive circuit 63 according to the display program of the integrated control device MC.

Next, we will explain the state in which the input key 43M1 is operated and individual names indicating "combined cooking mode" KM2 and "single cooking mode" KM1 are displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

When the left input key 43M1 of the two input keys 43M1 lined up on the left and right is operated, the display screen of the first area 30L moves forward, and the display screen switches so that the information displayed on the rear side is now displayed in the center of the front and rear.

When the left input key 43M1 is operated once, the user can select one of the desired display information (for example, a name that identifies "range grill" cooking, which is one of the control menus) from a group of display information stored in the integrated control device MC, such as the "control menu" (in the case of combined cooking mode KM2) and identification information 330 of the food to be cooked (in the case of linked cooking mode KM3). Note that the display screen itself does not actually move forward, but only appears to move forward visually.

Conversely, when the right input key 43M1 is operated once, the display screen of the first area 30L moves backwards, and the display screen switches so that different information is instead displayed in the center of the front and rear of the first area. In other words, even if the right input key 43M1 is operated, one of the "display information group" defined in the display program of the integrated control device MC is selected, but the selection direction (selection order) of the displayed information is reversed.

In this way, the user can display desired information from the display information group in the center of the first area 30L by operating either the right input key 43M1 or the left input key 43M1.

43M2 is a pair of input keys that switch the screen displayed in the second area 30M of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of these input keys 43M2, the display information in the second area 30M can be switched one by one in sequence, similar to the input key 43M1. The input key 43M2 may be called the "fourth input key."

43M3 is a pair of input keys that switch the screen displayed in the third area 30R of the display screen 30D. By operating any one of these input keys 43M3, the display information in the third area 30R can be switched one by one in sequence, similar to the input key 43M1.

The input key 43M3 also serves as a guide key for assisting the user in inputting information for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2.
When this input key 43M3 is touched in a specific situation, such as when no information is displayed in the third area 30R or when guidance information 30P described below is displayed, it displays "guidance information" 30P in the third area 30R to serve as a reference for the user's operation (see Figure 59).

The display of the guidance information 30P will automatically disappear after a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, and the display screen will return to its previous state. Details of this operation will be explained later with reference to Figures 84 and 85.

43MS is a "start unit" that can command the start of microwave cooking and oven cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is specifically a touch-type input key. It also doubles as an input key that can command a transition to the combined cooking mode KM3. This input key 43MS may be called the "start input key" when specifically distinguishing it from other input keys.

Conversely, 43MT is an "end section" that can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations, and is specifically a touch-type input key. It also doubles as an input key that can issue a command to cancel the transition to the combined cooking mode KM3. This input key 43MT may be called the "end input key" when specifically distinguishing it from other input keys.

When the operation key 98 of the main power switch is pressed to start cooking, for example, the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R do not always need to function as inputs.

Similarly, in the left operation unit 40L, the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4, 44L do not always need to have an input function. The same is true for the central operation unit 40M. To avoid unnecessary input, such as when the user touches an input key without realizing it, the integrated control device MC temporarily disables the input functions of the other input keys immediately after starting up the cooking appliance 1, and does not accept input, except for input keys that require input depending on the cooking condition input process and the progress of cooking.

To indicate that the input functions of the above-mentioned input keys are valid, light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided for each of the three operation units 40R, 40L, and 40M, as shown in Figures 20 to 23.

In FIG. 21, 507 is first identification information formed by printing, engraving, etc., near the front (surface) of the input key 43MC described above. In this embodiment 1, it is displayed as the number "1". This first identification information 507 is information that corresponds one-to-one to "first information 501" (see FIGS. 54 and 55) that clearly identifies the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC described later.

In FIG. 21, 508 is second identification information formed by printing, engraving, etc., near the front (surface) of the left input key 43M1. In this embodiment 1, it is displayed as the number "2." This second identification information 508 is information that corresponds one-to-one to "second information 502" (see FIGS. 54 and 55) that clearly identifies the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 described later.

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, in the right operation unit 40R, the individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 are located immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43R1 to 43R4 and 44R. The input keys 43R2 and 43R3 form a pair, and therefore share one individual light-emitting unit 27R2.

In FIG. 21, 509R is third identification information formed by printing, engraving, etc., near the front (surface) of input key 43R1. In this embodiment 1, it is displayed as the number "3." This third identification information 509R is information that corresponds one-to-one to "third information 503" (see FIGS. 54 and 55) that clearly identifies the third cooking mode selection unit 43R1 described later.

The individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 each have one or more light-emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged below the right operation unit 40R, and the display unit drive circuit 63 controls the individual light-emitting units 27R1 to 27R4 to turn on and off, or to change the color of the light they emit.

For example, before the input key 43R1 (see FIG. 22) of the right operation unit 40R (individual operation unit for the right heating unit 17HR) is operated, the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 immediately adjacent to and behind the input key 43R1 emits blue light. This indicates that the unit is in a state where it can accept operational input.

When a user operates the input key 43R1 and the integrated control device MC accepts the input, the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 emits light in a unified color (red) to indicate to the user that an operation has been accepted. This display control is performed by the display unit drive circuit 63 based on commands from the integrated control device MC. Note that instead of emitting light in one color, the light color may be changed, for example from blue to red, to indicate to the user that an operation has been accepted. This also applies to the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 and 27L1 to 27L4, which will be described later.

Note that the individual light-emitting unit 27R1 adjacent to and immediately behind the input key 43R1 may not be illuminated before the input key 43R1 is operated, but may start illuminating when the operation is accepted and continue illuminating. Alternatively, the system may be such that only the fact that operational input is possible is indicated by illumination in advance (before operation) and that the operational input has been accepted is not indicated by illumination. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light flashes when operational input is possible and waiting for input, and changes to continuous illumination when operational input is accepted.

Similarly, as shown in Figures 20 and 23, in the left operation unit 40L, individual light-emitting units 27L1 to 27L4 are arranged immediately behind the five touch-type input keys 43L1 to 43L4 and 44L. Since the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 form a pair, they share one individual light-emitting unit 27L4.

As shown in Figures 20 and 21, in the central operation unit 40M, individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 are arranged immediately behind the ten touch-type input keys 43KP, 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, and 43MT.

When the input key 43MS is pressed and induction heating begins, the input keys (43M1, 43M2, etc.) on the central operation unit 40M will no longer be able to input. However, the input function of the input key 43MT will remain valid.

The input key 43MT can cancel the input of the control menu or the cooperative cooking mode KM3. For example, when cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (in the heating chamber 113) is started, pressing this input key (end section) 43MT once stops the heating operation of the second heating means HM2 corresponding to the heating chamber 113. Pressing it once again cancels the setting of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 at that point, and as described later, the occupied state of the left heating section 17HL used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is immediately released.
Therefore, after this release, input of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL for other cooking can be started.

When cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode is being performed using the induction heating source 9, pressing the input key (end) 43MT twice in succession cancels the setting of the linked cooking mode KM3. In other words, cooking step 1 using the induction heating source 9 ends at that point, and the reservation for the next cooking step 2 is cancelled. Therefore, as described below, the state in which the microwave heating source 189 in the heating chamber 113 was occupied is immediately cancelled.

When the input key 43M1 or input key 43MC is operated to display the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, if the input key 43MT is operated before the cooking process starts, all previous input settings are cancelled. Therefore, if you want to display the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3, you need to operate the input key 43MC again.

The individual light-emitting units 27M1-27M6 each have one or more light-emitting diodes arranged below the central operation unit 40M, and the individual light-emitting units 27M1-27M6 are controlled by the display unit drive circuit 63 (see FIG. 30) to light up or turn off in a unified light color. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the light blinks when operation input is possible and waiting for input, and changes to continuous light when operation input is accepted.

As shown in FIG. 21, a pair of input keys 43M1 share one individual light-emitting unit 27M3. The two input keys 43M2 and 43M3 also share one individual light-emitting unit 27M4 and one individual light-emitting unit 27M5, since they also form a pair. In the following explanation, the reference symbol 27M is used to collectively refer to the individual light-emitting units in the central operation unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 22, an individual light-emitting unit 27R5 is also located directly behind the operation key (or operation button) 98 of the main power switch 97, which is located adjacent to the right end of the right operation unit 40R.

In FIG. 23, 509L is third identification information formed by printing, engraving, etc., near the front (surface) of input key 44L (or 43L1). In this embodiment 1, it is displayed as the number "3". This third identification information 509L is information that corresponds one-to-one to "third information 503" (see FIGS. 54 and 55) that clearly identifies third cooking mode selection unit 44L (or 43L1) described later.

It is desirable to unify the light emission modes (continuous light emission, flashing, light color, etc.) of the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, 27M as described above across the three operation units to avoid unnecessary confusion and misunderstandings by the user. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the light emission modes of the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, 27M are unified across the right operation unit 40R, the left operation unit 40L, and the central operation unit 40M.

One method is to have the operating part of the input key itself emit light to indicate that the input function of each input key is active, but in that case, the light-emitting part must be located directly below the operating part of the input key, and the operating part must be made of a light-transmitting material. There is also the issue of ensuring the sensitivity of the operating part of the input key, so there are many issues in terms of structure and cost.

Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the light-emitting display units 27R, 27L, and 27M are provided in adjacent positions, avoiding the operation of the input keys, as described above. "Adjacent" here means that, for example, the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display unit 27R is such that the two are close to each other when viewed from the user's perspective, and the one-to-one relationship is instantly apparent, such as the relationship between the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display unit 27R. This does not include cases where the input key 43R1 and the light-emitting display unit 27R are separated by a structure such as a wall that protrudes upward from the surface of the input key 43R1. However, since the input key 43MC is particularly important for indicating the linked cooking mode KM3, a structure is adopted in which it is illuminated from below.

In FIG. 20, heat level indicators 67L, 67R are provided at the rear of the right operating unit 40R and the left operating unit 40L to indicate the heat level during induction heating cooking.
These heat power indicators 67L, 67R indicate the heat power level of the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL by emitting light (red). Nine levels of heat power are indicated by light, ranging from the minimum rated heat power (heat power level 1: 150 W) to the maximum rated heat power (heat power level 9: 3200 W).

The flame power display units 67L, 67R are composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) installed in the space below the right operating unit 40R and the left operating unit 40L. The color of the light emitted may be changed according to the magnitude of the flame power. In this embodiment 1, for example, the flame power levels 1 and 2 are configured as follows.
(1) (Minimum) Heat level 1: 1 red light, remaining 8 blue light. (2) Heat level 2: 2 red light, remaining 7 blue light. In addition, at the left end of the heat indicators 67L and 67R, there is a keep warm indicator 67H that displays an LED by illuminating it when the appliance is operated in the “keep warm mode” (see “display screen 3A” in Figure 54) in which the heated object is heated with a heat level lower than the minimum heat level 1.

The left display unit 31L displays the heat level value of the left heating unit 17HL as a number between 1 and 9. When the heat level is at minimum 1, "1" is displayed, and when the heat level is at maximum 9, "9" is displayed. The heat display on the left display unit 31L matches the heat level displayed by the heat display unit 67L, and is displayed at the same time.

The right display unit 31R also displays the heat level value of the right heating unit 17HR as numbers 1 to 9. The display conditions are exactly the same as those of the left display unit 31L.

As can be seen from FIG. 20, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction. Moreover, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in the left-right direction.

In this way, the three light-emitting display units 27L, 27M, 27R and the two heat display units 67L, 67R are aligned in a straight line in the left-right direction behind the three input operation units 40L, 40M, 40R, providing good operability and visibility. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, and the right display unit 31R are also aligned in a straight line in the horizontal direction, providing a design that provides good overall operability and visibility from the perspective of a user standing in front of the cooking appliance 1 to operate it.

20 and 21, reference numeral 68 denotes a heat source display unit disposed behind the integrated display unit 30.
Since multiple heat sources are used with the central operation unit 40M, the heat source display unit 68 displays the heat source that is actually operating with the light of an LED.

The heating source display unit 68 is made up of three display units. The leftmost display unit 68L indicates that the microwave heating source 189 is in use, and the word "range" is displayed in letters near the front, making it easy to see that microwave heating is being used.

The central display 68M is a display that indicates when "grill cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. "Grill" is written on the front side so that it is easy to tell that grill cooking is being performed.

The rightmost display 68R is a display that indicates when "oven cooking" is being performed in the heating chamber 113 using either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B.

Unlike grill cooking, "oven cooking" involves monitoring the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 and reflecting (feeding back) it in the power control of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B. These will be explained in more detail later.

20 and 21, reference numeral 69 denotes a high temperature display unit provided immediately behind the heat source display unit 68. This high temperature display unit 69 causes an LED light-emitting unit to emit light based on a command from the integrated control device MC, thereby indicating that the part to be monitored for temperature is at a high temperature.
The integrated control device MC issues a command to display a high temperature based on temperature information from a temperature detection circuit 93 which receives temperature detection signals from various temperature sensors and a heating chamber control unit 159, as will be described later.

The high temperature indicator 69 is not shown in FIG.
The high temperature display unit 69 has three temperature monitoring target parts, the left heating unit 17HL, the heating chamber 113, and the right heating unit 17HR, and displays the status of these temperature monitoring target parts individually. Therefore, for example, after induction heating cooking is performed using the left heating unit 17HL, the high temperature display unit 69 can notify the user that the area from the center to the left side of the top plate 15 corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL has become hot, and alert the user.

In order to shorten the period during which the high temperature display unit 69 displays a high temperature as much as possible, if the temperature of the top plate 15 is still high immediately after one induction heating cooking session is completed, for example, the IH control unit 90 continues to operate the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, and uses outside air to cool the internal space of the upper unit 100, i.e., the upper space 300A.

Returning to FIG.
Reference numeral 47 denotes a touch-type input key for issuing an Internet connection command to the integrated control device MC for wireless communication. Each time the input key 47 is pressed, a wireless connection is established with the home gateway 411, and information from the outside can be obtained via the home gateway 411.

46L and 46R are windows that transmit infrared signals, which act as command signals to start operation, to the ventilation device 405 (range hood 422) installed outside. An infrared transmitter 48 (see Figures 29 and 30) is installed below these windows. Note that in practice, these windows 46L and 46R are covered with an inconspicuous surface sheet so that they cannot be seen from above the top plate 15. Naturally, this sheet is made of a material that allows infrared signals to pass through.

When detailed inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is to be manually displayed temporarily on the integrated display unit 30 while cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM3 is being performed, the input key 47 can be pressed. Specific inventory information is automatically displayed in all or part of the first area 30L to the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 for a certain period of time. In this case, the inventory information may be, for example, the name of the frozen food (e.g., "rice" or "gyoza") and the amount (one portion, weight 200g, etc.).

When cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM3 is being performed, the cooking appliance 1 automatically acquires inventory information at a predetermined timing, regardless of the operation of the input keys 47. This will be explained later with reference to Figures 114 and 115.

In FIG. 19, 49 is a wireless communication unit (communication module) that includes an antenna (not shown) and a transmitting/receiving circuit (not shown) that receives radio waves from the outside and transmits radio waves or infrared signals to the outside. This wireless communication unit 49 is installed below the right end of the display board 41, with a small gap between it and the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16. The reason for maintaining this gap is that there is a concern that if it gets too close to the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16, the radio wave reception sensitivity will decrease.

When installed in the kitchen furniture 2, the top surface of the cooking device 1 is exposed above the kitchen furniture 2. Therefore, the input operation unit 40 can also be operated from above, and exhaust air from the exhaust port end 102E of the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15) can also be released above the kitchen furniture 2.

(Control Means of Upper Unit 100)
Next, the control means of the upper unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
29 to 31, some components are omitted, and the filter circuit of the filter circuit board 54 is not shown. Also, part of the configuration of the lower unit 200 is shown.

Figure 29 shows the control means of the upper unit 100 and the control means of the lower unit 200. In Figure 31, only the main control means in Figure 29 are extracted, and the transmission and reception of control command signals, power supply relationships, etc. are indicated by arrows.

In FIG. 30, 97 is a main power switch that is opened and closed by the user, and is connected to a 200V commercial power source 99 via a power cord and power plug (not shown). 91 is a power circuit to which electrical energy is supplied via the main power switch 97, and 92 is a DC power conversion unit that converts AC power from the commercial power source into DC. This power circuit 91 is mounted on the power circuit board 55 (see FIG. 25).

In Figures 29 and 30, MC is an integrated control device, and has the functions of a main controller or a host computer. This integrated control device MC is a control device that is mainly composed of a microcomputer. This integrated control device MC is supplied with a predetermined constant voltage current from the power supply circuit 91.

As described above, the integrated control device MC is located on the underside of the central operation board 32 (shown in a dashed frame in Figures 24 and 25). However, it may also be located on the back (lower) side of the operation board 41. In any case, the integrated control device MC is built into the upper unit 100 and is not provided in the lower unit 200.

The integrated control device MC is composed of four parts: an input section, an output section, a memory section, and a CPU (arithmetic control section), and the power control program for the three heating sources is stored (stored) in the memory section in advance. In addition to the memory section (ROM, RAM) of the microcomputer, it also has a built-in large-capacity storage device (main memory) MM that records abnormality monitoring information. The power control program for the three heating sources may be stored in this storage device MM.

90 is an IH control unit that is responsible for control during induction heating, and is composed mainly of a microcomputer. This IH control unit 90 pre-stores (stores) current control programs that correspond to various control menus during induction heating. It also has a built-in storage device (not shown) that records abnormality monitoring information.

In addition, some of the functions of the IH control unit 90 may be handled by a second IH control unit 90A (not shown) that is provided separately. For example, a microcomputer may be mounted on the inverter circuit board 80, and the microcomputer may be responsible for input and output control of the inverter circuits 81L and 81R.

During all cooking operations, including induction cooking and microwave cooking, the integrated control device MC centrally monitors for electrical abnormalities.

In FIG. 30, 96 is a clock circuit also known as a real-time clock, which is supplied with power from a dedicated power source (built-in battery) BT1 separate from the power circuit 91 connected to the main power switch 97, and is designed to operate over a long period of time. This may be, for example, a radio-controlled clock, which will always notify the current date and the exact time down to the second when requested by the integrated control device MC, and is set to the correct date and time during the manufacturing process of this cooking appliance 1.

Even if the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 is turned off and then turned on again, the time information of the clock circuit 96 is not affected, and the clock circuit 96 has the function of always transmitting the latest correct time to the integrated control device MC. Therefore, the abnormality monitoring information recorded in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC is always recorded and stored with the correct time at the same time. Note that the clock circuit 96 may be omitted, and the integrated control device MC may have the timekeeping function.

In FIG. 30, 72 is a power control unit (also called a "demand control unit"). This power control unit 72 has a function of analyzing a command signal for induction heating or microwave heating from the integrated control device MC, and monitoring the total power consumption of the cooking device 1 so that it does not exceed a specified value or an upper limit set individually by the user, and also has a function of automatically limiting the heat (power consumption) during induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating so that the total power consumption does not exceed a specified value or an arbitrary set value.

In general, a "demand control device" or "demand control equipment" refers to a device that controls the value of demand (electricity demand). It automatically checks the electricity usage and if it is about to exceed a set value, it will issue an alarm or other warning. If automatic shutdown of devices that can be shut off is set, the device itself will automatically shut off electrical devices that can be shut off as set. After that, it is known to automatically turn on the electrical device after a certain amount of time has passed, and it is said to be extremely effective in managing the contracted power with the power company in each household.

The power control unit 72 in this embodiment 1 is provided to provide the cooking appliance 1 itself with the power consumption suppression function described above. The power control unit 72 may be provided as a control function within the integrated control device MC without providing special hardware, and may be realized by incorporating a demand control program into the integrated control device MC from the beginning or adding it later.

The power control unit 72 of this embodiment 1 can set the maximum power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 to only one of the four levels as described above by operating the function setting input key 43KP. This setting can be set on the input operation unit 40 while viewing the numerical values of the above four levels displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when multiple specific keys in the input operation unit 40 are pressed simultaneously. Such a simple setting method is introduced, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6012780.

As explained in Figures 20 and 21, when the input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode", and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays a display that allows "peak cut value setting" and "HEMS registration setting", so that the above-mentioned total power consumption suppression function of the cooking appliance 1 can be easily added, or the function can be changed or canceled. When determining the "permission conditions" described later, the data on the upper limit value of the maximum power consumption (total power consumption) set in this power control unit 72 is used.

73 is a signal transmission unit provided to transmit various control signals between the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200. For example, this corresponds to a signal line and connector that can transmit signals via a wire. It may also be, for example, an infrared communication unit that can transmit and receive signals wirelessly. The signal transmission unit 73 is also provided between the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90.

The IH control unit 90 obtains temperature information from a temperature detection circuit 93 and monitors whether the main parts of the upper unit 100 are abnormally hot. For example, the central operation unit 40M is equipped with electronic and semiconductor components corresponding to the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3, 43MS, 43MT, etc., described above, but since these components are relatively sensitive to heat, they are monitored via the temperature detection circuit 93 to ensure that they do not exceed a predetermined temperature (for example, 60°C).

When the measured temperature exceeds the specified temperature, the IH control unit 90 determines that the device is in a "pre-abnormal state." Note that the pre-abnormal state is limited to when the detected temperature is in the range of 60°C to 65°C. If the temperature exceeds 65°C, the risk increases and the IH control unit 90 recognizes the device as being in a true abnormal state.

In this preliminary abnormality state, the induction heating operation does not immediately stop, but rather the power of the induction heating is controlled to be reduced. However, once the temperature exceeds 65°C, the IH control unit 90 determines that an abnormality has occurred and immediately stops the induction heating operation. Specifically, for example, if the IH coil being driven is the right-side IH coil 17R, the power supply to the inverter circuit 81R that supplies high-frequency power to that IH coil 17R is cut off. Then, the operation of the induction heating circuit 94R, which includes the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor, is stopped. Note that 94L is the induction heating circuit for the left-side IH coil 17L.

In the above-mentioned abnormal standby state, the heat of induction heating may be maintained while improving the situation by increasing the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 that cools the IH coil installation space CK of the upper unit 100. Furthermore, this may be used in combination with measures to reduce the heat of induction heating.

Then, (abnormality monitoring) information showing electrical and physical changes (for example, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30) in the main parts during induction heating at least during the period from such an abnormality preparatory state to an emergency stop is stored in the memory device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

In the above-mentioned abnormal standby state, the induction heating operation is not immediately stopped, and the blowing capacity of the motor 61M of the second cooling fan 61 is not increased (the number of rotations of the rotor blades is not changed), and the heating power of the IH coils 17L and 17R may be forcibly reduced to improve the condition.

The abnormality monitoring information stored in the memory device of the IH control unit 90 is acquired during the period from the time when a start command is received from the integrated control device MC until cooking is normally completed. Therefore, the "IH control menu" in the single cooking mode KM1 (for example, "boiling water," "stewing," "frying," etc. in the case of the left operation unit 40L) and information on the heat power of the induction heating are also recorded in chronological order. If an emergency stop occurs midway due to an abnormal condition, the abnormality monitoring information and information identifying the IH control menu up to that point will be saved in chronological order in the memory device 90R.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, in order to monitor the operation of the cooking appliance 1 over a wider range and acquire data, the integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information related to all heating and cooking states on the upper unit 100 and lower unit 200 sides after the main power switch 97 is turned ON. The integrated control device MC acquires monitoring information on the presence or absence of abnormalities from the heating chamber control unit 159 and microwave heating control unit 130 via the signal transmission unit 73.

The inverter circuit board 80 includes an inverter circuit 81R dedicated to the right-side IH coil 17R, and an inverter circuit 81L dedicated to the left-side IH coil 17L.

These two inverter circuits 81L and 81R are driven independently of each other by the IH control unit 90. When these inverter circuits are referred to collectively, the reference symbol "81" is used.

Details of the two inverter circuits 81L and 81R will be explained later with reference to Figure 33.

In Figures 29 and 30, 95 is a voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) that synthesizes electronically created voice. This voice synthesis device 95 notifies the user by voice from a speaker 95S each time an input operation is guided or an abnormality occurs. The voice synthesis device 95 is a part that constitutes the notification unit AN (see Figure 29).

The temperature detection circuit 93 is connected to at least seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9. Specifically, the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are used to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the ambient temperature of the IH coil installation space CK, the temperature of the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80, the temperature of the integrated display unit 30, etc. The temperature detection circuit 93 receives temperature detection information from each of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 and sends the temperature detection results to the IH control unit 90.

The temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 may be either non-contact type such as an infrared sensor or contact type such as a thermistor, and they may be used alone or in combination.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two, TS5 and TS6, are non-contact sensors such as infrared sensors. These two temperature sensors TS5 and TS6 are placed in the gaps at the center of the IH coils 17L and 17R, respectively, as shown in FIG. 19, and receive infrared signals from the direction of the top plate 15. In other words, this allows the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N, such as a metal pot or frying pan containing the food to be cooked, to be measured without contact.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, two, TS3 and TS4, use thermistors as contact sensors. These temperature sensors TS3 and TS4 are in direct contact with the underside of the top plate 15 or in contact with the underside of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive intermediary object. This allows the temperature of the top plate 15 to be measured.

Of the temperature sensors TS3 to TS9, one, temperature sensor TS7 (see Figure 19), uses a thermistor as a contact sensor and is installed on the top surface of the holder 50. It detects the ambient temperature of the integrated display unit 30 and the input operation unit 40. The other two temperature sensors TS8 and TS9 also use thermistors and are attached to the top surface of the heat sink 82 as described above.

The lower unit 200 is also equipped with at least two temperature sensors TS1 and TS2 to detect the temperature of the internal space of the lower unit 200, the details of which will be explained later. As mentioned above, a thermistor-type temperature sensor TS10 (see FIG. 15) is also installed to detect the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113.

In Figures 29 and 30, 62 is a cooling fan drive circuit that controls the drive power of the drive motors 60M, 61M for the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61. In other words, the air blowing capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 is changed in multiple stages independently of each other by the control of the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

In FIG. 30, 63 denotes a display section drive circuit, which can control the operations of the integrated display section 30, the left display section 31L, and the right display section 31R, and has the function of displaying necessary information.
The display unit drive circuit 63 may be configured by a dedicated microcomputer. The control program (software) that realizes the functions of the display unit drive circuit 63 may be incorporated in the integrated control device MC. The display unit drive circuit 63 is mounted on the upper surface of the operation board 41 (see FIGS. 24 and 25).

In FIG. 30, 84 is a vibration sensor that detects shaking during an earthquake. If it detects a seismic intensity (acceleration) greater than a certain level, it sends a vibration detection signal to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC receives the signal, determines that an earthquake has occurred, and immediately cuts off the power to all heating means in use.

In Figures 29 and 30, 49 is a wireless communication unit, also shown in Figure 19, which receives commands from the integrated control device MC to transmit information. It also receives commands from the integrated control device MC to obtain information from the outside. For example, it receives a "peak cut signal" that reduces the total power consumption.

In this embodiment 1, the abnormality detection unit EM includes an abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) that can detect various abnormalities that occur on the top plate 15, an abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) that can detect various abnormalities related to the electrical components inside the upper space 300A, and an abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) that can detect various abnormalities related to the electrical components inside the lower unit 300B.

The main abnormalities that can be detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) include, for example, three types of abnormalities, abnormality 1 to abnormality 3, as follows.
Abnormality 1: When the water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 boils and spills over, an abnormality is detected.
Abnormality 2: During induction heating, the bottom surface of the object to be heated (such as a metal pot) N is deformed (the degree of curvature increases) and it is determined that the object is placed in an abnormal state (determined by the IH control unit 90).
Abnormality 3: During induction heating, the object to be heated (such as a metal pot) is moved and not immediately returned to the original heating part (determined by the IH control unit 90).

In addition, there are also the following abnormalities 4 and 5.
Abnormality 4: The rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command content (handled by the abnormality detection unit 2).
Abnormality 5: The rotation speeds of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 do not match the control command content (handled by the abnormality detection unit 3).

The function of the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) is, for example, performed by a temperature detection circuit 93 (see FIG. 30) that acquires temperature information from temperature sensors TS8 and TS9, and a temperature determination circuit (not shown) included in the IH control unit 90. In addition, an abnormality (abnormality 4) related to the rotation of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 can be detected by the cooling fan drive circuit 62.

The function of the abnormality detection unit 3 (EM3) is performed, for example, by a microwave heating control unit 130 (see Figure 30) that acquires temperature information from a temperature sensor TS1, and a heating chamber control unit 159 (see Figure 30) that acquires temperature information from a temperature sensor TS10 (see Figure 15).
This also applies to the case where the rotation speed of the third cooling fan 128 does not match the control command from the heating chamber control unit 159 .

Furthermore, the anomaly detection unit 3 (EM3) is managed by the microwave heating control unit 130 and detects malfunctions in the rotation or rotation of the motor 126 that rotates or turns the antenna 125 (see Figure 15).

In the example shown in Figures 29 and 30, the abnormality detection unit EM is configured as a separate hardware component from the IH control unit 90, but it may also be configured as part of the software that constitutes the control program of the IH control unit 90 or the integrated control device MC.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) employed in this embodiment 1 is equipped with a detection electrode (not shown) disposed on the underside of the top plate 15 in order to respond to the above-mentioned "abnormality 1," and a judgment circuit (not shown) that monitors changes in the current flowing through this detection electrode and determines whether hot water, cooking liquid, etc., has boiled and overflowed from the heated object N during induction heating.

When the abnormality detection unit EM (EM1) detects an abnormality, it sends an abnormality detection signal to the integrated control unit MC. The integrated control unit MC then issues an emergency stop command signal to the IH control unit 90 to bring the heating units 17HL and 17HR, which are in heating operation, to an emergency stop. Note that even in this case, the two cooling fans 60 and 61 continue to operate.

In addition, if microwave heating or oven cooking (including the combined cooking mode and the linked cooking mode) is being performed in the heating chamber 113 at the time when only the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) of the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality in the upper unit 100, the cooling fans 128, 129 of the lower unit 200 continue to operate without being affected. These will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 45 to 47.

The abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) for detecting various abnormalities occurring on the top plate 15 is as described above.

In this embodiment 1, a temperature detection circuit 93 serves as an additional abnormality detection unit, and in addition to measuring the temperature of the heat sink 82 itself, the ambient temperature in the vicinity of the integrated LCD display unit 30 is repeatedly measured during induction heating operation and for a certain period of time thereafter (abnormality detection unit 2).
Therefore, the IH control unit 90 that has acquired the measurement data of this temperature detection circuit 93 monitors the temperature around the integrated display unit 30 so that it does not exceed a regulated temperature value. Therefore, the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) also includes this temperature detection circuit 93 and the IH control unit 90.

Note that rotation abnormalities of the four cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are covered by the anomaly detection unit 2 (EM2) and the anomaly detection unit 3 (EM3). For example, for the first cooling fan 60, the cooling fan drive circuit 62 measures the input current for rotation drive with a current sensor and performs frequency analysis of the current to detect rotation abnormalities. When an abnormality is detected, unlike in the case of anomaly 1, the rotation drive is immediately stopped and the cooling fan 60 is stopped (anomaly detection unit 2).

Regarding "Abnormality 4," in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1, the abnormality detection unit 2 (EM2) has the function of detecting abnormalities in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 as described above. When the abnormality detection unit EM2 (EM2) detects an abnormality in one or both of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 while the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 is being performed, the integrated control device MC cancels the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3, stops the driving of all heating means that are in heating operation, and immediately stops the operation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61.

Therefore, if an abnormality in the rotation of the upper cooling fans 60, 61 is detected, all heating sources automatically stop operating, ensuring high safety. In addition, since the upper cooling fans 60, 61 are stopped immediately, if the upper cooling fans 60, 61 fail, the situation can be prevented from becoming serious.

(Lower unit 200)
Next, the lower unit 200 will be described.
12 to 17, reference numeral 101 denotes a lower case (lower housing) that constitutes the outer shell of the main body 110 of the lower unit 200. This lower case 101 is formed by pressing a single thin metal plate such as a zinc steel plate, or by joining a plurality of thin metal plates with spot welding, screws, etc. In the first embodiment, as described below, it is composed of three thin metal plates.

101H is a body portion that constitutes the three surfaces (vertical surfaces) of the rear and left and right portions of the lower case 101, and 101U is a flat bottom plate that completely closes the bottom opening of the body portion 101U. 101C is an inclined portion, which is a wall surface that inclines forward as it goes downwards so that the cooking appliance 1 does not hit the installation opening 2A of the kitchen furniture 2 when it is installed in the kitchen furniture 2.

101F is a front plate that constitutes the front surface of the lower case 101, and is a single flat plate as a whole. When the door 114 is closed, the rear surface of the door 114 comes into close contact with the front surface of the front plate 101F, preventing microwaves from leaking from the gap between the front plate 101F and the door 114. 101B is a rear wall surface (rear vertical wall) that rises vertically from the upper end of the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101.

The lower unit 200 has two independent heating sources. One of them is a microwave heating source 189 for the microwave heating device 120. The other is an oven heating source 188 for the oven heating device 140.

The oven heating source 188 heats the heating chamber (oven compartment) 113 from the outside of its wall, but it may also be located inside the heating chamber 113 and directly heat the food being cooked. In the following explanation, unless there is a particular contradiction, it is assumed that the "microwave heating source 189" does not include the "inverter circuit board 121" described below.

12, 13 and 15 show the main parts of a microwave heating device 120.
Starting from the front, the main components are installed in the following order:
At the frontmost side, an inverter circuit board 121 (see FIG. 14) on which an inverter circuit 121A (see FIG. 30) is mounted is disposed.

Behind this inverter circuit board 121 are arranged a magnetron 122, which serves as a source of microwaves, and a waveguide 123 that surrounds the oscillator 122A of the magnetron 122.

Furthermore, an antenna case 124 connected to the waveguide 123 and an antenna 125 inside the antenna case are disposed behind the waveguide 123 .
A motor 126 is disposed behind the antenna case 124 for rotating or turning the antenna 125 during microwave heating (see FIG. 15).

In FIG. 13, 127 is a power supply circuit board that supplies microwave heating output and power to the magnetron 122, and is equipped with a power supply circuit section 120P (not shown) that receives commercial power from the filter circuit 54, and a microwave heating control section 130, which will be described later.

In Figures 12 and 13, 128 is a third cooling fan (lower cooling fan A), which is disposed directly below the box-shaped case A150 that houses the inverter circuit board 121. The entire bottom surface of case A150 is open. In other words, it is a box-shaped fan with no bottom surface.

129 is the fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan B), and is placed directly below the box-shaped case B151 on which the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is placed. The heat dissipation section 122H has several parallel heat dissipation fins formed therein so that the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 can pass through. The case B151 is box-shaped with no bottom and the entire bottom surface is open.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are sometimes collectively referred to as the "lower cooling fans." This is because these two cooling fans 128, 199 have the function of cooling the inside of the lower space 300B.

The case A150 constitutes one of the inlet ends of the lower air passage UH.
As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the case A150 has a vertical portion 308 extending vertically away from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 at a position directly above the intake port 152F.
An inverter circuit board 121 for the microwave heating source 188 is housed vertically within the vertical portion 308 .

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are, for example, axial fans. They are supported on the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 so that the rotation axis at the center of the rotor blades is vertical (perpendicular).

As mentioned above, the entire bottom surface of case A150 and case B151 is open, and the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are arranged so that they lie on the inside of the opening.

In FIG. 12, two rows of air deflectors 199 are provided inside the case A150, and are formed integrally or separately on the inside of the case A150. The air deflectors 199 are installed to efficiently direct the cooling air from the third cooling fan 128 to the inverter circuit board 121 and two communication ports 138A and 138B, which will be described later.

In Figures 12 and 13, 152F is a front air intake port formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This air intake port is composed of many small circular through-holes, or rectangular or elliptical through-holes. This air intake port 152F is for the third cooling fan 128.

In Figures 12 and 13, 152B is an intake port on the rear side, and is formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. This intake port is composed of many small circular through-holes, or rectangular or elliptical through-holes. This intake port 152B is for the fourth cooling fan 129.

As shown in FIG. 14, the ventilation hole (first air intake) 164 that introduces outside air for cooling the induction heating source 9 into the interior of the upper unit 100 and the second air intakes 152B and 152F that introduce outside air for cooling the microwave heating source 189 into the interior of the lower unit 200 are located on opposite sides of the heating chamber 113.

In other words, when the cooking appliance 1 is viewed from the front side, the second air intakes 152B and 152F are located on the right side of the heating chamber 113, while the vent hole (first air intake) 164 and the vent hole 64 are located on the left side.

In FIG. 13, 153 is a duct installed on the upper part of the heat dissipation section 122H, which guides the cooling air RF6 (cooling air B) from the fourth cooling fan 129 that has passed through the heat dissipation section 122H downstream as shown in FIG. 16.

In Figures 12 and 13, 154 is case C, which houses the power supply circuit board 127 and the microwave heating control unit 130 in a sealed state. This case C 154 is made of a plastic material with excellent electrical insulation properties.

The case C154 is composed of a rear cover 154A and a container- or box-shaped main body 154B at the front, stacked together. The cover 154A covers a large opening formed on the front side of the main body 154B from the rear.

Case C154 has a main body 154B at the front side, on which a power supply circuit board 127 and a board (not shown) on which a microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted are attached. During maintenance and inspection, this lid 154A can be opened to allow various inspections and repairs of the power supply circuit board 127 and microwave heating control unit 130 inside.

This case C154 is installed as far away as possible from the back of the heating chamber 113 so as not to be affected by heat from the heating chamber 113. It is also installed away from the bottom plate 101U, so that electrical insulation is not impaired even if liquid such as water or cooking liquid seeps into the inside of the lower case 101 from the upper unit 100 side.

As described with reference to FIG. 12, the cavity 104 is the space where the distance between the bottom wall 16S of the upper case 16 and the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101 is the largest.
In the cavity 104, a waveguide 123 constituting part of the microwave heating device 120 is arranged long in the left-right direction behind the heating chamber 113, and behind the waveguide 123, the case C154 is arranged long in the left-right direction.

As explained in FIG. 12, the front horizontal wall 101T made of a metal plate provided on the front side of the lower case 101 is formed by bending the upper end of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101 backward. The support bracket 198 on the lower case 101 side is fixed to the upper case 16.

In Figs. 12 and 13, reference numeral 131 denotes a door opening/closing detection mechanism provided as a measure against leakage of radio waves during microwave heating.
In order to ensure the safety of a microwave heating device, it is legally required to install a door opening/closing detection mechanism 131. Representative door opening/closing detection mechanisms 131 of this type are known from patent documents such as Japanese Patent No. 4372099 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-214147.

According to the above-mentioned patent document, it is proposed that the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 incorporates three types of switches: a latch switch, a door switch, and a monitor switch, and that these switches are linked to the opening and closing of the door to detect opening and closing with a time lag.

In addition, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-214147 proposes using a first interlock switch and a second interlock switch to open and close the power supply to the inverter circuit, and also proposes providing a monitor switch to turn off the fuse inserted in the power supply circuit when the first interlock switch experiences a short circuit failure.

Figures 12 and 13 show the main parts of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 used in the first embodiment. In these figures, 132A is a latch switch, and 132B is a door switch. A monitor switch 133 (not shown) is also provided to cut off the power supply to the inverter circuit 121A mounted on the inverter circuit board 121 if either or both of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B are not opened due to an abnormality.

The latch switch 132A is pressed by a protruding pin 134 fixed to the door 114 side, and the built-in contacts are opened and closed. The door switch 132B is pressed by a protruding pin 135 fixed to the door 114 side, and the built-in contacts are opened and closed.

In FIG. 12, reference numeral 136A denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the latch switch 132A, and is biased toward the door by a compression spring (not shown) so that it always returns to the door side.
Reference numeral 136B denotes an interlocking rod that transmits the movement of the door 114 to the door switch 132B, and is biased in the door direction by a compression spring so as to always return to the door side.

In FIG. 12, 137 is a support plate to which the latch switch 132A, door switch 132B, monitor switch 133 (not shown), interlocking rods 136A, 136B, etc. are attached together. This support plate 137 is fixed to the lower case 101 with multiple screws. The door open/close detection mechanism 131 is configured around the various switches thus mounted on the support plate 137.

If there is variation in the mounting position of the latch switch 132A or the door switch 132B during the manufacturing process, there is a concern that the timing at which each switch is operated may deviate from the specified value. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, a closure detection unit 139 (see FIG. 30) for the door 114, which will be described later, is attached to the support plate 137, and the entire support plate 137 is made removable. Specifically, as described above, the lower case 101 is firmly fixed to the support plate 137 with multiple screws. During manufacturing or after-sales service, the operation of the closure detection unit 139 can be checked, adjusted, replaced, etc.

In Figures 12 and 14, 138A is a communication port formed in the upper part of the case A150 that houses the inverter circuit board 121, and 138B is a communication port formed in the upper and lower middle parts of the case A150.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138A guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to a space 141, which will be described later.
The cooling air RF5 may be referred to as "cooling air A" in the following description.

As shown in FIG. 14, the communication port 138B guides a portion of the cooling air RF5 from the third cooling fan 128 to the space 142 described below, and is used to cool the infrared temperature sensor 160 described below.

The temperature sensor 160 is mainly composed of a hollow sensor case (not shown), a sensor board (not shown) housed inside the sensor case, one or more infrared detection elements (not shown) mounted on the surface of the sensor board, and a lens (not shown) attached and fixed to the sensor case facing the infrared detection elements.

The temperature sensors 160 may be provided at multiple locations in the heating chamber 113 to enable temperature detection over a wide range, or the temperature sensor 160 may not be fixed in direction but may be automatically swung within a certain angle range to detect temperatures over a wide angle.

In FIG. 14, 161 is a detection window through which the temperature sensor 160 faces, and a gap may be formed between the outer circumferential surface of the temperature sensor 160 to allow cooling air to pass through. In the first embodiment, a gap of about several mm is formed.

In Figures 14 and 15, 162 is a cooking dish made of porcelain or heat-resistant plastic. This cooking dish 162 is formed with external dimensions that allow it to be inserted and removed from the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 14, HV is the effective height dimension from the top surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113. In FIG. 15, HX is the maximum height dimension from the top surface of the cooking dish 162 to the ceiling surface of the recess 113T formed in the center of the heating chamber 113.

In this embodiment 1, the effective height dimension HV is 94 mm, and the maximum height dimension HX is 100 mm. This is just one example, and the present disclosure is not limited to this dimensional configuration.

In FIG. 14, WH is the inner width dimension of the heating chamber 113. The heating chamber 113 is formed with this inner width dimension up to the front opening 113A, so it can also be said to be the opening dimension that determines whether the food to be cooked or cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This inner width dimension WH is 310 mm.

In Figure 15, WB is the depth dimension of the heating chamber 113. Like the width dimension WH (see Figure 14), this dimension determines whether the food to be cooked, the cooking dish 162, and cooking utensils such as a frying pan can be inserted. This depth dimension WB is approximately 310 mm.

The oven heating source 188 includes a heater 163 .
The heater 163 is an electric radiation type heater that heats the heating chamber 113 from the outside, and is, for example, a sheath heater, or a mica heater in which a heater wire is wound around the entire support plate made of thin mica.

The heater 163 is composed of two heaters, an upper heater 163 A and a lower heater 163 B. The power supply to these two heaters 163 A and 163 B is controlled independently of each other.
Reference numeral 163A denotes an upper heater fixed in close contact with or adjacent to the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and reference numeral 163B denotes a lower heater fixed in close contact with or adjacent to the bottom surface of the heating chamber 113.

The upper heater 163A can select multiple levels of heat power within a range from a maximum heat power of 1000 W to a minimum heat power of 50 W. The lower heater can also select multiple levels of heat power within a range from a maximum heat power of 1000 W to a minimum heat power of 50 W.

In FIG. 14, reference numeral 166R denotes a right-side partition plate that is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5R between itself and the right-side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is made of a thin metal plate.
Reference numeral 166L denotes a left partition plate that is vertically installed so as to form a gap GP5L between itself and the left wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is made of a thin metal plate.
A heat insulating material (not shown) is inserted into the gaps GP5L and GP5R on the left and right sides of the heating chamber 113 to suppress heat conduction (heat radiation) from the heating chamber 113.

An upper heat shield plate 167 covers the entire upper part of the upper heater 163A and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.
GP6 is a gap formed between the upper heat shield plate 167 and the upper heater 163A, and has a size of about several mm to 10 mm. This gap GP6 is an enclosed space so that there is no air circulation with the outside. The peripheral portion of the upper heat shield plate 167 is fixed in intimate contact with the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, with the upper edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched therebetween.

168 is a lower heat shield plate having a vertical cross-sectional shape that is vertically symmetrical to the upper heat shield plate 167. This lower heat shield plate covers the entire lower part of the lower heater 163B and is made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic.

GP7 is a gap formed between the lower heat shield 168 and the lower heater 163B, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap is an enclosed space so that air does not circulate with the outside. The peripheral edge of the lower heat shield 168 is fixed in intimate contact with the bottom wall surface of the heating chamber 113, with the lower edges of the right partition plate 166R and the left partition plate 166L sandwiched between them.

169 is an upper case that is placed on the periphery of the upper heat shield plate 167 so as to cover the entire upper part of the upper heat shield plate 167. 170 is a lower case that is placed on the periphery of the lower heat shield plate 168 so as to cover the entire lower part of the lower heat shield plate 168.

As shown in FIG. 14, the upper case 169 and the lower case 170 have a vertically symmetrical cross-sectional shape, and are made of a thin metal plate or heat-resistant plastic. GP8 is a gap formed between the upper case 169 and the upper heat shield plate 167, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap GP8 is an enclosed space so that there is no air circulation between it and the outside.

GP9 is a gap formed between the lower case 170 and the lower heat shield 168, and is several mm to 10 mm in size. This gap GP9 is also an enclosed space so that no air flows through it.

A sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175A (not shown) is placed in the gap GP6. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175B (not shown) is placed in the gap GP8.

A sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175C (not shown) is placed in the gap GP7. Similarly, a sheet or plate-shaped insulating material 175D (not shown) is placed in GP9. The insulating performance is further improved if each of these insulating materials 175A to 175D is made in a form of multiple layers stacked on top of each other rather than a single layer structure. The planar size (length and width dimensions) of each of the insulating materials 175A to 175D is at least larger than the installation range of the upper heater 163 and the lower heater 163B, respectively.

In FIG. 14, 171 is a partition plate that defines a passage 172 through which cooling air RF5 (cooling air A) flows above the upper case 169. A communication port 173 is opened at the top of the rear wall surface of the partition plate 171, and the inlet end of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 173.

In FIG. 15, 174 is a communication port formed in the rear of the ceiling surface of the heating chamber 113, and the inlet of the exhaust duct 102 is connected to this communication port 174. 102E is the terminal portion that is the final outlet for the cooling air.

As shown in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 has two independent internal passages 102A, 102B at the top and bottom, of which the cooling air RF5 flows through the upper internal passage 102A after cooling the inverter circuit board 121.
Further, cooling air RF6 (cooling air B) which has been introduced into the heating chamber 113 and has been heated flows through the other internal passage 102B.

102S is a separator (partition plate) that divides the inside of the exhaust duct 102 into two, upper and lower. The two internal passages 102A and 102B are formed with this separator 102S as the boundary.

As will be explained in detail in Figure 32, the exhaust duct 102 is the part where the internal passage (internal route) 102A that passes through the outside of the heating chamber 113 and the internal passage (internal route) 102B that passes through the inside of the heating chamber 113 join together.

The wind speed of the cooling air RF5 increases due to the exhaust port of the cooling air RF5 (cooling air A) having a narrowed opening area of the air passage. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 is attracted by the cooling air RF5 near the exhaust port. Due to this action, the gas inside the heating chamber 113 is sucked into the internal passage 102B.
As a result, both of the two cooling air currents RF5 and RF6 are efficiently exhausted to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 from the exhaust port 20. Note that instead of adopting such an induction structure, a method in which the cooling air currents are joined at an upstream stage before entering the exhaust duct 102 may be adopted.

In FIG. 15, 180 is a large power supply port formed on the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113, and 181 is a cover that closes this power supply port 180 from the outside, and is formed in a plate shape from heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass that is microwave-transmitting. Cover 181 is fixed to the outside of the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B.

The cover 181 is in close contact with the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B. The antenna case 124 is fixed to the rear wall 113B of the heating chamber 113 so as to cover the entire rear side of the cover 181. The cover 181 is inserted inside the front opening of the antenna case 124 as shown in FIG. 15.

In FIG. 15, 123 is a waveguide connected to the rear side of the cover 181. The motor 126 for driving the antenna is fixed to the rear side of the waveguide 123 through a heat-resistant sealant 184.

126A is the rotating shaft of the antenna drive motor 126, and is installed horizontally facing the front-to-rear direction. The antenna 125 is fixed to the free end (front end) of the rotating shaft 126A. The rotating shaft 126A is made of plastic or ceramic material, but only a certain area from the antenna 125 side may be made of metal, and the area from there to the antenna drive motor 126 may be made of a material with high heat resistance and insulation, such as plastic or ceramic.

In FIG. 15, 185 is a radio wave sealing chamber formed with a predetermined dimension around the rotating shaft 126A. This radio wave sealing chamber has a so-called choke chamber structure. In order to more effectively prevent microwave leakage, a radio wave absorber (not shown) may be placed closer to the antenna drive motor 126 than the choke structure to prevent microwave leakage from around the rotating shaft 126A. Note that the choke structure in a microwave heating device is described in Japanese patent documents such as JP 2011-174669 A, JP 2010-255978 A, and JP 63-172828 A (combined use of a quarter-wave choke chamber and a radio wave absorber), so a detailed description will be omitted.

In Figure 15, LA indicates the dimension from the rear wall (rear wall surface) 113B of the heating chamber 113 to the very end of the antenna drive motor 126. Hereinafter, this dimension will be referred to as the "protruding dimension." It is desirable to reduce this protruding dimension LA, but in reality, as mentioned above, the dimensions of the antenna case 124 and radio wave sealing chamber 185 are also necessary, and there is a limit to how small the external dimensions of the antenna drive motor 126 can be reduced. This protruding dimension LA is 70 mm.

15, GP10 is the gap between the back surface of the antenna drive motor 126 and the inclined portion 101C of the lower case 101, and is 69 mm at the upper end of the motor 126, while the gap between the lower end and the lower case 101C is about 53 mm. It is dimensionally impossible to place the case C154 in this gap GP10. Therefore, in this embodiment 1, the case C154 is positioned shifted to the right from directly behind (behind) the antenna drive motor 126.
This makes it possible to accommodate the microwave heating device 120 in the narrow space behind the heating chamber 113 .

(Door 114)
Next, the internal structure of the door 114 will be described.
In Fig. 15, reference numeral 190 denotes a metal or plastic frame constituting the outer shell of the door 114, and is formed in a picture frame shape when viewed from the front side. Reference numeral 192 denotes an inner frame formed from a metal plate. An opening that serves as an observation window 192W is formed in the center of the inner frame 192.

191 is a cover whose outer periphery is fixed between the inner frame 192 and the frame 190 so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 192, and is made of transparent heat-resistant plastic or glass so that the heating chamber 113 can be seen through.

193 is an inner seal frame with numerous small holes in the area corresponding to the observation window 192W, the size of which does not allow microwaves to pass through. This inner seal frame is entirely formed by pressing a thin metal plate, and a choke chamber 194 with an entrance (slit) on the heating chamber 113 side is formed on the outer periphery.

195 is a seal plate made of a thin metal plate. The outer peripheral edge of this seal plate 195 is bent continuously toward the inner seal frame 193 as shown in FIG. 15. The choke chamber 194 is a space surrounded by the outer peripheral edge of this seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193.

When the door 114 is completely closed, both the outer periphery of the seal plate 195 and the inner seal frame 193 are in contact with the surface of the front plate 101F of the lower case 101. Therefore, microwaves supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 113 do not leak out from the door 114 and the opening 113A on the front surface of the heating chamber 113.

196 is a transparent seal plate provided on the inside of the portion of the inner frame 192 that corresponds to the viewing window 192W, and is made of heat-resistant glass. 197 is a metal upper shielding plate that runs along the top surface of the door 114 and has a width dimension at least equal to the width of the door 114. This upper shielding plate 197 is provided in a eaves shape close to the top surface of the door 114, and is fixed to the lower case 101 with fasteners such as metal screws so that it is electrically connected to the lower case 101.

The door 114 has its lower portion supported by a hinge 176 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) on the lower case 101, so that the door 114 can be opened to a horizontal position by pulling the handle 115 toward oneself.
There is a concern that in the initial stage of such opening, a gap may momentarily form at the overlapping portion between door 114 and lower case 101, causing a portion of the microwaves to leak out. However, in this embodiment 1, the upper shielding plate 197 can suppress such unnecessary leakage of microwaves above door 114.

As explained in FIG. 5, it is recommended that the height dimension C1 of the front slanting portion 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 be 40 mm or less. In view of this, in FIGS. 16 and 17, H10 is the height dimension from the bottom wall surface 16S of the upper case 16 to the underside of the flange 16A. In this embodiment 1, it is set to 40 mm.

As described above, the height dimension C1 of the front downward section 2F of the kitchen furniture 2 and the height dimension H10 below the flange 16A of the upper case 16 are the same (40 mm), so when installed on the kitchen furniture 2, the upper case 16 does not protrude below the front downward section 2F. This makes the space below the upper case 16 larger than before, which is also advantageous when installing the lower case 101, as described below.

17, reference numeral 201 denotes an inlet formed in the front part of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113, and is formed of a number of through holes having a diameter such that microwaves do not leak. The reason for providing this inlet 201 in the front part of the right side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 is to supply a portion of the cooling air RF6 (cooling air B) to the vicinity of the inside of the door 114 and suppress fogging of the observation window 192W of the door 114.
The cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 is guided to the inlet 201 by the gap GP5R.

The temperature sensor 160 is located upstream of the inlet 201 in the flow of the cooling air RF6, and at the temperature sensor 160, a portion of the cooling air RF6 is blown into the heating chamber 113, so the amount of cooling air RF6 that reaches the inlet 201 is small. However, the purpose of introducing air from this inlet 201 is to "prevent fogging" of the seal plate 196 on the inside of the door 114, and a small amount of air does not pose any problems. It is not necessary to supply air from a narrow gap around the temperature sensor 160.

(Control Means of Lower Unit 200)
Next, the various control means in the lower unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to the block diagram shown in FIG.
In Figure 30, the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the power supplied to the inverter circuit 121A of the inverter circuit board 121, the magnetron 122, the antenna drive motor 126, and the two cooling fans 128, 129, and controls the start and stop of their operation, their operating conditions, etc.

The power supply circuit of this microwave heating control unit 130 is prepared separately from the power supply circuit 91 mounted on the power supply circuit board 55, and is a dedicated circuit for the microwave heating device 120. Note that power may be supplied from the power supply circuit 91.

The power supply circuit of the microwave heating control unit 130 is mounted on a power supply circuit board 127 (see FIG. 12). Various electrical components (diodes, etc.) that convert AC power to DC are mounted on this power supply circuit board 127 and are housed in a sealed state in case C154.

When the microwave heating control unit 130 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in response to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the microwave heating device 120, and has the function of sending a command signal to the inverter circuit 121A to reduce the output of the magnetron 122.

The microwave heating control unit 130 is equipped with a temperature sensor TS1 that detects the temperature of the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122. If the temperature of the heat dissipation unit 122H of the magnetron 122 is higher than a specified value even after microwave cooking is completed, a command signal is sent to the fourth cooling fan 129 to continue operating the fourth cooling fan 129 until the temperature drops. Note that the cooling fan drive circuits for the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not shown in Figure 30.

139 is a closure detection unit for the door 114. This closure detection unit 139 electrically detects the open/closed status of one or more of the latch switch 132A, the second door switch 132B (see FIG. 12), and the monitor switch 133 (not shown) by the current or open/close signal flowing through each circuit. In other words, it is a detection unit that corresponds to the operation of the door open/close detection mechanism 131 described above.

The circuit board that constitutes this closure detection unit 139 is attached to the support plate 137, so it can be inspected by removing the support plate 137 or by measuring it while it is installed to check whether it is functioning properly (see Figure 12).

158 is a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, and is composed of the temperature sensor 160 and a circuit (not shown) that analyzes the measurement signal from this temperature sensor and converts it into temperature information.

The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supplied to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and controls the start and stop of their operation, as well as their operating conditions (heating power, i.e., heat generation amount). The control circuit for this heating chamber control unit 159 is implemented on the power supply circuit board 127 (see Figure 13).

When the heating chamber control unit 159 receives a command signal from the power control unit 72, it operates in response to the command signal to reduce the total power consumption of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, and has the function of transmitting a command signal to reduce the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163. Note that in order to reduce the output of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163, the current flow rate per unit time is changed to change the effective heating power.

(Drive circuit for induction heating source 9)
Next, a description will be given of the configuration of the drive circuits for the IH coils 17L and 17R of the cooking device 1. For the sake of simplicity, a description will be given of an example of a circuit showing only one IH coil 17R in FIG.

In the cooking appliance 1, high-frequency power is supplied to each of the IH coils 17L and 17R by the drive circuit 74, whereby an induction heating operation is performed.
Each IH coil is provided with a drive circuit 74. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the drive circuit 74 for the right IH coil 17R. The drive circuit for the left IH coil 17L may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 33, the drive circuit 74 includes a DC power supply circuit 75, an inverter circuit 81R, a resonant capacitor 76, an input current detection unit 77a, and an output current detection unit 77b.
The current detection data from the input current detection unit 77 a and the output current detection unit 77 b are sent to the IH control unit 90 .

The input current detection unit 77a detects the current input from the AC power supply 99 to the DC power supply circuit 22, i.e., the current input to the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal indicating the detected value, i.e., the input current value, to the IH control unit 90. 99 is a commercial AC power supply.

The DC power supply circuit 75 includes a diode bridge 78a, a reactor 78b, and a smoothing capacitor 78c, and converts the AC voltage input from the AC power supply 99 into a DC voltage, which is then output to the inverter circuit 81R.

The inverter circuit 81R is a so-called half-bridge type inverter in which IGBTs 79a and 79b serving as the switching elements 83 are connected in series to the output of the DC power supply circuit 75. In the inverter circuit 81R, diodes 79c and 79d serving as flywheel diodes are connected in parallel with the IGBTs 79a and 79b, respectively.
The inverter 81R converts the DC power output from the DC power supply circuit 75 into AC power with a high frequency of about 20 kHz to 80 kHz, so-called high frequency power, and supplies it to a resonant circuit consisting of the IH coil 17R and the resonant capacitor .

The resonant circuit including the resonant capacitor 76 has a resonant frequency that corresponds to the inductance of the IH coil 17R and the capacitance of the resonant capacitor 76, etc.

With this configuration, a high-frequency current of several tens of amperes flows through the IH coil 17R, and the high-frequency magnetic flux generated by the flowing high-frequency current inductively heats the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 directly above the IH coil 17R.

IGBTs 79a and 79b are made of, for example, silicon-based semiconductors, but may also be made of wide band gap semiconductors such as silicon carbide or gallium nitride-based materials.

The power control switching element 83 described with reference to FIG. 12 corresponds to the IGBTs 79a and 79b in FIG.
By using a wide band gap semiconductor for this IGBT, the current loss as a switching element can be reduced. Also, even if the switching frequency, i.e., the drive frequency, is set to a high frequency, i.e., even if switching is performed at high speed, heat dissipation is improved. Therefore, the heat dissipation fins of the heat sink 82 to which the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a and 79b are attached can be made small, and the drive unit can be made small and inexpensive.

The output current detection unit 77b is connected to a resonant circuit consisting of the IH coil 17R and a resonant capacitor 76. The output current detection unit 77b detects, for example, the current flowing through the IH coil 17R, i.e., the current output from the drive circuit 74, and outputs a voltage signal corresponding to the detected value to the IH control unit 90. Although a half-bridge type inverter has been described in this configuration, the circuit that drives the IH coil 17R may also be a full-bridge type inverter. Also, although the circuit described in FIG. 33 is a current resonant type, a voltage resonant type may also be adopted.

As explained in FIG. 19, the wireless communication unit 49 is a wireless communication means for wirelessly communicating with the home gateway 411, which comprehensively manages the power usage and operation information of the home appliances 400 in the home, and can transmit and receive wireless signals.

The wireless communication unit 49 is connected to the integrated control device MC via a communication wiring. However, the longer the wiring, the more susceptible it is to noise. Therefore, it is desirable to place the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC close to each other and to shorten the wiring connecting the wireless communication unit 49 and the integrated control device MC.

In consideration of the effects of noise as described above, in this embodiment 1, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the input operation unit 40. Specifically, the wireless communication unit 49 is installed at the right end of the operation board 41. The integrated control device MC is also installed in the center of the input operation unit 40 (see FIG. 19).

(Cooling air duct)
Next, the configuration of the cooling air passage will be described.
12, the inside of the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is partitioned into two spaces, an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the bottom surface 16S by the bottom surface 16S of the metal upper case 16. In other words, the bottom surface 16S functions as a "partition wall" 16S, partitioning the inside of the main case HC into two spaces, an upper space and an lower space.

The upper air passage AH, which guides cooling air to the IH coils 17L and 17R housed in the upper space 300A and the inverter circuit board 80 for the IH coils, introduces outside air from outside the lower case 101 through the ventilation hole 64 that penetrates the partition wall 16S.

Meanwhile, a lower air passage UH that guides cooling air for the microwave heating device 120 is formed in the lower space 300B. The heat dissipation section 122H of the microwave heating device 120 is disposed in the lower air passage UH. This heat dissipation section 122H is cooled by outside air introduced from a second air intake 152B formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101. The inverter circuit board 121 of the microwave heating device 120 is cooled by outside air introduced from a first air intake 152F formed at the right end of the bottom surface of the lower case 101.

The cooling air that flows through the upper air passage AH and the cooling air that flows through the lower air passage UH do not merge along the way. The cooling air inside the upper unit 100 is exhausted into the gap GP1 behind the partition plate 52, and is released to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 through the exhaust port 20.

On the other hand, the cooling air from the lower unit 200 passes through the exhaust duct 102 that extends vertically within the same gap GP1, and is finally released to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 through the exhaust port 20.

Next, the entire path of the cooling air passage will be described with reference to FIG.
As is clear from FIG. 32, air outside the cooking appliance 1 (outside air) passes through the inside of the main body case HC of the cooking appliance 1 via two paths.

First path: A path that runs from the vent hole 164 formed on the left side surface of the lower case 101, through the vent hole 64 on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, through the first cooling fan 60 to cool the inverter circuit board 80 and the IH coils 17L and 17R, and to the exhaust port 20. In Fig. 32, this is indicated as "upper air passage" AH.
Second path: Outside air is drawn in through two intake ports 152F, 152B formed at the right end of the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. One of the outside air flows through the third cooling fan 128 to cool the inverter circuit board 121. The other outside air flows through the fourth cooling fan 129 to cool the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122. Thus, although there are two second paths, they ultimately enter the common exhaust duct 102 and reach the exhaust port 20. In FIG. 32, this is indicated as the "lower air duct" UH.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, the interior of the main body case HC is partitioned by the bottom surface (partition wall) 16S of the metal upper case 16 into two spaces: an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B formed below the partition wall 16S, and each space is provided with independent air passages (upper air passage AH and lower air passage UH), and each air passage is provided with its own dedicated cooling fan 60, 128, 129.
The upper unit 100 also includes a second cooling fan 61 , which cooperates with the first cooling fan 60 to cool the interior of the upper unit 100 .

(Central control panel control menu and cooking menu)
Next, the selectable control menu displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by the central operation unit 40M will be described with reference to FIG.

As mentioned above, the "IH control menu" of the "single cooking mode" that can be selected using the left operation unit 40L and the right operation unit 40R using the induction heating source 9 includes, for example, "boiling water," "boiling," and "frying (automatic cooking)," as shown in FIG. 39.

However, the "control menu" selectable by the central operation unit 40M is fundamentally different from the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (described later).
There are 11 types of control menus that can be selected on the central operation unit 40M, as shown in Fig. 34. These 11 types of control menus may be collectively referred to as the "control menu group" of the central operation unit 40M. The commands for executing these control menu groups are called "control menu programs" and are stored in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.

The "control menu" that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M is not classified by the name of the final dish obtained by heating with the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or by the names of ingredients. In other words, the "control menu" does not allow direct selection based on individual dishes to be cooked.

The "control menus" in the "single cooking mode" KM1 and "combined cooking mode" KM2 selected by the central operation unit 40M can be said to be broadly categorized based on the type, method, and conditions of heating required to complete the cooking process, and therefore the names of the control menus are conceptual and general, such as "warming" and "oven (cooking)."

The control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M include a control menu called the "range grill control menu" or "RG control menu" that uses the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Note that the control menus selected by the central operation unit 40M do not include the cooking menu of the "linked cooking mode" KM3, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment 1, the induction heating source 9 has individual operation units 40L, 40R, and a single cooking mode KM1 such as "warm" can be directly selected.
In contrast, for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, since the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M is used, it is not possible to display a dedicated display screen (third specific screen 30ST) for selecting the single cooking mode KM1.

For this reason, in this embodiment 1, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. Instead, a "single heating menu" similar to the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected in the "RG control menu" described below.

The RG control menu and the "cooking menu" of the "combined cooking mode" KM3 described below are fundamentally different.
The "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 corresponds directly to each food to be cooked. In other words, the "cooking menu" of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is an individual control pattern (control menu) based on each food to be cooked. These will be explained in detail later.

The various control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit 40M will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 34. Note that what is shown in FIG. 34 includes a control menu (e.g., "Microwave manual") for the single cooking mode KM1 that uses the microwave heating source 189, but even if that control menu is selected, exceptionally, the third specific screen 30ST cannot be displayed.

The "left display area" in FIG. 34 refers to the first area (display area) 30L of the integrated display section 30.
The "central display area" also refers to the second area 30M.
The "right display area" also refers to the third area 30R.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the control menu "Warm" in the left display area of FIG. 34 is always displayed first in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30. This is because the RG control menu "Warm" is set as the default.

As is clear from the "left display area" of FIG. 34, in addition to "warm," there are a total of 11 RG control menus, including "manual microwave," "pre-boil leafy vegetables," "RG cooking," "grill," and "oven." However, the "center heater" listed at the bottom of the "left display area" of FIG. 34 is not supported by the upper unit 100, and is therefore not actually displayed.

The "RG control menu" is a control pattern (of the combined cooking mode KM2) that uses microwave heating (range) and oven (heating chamber 113) heating in combination.
However, in this embodiment 1, the control pattern for either microwave heating (range) or oven heating (single cooking mode KM1) is exceptionally included.

The "center heater" corresponds to the case where another induction heating section (center induction heating section) is added between the right heating section 17HR and the left heating section 17HL in the upper unit 100, so strictly speaking it is neither a "range" nor a "grill."

"RG" is an abbreviation for range grill. Here, "range" refers to cooking using a microwave heating source 189. "Grill" refers to cooking using an oven heating source 188.

A typical method of cooking with a range grill is to use the range and grill at the same time, heat the food from the outside and inside (inside), and then grill it. It can also be used to grill "French toast" and "frozen chicken."

The first area in Figure 34 displays a total of 10 options, including "warm" and "grill," but "combined cooking," which uses two or more heating sources, includes "RG cooking" and "RG manual." Also, since "warm" only uses the microwave heating source 9, it does not actually belong to the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. However, it is included as an exception. Note that "warm," "grill," "microwave manual," and other options shown in Figure 34 do not fall under the cooking menu of the combined cooking mode KM3.

The contents shown in the "Central Display Area" in FIG. 34 indicate the contents displayed in the second area (display area) 30M of the integrated display unit 30. The contents of the default settings for the "Central Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Central Display Area."

The contents written in the "Right Display Area" in Figure 34 indicate the contents displayed in the third area (display area) 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The default settings for the "Right Display Area" are listed in the column to the right of the "Right Display Area". A blank area means that nothing is displayed.

The database of the RG control menu is created according to the above rules.
For this reason,
(1) When the input key 43MC of the central operation unit 40M is operated, the integrated display unit 30 displays the first specific screen 30SP described below, and displays guidance information 30P that serves as reference for transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
(2) When the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated without pressing the input key 43MC, the control menu group of the composite cooking mode KM2 is selected, and the first area 30L displays one of the control menus, "Warm," as a default display, the second area 30M displays "80°C" indicating the temperature condition, and the third area 30R displays no control condition. Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the third area 30R displays the guidance information 30P, which is useful for cooking. These will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 and the like.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 to display one RG control menu in the center of the first area, the "control conditions" (temperature, heat, time, etc.) corresponding to one RG control menu from the 11 types of menus shown in FIG. 34 are simultaneously displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

If the selected RG control menu belongs to the "composite cooking mode KM2", such as "RG cooking", then when the user operates the input key 43MS which commands the start of the heating operation, the mode transitions to the "composite cooking mode KM2" using both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the heating operation is started.
The collaborative cooking mode KM3 will be described later.

The specific contents of the RG control menu group shown in FIG. 34, detailed data such as control conditions and additional information, and display programs, etc. are stored in the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.
The main RG control menus will be outlined below.

(1) Warm: This is originally one of the "control menus for the single cooking mode KM1" since it uses the microwave heating source 189 to heat food. However, as an exception, it is classified as one of the combined cooking modes KM2 and displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.
This "warm" setting is also suitable for reheating food. The default setting is "80°C", so microwave irradiation will automatically stop when the food is heated to 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, and this temperature can be adjusted by the user before heating begins.
As shown in Fig. 34, the temperature can be set in 5°C increments in the range of 0°C to 90°C. For heating frozen foods, the temperature can be set in 2°C increments in the range of -10 to 0°C. The microwave heating output is fixed at 500W.

(2) Microwave manual: This refers to heating food using the microwave heating source 189, and is done by setting the heating time. The microwave heating output can also be selected from three levels: 500 W, 200 W, and 100 W. The default heating time is also 1 minute, but at 500 W output, it can be set between 10 seconds and 15 minutes.
This "manual range" also originally belongs to the "control menu of the single cooking mode KM1" because it uses microwaves only. However, as an exception, it is also classified as one type of control menu of the combined cooking mode and is displayed on the second specific screen 30SC. In other words, the RG control menu shown in Fig. 25 also includes the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 of the microwave heating source 189, and is displayed on the same second specific screen 30SC.

(3) Boiling leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food, particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach, Chinese cabbage, and other leafy vegetables, using the microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "Standard" is displayed in the second area as the default display. The non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 measures the temperature rise and automatically stops heating. This "Boiling leafy vegetables" is originally one type of "Control menu of single cooking mode KM1".

(4) Parboiling of root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food using the microwave heating source 189, particularly for boiling root vegetables such as potatoes, whose roots and rhizomes are edible. The microwave heating output value is not displayed, and "Standard" is displayed in the second area as a default display. Note that the heat value is determined in advance by the cooking appliance 1, so when adjusting the heat, it is necessary to change (select) the "Standard" default display in the second area to "Weak" or "Strong", etc.
This "pre-boil leafy vegetables" is originally one of the "controlled menus of the single cooking mode KM1."

(5) Meat thawing: This is an RG control menu suitable for thawing various frozen meats.
This is one of the "control menus for single cooking mode KM1" for heating food using a microwave heating source 189.
(6) RG cooking: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and is a combination of microwave heating and oven heating. In other words, this is one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2".
There are three types of control patterns: one in which microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heating is performed by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B, one in which heating is performed in the reverse order, and one in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. The heating power value (watts) during microwave heating is not displayed, and the user can select the heating intensity by looking at the display in second area 30M and selecting one of "weak" or "strong", etc.

(7) RG Re-cooking: This is suitable for re-heating already-cooked food using the heating chamber 113. This is also one of the control menus of the pure "combined cooking mode KM2". The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used in combination.
(8) RG manual: This is suitable for cooking using the heating chamber 113, and combines microwave heating and oven heating to cook. There are three types of this mode: microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B heats the food; the reverse order is used for heating; and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. This is also one of the control menus for the pure "combined cooking mode KM2."

(9) Grill: Heats food using the heating chamber 113, and uses one or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B as the heating source. As mentioned above, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is not managed, and the heating operation is not stopped by detecting an increase in food temperature. The heating power of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is determined in advance by the heating chamber control unit 159 on the heating cooker 1 side. A typical applicable cooking is grilled fish. Incidentally, the rated heating power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated heating power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. This is actually one of the control menus for the "single cooking mode KM1", but in this embodiment 1, it is prepared as one control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2.

(10) Oven: Heats food using heating chamber 113, and uses one or both of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B as a heat source. The temperature of heating chamber 113 is measured by heating chamber control unit 159, and power supply control is performed by heating chamber control unit 159 so that the temperature reaches a set target temperature.
As shown in Fig. 25, the default temperature is 180°C, and the user can change this target temperature if necessary. As explained in the "Grill" section, the rated heating power of the upper heater 163A is 1000W, and the rated heating power of the lower heater 163B is also 1000W. The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the power supply rate to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B, thereby controlling the heat generation amount of these two heaters 163A and 163B. This is one of the control menus of the "single cooking mode KM1".

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M. Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the memory device MM of the integrated control device MC and the central operation unit 40M.

Data indicating the names of individual control menus (e.g., "warm," "manual microwave," etc.) among the total of 10 RG control menus that can be displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the first layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating the "control conditions" (e.g., "microwave output value", "power application time", etc.) that can be displayed in the second area 30M of the integrated display unit 30 is stored in the second layer of the memory device MM.

Data indicating "control conditions" (e.g., "grill cooking heating time") that can be displayed in the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30, and reference information 30P, 30P1 are stored in the third layer of the memory device MM.

(Cooperative cooking mode)
Next, the "combined cooking mode KM3" will be described with reference to Figures 35 and 36.
As shown in Figures 35 and 36, inside the memory device MM, data for the first specific screen 30SP that is displayed when the input key 43MC is operated, and control data and an operation program for the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" that is read out when the input key 43M1 is subsequently operated (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "cooperative operation program") are stored in a memory area separate from the RG control menu.

Here, the data for the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" and the "cooperative operation program" include identification information 330 that identifies the multiple heating sources to be used to cook each individual food item (e.g., hamburger steak), information on various control conditions (heat, standard heating temperature, etc.) and control parameters, and information on the cooking process including the order (sequence) of the heating sources to be operated. In other words, it is necessary for the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the internal processing circuits and processors that realize each function of the integrated control device MC.

When one cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is specified, the (multiple) heating sources that can be used and the order in which they will operate are automatically determined. For example, for "hamburger steak," which is one of the cooking menus that can be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is not necessary to first select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL. First, the first specified screen 30SP is displayed on the display means 30, and the user can actually start the cooperative cooking mode KM3 by looking at the display and then selecting, for example, the right heating unit 17HR.

The first specific screen 30SP is displayed with a content indicating in advance that the left heating unit 17HL is to be used. The user can set in advance to use the right heating unit 17HR without using the left heating unit 17HL. However, there are cases where such a setting is not possible.
In addition, in the case where the right heating section 17HR is used in cooking step 1 and the subsequent cooking step 2 involves heating in the heating chamber 113 using the oven heating source 188, information on the series of cooking steps is stored in the memory device MM.

Additional information 331 that serves as a reference for transitioning to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 includes, for example, information on the cooking process described below, information on the heating source to be used, control conditions (preheating completion temperature, etc.), guidance information and instruction information that prompts the user to input information to proceed to the next cooking process, etc., which are stored in correspondence with each cooking menu of each collaborative cooking mode (e.g., "hamburger steak", "fried chicken")

In the following explanation, when preheating is required, the process up to raising the temperature to the set (target) temperature is called the "preheating process", and the process of actually heating the food to be cooked after the set temperature is reached and contributing to cooking is called "cooking process 1" or "cooking process 2".
For example, in induction heating, the start of the "cooking process" occurs when the user places the food to be cooked on the food N, such as a frying pan, which has already been heated to the desired temperature after the preheating process has been completed, and actually begins heating.
In addition, in this way, when the same heating source is used, an operation such as pressing a specific input key on the central operation unit 40M or the individual operation units 40L, 40R may be added so that (the integrated control device MC) can clearly identify the point when the preheating process is completed and the point when the cooking process 1 is started thereafter.

(Information on how to use RG control menus, etc.)
Next, the use of the RG (range grill) control menu explained in FIG. 34 and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 will be explained.

FIG. 37 is a classification table of the RG control menu and the control menu of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9.
The names of the control menus shown in category 3 in FIG. 37 are also displayed in the first area 30L, as shown in part in FIG. 34, and are used by the user to select a control menu.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of Figure 37, information indicating the main points of each control menu is also stored as data in the first or second layer of the memory device MM, as explained in Figures 35 and 36.

Therefore, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the user can optionally display information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37. Furthermore, when the user selects the RG control menu, the integrated control device MC can automatically display the information shown in category 2 on the integrated display unit 30 to assist the user in input operations. For example, when the user holds down the input key 43M1 once and a predefined reference time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed, information showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37 is displayed in any of the first area 30L to the third area 30R. Alternatively, the voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) 95 can notify the user by voice. For example, for "warm up," a voice guide such as "This is ideal for warming up rice or lunch boxes to your desired temperature" is displayed.

Note that in category 3 of Figure 37, the name "control menu" is listed, but there are 10 control menus that can be executed by the central operation unit 40M, ranging from "warm" to "oven."

The input operation unit 40 (central operation unit 40M) can display a total of 10 "control menus" using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 in the second specific screen 30SC immediately after pressing the selection unit (input key 43M1).

In this way, the total of 10 "control menus" displayed in the second specific screen 30SC are displayed in sequence (forward and backward), and only one of them can be selected by the selection unit (input key 43M1).

Specifically, the selection section (input key 43M1) has a pair of left and right operation surfaces (operation sections) that the user can touch to operate (see FIG. 63). When the left operation surface is touched, the display changes so that the control menu moves downward (in forward order) with each touch. Conversely, when the right operation surface is touched, the display content is updated in reverse, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, and the desired control menu can be displayed in the front-to-back center of the first area 30L (a specified position). The control menu displayed in that position becomes the control menu to be executed by the integrated control device MC when a command to start a heating operation is subsequently received.

(Operation of cooking device)
Next, an outline of the operation of the cooking device 1 having the above configuration will be described mainly with reference to Figs.

Figure 38 is a flowchart for explaining the overall control operation before cooking starts in the cooking device 1. Figure 39 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation during induction cooking in the cooking device 1. Figure 40 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation when microwave heating is performed during induction cooking in the cooking device 1. Figure 41 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. Figure 42 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. Figure 43 is a flowchart for explaining the control operation of the cooking device 1. Figure 44 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooling fan of the cooking device 1 and the type of cooking. Figure 45 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device 1. Figure 46 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process when an abnormality is detected in the cooking device 1. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the relationship between the cooling fan and the cooking process in an example of abnormality detection in the cooking device 1.

Referring to Figure 38 .
A basic operation program from power-on to cooking preparation start is stored in a memory device MM inside the integrated control device MC.
In the built-in type heating cooker 1, the power plug 106A (not shown) is always connected to the commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time the kitchen furniture 2 is installed, so the user turns on the power by pressing the operation button 98 (see Figures 20 and 30) of the main power switch 97 (step ST1 in Figure 38).

A specific low power supply voltage is supplied to the integrated control device MC via the DC power conversion unit 92 in the power circuit board 55, and the integrated control device MC is started. The integrated control device MC starts diagnosing itself for any abnormalities using its own control program.

Then, check for abnormalities in the IH control unit 90, which centrally controls the induction heating source 9, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130.

A total of seven temperature sensors TS3 to TS9 are connected to the temperature detection circuit 93 of the upper unit 100 to detect the temperature of the top plate 15, the inverter circuits 81L and 81R, the temperature near the integrated display unit 30, etc., and the temperatures detected by these temperature sensors are transmitted to the temperature detection circuit 93. This allows the IH control unit 90 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (ST2).

The heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 can also obtain the detected temperatures from the temperature sensors TS1, TS2, and TS10 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, it says "send start-up information to the outside", which means that the wireless communication unit 49 notifies the home gateway 411 in the kitchen KT that the cooking appliance 1 will start operating. This will be explained later.

The IH control unit 90 collects temperature information from the main components built into the upper unit 100, and performs abnormal heating determination processing as abnormality monitoring control before cooking begins. For example, if the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS7 is higher than the heat resistance temperature (e.g., 70°C) of electronic elements such as the liquid crystal display screen 30D in the integrated display unit 30, the IH control unit 90 determines that the temperature is abnormally high. It then notifies the integrated control device MC of the abnormality and performs processing such as displaying or notifying that operation cannot be started. This processing may also be performed by the integrated control device MC.

If no abnormality is found, the IH control unit 90 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. The integrated display unit 30 is then started and displays a message that "Since there is no abnormality, cooking can be started" (ST3). The display screen at this initial stage will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.
At the same time, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice the same content as that displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (ST3).

In step ST3, the wireless communication unit 49 accesses the home gateway 411 and acquires information useful for health management, such as control menus and recipe information, within the range previously set by the user. For example, information that the user of the cooking appliance 1 previously sent to the home gateway 411 via the Internet 416 using an information communication terminal device 418 or the like can also be acquired when the integrated display unit 30 is started.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires any information, it is advisable to notify the user by turning on a dedicated warning information lamp (not shown) provided near the input operation unit 40 of the upper unit 100.

At this point, inventory information for refrigerator 401 is not obtained. However, as shown in Figures 114 and 115, an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent to home gateway 411 at this point.

Next, after the abnormality determination is completed as described above, the integrated control device MC uses the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 to provide a notification and voice guidance to prompt the user to select a heating method (ST4). At this point, the standby initial screen 30Z and the guide screen 30SA, which will be described later, are displayed in sequence or alternately. These will be described later with reference to Figures 52 to 56.

Then, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has not been operated and the single cooking mode KM1 has been selected by the individual operation unit, the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R (STC).

As mentioned above (see Figures 34 and 37), the control menu "Warm" in "Range Heat" that uses only the microwave heating source 189 belongs to the single cooking mode KM1, but the means for selecting this control menu ("Warm") is the input key 43M1. For this reason, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected using the central operation unit 40. Note that the only way to specify a heating source and directly select a control menu in this cooking appliance 1 is with the induction heating source 9 when using the individual operation units 40L and 40R.

If neither input key 43M1 nor input key 43MC is selected within a certain grace period (e.g., 10 or 30 seconds), it is determined that neither linked cooking mode KM3 nor combined cooking mode KM2 has been selected. If the user operates at least one of the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R immediately after step ST4 or within the grace period, it is determined that only the heating source of the upper unit 100, i.e., the IH coils 17L and 17R, has been selected ("Yes" in step ST6).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MC is operated in step STC, the process proceeds to step STR1 of the coordinated cooking mode. Step STR1 of the coordinated cooking mode will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 64 to 113, etc.

If step ST6 is "Yes" as described above, proceed to the next step ST10. The subsequent induction heating control steps will be explained later with reference to Figure 39.

On the other hand, if a heating source for the lower unit 200 is selected in step ST5, the integrated control device MC proceeds to step ST8, which is a menu selection step for the two heating sources provided in the lower unit 200. Note that this step ST5 is performed when the central operation unit 40M (input key 43M1) is operated.

In step ST8, as shown in FIG. 38, three types of control menus (ST9A to ST9D) are displayed in a fixed order on the integrated display unit 30. These three types of control menus are the total of 10 control menus (see FIG. 34) displayed in the first area 30L.

The control menu displayed at step ST8 in FIG. 38 is based on the assumption that the heat source of lower unit 200 is to be used, and the following three types of control menu are displayed.
(1) A cooking menu that uses at least one of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (ST9A). This corresponds to "grill" or "oven" in the control menu shown in FIG.
(2) In addition to the above (1), a control menu (ST9B) using the microwave heating device 120 in combination. This corresponds to the "range grill" heating (cooking) in the control menus shown in Figs. 34 and 37.
(3) A control menu (ST9C) using only the microwave heating device 120. This corresponds to "manual range,""pre-boil leafy vegetables,""warm," and the like in the control menu shown in FIG.
In this case, the "combined cooking mode KM3" is not displayed.

If it turns out midway through that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is better, you can proceed to step STR1 in FIG. 78 by operating the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. In other words, you can proceed to the stage immediately before determining whether or not permission condition 1 for the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is met.

Figure 39 shows the operational steps of the integrated control device MC after the step (ST11) in which the induction heating control menu is selected.

Next, the control operation during induction heating will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following, an example in which the right heating unit 17HR is used will be described.
When the input key 43R1 on the right side of the individual operation unit 40R is touched, the IH control unit 90 determines that the user has commanded a heating preparation operation.

It is estimated whether or not a heated object N (such as a metal pot or frying pan) is placed above the IH coil 17R, or whether the bottom area of the heated object is larger than a predetermined value, and this estimation result is transmitted to the IH control unit 90, which determines whether to perform heating treatment suitable for a standard diameter pot or a large diameter pot (step MS1).
If the pot is compliant but has a large diameter, or is not suitable for heating, it will be treated differently from a standard pot.

Upon receiving a command from the IH control unit 90, the integrated control device MC displays a message on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 prompting the user to select the "IH control menu" for the desired cooking (MS2).

When the user selects and inputs the "IH control menu", heat level, cooking time, etc., on the right operation unit 40R (MS3), full-scale induction heating operation is started in the right heating unit 17HR (MS4).
The "IH control menu" displayed on the integrated display unit 30 includes seven items: "fast heating", "deep frying", "boiling water", "preheating", "cooking rice", "boiling", and "boiling water + keeping warm". However, in order to simplify operability, the above-mentioned "function setting" may be set so that some or all of the above seven IH control menus cannot be selected.

When the user selects one of these seven IH control menus, the control conditions corresponding to that IH control menu are automatically selected by the built-in program of the IH control unit 90, and the amount of current (heat) and current duration of the IH coil 17R are set. Depending on the IH control menu, a display is displayed on the display unit prompting the user to set the desired heat, current duration, etc. (MS5). Note that the operating program for the control conditions corresponding to the IH control menu may be stored in the integrated control device MC, not in the IH control unit 90.

Unless the user touches the input key 43R1 again to stop use within a certain time (for example, 15 or 30 seconds) after the above display is displayed, the IH control unit 90 will drive the inverter circuit 81R of the induction heating circuit 94R and start induction heating after the certain time has elapsed (MS6). Note that the input function of the input key 43R1 changes every time it is touched, and it is possible to issue commands to start and stop the heating operation.

The "large diameter pot" case is basically the same as steps MS1 to MS7 above, but some of the seven IH control menus shown in step MS3 of Figure 39 cannot be selected as IH control menus.

The "High-speed heating menu" in Figure 39 can only heat "normal pots" or "large-diameter pots" using the induction coil 17L on the left side. In this embodiment 1, a small pot refers to one with a bottom diameter of less than 10 cm, which is detected as unsuitable for induction heating and cannot be induction heated.

Next, the integrated power control operation when two or more different types of heating sources are used simultaneously, such as induction heating and microwave heating, will be described with reference to Figures 40 and 41. Note that the example described in Figures 40 and 41 is not for the above-mentioned linked cooking mode KM3.

The example shown in Fig. 40 is a case where a user attempts to perform microwave heating using heating chamber 113 of lower unit 200 while induction heating cooking is being performed previously using upper unit 100. Even if oven cooking, grill cooking, or the like is performed using both or either one of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B during induction heating cooking, basic total power control (for the entire cooking appliance 1) as described in Fig. 40 is performed by integrated control device MC and power control unit 72.
In this case, the combined cooking mode KM2 must be selected using the central operation unit 40M.

When a user wishes to perform microwave heating using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200, he or she must first turn on the main power switch 97 and select the heating source for the lower unit 200 using the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40.
However, a simple way to do this is to simply open the door 114. In other words, in this embodiment 1, if the upper unit 100 is operating (if the main power switch 97 is ON), cooking can be started directly by the lower unit 200. Therefore, there is no need to turn on the main power switch 97 as in the upper unit 100.

When the door 114 is opened, as explained in the main part of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131, there is a latch switch 132A and a door switch 132B that are opened and closed depending on whether the door 114 is opened or closed. Therefore, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC (through the function of the door opening/closing detection mechanism 131) can detect the opening of both or either of the latch switch 132A and the door switch 132B.

In FIG. 40, when a signal is received indicating that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 has been opened (step S1) as described above, the integrated control device MC provides voice guidance to the user (step S2). The content of the voice guidance may be, for example, "To start heating, select microwave heating and press the start button."

The default setting for microwave heating is a target temperature of 80°C, so even if you close the door 114 and start heating, it will automatically stop when it detects that the temperature of the food being cooked has reached 80°C. If you want to change the temperature from 80°C (to 75°C, for example), you can change the temperature conditions and then press the input key 43MS (see Figure 21).

When the user selects, for example, "Microwave manual" from the composite cooking menu with input key 43M1 and then issues the command "Start heating" with input key 43MS on central operation unit 40M, the rated power consumption value determined by magnetron 122 is used along with the power consumption of third cooling fan 128, fourth cooling fan 129, etc., and the integrated control device MC determines in step S3 whether the total power regulation value is exceeded.

For example, the integrated control device MC holds data on the heat value of the induction heating cooking that has already started and the power consumption of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, so it can calculate the total power consumption of the upper unit 100 and the microwave heating device 120. Note that the integrated control device MC may predict the maximum power consumption using power consumption data of the inverter circuit 81, etc., when the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M is operated.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to either reduce the output of the operating IH coil 17R or reduce the heat of the microwave heating. In step S3, the priority of the induction heating cooking at that time is determined from the induction heating control menu and the cooking process. For example, if rice cooking (particularly the "boiling process") is being performed in the upper unit 100, the rice cooking (boiling process) is given priority, and the heat of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

In addition, when deep frying is being performed in the upper unit 100, the heat is automatically increased in response to the addition of ingredients, etc., so that the temperature of the edible oil does not drop excessively. Therefore, even in such a case, the heat of the heating source of the upper unit 100 is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that induction heating has priority, then in order to reduce the power consumption of microwave heating, if the rated microwave output is assumed to be 500 W (power consumption is 900 W), the power consumption is temporarily reduced to, for example, an output of 300 W. The user is then notified that such a restriction will be imposed. The notification is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 (S6).

Then, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start microwave heating at low heat (S7).
Since the microwave heating control unit 130 has a non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 that detects the temperature of food, cooking utensils, etc. placed in the heating chamber 113, the microwave heating control unit 130 monitors whether the food has been heated and has reached the target temperature (S8).

If the target temperature is not reached, a determination is made as to whether the induction heating operation of the upper unit 100 has ended (S9). As long as the induction heating operation has not ended, steps S8 and S9 are repeated until the target temperature is reached.

When the target temperature is reached, the microwave heating control unit 130 sends a signal to the integrated control device MC. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S12, where it is notified that microwave heating has ended.

On the other hand, if induction heating of the upper unit 100 has ended, the process proceeds to step S10, where a command is issued to the microwave heating control unit 130 to restore the heat power initially set by the user and continue microwave heating. Then, the temperature of the food being cooked continues to be monitored (S11).

When the target temperature is reached, the integrated control device MC receives a signal from the microwave heating control unit 130, proceeds to step S12, and reports that microwave heating has ended.

The example shown in Figure 40 is based on the assumption that the power priority between microwave cooking and induction heating cooking is determined based on the control menu (e.g., "deep frying") and cooking process (e.g., the "boiling process" of cooking rice) being executed during induction heating cooking, and thus the priority with induction heating at that time.

Therefore, if the power priority between microwave heating cooking and induction heating cooking is always set to induction heating, a warning message will be displayed, for example, on the integrated display unit 30 before an instruction to start microwave heating is given using the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M. In addition, a warning message will also be issued from the voice synthesizer 95. Even if microwave heating is started after that, there may be cases where the heat value is forcibly lowered, as in the example above.

The power priority of the induction heating source 9, oven heating source 188, and microwave heating source 189 in the entire cooking device 1 can be set in the "Function Settings" described above. Once the power priority is set, the setting conditions are stored in the integrated control device MC and are carried over to the next cooking session and beyond, even if the main power switch 97 is turned off.

In the example shown in Figure 40, the temperature of the heated object is monitored, and microwave heating is terminated when the target temperature is reached. However, there is also a control method in which the microwave irradiation time is measured and cooking is terminated when a set time has elapsed, as will be explained next in Figure 41.

FIG. 41 shows an example of a control method for ending cooking based on the microwave irradiation time.
Since steps up to step S6 are the same as those in FIG. 40, the explanation will be omitted.

When microwave heating is started in step 7, the microwave heating control unit 130 calculates the correction (extension) of the heating time when the output of the magnetron 122 is reduced to a certain value. Then, in step S8, the extended time is determined as "set time 1" (S8), and steps 9 and 8 are repeated.

During this process, if induction heating of the upper unit 100 ends, the required operation time (set time 2) is recalculated, taking into account the time elapsed since the start of heating (step S7).

When the set time 2 has elapsed, microwave heating is terminated and this is notified (S12). Note that temperature monitoring by the non-contact temperature measurement unit (infrared temperature measurement unit) 158 may also be used until the set time 2 has elapsed.

(Integrated control device and total power control)
Next, reference will be made to Figures 42 and 43.
Figures 42 and 43 are flow charts for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance 1. The examples shown in these two figures are for a case where a user first attempts to perform microwave heating (in the single cooking mode KM1) using the heating chamber 113 of the lower unit 200 during a period in which induction heating cooking is being performed in the upper unit 100. Even in this case, the basic total power control (for the entire cooking appliance 1) as described in Figure 40 is performed by the integrated control device MC and the power control unit 72.

Unlike Figs. 40 and 41, Figs. 42 and 43 also show the transmission and reception of signals between the integrated control device MC and the microwave heating device 120, and the induction heating device consisting of IH coils 17L and 17R and an inverter circuit 81, etc.

In Figures 42 and 43, L1 to L10 indicate the generation timing of each operation signal, command signal, etc. When the main power switch 97 on the upper unit 100 is turned on, a start-up signal is sent to the integrated control device MC (L1).

After that, when the heating power and control menu of the IH coils 17L and 17R are determined on the input operation unit 40 (see steps MS2 and MS3 in FIG. 39), information indicating the contents is sent via the integrated control device MC (L2). In other words, the IH control unit 90 receives information indicating conditions such as the maximum heating power and operation time during induction heating from the integrated control device MC. Then, if there is an induction heating start command from the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 starts the heating operation using the induction heating circuits 94L and 94R.

We will explain the case where induction heating cooking is started in this way and microwave heating is also started. It is assumed that induction heating is started with the maximum heating power of 3200 W of the left IH coil 17L.

When the user opens the door 114, as described in FIG. 40, the latch switch 132A and/or the door switch 132B are opened, and the door open/close detection mechanism 131 (close detection unit 139), which monitors this, sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC (L3).

When the user inputs the heating power through the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues an operation start command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S3.
Alternatively, when the user simply issues an instruction to "start heating" on the central operation unit 40M, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the microwave heating control unit 130 to start operation.

If there are no abnormalities on the microwave heating control unit 130 side, the microwave heating control unit 130 sends a "warning signal" to the integrated control device MC to start cooking (L4). For example, in the case of a microwave output of 500 W, if the rated power consumption of the entire microwave heating device is 1000 W, the "warning signal" will include information to use 1000 W, as shown in Figure 42.

Next, upon receiving information from the integrated control device MC, the power control unit 72 uses the power consumption value known in advance, which reflects the power consumption of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129, etc., in addition to the rated power consumption value determined by the magnetron 122, to calculate the total power consumption when microwave heating and induction heating are performed simultaneously, and determines whether this total value exceeds the total power regulation value (same as step S3 in Figures 40 and 41). The result is then transmitted to the integrated control device MC.

As an alternative method, an upper limit for the total power consumption of the lower unit 200 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) can be determined (e.g., 2000 W), and a determination can be made as to whether the total power consumption limit will be exceeded when the lower unit 200 and upper unit 100 (induction heating source 9) are used simultaneously.

If step S3 is "Yes", it is necessary to reduce the output of the operating IH coil 17R or reduce the power of the microwave heating. In the next step S4, the integrated control device MC determines the priority of the induction heating cooking at that time from the induction heating control menu and heating process.

In the example shown in Figure 42, microwave heating is set as the priority, so the power of microwave heating is not reduced.

If it is determined in step S5 that microwave heating has priority, in order to reduce the power consumption of induction heating, the IH control unit 90 is instructed to control the IH coil 17R to lower the target heating power, temporarily reducing power consumption. The user is notified that such a restriction will be imposed. The notification operation is performed by the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95.

Then, the IH control unit 90 commands the inverter circuit 81R to change the induction heating to a low heat level (L5).

When the power reduction process on the inverter circuit 81R side is completed, the IH control unit 90 determines that the power reduction has been completed from the current values of the input current detection unit 77a and the output current detection unit 77b. It then transmits a notification that the power reduction has been completed to the integrated control device MC (L6). In response to this transmission, the integrated control device MC transmits an authorization signal to the microwave heating device 120 to start the heating operation (L7).

The inverter circuit 121A has a current detection unit (not shown) similar to the input current detection unit 77a and output current detection unit 77b used in the inverter circuit 81R of the upper unit 100.

Therefore, when microwave heating is completed, the microwave heating control unit 130 determines that the heating operation has ended from the current detection value of the inverter circuit 121A, and notifies the integrated control device MC of the heating operation with a specific signal (L8). Microwave heating may also be performed for a certain period of time set by a timer, in which case the microwave heating control unit 130 detects the passage of that time and notifies that the heating operation has ended (L8).

After the microwave heating is completed, the integrated control device MC issues a command signal to the IH control unit 90 to return the heating power to the setting originally requested by the user (L9). Then, the heating power is increased to the initial target level to continue the induction heating (S10).

When the set cooking time or target temperature is reached, the IH control unit 90 ends induction heating and notifies the integrated control device MC that operation has ended (L10).

(Basic operation of induction heating cooking and cooling operation)
Next, basic operations of each part of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment when induction heating is performed will be described.

When the start of induction heating cooking is commanded through the input operation unit 40, the IH control unit 90 issues a drive command to the induction heating circuits 94L, 94R corresponding to the specified heating unit, and drives the inverter circuits 81L, 81R of the IH coils 17L, 17R.

An operation command signal is sent from the IH control unit 90 to the cooling fan drive circuit 62 .
Simultaneously with or slightly after the inverter circuits 81L and 81R start to drive, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 start to operate.

The airflow capacity of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 does not have to be fixed. For example, the airflow capacity may be automatically changed between low and high operation depending on the temperature of the temperature sensor TS8 of the heat sink 82 and the temperature sensor TS that detects the temperature near the integrated display unit 30.

Generally, when the cooling fan is changed from low to high operation, the fan noise increases, raising concerns that this may become a source of noise. Therefore, the temperatures detected by the two temperature sensors TS7, TS8 and the operating strengths of the cooling fans 60, 61 are determined in a correspondence table (data table) based on data from prior air blowing tests, etc., and this correspondence table is stored in the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90. The IH control unit 90 may then change the operating conditions of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 as needed according to the data table.

The correspondence table (data table) that determines the operating strength of the cooling fans 60, 61 may be stored in the integrated control device MC instead of the storage device 90R of the IH control unit 90.

When the first cooling fan 60 is operated, air is drawn in through the vent 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60. The cooling air RF1 is forced into the first air duct F1 from the air outlet 60A as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24.

When the second cooling fan 61 is operated, air is sucked in through the vent 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 61. The cooling air RF2 is forced into the second air duct F2 from the air outlet 61A as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 24.

Here, we will explain one of the features of this embodiment 1. In particular, we will explain the supply of cooling air to the inverter circuit board 80 with reference to Figures 24, 25, 27, and 28.

The first cooling fan 60 rotates the flat rotor blades 60T in the counterclockwise direction RD1. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 60C advances to the air outlet 60A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27, and is blown out from the air outlet 60A in the direction of the inverter circuit board 80.

The wind speed distribution of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 60A will be described.
The speed of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is not uniform across the entire area in the front-to-rear direction of the air outlet 60A. The cooling air swirling around the outermost periphery inside the fan case 60C has the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the center. This is shown diagrammatically in Figure 27 by three solid arrows.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A travels in the direction of the air outlet line FL1, but due to the difference in speed between the rotation direction RD1 of the rotor blades 60F of the first cooling fan 60 and the cooling air 60FL itself, as it approaches the heat sink 82, the cooling air gradually changes direction toward the rear, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 27.

The main component of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is concentrated on the rear (back) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82, which is arranged in two rows, front and back. The cooling air then moves to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the rear surface of the partition wall 11. The dashed arrows in Figure 27 indicate the flow of the cooling air RF1 that flows around the heat dissipation fins 82FN.

The cover 70 is installed so as to surround the front, back, and top of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape, so that the main components of the cooling air 60FL immediately after it is blown out of the air outlet 60A are not diffused to the surroundings, but are instead forced into the narrow space of the heat dissipation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82, which are located behind the partition wall 11.

In addition, since the first air passage F1 begins after passing the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 60A is introduced into the inlet F1 of the first air passage F1, and is then transported in a straight line as the cooling air RF1 to the outlet FO on the right side.

However, because there is no direct connection between the air outlet 60A and the left end surface of the cover 70, and because there is a gap GP14 and a front cutout 70A, a portion of the cooling air 60FL immediately after being blown out of the air outlet 60A turns rearward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows into an area with relatively low pressure. As a result, cooling air is also generated that flows in the direction of the rear exhaust port plate 53L.

The flow of cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 will be explained with reference to Figures 25, 27, and 28.

The flat rotor 61T rotates in the counterclockwise direction RD2. Then, the outside air sucked into the inside of the fan case 61C moves in the direction of the air outlet 61A while swirling as shown in FIG. 27. Then, the air is blown out from the air outlet 61A in the direction of the inverter board 80.

The wind speed of the cooling air 61FL immediately after it is blown out from the air outlet 61A is not uniform across the entire area in the front-to-rear direction of the air outlet 61A. The cooling air that swirls around the outermost part of the fan case 61C moves at the highest speed, and the speed decreases toward the center. This is indicated by three solid arrows in Figure 27.

As shown in FIG. 27, the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A travels in the direction of the air outlet line FL2. However, due to the difference between the rotation direction RD2 of the rotor 61F of the first cooling fan 61 and the speed of the cooling air 61FL itself, as it approaches the heat sink 82, the cooling air gradually changes direction toward the rear, as shown by the dashed arrow in FIG. 27.

The main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is concentrated on the front (front) side of the partition wall 11 located at the center of the heat sink 82 arranged in two rows, front and back. It then proceeds to the right while being restricted from moving forward by the front of the partition wall 11. The dashed arrow in Figure 27 shows the flow of the cooling air RF2 flowing around the heat dissipation fin 82FN.

A cover 70 is provided so as to surround the front, rear and upper sides of the heat sink 82 in a tunnel shape with a small gap therebetween.
Therefore, the main component of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the air outlet 61A is forced into the narrow space of the heat dissipation fins 82FN of the heat sink 82 located forward of the partition wall 11 rather than diffusing to the surroundings.

In addition, since the first air passage F1 begins after passing the left end of the cover 70, the main part of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out from the outlet 61A is introduced into the inlet FI of the first air passage F1, and is then transported in a straight line to the outlet FO on the right side as the cooling air RF2.

However, because there is no direct connection between the air outlet 61A and the left end surface of the cover 70 and there is a gap (not shown) and a front cutout 70A, a portion of the cooling air 61FL immediately after being blown out of the air outlet 61A leaks forward before reaching the inlet FI of the first air passage F1. It then flows into an area with relatively low pressure. As a result, it flows as cooling air that branches off in the direction of the space directly below the front input operation unit 40, and becomes cooling air RF2A (see FIG. 25).

The vent hole 64 located directly below the first cooling fan 60 and the vent hole 64 located directly below the second cooling fan 60 are provided adjacent to each other on the bottom surface of the upper case 16, but it is also possible to provide a large number of small hole groups and share these small hole groups.

Diode 79c (see Figure 33) and other electrical components are mounted on the upper surface of the inverter circuit board 80, and are cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

Two IGBTs 79a and 79b (power control switching elements 83) are used for one IH coil 17L. Similarly, a power control switching element 83 is used for the other IH coil 17L.

These two power control switching elements 83 generate heat during induction heating operation, but are continuously cooled by the cooling air RF1 and RF2.

The cooling air RF2A advances to the right while cooling the various switches that receive input operations and are arranged on the input operation unit 40, the liquid crystal display screen, the display unit drive circuit 63, and other components.

As shown by the thick arrow in Figure 24, some of the cooling air RF1 changes direction upwards when it leaves the outlet FO of the cover 70, but due to the force of the cooling air RF2 joining it from the front, it is roughly divided into cooling air RF3 that turns around and travels to the left over the cover 70, and cooling air RF4 that travels in the direction of the filter circuit board 54.

The cooling air RF3 flows underneath the right-hand IH coil 17R, and then flows underneath the left-hand IH coil 17L. In the process, it cools the two IH coils 17R and 17L. Generally, the temperature of this type of IH coil rises to around 250°C to 300°C during induction heating operation. Therefore, as described above, it is cooled by the two cooling airs RF1 and RF2 combined into cooling airs RF3 and RF4.

As explained in Figures 24 and 25, the cooling air RF4R that has traveled to the right of the partition plate 14 travels rearward while cooling the filter circuit board 54, and is exhausted through the exhaust window 52B. 53R is an exhaust plate that has multiple through holes 53R1 formed in it.

The cooling air RF3 that has cooled the IH coils 17L, 17R also changes direction and travels toward the exhaust window 52A, which serves as the final exhaust port, passes through a number of through holes 53L1 provided in the exhaust plate 53L, and is exhausted from the exhaust window 52A.
As a result, the cooling airflows RF3 and RF4 flowing inside the upper case 16 reach the exhaust port 20. Then, the cooling airflows are discharged from the exhaust cover 19 into the room.

As mentioned above, the components such as the IH coils 17L, 17R and the inverter circuit board 80 are the components that need to be cooled inside the upper unit 100 (IH coil installation space CK). The space for cooling these components is located in front of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B. In other words, downstream of the exhaust windows 52A, 52B, there is a gap GP1 that connects to the exhaust port 20, but since there are no components to be cooled as described above inside this gap GP1, it does not form a cooling space for the upper unit 100.

(Basic operation during microwave cooking)
Next, a basic operation of each part of the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment when microwave heating is performed will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned ON, microwave cooking can be started immediately even if induction heating cooking is not actually being performed in the upper unit 100. However, if the main power switch 97 is once turned OFF, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start microwave heating cooking.

For safety reasons, the main power switch 97 is automatically reset and opened a certain time (e.g., 30 minutes) after the last use of any of the microwave heating, oven (heating chamber 113) heating, and induction heating. Alternatively, the main power switch 97 is automatically opened when the temperatures of the top plate 15, heating chamber 113, etc. all drop below a specified value. Such safety measures are adopted.

Next, the door 114 is opened, food or other items to be cooked are placed in the heating chamber 113, and after the door 114 is closed, a command to start microwave heating cooking is issued by the input key 43MS (see FIG. 20) on the central operation unit 40M of the input operation unit 40. The integrated control device MC then issues a drive command to the microwave heating control unit 130, causing the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 to start operating.

The microwave heating control unit 130 drives the inverter circuit 121A of the magnetron 122 to radiate microwaves from the oscillator 122A. Note that the microwaves referred to here are radio waves of 2450 MHz ±50 MHz.

The generated microwaves are guided from the waveguide 123 into the antenna case 124. The motor 126 for driving the antenna 125 starts operating at the same time that the microwaves are generated, so the microwaves introduced into the antenna case 124 can be propagated evenly inside the heating chamber 113 by the action of the rotating antenna 125 and the rotating shaft 126A. The action of this type of antenna and rotating shaft 126A is explained in detail in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 4836965 and Japanese Patent No. 5674914, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, outside air is drawn into the inside of the case A150 through the intake port F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF5. The cooling air RF5 first cools the inverter circuit board 121, and then cools the various electrical components mounted on the circuit board.

The cooling air RF5 then passes through communication ports B138B and A138A, which are provided at the top and bottom of the case A150, and the cooling air RF5 that passes through communication port B138B hits the back of the temperature sensor 160.

The temperature sensor 160 is installed in a mounting hole in the right-side partition plate 166A. There is a tiny gap of a few millimeters or less between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole. The cooling air RF5 passes through this gap and is blown out from the detection window 161 of the temperature sensor 160 into the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, most of the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 is guided from the communication port A138A to the passage 172. In other words, it is guided to the passage 172 formed between the upper case 169 that covers the top of the heating chamber 113 and the partition plate 171. This passage has the effect of preventing high heat from being transmitted to the upper unit 100 even if the upper heater 163A above the heating chamber 113 becomes so hot that it exceeds 300°C.

When the position of the communication port 173 is viewed from the communication port A 138A in a plan view, the communication port 173 is located diagonally rearward across the passage 172. In other words, the communication port 173 is located at the farthest position.
Therefore, the entire air in the passage 172 is guided to the communication port 173, passes through the communication port 173, and is introduced into the exhaust duct 102 extending horizontally rearward (see FIG. 15).

When the cooling air RF5 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it merges with the cooling air RF6 rising from below and is released into the room through the exhaust port 20.

Next, the flow of the cooling air RF6 by the fourth cooling fan 129 will be described.
12 and 13, when the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A 151 from the intake port B 152B formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101, and becomes cooling air RF6. The cooling air RF6 first cools the heat dissipation part 122H of the magnetron 122, passes through the heat dissipation part 122H, and reaches the inside of the duct 153.

The cooling air RF6 then enters the gap GP5R adjacent to the right side of the heating chamber 113 from the duct 153 and travels forward. It is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. 17.

Because the inlet 201 is located close to the opening 113A of the heating chamber 113, some of the cooling air RF6 also reaches the inside of the door 114, eliminating fogging that occurs on the heating chamber 113 side of the sealing plate 196.

The cooling air RF6 introduced into the heating chamber 113 has the purpose of discharging steam, smoke, and the like generated from heated objects such as food inside the heating chamber 113. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, the cooling air RF6 moves from the front to the rear of the heating chamber 113, and finally reaches the communication port 174 formed in the ceiling at the rear.

The cooling air RF6 is introduced into the exhaust duct 102, which extends horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. When the cooling air RF6 leaves the end of the internal passage 102B of the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted by the rising air current of the cooling air RF5 emerging from the other internal passage 102A, merges with the cooling air RF5, and is released into the room from the exhaust port 20.

Even if the initial air volumes of cooling air RF5 and cooling air RF6 are equal, due to the difference in the paths as in this embodiment 1, cooling air RF5 has a faster wind speed when it is released from duct 102. Therefore, it has the effect of attracting cooling air RF6 released from below.

To forcibly release the cooling air RF5 and RF6 from the exhaust duct 102, an exhaust fan may be provided midway through the exhaust duct 102. In this embodiment 1, such an exhaust fan is omitted, which can be realized at low cost and is advantageous when considering the arrangement of components inside the upper unit 100.

Next, we will explain Figure 44.
FIG. 44 is a table showing the correspondence between the four cooling fans of the cooking appliance 1 and the types of cooking.
As is clear from Fig. 44, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated in the case of induction heating cooking, as well as in the case of microwave heating cooking and oven heating cooking.

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated in the cases of microwave cooking and oven cooking.
On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated only during oven cooking.

Next, we will explain Figure 45.
FIG. 45 shows a case where cooking is performed using the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and "hamburger steak" is selected as the cooking menu.

This is an example of cooking in three stages: a preheating process using induction heating source 9, a cooking process 1 using induction heating source 9, and a cooking process 2 using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189.
Fig. 45 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 has been detected among the main abnormalities that can be detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). Note that abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the contents of the control command) is not shown in Fig. 45.

Preheating process: When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 are controlled as shown in FIG. 45.
That is, the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Also, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times “Th1”, “Th2” from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning during the preheating process, so they are not affected in any way.

Cooking process 1: If at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 in heating operation is immediately stopped. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be explained later.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning during the preheating process, so they are not affected in any way.

Cooking step 2: In cooking step 2, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are used. When the oven heating source 188 is driven, the third cooling fan 128 starts operating.
Furthermore, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128, the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 is also started at the same time (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 in the heating operation is immediately stopped. Also, if the microwave heating source 189 is being driven, it is immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are in operation, as will be described later, they are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2".

As shown in FIG. 45, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected during a period in which the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operating, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not affected in any way because it has not been operating from the beginning.

As described above, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1) at any stage of the preheating process, cooking process 1, or cooking process 2, the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 (in Figure 45, the cooking menu is "hamburger steak").

The effect of this "cancel" is the same as the effect of canceling the combined cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
Therefore, this cancellation means that the heat source is no longer in use. Incidentally, "occupation" will be explained in detail later with reference to Figures 66 to 68.

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
FIG. 46 shows a case where cooking is performed using the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and "fried chicken" is selected as the cooking menu.

A preheating step using induction heating source 9 is started, and during the period during which current is being applied to the preheating step, cooking step 1 is started using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189. In other words, the preheating step and cooking step 1 overlap in time.
The cooking process 2 is an example in which the food N, which has been heated to a high temperature in the preheating process, is further heated by the induction heating source 9 above the top plate 15 to perform cooking.

As with FIG. 45, FIG. 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 has been detected. Note that FIG. 46 does not show abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command).

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
This is an example of a case where three types of cooking are performed: a preheating step using induction heating source 9, cooking step 1 using induction heating source 9, and cooking step 2 using oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189. This differs from the cooking mode in Fig. 45 in that the preheating step and cooking step 1 overlap in time.

This Figure 46 shows a case where at least one of the above-mentioned abnormalities 1 to 3 has been detected among the main abnormalities that can be detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1). Note that abnormality 4 (when the rotation speeds of the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 do not match the control command content) is not shown in this Figure 46.

Preheating process: First, the induction heating source 9 is energized to start preheating the object N to be heated.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the driving of the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped. Furthermore, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be described later.

The third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are not operated from the beginning in the preheating process, and are therefore not affected at all.
During this preheating process, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (in Figure 46, the cooking menu is "fried chicken").

Cooking process 1: If at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the oven heating source 188 in heating operation is immediately stopped. In addition, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Th1" and "Th2" from the time when the induction heating source 9 is stopped, as will be explained later.

The third cooling fan 128, which has been started at the same time as the oven heat source 188 is driven, is operated for a heat dissipation operation time "T01" from the time when the oven heat source 189 is stopped, as will be described later.
Moreover, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated from the beginning and is therefore not affected at all.

On the other hand, when the microwave heating source 189 is driven, in addition to the operation of the third cooling fan 128, the fourth cooling fan 129 also starts operating at the same time (see FIG. 44).
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the microwave heating source 189 in the heating operation is immediately stopped.
When the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 are in operation, as will be described later, they are operated for the heat dissipation operation times "Tm1", "Tm2", "To1", and "To2".

Cooking step 2: In cooking step 2, the induction heating source 9 is used. Therefore, as soon as the induction heating source 9 is driven, the first and second cooling fans 60, 61 start operating.
When at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the induction heating source 9 is immediately stopped.

As will be described later, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 are operated for heat dissipation operation times "Th1", "Th2" from the time when the driving of the induction heating source 9 is stopped.
Even at this stage of cooking process 2, if at least one of the above-mentioned "Abnormality 1" to "Abnormality 3" is detected by the abnormality detection unit 1 (EM1), the integrated control unit MC immediately cancels the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (in Figure 46, the cooking menu is "fried chicken").

The effect of "cancelling" the combined cooking mode in the preheating step, cooking step 1, and cooking step 2 described above is the same as the effect of canceling the combined cooking mode KM3 itself by pressing the input key 43MT.
This cancellation therefore eliminates the "occupation" of the heat source in use.

Next, we will explain Figure 47.
FIG. 47 explains the operation of the integrated control device MC during the cooking operation of the cooking appliance 1, particularly after an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection unit EM.

The anomaly detection unit EM does not detect anomalies before the actual heating operation starts, such as step MS1 described in FIG. 39. Therefore, it detects physical (electrical, mechanical, etc.) anomalies in the cooking process after the heating operation has actually started.

In FIG. 47, steps S20 to S33 show the operation of the integrated control device MC.
For the sake of simplicity, a case will be described in which the abnormality detection unit EM detects abnormality 1 out of the abnormalities 1 to 3 described above.
Anomaly 1 occurs when the water or cooking liquid contained in the object to be heated N on the top plate 15 boils and spills over, resulting in an abnormality being detected.

When it is detected that liquid has overflowed from the object to be heated N due to induction heating on the top plate 15, the integrated control device MC receives an abnormality signal (determined as "Yes" in step S20). In other words, if the liquid spills onto the top surface of the top plate 15 and reaches the top surface of the input operation unit 40, there is a concern that this could cause the input operation unit 40 to malfunction.

In the next step S21, the inverter circuit 81L is stopped to stop heating the IH coil 17L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL of the operating induction heating source 9. The integrated display unit 30 also displays that the operation has been stopped due to an abnormality. In this case, it is advisable to display the same information on the left display unit 31L.

In the next step S22, it is determined whether any heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, and if the answer is "No", the process proceeds to step S23, where the operation of the two cooling fans 60, 61 is stopped. Note that this operation stop process does not mean that the cooling fans 60, 61 are stopped immediately after step S21. This point will be explained in detail in Figures 48 and 49.

If it is determined in step S22 that a heating source other than the induction heating source 9 is being driven, the process proceeds to step S24.
In step S24, it is determined whether a cooking process is being performed by the microwave heating source 129.

In step S24, if it is determined that a cooking process is being performed using the microwave heating source 189, the process proceeds to step S25.
In step S25, it is repeatedly determined at regular short intervals (less than a few seconds) whether the cooking process by the microwave heating source 189 has ended.

When it is determined that the cooking process using the microwave heating source 189 has ended, the driving of the magnetron 122 is stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S26.
In step S26, it is determined whether or not a cooking process using the oven heat source 188 is being performed.

In step S26, a cooking process using oven heat source 188 is determined to be "No", and the process proceeds to step S30.
On the other hand, if the determination in step S26 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process using the microwave heating source 189 has been completed.
In the next step S28, a process is performed to stop the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 that has been cooling the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 by the cooling air RF6. Note that the cooling air RF6 has been introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201, but the supply of this cooling air is stopped.

The "operation stop process" in step S28 does not mean that the cooling fan 129 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S27. This will be explained in detail in Figures 48 and 49.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S24 is "No", the process proceeds to step S30.
Also, if the determination in step S26 is "No", the process proceeds to step S30.

In step S30, it is repeatedly determined at short intervals (less than a few seconds) whether the cooking process of the oven heat source 188 has ended.
When the power supply to the oven heating source 188 is stopped and the cooking process is completed, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S31.

In step S31, the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process using the oven heat source 188 has ended.
In the next step S32, a process is performed to stop the operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 that has been cooling the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 with the cooling air RF6. Note that this process does not mean that the cooling fan 129 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 48 and 49.

In addition, the third cooling fan 128, which supplies cooling air RF5 to the area around the temperature sensor 160, is stopped. Note that this stop operation process does not mean that the cooling fan 128 is stopped immediately after the determination in step S31. This point will be explained in detail in Figures 48 and 49.

When the operation stop process for each cooling fan 60, 61, 128, 129 is completed by steps S23, S28, S32, and S33 and the cooling fans are stopped, the operation history information shown in step S29 is recorded. In other words, the series of operations from step S20 onwards are stored in an operation history storage area prepared inside the memory device MM and are used for control thereafter. They are also used by users and maintenance and inspection specialists to check for abnormalities, etc.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing the timings for starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when coordinated cooking is performed in the cooking appliance 1.

As shown in FIG. 48, the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 start operating basically at the same time as the start of cooking.
The solid arrows in Fig. 48 indicate the period from the start to the end of operation, and the dashed arrows following the solid lines indicate the additional operation time for heat dissipation, which will be described below. Note that each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 does not actually stop operation at the end of the solid arrows, but continues to operate for the additional operation time.

In the first embodiment, the time from the start to the end of operation of each of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is defined as follows.
First cooling fan 60: Starts operation when induction heating starts. Also starts operation when microwave cooking and oven cooking start. In single cooking mode KM1, "heat dissipation operation" is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the cooking mode ends. This is to cool high-heat parts such as the top plate 15. Depending on the value determined by the "product" of the length of induction heating time and the maximum heat power used (power consumption of the inverter circuit), one of three stages, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes, is selected as the "heat dissipation operation time Th1". This is performed by the IH control unit 90.

In the "cooperative cooking mode" KM3 in which the induction heating source 9 is used, if there is a heating source that finished its heating operation after the induction heating source 9 stopped operating, the first cooling fan 60 performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time that the heating operation of that heating source finished or until the temperature of the top plate 15 drops below the reference temperature. In the cooperative cooking mode KM3, operation is controlled by the integrated control device MC.
In FIG. 48, the "heat dissipation operation time" of the first cooling fan 60 is indicated by the symbol Th1.

Second cooling fan 61: The "heat dissipation operation time Th2" is determined in synchronization with the operation of the first cooling fan 60. This is done by an operation start command and an operation end command from the IH control unit 90. Note that operation starts at the same timing as the first cooling fan 60. In the case of the linked cooking mode KM3, operation is controlled by the integrated control device MC.

Fourth cooling fan 129:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "heat radiation operation" is performed for only 3 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating operation is completed. In other words, this "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes. This is performed by the microwave heating control unit 130.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: The oven will not operate.

Third cooling fan 128:
(1) In the case of microwave heating cooking: "Heat radiation operation time Tm1" is the same as "heat radiation operation time Tm2" of the fourth cooling fan 129. In addition, the start and end of operation are controlled by the microwave heating control unit 130, similar to the fourth cooling fan 129.
(2) In the case of oven cooking: Immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is finished, the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured and the oven is operated until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 falls below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" is determined under these conditions.
Temperature is measured by a temperature sensor 160 that measures non-contact using infrared rays, and a contact-type temperature sensor TS10 (see Figs. 15 and 30). Temperature measurement data is sent to a non-contact temperature measurement unit 158 and a heating chamber control unit 159. The temperature measurement data is finally sent to the integrated control device MC, and the third cooling fan 128 continues to operate until an operation end command is issued to the third cooling fan 128.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the case of oven cooking, the "heat dissipation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128 is important.
In oven cooking, the entire heating chamber 113 becomes hot (for example, 200° C.), and therefore it takes time to cool down such heating chamber 113.
If the temperature of heating chamber 113 is not lowered, the next time microwave cooking is performed immediately, the temperature of heating chamber 113 may be high from the beginning.

If the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is too high, it will be impossible to use the microwave heating source 189 for "warming" cooking. This is because the "warming" control menu employs a control that automatically stops microwave irradiation when the food is heated and reaches, for example, 80°C (default value). Therefore, in order to avoid confusing the user, for example, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is already 80°C or higher, it is necessary to implement error processing and not accept heating cooking.

In this embodiment 1, the relationship between the control menu of embodiment 1 and the operation times (periods) of the first to fourth cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 is set as follows.
That is, the control program of one control menu includes the above-mentioned times such as "heat radiation operation time Th1,""heat radiation operation time Th2," and "heat radiation operation time To1." That is, the operation times of the first cooling fan 60 to the fourth cooling fan 129 are also controlled by the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the integrated control device MC.

Therefore, when one control menu is set, a series of control operations from the end of the heating operation until the end of the heat dissipation operation is determined according to that control menu. In other words, one control menu ends when the operation of the related first cooling fan 60 to fourth cooling fan 129 ends. Therefore, for the induction heating source 9, the arrow indicating the execution period of one control menu is a longer period that extends beyond the execution period of the oven heating source 188 (in the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM3) as shown in FIG. 48.

The above explanation is based on the assumption that the airflow volume (airflow capacity) of the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 during cooking is constant, but it is also possible to make changes such as increasing the airflow volume during cooking and decreasing the airflow volume during heat dissipation operation. Also, it is also possible to perform variable capacity operation such that the airflow volume is decreased when the temperature inside the lower unit 200 or upper unit 100 is low rather than when it is high.

In addition, in FIG. 48, the induction heating source 9 is depicted as being driven (energized) until a point later than the point at which the microwave heating source 189 is driven. This is because, in this example, the induction heating source 9 heats the object N to be heated, for example a frying pan, to a preheating temperature (for example, 180°C) (preheating step), the object to be cooked is slightly heated in the high-temperature frying pan (cooking step 1), and then the object to be cooked is moved to the heating chamber 113 and microwave heated, and it is not necessarily necessary to stop the induction heating source 9 before starting microwave heating.

In addition, in FIG. 48, during oven cooking, the fourth cooling fan 129 may be operated as indicated by the dashed line for the operation period of the fourth cooling fan 129.
In this case (oven cooking), the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is measured immediately after the operation of either or both of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is completed, and the heater 163B is operated until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 falls below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat radiation operation time To2" may be changed from time to time. Or, it may be adjusted to the "heat radiation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128.

Next, we will explain Figure 49.
FIG. 49 is a time chart showing the timings for starting and stopping operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heating sources are driven simultaneously in the cooking appliance 1. In FIG.

Figure 49 is a time chart showing the case where the integrated control device MC executes "abnormality processing mode A" because the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during a cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven simultaneously.

When the induction heating source 9 finishes the heating operation as shown in Fig. 49, the first cooling fan 60 performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time when the heating operation ended as described in Fig. 48. Specifically, as described above, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60 .

On the other hand, the third cooling fan 128 is operated for only the "heat dissipation operation time Tm1" after the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is stopped.
46, the fourth cooling fan 129 is operated for the "heat radiation operation time Tm2" based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 is stopped. This "heat radiation operation time Tm2" is fixed at 3 minutes.

If the abnormality detection unit EM detects, for example, "abnormality 1" on the top plate 15 (e.g., overflow from the object to be heated N), when the integrated control unit MC receives an abnormality detection signal, it immediately stops the operation of the induction heating source 9 arranged inside the upper space 300A. For example, if induction heating is being performed in the left heating unit 17HL, it stops driving the inverter circuit 81L (see Figure 30) dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL by the IH control unit 90. The same applies to "abnormality 2" and "abnormality 3" described above.

In FIG. 49, ET1 indicates the timing at which the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped urgently.
On the other hand, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow rate) as before the occurrence of the abnormality until the timing ET2 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 49, while the microwave heating source 189 is driven, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow rate) as before the occurrence of the abnormality.
Then, based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 has finished driving, the microwave heating source 189 is operated for a "heat radiation operation time Th3" and a "heat radiation operation time Th4".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th3" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th1." Also, the "heat dissipation operation time Th4" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th2."

The "heat radiation operation time Th3" and "heat radiation operation time Th4" are specified to be a maximum of 10 minutes based on the time when the microwave heating source 189 ends its heating operation. This time is determined by the integrated control device MC, which grasps the operation information of the microwave heating control unit 130, and the IH control unit 90 selects only one of three minutes, five minutes, or ten minutes based on the operation information from the integrated control device MC.

As described above, even if the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and causes an emergency stop of the driving sources of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R, etc. of the induction heating source 9 while induction heating cooking and microwave heating cooking are being performed simultaneously, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 that cool the inside of the upper space 300A will continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality, at least until the driving of the microwave heating source 189 is terminated, as explained in FIG. 49.

As a result, the cooling effect of not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire cooking device 1, and the power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, and other important components related to each heating source are not affected in any way. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions such as overheating and quality deterioration of these components.

Next, we will explain Figure 50.
FIG. 50 is a time chart showing the timings for starting and stopping the operation of the first to fourth cooling fans when a plurality of heat sources are driven simultaneously in the cooking appliance 1. In FIG.

Figure 50 is a time chart showing the case where the integrated control device MC executes "abnormality processing mode B" because the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during a cooking process in which both the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously.

When the induction heating source 9 finishes the heating operation as shown in Fig. 50, the first cooling fan 60 performs "heat dissipation operation" for a maximum of 10 minutes from the time when the heating operation finished as described in Fig. 48. Specifically, as described above, the "heat dissipation operation time Th1" is selected from 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes (this is performed by the IH control unit 90).
The second cooling fan 61 is also operated for the same “heat dissipation operation time Th2” as the first cooling fan 60 .

Meanwhile, the third cooling fan 128 measures the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and operates until the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 drops below a certain temperature. In other words, the "heat dissipation operation time Tо1" is determined under these conditions.

If the abnormality detection unit EM detects, for example, overflow from the object to be heated N on the top plate 15, the operation of the induction heating source 9 arranged inside the upper space 300A is immediately stopped, as described in FIG. 49.

In FIG. 50, ET1 indicates the timing when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped urgently.
On the other hand, if the cooking process of the oven heating source 188 has not yet finished when the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 is stopped in this way, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow volume) as before the occurrence of the abnormality until the timing ET3 shown in Figure 48.

As shown in FIG. 50, while the oven heat source 188 is driven, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow rate) as before the occurrence of the abnormality.
Then, based on the time when the oven heating source 188 has finished driving, the oven heating source 188 is operated for a "heat radiation operation time Th5" and a "heat radiation operation time Th6".

The "heat dissipation operation time Th5" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th1." Also, the "heat dissipation operation time Th6" corresponds to the "heat dissipation operation time Th2."

The "heat radiation operation time Th5" and "heat radiation operation time Th6" are set to a maximum of 10 minutes, based on the time when the oven heating source 188 finishes its heating operation. This time is determined by the integrated control device MC, which grasps the operation information of the heating chamber control unit 159. Based on the operation information from the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90 selects only one of three minutes, five minutes, or ten minutes.

When cooking using the oven heating source 188 alone, the fourth cooling fan 129 does not operate, but it may be operated as shown in FIG. 49. In this case, the "heat radiation operation time To2" is the time it takes for the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113 to drop below a certain temperature. In other words, it may be changed from time to time. Or, it may be synchronized with the "heat radiation operation time To1" of the third cooling fan 128.

As described above, even if the abnormality detection unit EM suddenly detects an abnormality and emergency stops the power supply to the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B while induction heating cooking and oven heating cooking are being performed simultaneously, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 that cool the inside of the upper space 300A will continue to operate under the same conditions (airflow volume) as before the abnormality occurred, at least until the operation of the oven heating source 188 is stopped, as explained in FIG. 50.

As a result, the cooling effect of not only the heat sink 82 of the induction heating source 9, but also the integrated control device MC that controls the entire cooking device 1, and the power supply circuit board 55, filter circuit board 54, and other important components related to each heating source are not affected in any way. This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions such as overheating and quality deterioration of these components.

The heat dissipation operation times (Th1, Tm1, To1, Th2, etc.) are guaranteed even if the user turns off the main power by pressing the operation button (key) 98 of the main power switch 97. In other words, the integrated control device MC is programmed to cut off its own power circuit after completing the heat dissipation operation described above.

(Basic operation when cooking in the oven)
Next, a basic operation of the oven heating device 140 in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment will be described.

When the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the integrated control device MC presumes that some kind of cooking will be started and performs a preliminary start. Therefore, oven cooking can be started immediately even if induction heating cooking or microwave heating cooking is not actually being performed in the upper unit 100. However, if the main power switch 97 is once turned OFF, it is necessary to first turn on the main power switch 97 in order to start oven cooking.
Furthermore, pressing the main power switch 97 again will turn it OFF, and all heating and cooking that is being performed will be stopped at the same time (however, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129, which will be described later, will not immediately stop operating, but will continue to operate in a heat dissipation mode until certain conditions are met, as will be described later).

Next, the door 114 is opened and food or other items to be cooked are placed in the heating chamber 113, after which a control menu for cooking using the heating chamber 113 is selected in the central operation section 40M of the input operation section 40. For example, when cooking fish or meat by grilling, the heating time and heat are set. However, if the control menu for automatic grilling is selected, the heat is automatically set by the heating chamber control section 159. The selection of this control menu will be explained later.

The heating chamber control unit 159 receives command signals from the integrated control device MC and controls whether or not the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized, the time period during which they are energized, the energization pattern (intermittent heating), the heat, etc.

The temperature sensors TS2 and TS10 detect the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 with an infrared signal, and transmit the detected temperature data to the heating chamber control unit 159 via the temperature measurement unit 158. The heating chamber control unit 159 checks the difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature and controls the power supply to both or either of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B (feedback control). Note that the temperature sensors TS2 and TS10 are sometimes referred to as the "second temperature sensor."

In addition, when the control method for timer cooking is input through the central operation unit 40M, the upper heater 163A and/or the lower heater 163B are energized for the set time. In other words, the heating chamber control unit 159 does not limit the energization time according to the detected temperature data of the temperature sensors TS2 and TS10.

After the door 114 is closed, when a command to start cooking in the oven (heating chamber 113) is issued on the central operation unit 40M (input key 43MS) of the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC issues a drive command to the heating chamber control unit 159, and starts operating the third cooling fan 128. Note that a drive command signal may be sent directly from the heating chamber control unit 159 to the third cooling fan 128.

When the third cooling fan 128 is operated, air is drawn into the inside of the case A150 through the air intake F152F formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101. However, unlike the case of microwave cooking, the inverter circuit board 121 does not generate heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF5 enters the communication port B138B and the communication port A138A, respectively, without cooling the inverter circuit board 121.

The cooling air RF5 that passes through the communication port A138A is blown out into the heating chamber 113 through the gap between the outer case of the temperature sensor 160 and the edge of the mounting hole, via the detection window 161.

The cooling air RF5 that passes through the communication port A138A is guided to the passage 172. It then reaches the communication port 173 while cooling the upper case 169, and is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102 (see FIG. 15).

On the other hand, the fourth cooling fan 129 is not operated from the start in oven cooking (see Figure 44). If it were operated, the cooling air RF6 would pass through the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 and reach the inside of the duct 153. However, since the magnetron 122 is not driven, it is not generating heat. Therefore, the cooling air RF6 enters the gap GP5R with almost no increase in temperature (see Figures 16 and 17).

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the heating chamber 113 from the inlet 201 as shown in FIG. 17. As a result, the cooling air RF6 reaches the inside portion of the door 114.

The food or other cooked object placed in the heating chamber 113 may generate steam or oily smoke due to the radiant heat from the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B. Such steam, oily smoke, etc. is carried to the communication port 174 by the cooling air RF6 moving from the front to the rear of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 15.

The cooling air RF6 is then introduced into the exhaust duct 102, which extends horizontally rearward from the communication port 174. Then, when the cooling air RF6 leaves the exhaust duct 102, it is attracted by the cooling air RF5 rising upward and passes through the exhaust port 20, before being released into the room (see FIG. 15).

In the above-described embodiment 1, after the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the integrated control device MC controls the overall status of the cooking device 1 up to a certain stage, and if the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R is operated thereafter, the induction heating control is left to the IH control unit 90. However, the range of control by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the IH control unit 90 and the integrated control device MC.

Similarly, the range controlled by the integrated control device MC may be changed between the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

For example, after the selection of one of the control menus, induction heating, microwave heating, or oven (heating chamber) heating, the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130 may basically perform the control operations related to heating.

In this case, if new input is made to the input operation unit 40 (including stopping heating), control will be temporarily performed by the integrated control device MC, but if no input is made, cooking can be performed by either the IH control unit 90, the heating chamber control unit 159, or the microwave heating control unit 130.

(Control during deep-frying by the IH control unit 90)
A specific example of the control operation of the IH control unit 90 will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating the operation of the IH control unit 90 when deep frying (automatic), which is one type of single cooking mode using the induction heating source 9, is performed in the cooking appliance 1.

When "deep frying (automatic cooking)" is selected in the induction heating cooking control menu by operating the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R, the temperature of the cooking oil placed in the heated object (metal pan) N is monitored by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the heat of the IH coils 17L and 17R is automatically controlled.

When the user selects the control menu for deep frying (automatic), the IH control unit 90 sequentially executes a preheating process, a deep frying process, and a heat-up process, as shown in FIG.
Furthermore, on the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30, necessary information and reference information (e.g., the estimated time required for preheating) are displayed in the form of characters, figures, etc. Also, the fact that this is priority cooking and power is not limited (suppressed) by the power control unit 72 is displayed.

This allows the user to know that power will be secured as a priority during deep frying, even if microwave or oven heating is in use.

In the preheating process, if the target oil temperature set by the user is 180°C, the inverter circuit 81R (or 81L) starts operating at a specified heating power value (maximum 1500W) in the preheating process, and the oil temperature rises rapidly from room temperature (e.g. 20°C) to the target temperature T1 of 180°C.

This temperature rise is monitored in real time by the temperature detection circuit 93 described above, so when the temperature detection circuit 93 detects that the target temperature T1 (first temperature) of 180°C has been reached, the IH control unit 90 adjusts the amount of induction heating, i.e., the inverter output, to maintain the target temperature as is (this control action of automatically adjusting the high-frequency heating power to approach the target temperature based on such temperature detection information is hereinafter referred to as "temperature feedback control").

Then, a display command is sent to the integrated control device MC, and audio guidance is given to the user via the voice synthesizer 95, such as "The oil temperature has reached the appropriate level. Please add ingredients."

When the user places ingredients, for example frozen croquettes, into cooking oil, cooking step 1 begins at this point.
The cooking oil is cooled rapidly from the moment it is added by the cold ingredients (croquettes), so its temperature drops sharply as shown in Figure 51. However, the temperature detection circuit 93 monitors this temperature drop and immediately increases the heating power of the inverter circuit 81R (81L) to the specified heating power of 1500W or 1800W, causing the oil temperature to rise again (temperature feedback control). When the oil temperature reaches the target temperature T1 again in this way (or after a specified time has passed), the process switches from the deep frying process to the heating power increase process.

During the heating power increase process, the control device 90 controls the inverter circuit 81R (81L) so that the oil temperature is maintained between the second temperature T2 (225°C) higher than the target temperature T1 and the upper limit temperature (third temperature) T3 (230°C) which is even higher than that.

As shown in FIG. 51, the heating power is about 900 W and the heater is driven intermittently.
The process after the first temperature T1 is reached is called the "deep-frying finishing process" and is an important process for finishing deep-fried foods crisply. If sufficient heat is not applied in this heat-up process, deep-frying will not be done well. Note that the deep-frying process is not limited to a certain time, so when the user presses input key 43R1 (or input key 43L1), all deep-frying is completed.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the (automatic) deep frying control menu, the period from the deep frying process to the heat-up process is defined as the "priority control menu execution time period", and during this execution time period, power reduction is prevented by starting other heating sources or changing operating conditions. In other words, the induction heating IH control unit 90 has the function of constantly knowing whether the control menu being executed is within the "priority control menu execution time period", and if it is within that execution time period, reporting this to the outside.

As is clear from the above explanation, when a specific heating process is started, the integrated control device MC does not issue a control signal to the IH control unit 90 each time, and the progress of the heating process is left entirely to the control of the IH control unit 90.

In the "linked cooking mode KM3" described in detail later, when a control operation including such a "preheating process" is performed, the "cooking process" begins from the stage of the "drying cooking process" where the food to be cooked is actually heated. In other words, the preheating process is not included in the cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2, etc.).

(Display on integrated display unit 30)
Next, the relationship between the integrated display unit 30 and the various input keys of the central operation unit 40M, the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 52 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after the start of the heating cooker 1. Figure 53 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start of the heating cooker 1. Figure 54 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start of the heating cooker 1. Figure 55 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start of the heating cooker 1. Figure 56 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit after the start of the heating cooker 1. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram 1 of the operation of the left operation unit of the heating cooker 1. Figure 58 is an explanatory diagram 1 of the operation of the left operation unit and the integrated display unit of the heating cooker 1. Figure 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker 1. Figure 60 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker 1. Figure 61 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the combined cooking mode of the heating cooker 1. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit when the cooking device 1 is in the combined cooking mode. FIG. 63 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit and the central operation unit when the cooking device 1 is in the combined cooking mode.

Referring now to Fig. 52, when the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display unit 30 is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then causes the integrated display unit 30 to display the display screen 1 of FIG.

In the display screen 1 of FIG. 52, 30A is a display message informing the user that the power is on. 30B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing the user to a dedicated recipe posting site via the Internet. 30C is a message explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code.

When the two-dimensional code 30B is optically read by the information processing terminal 418, the information processing terminal 418 can be connected to an external server 417 that stores information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information 30C and the display text 30A are a type of "common information during standby" 30N.

After display screen 1 in FIG. 52 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. On display screen 2A, the text display "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning displays 30E.

Here, "bumping" refers to the phenomenon in which, for example, when a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew is being heated, the inside of the food becomes overheated above the boiling point, causing sudden, violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets may fly off, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping is said to be the introduction of foreign matter from outside or an impact. For this reason, when a metal pot or the like containing food is placed on the top plate 15 and induction heated, a warning is displayed when stirring the food. The information displayed in this warning is a type of "common information during standby" 30N.

The three display screens, display screen 1, display screen 2A, and display screen 2B, which are the standby initial screen 30Z shown in FIG. 52, may be referred to as the "common screen" 30Z. Note that the common screen 30Z may include forms other than these three.

On display screen 2B, 30E is a warning display that warns the user that the inside of heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature and that the user should not come into contact with the high temperature. If the integrated control device MC detects that heating chamber 113 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 113, the display screen will automatically switch to this state.

Although display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, they may be displayed alternately at intervals of a few seconds to alert users to both the bumping and high temperature indications. In addition, the alerts on display screens 2A and 2B may be displayed in voice in parallel using a voice synthesizer 95.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2A, 2B in Figure 52, these displays are made using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, rather than displaying partially in any of the first area 30L to third area 30R described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 30L to third area 30R are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user sees them displayed on the entire integrated display unit 30.

The display screens 1 to 2A and 2B are at stage ST3 in terms of the operation steps of FIG.
When a certain time (e.g., 3 or 5 seconds) has elapsed from the time when display screen 1 to display screen 2A, 2B are displayed, the display content changes to one that prompts the user to select one of input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43L1, 43R1 (corresponding to operational step ST4 in Figure 38).

Next, induction heating cooking will be described with reference to FIG. 53. Note that FIG. 53 describes the case of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, not the case of the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3.

Figure 53 is a plan view of the left display unit 31L and left operation unit 40L for the left heating source 17HL. Before the input key 44L (or 43L1) for selecting cooking with the left heating unit 17HL is pressed, at least one of the display screens 1 to 3 in Figure 53 is displayed.

After at least one of the display screens 1 to 3 in FIG. 52 has been displayed, the integrated control device MC automatically switches the display screen from the standby initial screen 30Z to the guidance screen 30SA.
When the input key 43M1 is pressed while viewing the guide screen 30SA, the display screen 4ST is displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (the guide screen 30SA disappears at the same time).

That is, the default screen of the second specific screen 30SC for the combination cooking mode KM2 described later is displayed.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53, when the input key 44L (or 43L1) of the individual operation unit 40L is pressed, the third specific screen 30ST of the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 is displayed, and the display screen 3A for selecting "Keep Warm" from one control menu is displayed (the guidance screen 30SA disappears at the same time).

As shown by the dashed line in FIG. 53, when the input key 43MC is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is displayed (not shown). When the input key 43R1 of the individual operation unit 40R is pressed, the third specific screen 30ST of the independent cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 is displayed, and the display screen 3A for selecting "Keep Warm" in one control menu is displayed (the guide screen 30SA disappears at the same time).

Figure 54 shows the aforementioned guidance screen 30SA. As mentioned above, after the aforementioned display screen 1 (see Figures 52 and 53), when a certain period of time has elapsed (e.g., 3 or 5 seconds), this guidance screen 30SA is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

As shown in FIG. 54, the three display areas (first area 30L to third area 30R) each display a list of display units 510 that indicate in text the three cooking modes or heating sources: "Linked cooking," "Combined cooking," and "IH cooking."

In FIG. 54, 501 is first information that clearly identifies the first cooking mode selection unit (input key) 43MC. This first information 501 is information that corresponds one-to-one to the first identification information 507 (see FIG. 21) that is printed, engraved, or the like, in the vicinity of the front (surface) of the input key 43MC.

In FIG. 54, 502 is second information that clearly identifies the second cooking mode selection unit (input key) 43M1. This second information 502 is information that corresponds one-to-one to the second identification information 508 (see FIG. 21) that is printed, engraved, or the like, in the vicinity of the front (surface) of the input key 43M1.

In FIG. 54, 503 is third information that clearly identifies the third cooking mode selection section (input key) 43M1. This third information 503 is information that corresponds one-to-one to the third identification information 509R (see FIG. 22), 509L (see FIG. 23) that is printed, engraved, or the like on the front (surface) of the input key 44R (or 43R1), 44L (or 43L1) described above.

As shown in FIG. 54, the guidance screen 30SA may wait for an input operation for a certain period of time (maximum 30 minutes) while displaying the display unit 510 and the first information 501 to the third information 503 in a list state.

Alternatively, the guidance screen 30SA may be configured to have an alternating display form in which, after a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed while the display unit 510 and the first information 501 to the third information 503 are displayed in a list form, the guidance screen 30SA automatically switches to the standby initial screen 30Z, and after a certain period of time (e.g., 3 or 5 seconds) has elapsed on the standby initial screen 30Z, the guidance screen 30SA is returned to.

In other words, the guidance screen 30SA and the standby initial screen 30Z may be displayed in a manner such that one of them is displayed first and the other is displayed later, or both are displayed alternately multiple times.

As yet another display format, as shown in FIG. 55, display screens 1A to 1D may be displayed at regular time intervals (for example, 3 or 5 seconds each), and then the standby initial screen 30Z may be displayed for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds). Then, display screens 1A to 1D may be displayed again.

On the other hand, the voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) 95 notifies the user by voice of the display contents (displayed information) of the guide screen 30SA when it is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 or when display screens 1A to 1D are displayed as shown in FIG. 55, and also notifies the user by voice of the input keys to be operated.

For example, on display screen 1B, it would be good to display a message such as, "When using both the heating chamber and the induction cooker for coordinated cooking, select key number 1." In this case, the "key number 1" is input key 43MC, which corresponds to first specific information 507, as shown in FIG. 21.

When the input key 43MC is pressed for the first time after going through the above process, the integrated display unit 30 switches from the guide screen 30SA or the standby initial screen 30Z to the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 56. However, if the "permission conditions" described below are not met, a display or audio notification is given to the effect that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected (see FIG. 78).

The integrated control device MC is configured to automatically turn off the main power switch 97 when the time that has elapsed without operation of either the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC or the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 exceeds a certain time limit (30 minutes) from the time that the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed or the time that the first information 501 and the second information 502 are audibly notified by the audio notification unit 95.

Next, we will explain Figures 57 (A) and (B).
In FIG. 57, a star symbol indicates that the light emitting display section 27 is lit or flashing.

When using the left heating unit 17HL in the single cooking mode KM1, (after turning on the main power switch 97) first press the input key 44L (or 43L1). This selects the left heating unit 17HL.

When switching to induction heating in the linked cooking mode KM3 (described later), the input key 44L is pressed first. This is different from the case of the single cooking mode KM1.

As shown in FIG. 53A, the individual light emitting portion 27L3 corresponding to the input key 43L1 is blinking and is in a state of waiting for an input.
When the input key 43L1 is pressed, the integrated control device MC detects that the user has selected the left heating source 17HL. Then, as shown in FIG. 57B, the integrated control device MC causes the individual light-emitting unit 27L3 to emit light, indicating that an operation input has been received.

The input key 43L4 for selecting timer cooking is also waiting for input, so the individual light-emitting element 27L1 is made to flash. Also, the selection of the control menu is also waiting for input, so the individual light-emitting element 27L2 located directly behind the input key 44L is made to flash.

If the default heat level of the heat level indicator 67L, which shows the heat level during induction heating cooking, is set to "3," the light-emitting portion of the heat level indicator 67L will continuously light up from the left side (or change from blue to red) until it indicates heat level 3, thereby indicating the level of heat level to the user.

When the user wants to change the heat level to something other than the default setting, by pressing input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heat level will decrease or increase by one level each time the key is pressed, and the range of the light-emitting portion (or the red light-emitting portion) of heat level display unit 67L will expand from left to right or shrink to the left accordingly, thereby displaying the heat level adjustment status to the user.

Next, we will explain Figure 58.
FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the left operating unit 40L and the left display unit 31L of the cooking appliance 1.
In Fig. 58, states A to C on the left side are schematic diagrams of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L. State A in Fig. 58 shows the state before operation begins.

As described in FIG. 57, when the input key 43L1 is operated, the light-emitting display section 27L3 emits light continuously as shown in state B in FIG.
In state B, the light-emitting indicator 27L4 is also lit, and it can be seen that the input functions of both the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 are valid. Therefore, pressing the left input key 43L2 decreases the flame power. The increase or decrease in flame power can be seen from the light-emitting state of the flame power indicator 67L located immediately behind it.

Next, the "single (heating) cooking mode" using the induction heating source 9 will be described.
For ease of explanation, a case in which the left heating unit 17HL is used will be explained.

When the input key 43L2 on the left operation unit 40L is pressed once, the heat level is specified down to level 1, and the integrated control device MC determines that the "keep warm" control mode has been specified, and the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 displays the "third specific screen" 30ST, which shows "keep warm" as one of the "control menus."

Furthermore, when the input key 44L is pressed once while the third specific screen 30ST is displayed, "deep-fried food" is selected as one control menu from the control menu group, and the "third specific screen" 30ST corresponding to deep-fried food is displayed.
The "third specific screen 30ST" for deep-frying has a default temperature set to 180°C, so the text "Deep-frying 180°C" may be displayed.

When the input key 44L is pressed once more, the "third specific screen 30ST" corresponding to preheating is displayed.
Information such as how to use the preheating menu and the recommended control mode for making eggs, etc. may also be displayed.

As can be seen from the display screen 3A in Figure 58, the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 displays a "schematic diagram of a container" 280 such as a pot, and the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form a wide horizontal display area.

The words "Keep Warm (Left IH)" are displayed in the combined space of the second area 30M and the third area 30R, indicating that the temperature for keeping warm is approximately 80°C. An explanatory text 30F indicates that this is a recommended control menu for soups, etc. At this stage of the display screen 3A, nothing is displayed on the left display section 31L. However, the temperature for keeping warm may be displayed as "80°C" as shown in FIG. 58.

Next, when the input key 44L is pressed in state B of FIG. 58, each time it is pressed, one control menu is selected from the "IH control menu group" and displayed as in display screen 3B. The example of display screen 3B shows that "deep-frying" has been selected. After a certain period of time has elapsed in this state B, the control menu for the left heating unit 17HL is confirmed as "deep-frying" and the operation of the IH coil 17L begins. As explained in FIG. 39, the IH control menu group includes "boiling" and "boiling water" in addition to "deep-frying".

In the case of display screen 3B, the default temperature is set to 180° C., so the left display section 31L displays the words "Deep frying 180° C." as shown in FIG.
This temperature of "180°C" means that the cooking oil is heated by the IH coil 17L and maintained at around 180°C. When 180°C is reached, a voice synthesizer 95 will notify the user by voice. In addition, the integrated display unit 30 will display "preheating temperature has been reached," which is expected to have the effect of encouraging the user to add ingredients, etc.

If you want to change the preheat (target) temperature in this frying (automatic) control menu, you can lower the temperature using input key 43L2 or raise the temperature using input key 43L3.

As can be seen from display screen 3B, display screen 30D combines second area 30M and third area 30R to form a wide horizontal display area, and in the combined space of second area 30M and third area 30R, a warning message 30G is displayed informing the user that preheating has started and that the user should not leave the vicinity of cooking appliance 1 during the preheating operation.

Next, in state B of FIG. 58, when input key 44L, known as the menu key, is pressed and "suitable temperature" is selected as another control menu, display screen 3C is displayed. As shown in display screen 3C, the control menu "suitable temperature" is a control mode recommended for heating a pan or the like to a set temperature (default temperature is 180°C) and for making eggs and the like. A recommendation 30H is displayed so that this meaning can be understood. At the display screen 3C stage, text information saying "Preheat 180°C" is displayed on the left display section 31L. In addition, in the case of this "suitable temperature," heating is performed without adding cooking oil or the like to the heated object N, such as a frying pan.

The "third specific screen" 30ST may be displayed on the individual display units (left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) adjacent to the dedicated operation units (right operation unit 40R, left operation unit 40L).

Next, we will explain Figure 59.
59 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking appliance 1 is operated. The scene in which the composite cooking mode KM2 is executed is shown.
Since the display screen 4ST is a default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC, "Warm" is displayed in the center of the front-to-rear direction of the first area 30L.

As described with reference to FIG. 21, when the input key 43M1 is operated without pressing the input key 43MC, the display screen 4ST of FIG.
As is clear from the display screen 4ST, a specific text 30J indicating the name of one control menu (of the RG control menus), "Warm," is displayed large in the center of the front-rear direction of the first area 30L.

The word "oven" is displayed slightly smaller on the BK side behind the specific text 30J for "warm" that is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, and conversely, the word "microwave manual" is displayed slightly smaller on the FR side in front of it.

When the user selects the control menu, the next options are "Oven" and "Microwave Manual." If the user presses the input key 43M1 (left side) located in the position corresponding to the first area 31L once at this stage, the word "Warm" (specific sentence 30J) changes to "Microwave Manual."
Moreover, when the input key 43M1 (on the right side) located in the position corresponding to the first area 31L is pressed once, the word "warm" changes to "oven."

In FIG. 59, the display screen 4ST, which is the default display screen, displays target temperature information 30T of "80°C" in the second area 30M. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, if the food temperature is 80°C, microwave heating will automatically stop when the temperature sensor TS1 detects 80°C.

To raise the target temperature (80°C) in the second area 30M to 85°C, operate the right input key 43M2 located just before the second area 30M once. Conversely, to lower the temperature to 75°C, operate the left input key 43M2 once.

A mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is displayed above the target temperature (80°C) in the second area 30M. Also, a downward-pointing (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed below the 80°C number.

The shape of this symbol 30UP is similar to that of the input key 43M2 (on the right side) of the central operation unit 40M, so that the user can easily understand that to increase the temperature or heat, etc., they should operate the input key 43M2 on the right side.

Conversely, because the shape of the symbol 30DN and the (left) input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M are similar, it is easy for the user to understand that to lower the temperature or heat, etc., they should operate the left input key 43M2. This correspondence rule also applies to the relationship between the display in the third area 30R and the pair of left and right input keys 43M3. In this way, efforts are made to prevent users from making input operations (pressing the wrong input key).

In FIG. 59, 30K is a heating source display section that displays in text that the only heating source is the microwave heating source 189. As mentioned above, 30P is reference information that is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for warming side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 30Q, or two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for a few seconds on the display screen 30D.

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 of FIG. 37, information (reference information) 30P1 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time in response to the operation of the input key 43M3.
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 30P that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warm up") is displayed so that the user does not hesitate as to whether or not to select each control menu (e.g., "warm up").
Furthermore, when reference information 30P is displayed as shown in FIG. 59, if the (two) input keys 43M3 located in front of the reference information 30P are touched, the reference information 30P1 can be displayed in the third area 30R instead of the reference information 30P.

Next, we will explain Figure 60.
FIG. 60 is another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when the central operation unit 40M of the cooking appliance 1 is operated to implement the combined cooking mode KM2.

The display screens 5ST, 5UPN, 5DN1, etc. shown in FIG. 60 are all types of the second specific screen 30SC.
When the control menu is set to "manual range", the display screen 5ST is the default display screen determined by the integrated control device MC.
That is, in the second specific screen 30SC in the collaborative cooking mode, one control menu (in this case, "Microwave manual") and the default values of the control conditions (in this case, microwave output 500 W, heating for 1 minute) are displayed as a set.

As explained in FIG. 21 and FIG. 60, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the display screen 4ST in FIG. 59 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 as one type of the second specific screen 30SC. Next, when the input key 43M1 on the left side of the central operation unit 40M is operated several times, the specific text 30J changes to "Range Manual" and the display screen 5ST in FIG. 60 is displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

As is clear from the display screen 5ST, the specific text 30J of the control menu "Manual Range" is displayed large in the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L.

In the display screen 5ST, the microwave output value (watt value) information 30X of "500 W" is displayed in the second area 30M. In addition, the adjacent third area 30R displays microwave heating time information 30MY of "1 minute 00 seconds." As can be seen from this display screen 5ST, although it is included in the combined cooking mode, in this "manual range" it is known from the beginning that only the microwave heating source 189 will be used, so the heating source display section 30K as shown in FIG. 59 (which displays in text the microwave heating source 189) does not need to be displayed.

If you want to lower the microwave output value (watt value) of 500 W in the second area 30M of this display screen 5ST by one step to 200 W, you can do so by operating the left input key 43M2 once.

Similarly, to increase the heating time of the second area 30R to 1 minute 10 seconds, operate the right input key 43M3 once, located immediately before the third area 30M. Conversely, to decrease the heating time by one step to 50 seconds, operate the left input key 43M3 once.

In the display screen 5ST in Figure 60, the mountain-shaped symbol 30UP is not displayed above the number for the output (500W) in the second area 30M. Similarly, a downward-pointed (V-shaped) symbol 30DN is displayed below the number 500W.

The display screen 5DNN in FIG. 60 shows the minimum heat (100 W) and the shortest time (10 seconds), and the display contents of the first area 30L are omitted.
The symbol 30UP is displayed only above the minimum heat (100W) on the display screen 5DNN, indicating that only heats greater than this can be selected. Similarly, the symbol 30UP is displayed only above the number for the shortest time (10 seconds), and the symbol 30DN is not displayed. In other words, the symbol 30UP indicates that a time shorter than this cannot be selected.

Next, we will explain Figure 61.
61 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 is performed. That is, it shows a situation in which the display contents of the second specific screen 30SC change from time to time in response to an input operation by the user.

When the display screen shown in FIG. 60 is displayed, operating the left input key 43M1 corresponding to the first area 30L once will change the setting from "Microwave manual" to "Pre-boil leafy vegetables," as shown in FIG. 61.

The display screen 6ST in Fig. 61 is the default display screen. In the first area 30L, a specific sentence (name) 30J of the control menu, "Pre-boil leafy vegetables", is displayed in a large size.
In the second area 30M, the information 30V indicating the microwave output level is displayed as "standard", and if cooking is started in this state, heating will be performed at 500 W. The microwave output value in this case of "standard" may be 500 W, but it may be other than this. In other words, the "standard" heating level when using the microwave heating source 9 differs for each composite cooking menu, and is not always the same output (for example, 500 W).

In the first area 30L of FIG. 61, as explained in FIG. 59, a heating source display section 30K is displayed indicating in text that the heating source is a microwave heating source 189. As mentioned above, 30P is a recommendation (reference information) indicating that this is a recommended control mode for heating side dishes, etc. The content of this recommendation may be other additional information 30Q, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately for several seconds on the display screen 30D.

Instead of the recommendation text 30P in FIG. 61, as explained in FIG. 59, reference information 30P1 showing the main points of each control menu shown in category 2 in FIG. 37 may be displayed each time in response to a user request.

Next, we will explain Figure 62.
62 is yet another schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 when cooking in the composite cooking mode KM2 is performed. The display contents of the second specific screen 30SC are shown to change from time to time in response to an input operation by the user.
FIG. 62 shows a scene where a range grill (RG) control menu "RG cooking" is selected.

As described above, the "RG cooking" is a control menu (of the combined cooking mode KM2) that allows cooking by combining microwave heating and oven heating using the heating chamber 113.
There are three types of patterns: microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heating is performed by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B, heating is performed in the reverse order, and microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously. Note that "simultaneously" does not mean that the timing of both the start and end of heating is exactly the same, but rather that the time periods of the heating operations overlap even partially.

The display screen 7ST1 shown in Figure 62 shows that the heating control (time control) pattern is to first drive both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 simultaneously to heat for one minute, and then stop the microwave heating and heat only with the oven heating source 188 for five minutes.

The reason why the term "range grill" is not used and the abbreviated form "RG" is to minimize the number of characters that can be displayed in the first display area 30L. If more characters were to be displayed, the area occupied by the first area 30L would increase.

In the example display shown in Figure 62, heating time information 30S is displayed in minutes in the second area 30M, and subsequent grill cooking heating time information 30GY is also displayed in minutes (however, if the time is short, it is displayed in 10-second units).
The heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M and the heating time information 30GY shown in the third area 30R can be changed as appropriate by the input keys 43M2 and 43M3 of the central operation unit 40M.

In FIG. 62, display screen 7ST2 shows a heating control (time control) pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 alone is used to heat for one minute (microwave output 500 W) at first, and then the oven heating source 188 alone is used to heat for five minutes. This display screen 7ST2 is the default display screen. Note that display screen 7ST1, which drives both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating edge 188 for only the first minute, is also the default display screen. The user can specify the default display screen in advance ("Function setting" using input key 43KP as described above).

Next, we will explain Figure 63.
Figure 63 is a schematic plan view illustrating the state of the display screen 6ST displaying the control menu for "pre-boiling leafy vegetables" shown in Figure 61 at a predetermined position (center position between front and back) in the first area 30L, and the operation of the central operating unit 40M.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 causes the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 to emit light in a unified color.

Thereafter, when the selection input key 43M1 for the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the display screen 6ST shown in FIG. 61 is displayed by default in the first area 30L.
At this display stage, all of the four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can receive input, and therefore the two individual light emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to the four input keys 43M1 to 43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, after the display screen 6ST, the display screen 6UP1, 6DN1, etc. are displayed, the individual light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the start input key 43MS changes from continuous illumination to blinking, as shown by the dotted circle in FIG. 63. The presence of the input key 43MS is then highlighted with light.

When the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 63, the mode transitions to the combined cooking mode KM2. In the case of a heating means other than the induction heating source 9, the heating operation starts immediately. However, in the case of the induction heating source 9, after transitioning to the combined cooking mode KM2, it is necessary to press the input key 44R (or 43R1) or the input key 44L (or 43L1) once. Note that the same is true in the linked cooking mode KM3 after a command to transition to a cooking process using the induction heating source 9 is given (by the input key 43MS).

In this manner, in the first embodiment, a light-emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63) is provided which causes each of the light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light in the first light-emitting mode (continuous light emission) when the input functions of the input key 43M1 and the input key 43MS are valid.
The integrated control device MC is configured to, when displaying the reference information 30P, 30P1, cause only the light-emitting portion 27M6 corresponding to the start selection portion (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light-emitting form (flashing).

Because of the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state of waiting for a command to start the heating operation (in combined cooking mode KM2) by the blinking of the light-emitting unit 27M6. Note that the light-emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT that can stop the microwave heating and oven heating operations. Therefore, even after the heating operation has started, if the light-emitting unit 27M6 is emitting light, the input function of the input key 43MT is also valid, and a command to stop heating can be sent by touching it.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display drive circuit 63 may be configured to blink only the light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection element, from the beginning. The other light emitting elements 27M1 to 27M4 may be configured to emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection element.

(Basic operation during heating and cooking in the linked cooking mode)
Next, the basic operation of the combined cooking mode KM3 will be described with reference to Figures 64 to 73.
Fig. 64 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M during cooperative cooking. Fig. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operations and steps when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 are performed. Fig. 66 is explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode and the single cooking mode. Fig. 67 is explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, a first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 64 is displayed.
Even if the input key 43M1 is pressed first and the operation for setting the combined cooking mode KM2 as shown in Figures 59 to 63 is halfway completed, if the operation is at a stage before the input key 43MS is pressed, the input process for the combined cooking mode KM3 will be started from the stage at which the input key 43MC is pressed. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP will be displayed from this stage.

When the input key 43M1 is touched next after the input key 43MC, further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food) 330 is displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) to identify the food to be cooked that is the target of the multiple linked cooking modes KM3 (the linked cooking menu).

In FIG. 64, the number of "foods" that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is three. That is, there are three: "hamburger steak," "gratin," and "roast beef." In this way, the number of food items is called the "number of coordinated cooking menus."

In this embodiment 1, there are a total of eight collaborative cooking menus. Details are explained in Figures 87 to 88.

In FIG. 64, 330 is identification information, which in this embodiment 1 is information indicating the name of the food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak).
There are eight pieces of identification information 330. In other words, the number of linked cooking menus is also eight. Reference numeral 331 denotes additional information presented to the user regarding cooking of an object to be cooked (e.g., a hamburger steak).

In FIG. 64, the additional information 331 indicates that "Press the start button to start heating the left IH." This means that by pressing the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M, induction heating can be started in the left heating unit 17HL. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press the input key 44L (or 43L1) on the left operation unit 40L after pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 64, identification information 330A indicating the name of another cooking item (e.g., gratin) is displayed above the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.
Further, identification information 330B indicating the name of another food item (e.g., roast beef) is displayed below the identification information 330. In the following description, when the identification information is collectively referred to, the reference numeral 330 is used.

Similar to the switching of the display of the "composite cooking mode KM2" described in Figures 59 to 63, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (e.g., hamburger steak) changes in a manner that it moves sequentially upward or downward. In other words, the identification information 330 can be displayed sequentially at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in the first area 30L by forward and backward movement.

In this embodiment 1, as mentioned above, there are a total of eight types of food items in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all food items will be cycled through. Conversely, if the right input key 43M1 is operated eight times, the identification information 330 of all food items will be cycled through. This will be explained in detail in Figures 87 to 89.

The default display for the collaborative cooking menu is "Hamburger" as shown in FIG.
Identification information 330 indicating the name of this food (hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the front-rear direction (of the first area 30L). In this state, by operating the input key 43M1, identification information of another food can be displayed in the center (corresponding to step STR4 in FIG. 79).

In this embodiment 1, the "first specific screen" 30SP refers to the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 shown in FIG. 64. The display content of this first specific screen SP is not always the same because it changes from time to time depending on the input by the user to the central operation unit 40M and the operating state of the cooking appliance 1.

The main information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP is as shown in FIG.
(1) The first area 30L displays the identification information 330. In principle, the identification information 330 is always displayed even when the heating process of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 progresses. However, there are some exceptions, as shown on the display screen 10C in FIG. 98(B).
(2) In the first half of the horizontally long area formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a pair of heating unit specifying parts 333R, 333L corresponding to the heating units of the induction heating source 9 to be used are displayed. Either one of these heating unit specifying parts 333R, 333L can be selected by operating the input key 43M2. The selected heating unit specifying part 333R, 333L changes color or brightness, for example, to show the character "left" in white as shown in Fig. 64, to indicate the selected heating unit (either the right or the left).
(3) In the latter half of the horizontally long area formed by combining the second area 30M and the third area 30R, a horizontally long band-shaped process display section 332 is displayed. This process display section 332 is continuously displayed from before the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 until all cooking processes in the cooperative cooking mode are completed. In addition, the content is updated as the cooking process progresses, for example by displaying inverted black and white or changing the color, so that the current cooking process can be identified. This will be described in detail later.
(4) Additional information 331 useful for cooking is displayed to the right of the heating unit identification sections 333R and 333L. In exceptional cases, the additional information 331 may be displayed over a wide area covering the entire integrated display section 30 (see display screen 10C in FIG. 98B).

When the input key 43MS is pressed while the identification information 330 of the desired food (e.g., hamburger steak) is displayed in the center of the first area 30L, a command to execute the linked cooking mode KM3 for heating and cooking the food is sent to the integrated control device MC (corresponding to step STR7 in FIG. 79).

When cooking using the induction heating source 9 in cooking step 1 (e.g., hamburger steak), either the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR may be recommended depending on the linked cooking mode. For example, to recommend the use of the left heating unit 17HL, the default display screen of the first specific screen 30SP for hamburger steak is as shown in FIG. 64, and the left heating unit 17HL is recommended.

The additional information 331 changes as the cooking process progresses and also changes depending on the food being cooked. The example shown in FIG. 64 explains that in order to start induction heating cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS.

Next, we will explain Figure 65.
In the flow chart for explaining the control operation of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 38, the operation after step ST4 is shown in FIG.

After the display/notification step (ST4) in which the guide screen 30SA is displayed and the user is prompted to select a heating method, the user can select cooking using the right heating unit 17HR with the right operating unit 40R (SP1). Also, cooking using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected with the left operating unit 40L (SP2).

Furthermore, after step (ST4), the central operation unit 40M can be used to select cooking using the microwave heating source 189 (SS1). The central operation unit 40M can also be used to select cooking using the oven heating source 188 in the heating chamber 113 (SS2).

Furthermore, the combined cooking mode KM2 can be selected by the central operation unit 40M (SS3A). Also, the single cooking mode KM1 can be selected (SS3B).

After the step (ST4), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be selected by operating the input keys 43MC of the central operation unit 40M (SR1).
In Fig. 65, CH1 is a first-layer selection means for selecting one of three types of heat sources. That is, the first-layer selection means includes a total of four input keys: input key 43MC and input key 43M1 of central operation unit 40M, input key 44L (or 43L1) of left operation unit 40L, which is an individual operation unit, and input key 44R (or 43R1) of right operation unit 40R.

As mentioned above, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.; the same applies below) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions (hereinafter referred to as "control conditions") can be set independently.

More specifically, in the “cooperative cooking” in this embodiment 1, the heating locations for one food item are on top of top plate 15 and inside heating chamber 113 .
The two types of heating sources for which heating operation conditions can be set independently are the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189. The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 perform heating operations during the same time period or with a time difference.

In the first embodiment, the "coordinated cooking" is made up of two coordinated cooking operations: a "first coordinated cooking" and a "second coordinated cooking".
The "first coordinated cooking" refers to first cooking with the induction heating source 9 in the left heating section 17HL, and then cooking with microwaves inside the heating chamber 113. The cooking process of this "first coordinated cooking", i.e., the cooking sequence, is defined by the "first coordinated cooking mode" (SR2A).

On the other hand, "second coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that is first performed inside the heating chamber 113 using microwave heating or the oven heating source 188, or using these two heating sources in combination, and then cooking is performed in the left heating section 17HL using the induction heating source 9.

The cooking steps of this "second coordinated cooking", that is, the cooking sequence, are defined in the "second coordinated cooking mode" (SR2B).
In the case of the second collaborative cooking mode, normally (default setting condition), the integrated control device MC performs a process to restrict operation corresponding to menus other than the collaborative cooking mode KM3 for a specific period of time for either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, which are the heating sources used first.

The selection of the "first coordinated cooking mode" and the "second coordinated cooking mode" (SR2A, SR2B) is not made by the user each time he or she makes a decision to select, but is automatically selected (determined) by the integrated control device MC when the user selects identification information 330 (for example, the name of a dish called "hamburger steak") that corresponds to a coordinated cooking menu in the coordinated cooking mode.

In this embodiment 1, the heating parts of the induction heating source 9 that are used when the "coordinated cooking" menu is executed are both the right heating part 17HR and the left heating part 17HL. Therefore, if, for example, only the left heating part 17HL is being used during the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the right heating part 17HR can be used freely during the execution of the coordinated cooking mode, independent of coordinated cooking. However, if the power control part 72 determines that the total power consumption during coordinated cooking and the power consumption of the right heating part 17HR used separately exceeds the limit value, the integrated control device MC issues a command to prohibit the use of the right heating part 17HR or to forcibly reduce the heat.

In FIG. 61, CH2 is a second-level selection means for selecting a control menu. That is, in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the second-level selection means is the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M.

On the other hand, the second layer selection means in the composite cooking mode KM2 is the input key 43M1 of the central operation section 40M.
Furthermore, as the second layer selection means, in the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, there are input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L. Similarly, there are two input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R.

In other words, in this embodiment 1, the input keys for forwarding and backwards through the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and displaying them at a predetermined display position on the integrated display unit 30 are both input keys 43M1. Therefore, when the user selects a cooking menu or a control menu, the desired cooking menu, etc. can be displayed by the same input key 43M1, which provides good operability.

As shown in FIG. 65, at the stage where induction heating cooking has started (SR5), the user can operate input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L to specify the heating power (power consumption) of the left heating unit 17HL (SR6). Also, by operating input key 44R (or 43L1), the heating operation can be stopped at any time (SR7).

In addition, in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the heating and cooking time of the left heating unit 17HL is not generally set in advance, so the user can heat and cook for any desired time.

In addition, at the stage where induction heating cooking has started using the right heating unit 17HR (SR5), the user can operate the input keys 43R2 and 43R3 of the right operation unit 40R to specify the heating power (power consumption) of the right heating unit 17HR (SR6).

Furthermore, when the right heating unit 17HR is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 44R (or 43R1) (SR7).
Furthermore, when the left heating unit 17HL is being driven, the heating operation can be stopped at any timing by operating the input key 44L (or 43L1) (SR7).

When cooking step 1 by the left heating unit 17HL is ended by input key 44L, the cooking step in the linked cooking mode KM3 proceeds to the next cooking step 2 (described in detail in FIG. 68).

When the induction heating process is completed during the cooking process of the first coordinated cooking, it is necessary to operate the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M again (SR8). When a command to resume this coordinated cooking is issued (SR9), it may be possible to increase or decrease the microwave output value during microwave heating by operating the input key 43M2 or 43M3 on the central operation unit 40M (SR10). However, there are also cases where the microwave output is fixed at, for example, 500 W as the cooking process proceeds.

When microwave heating cooking (cooking process 2) is ended by input key 43MT, all cooking processes in the linked cooking mode KM3 end at this point (SR11). In other words, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 becomes the same as if it had been canceled. However, if cooking process 3 follows cooking process 2, the setting state of the linked cooking mode KM3 is maintained.

Although this is not a cooking step of the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the user may operate the central operation unit 40M thereafter (using the combined cooking mode KM2 or the independent cooking mode KM1) to further perform microwave heating cooking.

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
SS1 to SS11 in FIG. 65 show the operation steps when microwave cooking and oven cooking are performed by the central operation unit 40M.
As described above, by operating the input key 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M, the control menu (11 types) of the single cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 for microwave heating and oven heating is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see FIG. 34).

Therefore, by pressing the input key 43M1, the control menu of one of the composite cooking mode KM2 or the control menu of the single control mode KM1 can be selected (SS3). However, as described above, since only the composite cooking mode KM2 can be selected on the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40, the third specific screen 30ST is not displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Next, by pressing the input key 43MS, execution of one of the composite cooking modes KM2 or the independent control mode KM1 is commanded (SS4), and cooking can be started (SS5). Note that in the explanation of FIG. 34, the overall explanation was given as a composite cooking mode, but strictly speaking, menus such as "Microwave manual" are control patterns of the independent cooking mode KM1, but cannot be selected when one wants to select the composite cooking mode KM2. In other words, in reality, they also include the control menu of the independent heating mode KM1. This was explained in FIG. 37.

For example, when the input key 43M1 is operated, the above-mentioned control menu "Range Grill (RG) Cooking" can be displayed on the integrated display unit, and this "RG Cooking" is a single control menu (of the combined cooking mode KM2) that combines microwave heating cooking and grill cooking.

On the other hand, by operating the same input key 43M1, "warm" can be selected, but this is cooking using the microwave heating source 189 alone, and is one control menu of the single cooking mode KM1. Due to the constraints of the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M, the single cooking mode KM1 cannot be directly selected for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the corresponding third specific screen 30ST cannot be displayed.

After the microwave heating or oven heating starts, the heating conditions (for example, heating time) may be changed (SS6).
When the input key 43MT is pressed, a command is issued to stop the execution of one control menu (SS7), and the microwave heating or oven heating operation is stopped (SS8).

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
SP1 to SP8 in FIG. 65 show operation steps when induction heating cooking is performed using the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40R.
For example, by pressing the input key 43L1 of the left operation unit 40L, cooking using the right heating unit 17HL can be selected (SP2). Then, even if the input key 43L2 or 43L3 is not operated, the induction heating control menu is automatically confirmed after a certain period of time (SP3). Note that the "induction heating control menu" here refers to the IH control menu.

In other words, the induction heating control menu is completely separate from the cooking menu of the "linked cooking mode KM3" that is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 by operating the input key 43MC on the first specific screen 30SP.

The execution of one control menu is commanded (SP4), and cooking in the "single cooking mode KM1" can be started (SP5).
The term "single cooking" in step SP5 means that the heating source used is the induction heating source 9 alone.
If, after induction heating has started, the user operates input key 43R2 or 43R3 to command a change in the heating power of induction heating, the integrated control device MC changes the heating power, which is one of the control conditions (SP6).

In both the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3, the cooking process using microwave heating starts when the input key 43MS is operated. In addition, the cooking process in the independent cooking mode KM1, in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are each driven independently, also starts when the input key 43MS is operated.

As described above, in this embodiment 1, there is no dedicated switch (button or input key) for the induction heating source 9 to command the start of cooking, but a dedicated switch or input key (in addition to input key 43MS) may be provided.

Pressing input key 43R1 issues a command to stop the right heating unit 17HR (SP7), and the induction heating operation is stopped (SS8). In the case of the left heating unit 17HL, pressing input key 44R (or 43L1) is sufficient. In this way, input keys 44R, 44L (or 43L1, 43R1) are used both when selecting a heating unit to start operation, and when ending cooking.

Next, Fig. 66 will be described. Fig. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9. It is also a schematic diagram showing that the operation of the heating source used during cooperative cooking is restricted.
The coordinated cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG. 66 is the "first coordinated cooking mode" described in FIG.

In this example, the "first coordinated cooking mode" uses the induction heating source 9 in cooking process 1, and after the heating operation is completed, the microwave heating source 189 is operated in cooking process 2. Also, in cooking process 2, the oven heating source 188 is operated.

As shown in FIG. 66, one collaborative cooking mode KM3 is composed of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when the input key 43MC is operated to execute the collaborative cooking mode until the input key 43MS is subsequently pressed.

P2 is a heat cooking period (cooking step 1). Note that this cooking step 1 does not include a "preheating step" in which the food to be cooked is not actually heated.
P3 is a pause period (also called a "transition period TR") during which the operation of the heating means used in cooking step 1 is temporarily stopped and heating by the other heating means is started in order to switch from cooking using the heating means used in cooking step 1 to cooking in cooking step 2, which uses a different heating means. The length of this pause period depends on the timing of the user's operation. In other words, the earlier the user issues a command to start cooking step 2, the shorter this pause period will be.
P4 is a heating and cooking period (cooking process 2) by the heating means used in cooking process 2 (the heat source may be either single or multiple).

In this embodiment 1, a "cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4" is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
The cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 will be described in detail later, but an example of a cooking menu that utilizes the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of this "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed by the induction heating source 9, but the heating operation of the preheating process does not need to be stopped at the start of cooking process 1 (that is, the energization for induction heating in the preheating process and the energization of the heating source for cooking process 2 are performed simultaneously in parallel during a certain time period).

In other words, in the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4, the heating source (induction heating source 9 in the above explanation) that has been operating before cooking process 1 is not necessarily stopped at the start of cooking process 1, and during cooking process 1, the induction heating source 9 and the oven heating source 188 or microwave heating source 189 may be driven simultaneously.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be made on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM3 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM4.

As is clear from FIG. 66, when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL becomes unusable when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (on the first specific screen 30SP).

Specifically, of the various input keys of the left operation unit 40L, at least the input key 44L (or 43L1) is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This "disabled" means that a valid command signal is not sent from the input key 44L (or 43L1) to the integrated control device MC, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the integrated control device MC does not process the command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be selected.

On the other hand, even when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, that is, when the identification information 330 is displayed, the right operation unit 40R of the right heating unit 17HR can be used. This is because the integrated control device MC initially determines (by the control program) that the right heating unit 17HR will not be used in the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Therefore, the above-mentioned "prohibition of use" process is not performed on the right operation unit 40R. There is no restriction on this even when other cooking is being performed.

Therefore, in the induction heating source 9, only the left heating section 17HL is "occupied" by the selection of the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Also, when viewed from the perspective of the induction heating source 9 as a whole, the use of only a portion (the left side) of the two heating sections is "restricted." Note that if the right heating section 17HL is not being used for other cooking, this right heating section 17HR may also be placed in an occupied state. Note that the control program may be changed to place the right heating section in the "occupied" state when the input key 43MS is pressed after the selection of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is completed.

Here, the use of the induction heating source 9 will be described, focusing on the function of the input operation unit 40.
As described above, the input operation unit has two input keys, the input key 43L1 for selecting cooking by the left heating unit 17HL, and the input key 44L.

In cases other than the cooperative cooking mode KM3, when using the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 43L1 first, and after the heating operation of the left IH coil 17L has started, the heating operation can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43L1. In other words, when pressed once at the beginning, it performs the function of selecting the left heating unit 17HL, and when pressed once again after induction heating has started, the heating operation can be stopped instantly.

On the other hand, the input operation section has an input key 44L. This input key 44L is a touch-type input key with which a "control menu" for induction heating cooking by the left heating section 17HL can be selected.
The "control menu" in this case includes "boiling water,""boiling,""cookingrice,""frying(automatic)," etc., from which only one can be selected.

When starting the cooking process of the induction heating source 9 in the linked cooking mode KM3, the input key 44L is designed to be pressed, not the input key 43L1. Note that, as in the case of the normal single cooking mode KM1, the program may be modified so that the input key 43L1 is pressed first, and when the heating operation is to be ended, the same input key 43L1 is pressed.

To select cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, it is necessary to first press the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. When the input key 43MC is pressed, if the above-mentioned "permission conditions" are met, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed.
When this first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 66), or when a "start input command" for switching to the cooperative cooking mode is entered using the input key 43MS (see FIG. 63), the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, and at the same time, the heating source to be used becomes "occupied."

The left operation unit 40L when the induction heating source 9 is in the "occupied state" will be described.
There are two methods by which the integrated control device MC can occupy the left heating section 17HL.
(1) First Method:
When the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is entered, the input function of the input key 43L1 is enabled, and the input functions of the other input keys 43L2, 43L3, 43L4, and 44L are all disabled.
In this case, after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed, the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L begins.
Therefore, when the induction heating (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) that has started is to be stopped, the input key 43L1 should be pressed once. In addition, at the same time as the supply of high-frequency power starts, the input functions of the input keys 43L2, 43L3, etc. that have been disabled are restored.
Furthermore, in order to start heating again for additional heating in this state, the input key 43L1 can be pressed once again (the cooperative cooking mode is not cancelled even at this stage).

(2) Second Method:
The input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, 43L3, and 43L4 in the left heating unit 17HL are disabled. Even when the mode is changed to the cooperative cooking mode, only the input key 44L is kept valid.
Therefore, the operation of the induction heating source 189 (in the cooperative cooking mode KM3) is finalized only when the input key 44L is pressed once after the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Thereafter, when the supply of high frequency power to the left IH coil 17L starts and induction heating starts, the input functions of the input keys 43L1, 43L2, etc. are immediately restored.
Thereafter, the induction heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 44L once, and can be resumed by pressing the input key 44L again (the combined cooking mode KM3 is not released at this stage either).
These will be explained later in FIG.

In both the first and second methods, the input function of the input key 43L1 was disabled until a certain point in time to prevent the left heating unit 17HL from being selected.

In the following explanation of this embodiment 1, the second method is assumed, but even if the first method is adopted, the basic effect obtained by this disclosure is not affected in any way.

As shown in FIG. 66, in cooking step 1 (P2), after induction heating has started, the user can increase or decrease the heat by operating the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L.

In cooking step 1, it is necessary to first press the input key 44L (see FIG. 23) on the left operation unit 40L only once, at which point a command to start induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC. Note that in cooking modes other than the linked cooking mode KM3, the input key 43L1 is pressed first.

It is also possible to omit the operation of the input key 44L of the left operation unit 40L to issue a heating start command, and have induction heating cooking start at a fixed heat level (low or standard heat level) a fixed time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the input is made using the input key 43MS.

Furthermore, in cooking step 1 (P2), the user can immediately stop the induction heating operation by touching the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L.
When the heating operation is stopped, cooking step 1 ends immediately, but the combined cooking mode itself is not cancelled.

Therefore, the heating operation (linked cooking mode) by the left heating unit 17HL can be started. However, the operation to resume the heating operation is the same as that in the single heating mode KM1 as described in Figures 57 (A) and (B), and it is necessary to press the input key 44L again just once to resume cooking by the left heating unit 17HL.

Furthermore, if the user wishes to specify (change) the heat level after induction heating has started, by pressing input key 43L2 or 43L3, the heat level will decrease or increase by one level each time the key is pressed, allowing the desired heat level to be set.

As shown in FIG. 66, after cooking step 1 (P2), the induction-heated food is moved to the heating chamber 113. It is possible to place the metal dish used during induction heating directly in the heating chamber 113 and heat it with microwaves, but if the food is completely surrounded by metal, it is not possible to heat the food inside with microwaves, so it is necessary to transfer it to an open metal container, heat-resistant glass, or a porcelain container.

During the heating pause period (P3), when the door 114 is closed and the input key 43MS is pressed, the microwaves generated by the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating source 189 are guided into the heating chamber 113, and the heating and cooking period (cooking step 2) (P4) begins.

After microwave heating is started by input key 43MS, the user can set the microwave heating control conditions as desired by operating various input keys 43M2, 43M3 on central operation unit 40M (the default values can be changed). However, depending on the individual food being cooked that is the target of linked cooking mode KM3, there may be some restrictions on changing the control conditions. For example, the microwave heating output is basically 500W, so the control program is set up so that the user cannot increase or decrease this output at will during the cooking process.

As shown in FIG. 66, after cooking step 2 (P4), there are two types: the cooking step ends automatically when a predetermined time (default time) specified in the control program has elapsed without the need to set the microwave heating control conditions (e.g., heating time), and the cooking step ends at any stage by the user operating the input key 43MT on the central operation unit 40M.

In addition, once cooking step 2 is stopped, it is treated as if all cooking steps in the linked cooking mode KM3 have been completed. Therefore, the linked cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and as in the case of carrying out the combined cooking mode KM2, the input key 43M1 can be operated again to set a control menu such as "microwave manual" to perform additional heating and cooking.

If the operating program of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 expects cooking step 3 to follow cooking step 2, stopping cooking step 2 does not mean that all cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 have been completed. After the stopped cooking step 2, the transition period TR must elapse before proceeding to the next cooking step 3.

As shown in FIG. 66, in this coordinated cooking mode KM3, only the left heating unit 17HL of the first heating source 9 is used, so there are no restrictions on the use of the right heating unit 17HR during the preparation period (P1) through cooking step 2 (P4). Therefore, during cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, another heating cooking can be performed simultaneously in parallel using the right heating unit 17HR. For example, the right operating unit (first operating unit on the right side) 40R can be used to start, for example, "boiling water" in the IH control menu using the right heating unit 17HR.

Next, we will explain Figure 67.
FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the priority relationship between the combined cooking mode KM3 and the independent cooking mode KM1 using an induction heating source, and is an example in which the configuration of FIG. 62 is slightly modified.
FIG. 67 shows a slightly modified timing from FIG. 66 at which the operation of the heat source used (in this case, the induction heating source 9) starts to be restricted in the coordinated cooking mode KM3.

In the example shown in FIG. 67, at the stage of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, i.e., when the identification information 330 indicating the name of the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP), the left heating source 17HL is not yet occupied. Therefore, the left operation unit 40L of the left heating source 17HL is operable for input, and cooking from the IH control menu (e.g., "boiling water") can be selected in the single cooking mode KM1.

In other words, during this preparation period P1, it is possible to input a new (single cooking mode KM1) using the left operation unit 40L.

When the start of cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is commanded by the input key 43MS, at least the input key 44L among the various input keys on the left operation unit 40L is disabled by the integrated control device MC. This is different from FIG. 66. All input keys on the left operation unit 40L may be disabled. Note that the meaning of "disable" in FIG. 67 is the same as that explained in FIG. 66.

Next, the basic operations of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 in this embodiment 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 68 to 75.

Figure 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys and cooking steps in the input operation unit 40 in chronological order from the selection to the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Figure 69 is a flowchart showing the change in the input function of the input operation unit and notifications in chronological order from the start to the end of the heating operation in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input operation and the display in chronological order until the transition between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Figure 71 is explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 72 is explanatory diagram 2 showing the relationship between the various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 73 is explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the various cooking steps and operations in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 74 is flowchart 1 showing the notification operation of the cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode. Figure 75 is flowchart 2 showing the notification operation of the cooking steps in the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker.

Referring to Figure 68 .
FIG. 68 shows the case of a coordinated cooking mode KM3 (coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4) in which cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating section 17HL and cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113.
In Fig. 68, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to the start and end of a cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are illustrated.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, pressing 43MS transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (at this stage, the heating cooking period P2 is entered).

When the user selects the left heating section 17HL, cooking step 1 is carried out in the left heating section 17HL.
For this reason, it is necessary to press the input keys 44L, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L as shown in Fig. 68. Note that, since the control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed in the default setting, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 (cooking process 1) begins, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 68, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

When the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the induction heating operation stops at this stage and the heating and cooking period P2 ends.

Next, the heating pause period P3 is entered. In other words, the transition period TR is entered. At this stage, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all enabled (each input key is indicated by a solid line frame).

In this embodiment 1, we will explain what it means that "when the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M is restored, and the start and end of the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is performed according to commands from the central operation unit 40M."

The above "restore input functions" does not mean that the functions are unconditionally restored immediately after cooking process 1 is completed. For example, if the door 114 remains closed from before the end of cooking process 1 until after it is completed, the integrated control device MC does not enable the functions of the disabled input keys. In other words, the functions are restored to their active state when the door 114 is opened. In this way, the conditions and timing for restoring the input functions are appropriately determined so as to match the actual user operations (including opening and closing the door) in consideration of the user's operations for the next cooking process 2. This point will be explained in FIG. 69.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 68, the input functions of the input keys 44L, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all maintained as valid, so the left heating unit 17HL may be used for other cooking during the transition period TR or the heating and cooking period P4 (in this case, the control menu is selected in the single cooking mode KM1).

When the user touches the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M, cooking step 2 of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 starts. Then, by pressing the input key 43MT, the user can end the cooking step 2 at any time.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released as soon as cooking process 2 ends.

Therefore, if you want to perform additional heating again in the heating chamber 113 using the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 immediately after the end of cooking step 2, you can operate the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc., and the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M to perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2. However, since the central operation unit 40M does not allow you to directly select the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 to resume the single cooking mode KM1, you can first operate the input key 43M1, which is mainly used for the combined cooking mode KM2, and select, for example, "warm" at the control menu selection stage. This selection can also be made using the input key 43M1.

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (e.g., within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode, and the process may wait for the user's input (operation of the input key 43MS).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can remove the food from the heating chamber 113 and check the doneness, etc., and if it is not heated enough, he or she can immediately return the food to the heating chamber 113 and touch the input key MS waiting for additional operation by the user. This method also improves usability for the user.

Referring to Figure 69,
FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing the timing for disabling the input function of the shared operation unit 40M and the operation of the integrated control device MC when the input function is restored to an enabled state.
In this example, cooking process 1 is performed in the left heating section 17HL, and cooking process 2 is performed in the heating chamber 113.

When the input key 43MS on the shared operation unit 40M is pressed to move to cooking step 1, the notification unit AN notifies the user that cooking step 1 can be started (for example, by the left heating unit 17HL). At this point, the left heating unit 17HL is in standby with zero heat and has not yet started any actual heating operation.

When at least the input key 44L of the left operation section is pressed, the induction heating operation is started (step S40).
From the start of this heating operation, the input function of the common operation unit 40M is disabled. In fact, the input keys (43M1, 43MC, etc.) other than the input key 43MT are disabled (step S41).

After this, a determination is repeatedly made as to whether cooking step 1 has ended (S42), and if cooking step 1 has ended, the process proceeds to step S43. In other words, the process enters into a heating pause period P3 (see Figures 66 to 68). Then, the notification unit AN guides the user by voice or the first specific screen 30SP to move the food item heated by the left heating unit 17HL to the heating chamber 113 (S43). Note that the food item N, such as a frying pan used in the left heating unit 17HL, may be placed directly into the heating chamber 113 (however, microwave heating may be hindered if the entire top surface is not open without a metal lid).

In step S43, the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 may be opened, and after the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 113, a warning may be issued to the user to close the door 114 again. However, as shown in FIG. 69, in the heating pause period P3, a determination is made in steps S44 and S45 as to whether the door 114 has been opened once and then closed again.

When the integrated control device MC determines that the door 114 is closed, the input function of the shared operation unit 40M is restored for the first time at that point. In other words, the design does not allow microwave heating, etc. to be started while the door 114 is open.

Note that step S46A shown by a dashed line in FIG. 69 corresponds to step S46. In this way, the input function of the shared operation unit 40M may be restored once the door 114 is opened. In this case, if, for example, the input key 43MS of the shared operation unit 40M is pressed immediately after this step S46A, an input signal is sent (from the input operation unit 40) to the integrated control device MC, but the control program in the integrated control device MC does not start cooking process 2 unless a confirmation signal for "door closed" is received in the next step S45.

In step S46, the input keys of the common operation unit 40M are operated to notify the user to start cooking process 2. In this case, it is at least the input key 43MS that commands the user to start cooking that is restored to its input function. If the user needs to set the control conditions for cooking process 2 (for example, heat and heating time), input keys 43M1 and 43M2 can be restored.

After this, a determination is repeatedly made as to whether a command to start cooking process 2 has been issued (S47), and if input key 43MS is pressed, cooking process 2 is started (S48).

After this, a determination is repeatedly made as to whether cooking step 2 has been completed (S49), and if cooking step 2 has been completed, the process proceeds to step S50. Then, a notification is issued that cooking in the linked cooking mode KM3 has been completed. At this point, if the input functions of any of the input keys of the shared operation unit 40M have not been restored in step S46, all input functions are restored.

Referring to Figure 70 .
The operation procedure for shifting to the composite cooking mode KM2 requires four inputs as shown in Fig. 70. That is, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43M1, 43M2, 43M3, and 43MS. When the mode has shifted to the composite cooking mode KM2, the input key 44R or 44L must be operated to actually heat the induction heating source 9.

On the other hand, the operation procedure to switch to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 requires four inputs as shown in FIG. 70. In other words, the first to fourth inputs are performed using the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43M2, and 43MS.

When switching to the collaborative cooking mode KM3 as described above, the user operates the input key 43M2 on the central operation unit 40M, and then operates the input key 44R on the right operation unit 40R to operate the right heating unit 17HR first.

When the user selects to use the left heating unit 17HL in the coordinated cooking mode, the user operates the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L.

In this way, after switching to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the start of the heating operation can be commanded from the individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the heating units 17HL and 17HR. The heating stop operation can also be performed from the same operation units, so that the user does not get confused about the location of the operation units and input keys when starting and stopping heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 71.
FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing various steps in the coordinated cooking mode on the horizontal axis, and the operation of the main components such as user operations and the display unit on the vertical axis.

FIG. 71 shows the steps up to the start of cooking operation in the combined cooking mode KM3.
In item A on the left side of Fig. 71, "user operation" refers to various input operations in the central operation unit 40M and the right operation unit 40R. In this "user operation" process, five operations A1 to A5 are performed.

"Pressing the relay button" in A1 refers to operating the input key 43MC to select the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
The "menu selection" of A2 refers to the selection of a desired cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. This selection is made using the input key 43M1.

The "heat source selection" of A3 is an operation for selecting either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and is performed by the input key 43M2. In this example, the case where the right heating section 17HR is selected is shown.
"Pressing the start button" in A4 means operating the input key 43MS.
"Pressing the right IH input button" in A5 refers to operating the input key 43R1 of the right operation section 40R.

In item B on the left side of Fig. 71, "cooking process" indicates the type of process up to the execution of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. The process here is different from the cooking process 1 and cooking process 2.
"Selecting a coordinated cooking mode" in B1 indicates a process of selecting an object to be cooked and selecting an operation program for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 corresponding to that object.
"Grill heat source on standby" in B2 indicates a period during which the oven heat source 188 is on standby. "Heating" in B3 indicates a period during which induction heating is performed by the right heating unit 17HR.

In item C on the left side of FIG. 71, "left IH display unit" refers to the left side display unit 31L.
"Off (operation not accepted)" in C1 means that no information is displayed on the left display unit 31L. As described above, until the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 71), the user is performing input operations while looking at the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user will use the left heating unit 17HL in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the left display unit 31 is not started as part of putting the left heating unit 17HL into an "occupied state." At the same time, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is not accepted.

"Off (accepts normal operations)" in C2 means that no information is displayed on the left display unit 31L. However, after the input commanding the start of the transition to the linked cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 71) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP has been completed. Therefore, it is determined that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the linked cooking mode KM3, and there is no longer any possibility of using the left heating unit 17HL. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to put the left heating unit 17HL in an "occupied state." For this reason, at this stage, the input function of the left operation unit 40L is made available for acceptance. By actually pressing the input key 44L of the left operation unit 40L, the control menu (for example, "boil water") of the single cooking mode KM1 using the left heating unit 17HL can be selected.

In item D on the left side of FIG. 71, "Right IH display unit" refers to the display content of the right side display unit 31R.
"Off (no operation accepted)" in D1 means that no information is displayed on the right display unit 31R.
As described above, until the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 71), the user is performing input operations while viewing the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Therefore, since there is a possibility that the user will use the right heating unit 17HR in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the display screen of the right display unit 31 is not started in conjunction with the right heating unit 17HR being in an "occupied state." At the same time, the input function of the right operation unit 40R is not accepted.

Thereafter, when the input commanding the start of the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (operation A4 in FIG. 71) has passed, the input operation on the first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 has already ended.
The "heating standby state" of D2 refers to a state in which the right heating unit 17HR is waiting for a user operation A5 after it has been determined that the right heating unit 17HR will be used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. In other words, this is the stage in which the right heating unit 17HR is waiting for a command to start cooking process 1.

"Preheat display" in D3 means displaying information on the preheating state on the right display section 31R. For example, it is to display information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature (e.g., 180°C) is reached.

In item E on the left side of FIG. 71, “central display section” refers to the display content of integrated display section 30 .
The "initial screen of coordinated cooking" in E1 indicates that the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 (see FIG. 99).
"Change menu" at E2 means operating input key 43M1 to select one desired food item from the linked cooking modes and to select the corresponding linked cooking menu (see FIG. 100(A)).

"Change selected heating source (select right IH)" in E3 refers to selecting the right heating unit 17HR while viewing the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made using the input key 43M2 (see FIG. 100(B)).
The "right IH input button press guidance display" in E4 means that a message is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 indicating that the input key 43R1 located on the right operation unit 40R must be operated to start coordinated cooking. In other words, the user is recommended to press the input key 43R1 to start cooking step 1 of coordinated cooking (see FIG. 101(A)).

The "IH preheating display" in E5 indicates that the right heating section 17HR has started preheating. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180°C is reached. In contrast, the integrated display section (central display section) 30 displays information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress" or "Preheating completed" in the first specific screen 30SP (see FIG. 101 (B)).

In item F on the left side of FIG. 71, “notification means” refers to the notification contents notified by the voice synthesizer 95 .
As shown by F1 to F5, when "hamburger" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode and cooking is performed, a total of five audio notifications are issued.
The notification content of F1 is, for example, "This is a hamburger steak. It will be cooked on the induction cooker and then finished on the range grill." In other words, the first specific screen 30SP also displays the food to be cooked and the cooking process, but the same information is also notified to the user by voice.

The content of the notification in F2 is, for example, "This is fried chicken. It will be cooked in the range grill and then finished on the induction cooker." In other words, in response to the user's menu selection operation A2, the result of the selection of the linked cooking mode and an explanation of the cooking process are displayed in real time.

The content of the notification of F3 is, for example, "Right IH." In other words, since the user selected right IH (right heating unit) 17HR through operation A3, the result of the heating source selection is immediately notified.

The notification content of F4 is, for example, "Press the right IH input button to start heating." In other words, the user is asked to perform operation A3 of menu selection, followed by operation A4 of the start button (input key 43MS). When this operation A4 is performed, the user is asked to operate the "input key" on the right operation unit 40L. Note that the input key referred to here is input key 43R1.

The notification content of F5 is, for example, "Preheating the pan to 180°C."
After coordinated cooking is started in the right heating unit 17HR, the heating operation of the right heating unit 17HR begins, and preheating operation is started so that the temperature of the heated object N, such as a pot placed on the top plate 15, reaches the target temperature of 180°C, and this fact is notified.

In item G on the left side of Figure 71, "left IH drive unit" refers to the operation of the inverter circuit 81L.
In item H on the left side of Figure 71, "right IH drive unit" refers to the operation of inverter circuit 81R.
The "preheating step" of H1 indicates that the inverter circuit 81R is driven and a preheating step is being performed.

In item J on the left side of Figure 71, "range grill drive unit" refers to the operation of the heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the power supply to the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B that make up the oven heating source 188, and the operation of the microwave heating control unit 130 of the microwave heating source 189. In other words, it collectively refers to the operation of the drive unit that performs the above-mentioned "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

Next, we will explain Figure 72.
Fig. 72 shows a case where "hamburger steak" is cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. As in Fig. 71, this is an explanatory diagram in which the horizontal axis indicates various steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the vertical axis indicates user operations and the operation of the main components such as the display unit.

The meanings of items A to J on the left side of FIG. 72 are the same as those explained in FIG.
In FIG. 72, the operation content of A11 is to start preheating in order to cook the hamburger steak, and then to perform cooking process 1 (the corresponding part is cooking process B11 in FIG. 72), by first selecting the left heating unit 17HL and pressing the input key 44L.

"Press IH OFF/ON button" in A12 means that the user first selects the left heating section 17HL as the input switch and presses the input key 44L to end hamburger cooking process 1.

The "open grill door" in A13 is an operation in which the user opens the door 114.
"Press the start button" in A14 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the time button" in A15 refers to pressing the input key 43M2 of the central operation unit 40M.

"Press the start button" in A16 means pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
"Pressing the cancel button (canceling grill heating in the middle of the process)" in A17 means pressing the oven heat source 188.
"Pressing the cancel button" in A18 refers to pressing the input key 43MT of the central operation unit 40M. By operating the input key 43MT, the series of heating operations in the coordinated cooking mode is all terminated (the coordinated cooking mode is cancelled).

In item B (cooking process) of FIG. 72, "IH heating process" in B11 indicates the induction heating process in the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
The "grill heating standby step" of B12 indicates a period during which the oven heating source 188 is on standby until the user performs the operation A14.
The “grill heating process” of B13 indicates a heating process using an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189.

The "grill heating extension standby process" in B14 indicates a standby period during which the grill heating process in B13 is temporarily completed, and the user is awaited to determine whether or not to command an extension process.
The "extended heating step" of B15 is a step in which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven again (power is started) because the user performed operation A16 (pressing the start button) during the grill heating extended standby step of B14. The extended heating step is started by pressing the input key 43MS.

As shown in FIG. 72, the "extended heating process" B15 can be performed multiple times, not just once, if the user performs operation A16 (pressing the start button). However, once the "cancel button" of A18 is pressed, the coordinated cooking mode is cancelled at the time of the cancel operation of input key 43MT (for cancelling the coordinated cooking mode and combined cooking mode), so to cook again in heating chamber 113, it is necessary to operate oven heating source 188 and microwave heating source 189 in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).

In item C (left IH display) of Fig. 72, "Preheat display" of C11 refers to displaying the target preheat temperature in the preheating process on the right display section 31R or the left display section 31L (see Figs. 92 and 94). For example, the preheat target temperature (e.g. 180°C) is displayed.

C11a to C11d show progress display 1 to progress display 4. For example, progress display 1 is a display that says "preheating", and "progress display 4" is a display that says "suitable temperature". This "suitable temperature" indicates that the object to be heated (such as a pan) N has been heated to the preheat target temperature (for example, 180°C). During the preheating display (C11), the progress displays 1 to 4 (C11a to C11d) are displayed in accordance with the progress of preheating (temperature rise). In this FIG. 72, the preheating state display C11 by the left heating unit 17HL is displayed on the left display unit 31L.

The "cooking process" in C12 indicates that the left heating unit 17HL heats and cooks the object N after it reaches the preheating target temperature (e.g., 180°C). In other words, it indicates that cooking process 1 has begun. As is clear from the cooking processes in C11 and C12, no user operation is performed during this period (no operation is required). In other words, after operation A11 is performed, no user operation input is required before operation A12.

Item E (center display section) in FIG. 72 shows the display contents of the integrated display section 30.
The "IH preheating display" of E11 displays on the first specific screen 30SP displayed on the integrated display unit 30 that preheating has begun by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 101 (A)).

In FIG. 72, the "IH heating display" of E12 indicates that preheating has been completed and heating is possible with the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 102 (B)). In other words, it indicates that the stage is now moving on to cooking step 1 using induction heating (IH heating).

The "grill door opening and closing operation guidance display" in E13 prompts the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber (heating compartment) 113 (where cooking process 2 will be performed) since induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed (see FIG. 104). One example of additional information 331 in this scene is a display that reads, "Please place food in the heating compartment."

As shown in FIG. 103, if the user wishes to stop the induction heating operation using the left IH coil 17HL at any time during the induction heating cooking, additional information 331 stating "Press the left IH on/off button" may be displayed. The "on/off button" here refers to input key 44L (which may be changed to input key 43L1).

In FIG. 72, E14's "alternating display of heat power change display and start prompt display" indicates that the heat power for range grill cooking (combined heating) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further indicates that grill cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS) (see FIG. 105).

In FIG. 72, the "grill heating indicator" E15 indicates that the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2) (see FIG. 106).

In this embodiment 1, both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously, and the food being cooked is heated from both the inside and outside at the same time by the synergistic effect of the microwaves and radiant heat.

In FIG. 72, E16's "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" indicates that the grill heating process B13 has ended, and that the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3) and grill heating can be performed again (see FIG. 107 (A)).

If the user does not wish to perform extended heating, the display indicates that the user can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) to end the linked cooking mode without performing extended heating (see FIG. 107(B)). These two types of information are displayed alternately on the first specific screen 30SP, for example at intervals of a few seconds.

The "time setting display" of E17 displays the result of setting the extended time when the cooking time is extended using input key 43M3 and grill heating is performed again (see FIG. 108). After this time setting display, the aforementioned "grill heating display" E15 and the "alternate display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" E16 are performed.

In item F (notification means) of FIG. 72, the notification content of F11 is "Preheating the pan to 180°C will begin." This is a voice notification that the preheating process has begun by the right heating unit 17HR in the IH heating process B11.

In FIG. 72, the notification of F12 is "The right IH has reached the set temperature. Please start cooking." This notifies the user that the preheating by the right heating unit 17HR has reached the target temperature (e.g. 180°C) and prompts the user to start heating using the right operation unit 40R.

FA1 in FIG. 72 is a notification of the first reference information. In the following explanation, this "first reference information" FA1 will be referred to as "reference information 1." The gist of this reference information may be displayed in the form of text or graphics on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 1."

The notification of reference information 1 (FA1) is made when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed from the start of cooking process 1 (G12 in FIG. 72) by the left IH coil 17L. This will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 74.

In FIG. 72, the notification for F13 is "The pan is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when placing food inside." This is to alert the user that cooking process 1 (G12) by the right heating unit 17HR has finished, and that food should be moved to the heating chamber 113 for cooking process 2, and that the top plate 15, etc. are hot.

The notification content of F14 is "Press the start button to start heating the range grill." This notifies the user that range grill cooking can be started by operating the input key 43MS.
The notification content of F15 is "Starting standard range grill finish." This notifies the user that cooking step 2 of the range grill will start and cooking (e.g., hamburger steak) will be completed. Note that "Starting standard" means that the heat during range grill cooking will be "standard."

FA2 in FIG. 72 is a notification of second reference information. In the following explanation, this "second reference information" FA2 will be referred to as "reference information 2." The gist of this reference information may be displayed in the form of text or graphics on the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 2."

The notification of reference information 2 (FA2) is made when a predetermined time (second elapsed time TN2) has elapsed since the start of cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 72) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113. Or, it is made when a predetermined temperature (second rising temperature TN2) has been exceeded since the start of cooking process 2 (grill heating process B13 in FIG. 72). These will be explained in detail later with reference to FIG. 74.

The notification F16 informs the user that cooking on the range grill has finished and that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2). It also informs the user that the linked cooking mode KM3 will end without extended heating if the cancel button (input key 43MT) is pressed. In addition, the user is warned that the heating chamber 113 is hot and that the interior should be cleaned after it has cooled down.

The notification F17 notifies the user that after the cooking process (B13) of the range grill is finished, the user will operate the extended heating to start heating for an additional 2 minutes and 20 seconds. After this notification F17, the notification F16 is issued again. If the user again commands extended heating, notifications F16 and F17 are repeated.

In item G (right IH drive unit) of FIG. 72, G11 indicates an induction heating operation for the preheating step (B11).
G12 shows the induction heating operation for cooking process 1 which is carried out following the preheating process.

In item J (range grill driving section) of Figure 72, J11 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are driven, and cooking step 2 is carried out during this period.
J12 indicates the period during which the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 are activated for the extended heating step.

Next, we will explain Figure 73.
Fig. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between various steps and operations when "fried chicken", one of the cooperative cooking modes, is performed in the cooperative cooking mode. As in Fig. 71 and Fig. 72, the horizontal axis shows various steps in the cooperative cooking mode, and the vertical axis shows the user's operations and the operation of the main components such as the display unit.

In FIG. 73, the operation content of A21 in item A (user operation) is to first select the left heating unit 17HL and press the input key 44L in order to cook fried chicken. This starts the preheating process (see G21 in FIG. 73).

The operation of A22 indicates an operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113. At this stage, induction heating (preheating) has already started in the left heating section 17HL.
The operation of A23 is called "pressing the start button" and is performed by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.
By the operation of A23, the "range grill driving unit" is driven, and the grill heating step B23 is performed. Note that the "range grill driving unit" refers to the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130.

Before the IH preheating step G21 by the left heating unit 17HL is completed, the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" in the heating chamber 113 is started.
In this way, since the temperature of the heating chamber 113 cannot be raised immediately even if the oven heating source 188 is energized, the time to start energizing the oven heating source 188 is determined taking into account the time required to raise the temperature.

The operation of A24 indicates the operation of opening the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 after the grill heating process B23 by the "range grill driving unit" is completed. This allows the food to be removed from the heating chamber 113.

On the other hand, before the door 114 is opened and the food to be cooked (food) is removed from the heating chamber 113, the cooking utensil for deep-fried chicken (food to be heated such as a dedicated pan) is heated in the left heating section 17HL (cooking step G22) (no cooking oil is poured in this case). Therefore, when the food to be cooked from the heating chamber 113 is placed on the preheated food to be cooked N, the cooking step 2 using the induction heating source 9 is started (cooking oil, seasonings, etc. may be added at this point).
.

The operation of A25 is to operate the input key 43M3 called the time button in order to perform the grill heating step B23 by the "range grill driving unit" again.
The operation A26 is to press the input key 43MS to restart the grill heating step B23.
The operation A27 is to press the input key 43MT to end the grill heating process B23 at any time during the process, thereby canceling the collaborative cooking mode.
The operation of A28 is to press the input key 44L to end the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, item B (cooking process) will be described with reference to FIG.
B21 is an IH preheating step, which is a step of preheating with the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user.
B22 is a grill heating standby step, in which the user opens the door 114 and then waits for the operation A23 to start heating.
B23 is a grill heating step (cooking step 1).
B24 is cooking process 2 in which heating is performed by the left heating unit 17HL selected by the user in the IH heating process.

Next, item C (left IH display unit) will be described with reference to FIG.
The display C21 indicates that preheating is being performed by the left heating section 17HL.
Displays C21a to C21d are displayed in sequence during the period of display C21, with C21a being progress display 1, C21b being progress display 2, C21c being progress display 3, and C21d being progress display 4.
The display C22 indicates completion of the preheating operation by the left heating unit 17HL (cooking process).

In FIG. 73, item E (center display portion) will be described.
The display E21 is an IH preheating display, and it can be seen that the preheating operation is being performed by the left heating unit 17HL (see FIG. 109(A)).
E22 is a grill door opening/closing operation guidance display, which prompts the user to open the door 114 and place the food to be cooked (food) into the heating chamber 113 to perform the grill heating step B23 (see Figure 109 (B)).

E23 alternates between a heat level change indication and a start prompt indication, and indicates that when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill drive unit," the heat level can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing input key 43MS (see FIG. 110 (A)).

E24 is a range heating display, which indicates that the cooking heat can be changed when driving the "range grill drive unit", and after cooking has begun, displays the remaining time until completion, etc. (see FIG. 111).
E25, as shown in Figures 111 (A) and (B), alternates between displaying an extension operation guide and displaying the completion of IH preheating.
After the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit," is completed, a message is displayed indicating that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2).
On the other hand, it is displayed that preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has been completed. That is, these two types of information are displayed alternately on the first specific screen 30SP at intervals of, for example, several seconds.

E26 is a time setting display. This indicates that the cooking process B24, which is performed by driving the "range grill driving unit," will be performed for, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds (see Figure 113).

Item F (notification means) will be described with reference to FIG.
The notification F21 is, for example, a voice message such as "Preheating pan to 180° C." which notifies the user of the preheat target temperature and that the preheating process has begun by the left heating unit 17HL.
The notification of F22 is "The left IH will soon reach the set temperature. Please put food inside the oven." This is to inform the user that the preheating by the left heating unit 17HL has reached the target temperature (e.g. 180°C) and to encourage the user to put food or the like into the heating chamber 113 so that range grill cooking can begin in the heating chamber 113.

The notification of F23 is "Press the start button to start heating in the microwave." That is, it notifies the user that microwave grill cooking should be started by pressing the input key 43MS.
The notification of F24 is, for example, "The range is starting at standard finish." In this case, "standard finish" means that the heat is at a standard level.

FA3 in FIG. 73 is a notification of the third reference information. In the following explanation, this "third reference information" is referred to as "reference information 3." Note that the gist of this reference information 3 (FA3) may be displayed in the integrated display unit 30 using text or graphics. In that case, the display is referred to as "reference display 3."

The notification of reference information 3 is made when a predetermined time (third elapsed time TN3) has elapsed since cooking process 1 (B23 in FIG. 73) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by user operation input (A23 in FIG. 73). This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 75.

The notification F25 is related to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, it may say, "Cooking on the range grill has finished. You can extend the cooking time by pressing the time button. Please remove food from the oven and start cooking on the induction heater."

The F26 notification informs you that cooking on the range grill will start again after cooking on the range grill has finished. For example, the notification "Range grill starting for 2 minutes" is made. This means that because the extension time has been set to 2 minutes, cooking on the range grill will start for the next 2 minutes.

FA5 in FIG. 73 is a notification of the fifth reference information. In the following explanation, this "fifth reference information" FA5 will be referred to as "reference information 5." Note that the gist of this reference information 5 (FA5) may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 using text or graphics. In that case, the display will be referred to as "reference display 5."

The notification of reference information 5 is made when a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed since cooking process 3 (B23 in FIG. 73) by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by user operation input (A26 in FIG. 73). This will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 75.

In FIG. 73, in item G (left IH drive unit), the preheating process of G21 is a preheating process by the left heating unit 17HL, and indicates the drive period of the inverter circuit 81L.

In FIG. 73, G22 also indicates the period of heating operation (driving inverter circuit 81L) for the cooking process by left heating unit 17HL.

In item J (range grill drive section), the heating step J21 indicates the drive period by the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189. Note that the combined cooking mode described in FIG. 73 is for cooking "fried chicken", so in reality, only the microwave heating source 189 needs to be driven.

Next, we will explain Figures 74 to 76.
74 to 76 show the process by which the "reference information 1" to "reference information 4" are notified when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

FIG. 74 shows a case where hamburger steak is cooked in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.
FIG. 74 is a flowchart corresponding to various steps of the combined cooking mode KM3 shown in FIG.
In the first embodiment, the cooking step 1 of the hamburger steak is performed, for example, by the left heating unit 17HL, and the cooking step 2 is performed by the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). That is, the cooking step 2 uses both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

In the first step SA1, induction heating (cooking process 1) is started on the object N that has already been heated to the preheat temperature (e.g., 180°C) by the left heating unit 17HL, and as explained in FIG. 72, a voice notification F12 is issued saying, "The left IH has reached the set temperature. Please begin cooking." Note that this "set temperature" refers to the preheat temperature set by the user. The default value is 180°C. Also, this cooking process 1 does not begin from the point in time when the IH coil 17L begins induction heating. The start point is when the object N that has reached the preheat temperature is placed on the object (in this case, a hamburger steak) and heating begins.

In the next step SA2, measurement of the elapsed time TN1 is started.
The elapsed time TN1 is measured by a clock circuit 96.

At Step SA3, it is judged whether or not the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded.
When grilling a hamburger steak, three things are important: the amount (weight) of the hamburger steak, the grilling time, and the grilling heat. If the standard time for cooking a given amount of hamburger steak (e.g., 300 g) at a standard heat level (e.g., 1000 W) is "7 minutes," then the elapsed time TN1 is, for example, 5 minutes.

If the purpose of using the elapsed time TN1 is to know the approximate timing for turning the hamburger steak upside down (flipping it over) halfway through, in the above example, the notification FA1 at the point when five minutes have elapsed will let the user know the timing for turning it upside down. The actual notification content is, for example, "Five minutes have elapsed since heating began. Heating will be completed in two minutes."

In other linked cooking modes, the notification will also let you know when to add water, seasonings, or cooking liquid during cooking, for example.

If the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed, step SA3 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SA4, where the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the first reference information (reference information 1) FA1.
In synchronization with this, reference information 1 (FA1) may be displayed on the left display section 31L.

After step SA4, a decision is made as to whether the user wants to stop the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL (step SA5), and if a stop command has been issued, the process proceeds to step SA6.

In step SA6, the heating operation by the left heating unit 17HL is stopped. As described in FIG. 72, a voice notification F13 is issued to the effect that "The pot is hot. Please be careful not to burn yourself when placing food inside the oven."

The user moves the food to be cooked (in this case, a hamburger steak) into the heating chamber 113. In this case, if the metal pot used for induction heating is not to be used, tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a dedicated tray 145 (not shown) is used instead. The hamburger steak is placed in such tableware or tray and then placed in the heating chamber 113.

The object N used for induction heating may be placed directly in the heating chamber 113 for cooking. However, this is limited to objects N that can be cooked using microwaves (radio wave transparent or open type).

When the integrated control device MC detects that the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 is closed, in the next step SA7, as described in FIG. 72, a voice notification F14 is issued to the effect that "Press the start button to begin heating the range grill."

When the user operates the input key 43MS, step SA8 becomes "Yes", and range grill cooking is started as cooking process 2.
As explained in FIG. 72, a voice notification F15 saying "Standard oven grill finish setting is about to begin" is issued (step SA9).

In the next step SA10, the microwave heating source 189 that serves as the heat source for the range grill is driven at a standard heating power. For example, as described above, operation is started at an output of 500 W.
Additionally, upper heater 163A of oven heating source 188, which serves as the heat source for the range grill, begins to be energized at 1000 W.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN2 from the time of step SA10 is started (SA11). Then, when it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has been exceeded (step: SA12), the process proceeds to step SA13, where the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the second reference information (reference information 2). In synchronization with this, the integrated display unit 30 displays reference information 2 (FA2).

The notification content of reference information 2 (FA2) is, for example, that a predetermined time has passed since the start of cooking process 2. If the standard time for cooking process 2 is, for example, 5 minutes, by setting the elapsed time TN2 to 4 minutes and 30 seconds, the end of cooking process 2 can be known 30 seconds before the end of cooking process 2.

It is generally said that once ingredients are heated to a certain degree, the degree of heating of the ingredients progresses rapidly. In particular, if the user is not accustomed to cooking with that ingredient, there is a concern that the ingredient may be overheated. Therefore, in cooking process 1, reference information 1 (FA1) is notified before the end of the process.

Similarly, in cooking step 2, reference information 2 (FA2) is notified before the end of cooking step 2. This makes it possible to prompt the user to pay attention to the end of cooking and to prepare for the next step.

After this, proceed to the next step.
After this, the notification of F16 shown in Fig. 72 is made. That is, as described above, it is notified that the cooking time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M3). Furthermore, by operating the cancel button (input key 43MT), all cooking steps of "hamburger steak" in the cooperative cooking mode are terminated.

Next, we will explain Figure 75.
75, "fried chicken" is selected as the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and cooking process 1 is performed using the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu). Cooking process 2 is performed using the left heating unit 17HL, for example.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 75, there is also a cooking process 3, which is performed in the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu).
FIG. 75 is a flowchart corresponding to the various steps of the coordinated cooking mode shown in FIG.

As explained in FIG. 73, when cooking step 1 is started (A23), a voice notification F24 is issued, for example, "Microwave, starting standard finish." In this case, "standard finish" means that the heat is at a standard level. For example, heating operation is started with a microwave output of 500 W (step: SB1).

In the next step SB2, measurement of the temperatures of the heating chamber 113 and the food to be cooked is started. That is, measurement of the temperature rise TN3 of the basic ingredient (chicken meat) of the "fried chicken" cooking is started.
The temperature TN3 is measured by a temperature detection circuit 93.

At the next step SB3, it is determined whether or not the rising temperature TN3 has been exceeded.
When the chicken meat that is the ingredient of "fried chicken" is heated with microwaves, the temperature rises, and it is determined whether the measurement result of this temperature has reached a predetermined rise in temperature TN3.

The rate at which the temperature TN3 rises varies depending on three factors: the amount (weight) of fried chicken, the cooking time, and the heat. The temperature rise pattern when a given amount (e.g., 300 g) of fried chicken ingredients is cooked using standard heat (e.g., microwaves with an output of 500 W) is stored as control data by the integrated control device MC based on the results of prior experiments, etc.

In other words, the integrated control device MC has data that shows that when finishing with standard microwave output (500 W), it is best to raise the temperature to a certain level and continue heating at that temperature. Therefore, the integrated control device MC notifies the user when the temperature has risen to that level (TN3) (step: SB4).

The user can be notified in advance that the time to end the (microwave) heating of the fried chicken is approaching by the audio notification of reference information 3 (FA3). In addition, the user can also be notified in synchronization with this by reference display 3 on the integrated display unit 30.

After this step SB4, microwave heating is automatically stopped (due to the cooking time exceeding). The user may also stop it midway. For example, if the control program is such that one minute after the temperature has risen to TN3, the integrated control device MC stops the heating operation by the microwave heating source 189 via the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating operation may be stopped at the user's discretion before one minute has elapsed after receiving a notification of reference information 3 indicating that the temperature has risen to TN3.

Then proceed to cooking step 2, which uses the induction heating unit 17H. To do this, the user must move the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 onto the top plate 15. This will be explained in Figure 76.

In FIG. 75, step SB7 is a notification of reference information 4 (FA4) in cooking process 2. This is determined based on the elapsed time TN4 or the increased temperature TN4 from the point when the user places the food to be cooked on the food to be heated N, which has been heated to a high temperature by preheating, after preheating is completed by induction heating unit 17H.

In this step SB8, the user does not perform any input operation on the input operation unit 40. The food to be cooked is simply moved. Therefore, the starting point of the elapsed time TN4 is the information that detects the timing when the temperature of the food to be heated N drops. Since the temperature of the food to be heated N drops sharply once when the food to be cooked is placed or inserted, this point in time is detected by the temperature detection circuit 93, and the elapsed time from this detection time can be counted.

The next step SB8 is a step for determining whether to issue a command to carry out cooking process 3 in the heating chamber 113 after cooking process 2 has been completed. The user performs the operation A26 shown in Fig. 73. To do this, it is necessary to press the input key 43MS.
Before step SB7, the user must return the food that has been induction heated (cooking step 2) on top plate 15 back into heating chamber 113. This will be described with reference to FIG.

In the next step SB9, cooking step 3 of the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is started.
As described above, the notification F26 is for informing the user that cooking on the range grill will be started again after cooking on the range grill has finished. For example, a notification such as "Range grill will start for 2 minutes" is made.

In the next step SB10, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 is started. That is, measurement of the elapsed time TN5 from the start of the cooking process 3 is started.
The elapsed time TN5 is measured by a clock circuit 96.

In next step SB11, it is determined whether or not an elapsed time TN5 has elapsed.
For example, if the cooking time for the "range grill control menu" (RG control menu) is set to 2 minutes before the start of cooking step 3 (before step SB8), the elapsed time is set to 1 minute 30 seconds, for example. In other words, it is set to 30 seconds before the end of cooking step 3.

If the elapsed time TN5 has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SB12.
In step SB12, reference information 5 (FA5) is notified by voice. Reference information 5 includes, for example, guidance such as "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." Since the user knows that the final cooking process is about to end, the user can start preparations for removing the "fried chicken" from heating chamber 113 from the point in time when reference information 5 is notified. Synchronously with this, reference information 5 (FA5) is displayed by integrated display unit 30.

In the next step SB13, the cooking process 3 is automatically stopped.
A notification F25 shown in Fig. 73 is also made. This notification is related to the user's operation when cooking on the range grill is finished. For example, it may say, "Cooking on the range grill is finished. You can extend cooking by pressing the time button. Please remove food from the oven." Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped by opening the door 114 without the user having to operate the input operation unit 40.

Next, we will explain Figure 76.
Fig. 76 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is performed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3. Fig. 76 is a time chart corresponding to Figs.
In Fig. 76, #1 to #9 indicate user operations and state changes of the cooking appliance 1. The other symbols correspond to Fig. 73 and Fig. 75.

In Fig. 76, before starting cooking step 1 to cook "fried chicken", the user first selects the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 44L (operation A21 in Fig. 73). Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 15 begins. In this case, the object to be heated N is a metal pan for deep frying, with a certain amount of cooking oil added.

Meanwhile, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and places ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
After closing the door 114, an operation A23 called "pressing the start button" is performed. This operation is performed by pressing the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 75, reference information 3 is notified (SB4 in FIG. 75).

During this cooking step 1, the preheating of the left induction heating unit 17HL is also completed (for example, the heated unit N is heated to the standard preheating temperature of 180°C). The completion of preheating is notified to the user by the notification unit AN through voice and text (#2).

The user can stop microwave cooking at any time during cooking step 1. To stop cooking, the user simply opens door 114. Note that pressing input key 40MT on central operation unit 40M will cancel the selection of "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode.

By opening door 114, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and cooking step 1 ends (#3).
Next, the user moves the food material that has been heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object to be heated N that is being preheated on the top plate 15 (#4).

Then, cooking process 2 is started in the left heating section 17HL (#5).
In cooking step 2, the input key 44L (see FIG. 23) of the left operation unit 40L is pressed first before starting preheating, and at that point a command to start induction heating is sent from the left operation unit 40L to the integrated control device MC.

To start cooking process 2 (#5), the user does not need to operate the input operation unit 40 in any particular way.
The cooking process 2 starts when the food to be cooked is placed on the preheated food N and is ready to be heated.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user operating the left operating unit 40L.

The user then moves the food again.
First, the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 113, and the door 114 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed to start cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu).

When a predetermined time (fifth time TN5) has elapsed since cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 113 was started by the user's operation input (A26 in FIG. 68), reference information 5 (FA5) is notified.

The reference information 5 (FA5) includes information such as, for example, "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." In addition, since the user knows that the final cooking process is about to finish, the user can start preparing to remove the fried chicken from the heating chamber 113 from the point in time when the reference information 5 is notified. In synchronization with this, the integrated display unit 30 also displays the reference information 5 (FA5).

Thereafter, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and cooking step 3 is completed (#7). Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately if the user opens door 114.
Then, the user moves the food heated in the heating chamber 113 into the object N that is being preheated on the top plate 15 (#8). In this case, since the object N is maintained in a heated state by induction heating, it may be further heated by induction (cooking step 4) (#9). In this case, if the object N is already in a preheated state, it is sufficient to simply move the object to be cooked onto the object N on the top plate 15.

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 40L. In other words, the user's operation A28 is to press the input key 44L of the left operation unit 40L that corresponds to the left heating unit 17HL.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 76 can shorten the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1.
That is, cooking step 1 is started by placing ingredients (food to be cooked) in heating chamber 113 before the completion of preheating of induction heating source 9 or notification of the completion of preheating.

Because the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed before the completion of cooking process 1, the food to be cooked can be transferred immediately to the food to be heated N on the top plate 15 after the end of cooking process 1, and cooking process 2 can be started.

Note that cooking step 3 and cooking step 4 are not necessarily required. Depending on the type of food to be cooked and the user's wishes, it is sufficient to finish with the necessary cooking steps.

In addition, in FIG. 76, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the induction heating source 9 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time by the left side operation unit 40L after cooking step 2 is completed. Specifically, pressing the input key 44L of the left side operation unit 40L stops the overheating operation of the left heating unit 17HL. However, as shown by the dashed line in FIG. 72, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figure 77.
Fig. 77 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, similar to Fig. 76. Fig. 77 is a time chart corresponding to Figs. 73 and 75.
In Fig. 77, #1 to #9 indicate user operations and state changes of the cooking appliance 1, as explained in Fig. 76. The other symbols correspond to Fig. 73 and Fig. 75.

The difference between FIG. 77 and FIG. 76 will now be described.
FIG. 77 shows a case where cooking step 1 is started in the heating chamber 113 after the induction heating source 9 has completed preheating the object N to be heated and a notification of this (#2) has been received.

When the completion of preheating of the object N by the induction heating source 9 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP and the left and right display units 31L, 31R, and is also notified by voice via the voice synthesis device 95, the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 and places the ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 113 (#1).
After closing the door 114, the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is pressed.

At this point, the microwave heating source 189 operates and cooking step 1 of microwave cooking begins. Then, via steps SB1 to SB3 in FIG. 75, reference information 3 is notified (SB4 in FIG. 75). After this, the process is the same as that shown in FIG. 76.

In the cooking sequence shown in FIG. 77, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the induction heating source 9 (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1 is longer than in the example of FIG.
However, since heating of the ingredients (food to be cooked) in the heating chamber 113 starts after the preheating of the induction heating source 9 is completed or a notification of the completion of the preheating is received, there is a guarantee that the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 can be started immediately if the food to be cooked is moved at the end of cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 113. Therefore, this method is suitable for users who are not very familiar with the linked preheating cooking mode KM4.

In addition, in FIG. 77, the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, but if the induction heating source 9 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 17L may be stopped at any time after cooking step 2 is completed using the left side operation unit 40L. However, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 77, if the left IH coil 17L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

Next, we will explain Figures 78 to 80.
Fig. 78 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device before switching to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 79 is a flowchart 1 showing the control operation of the integrated control device until switching to the coordinated cooking mode. Fig. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions and the judgment results before switching to the coordinated cooking mode.

Now, reference will be made to Fig. 78. Steps ST2 to ST4 have been explained with reference to Fig. 38, so they will be explained briefly here.
In step ST2, the IH control unit 90 determines whether or not there is an abnormality. The heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 are also diagnosed by the integrated control device MC.

At step ST3, the integrated display unit 30 is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the integrated control device MC also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 40 regarding the upper limit of the total power consumption.

In step ST4, the integrated control device MC, by means of the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95, provides a notification (including display of the guide screen 30SA) and voice guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
That is, in step ST4, the initial standby screen (display screens 1, 2A, and 2B) is displayed on the integrated display section 30, and warning information is also displayed (see FIG. 52). Furthermore, the guidance screen 30SA is displayed and audio guidance is provided.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than the input key 43MC (e.g., 43M1) has been operated (STC). If the input key 43MC has been operated, step STC becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step STR1. In step STR1, it is checked whether the "permission conditions" are met. For example, the usage state of the heat source used in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is checked.
The permission conditions and the determination results will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

In step STC, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether individual heating cooking was selected by the left operation unit 40L or the right operation unit 40R, which are the individual operation units, before the input key 43MC is pressed, and it is also determined whether the composite cooking mode KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 40M.

When the input key 43MC is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (for example, 30 seconds), the "combined cooking mode KM3" starts to be displayed as described above.
On the other hand, if the input key 43MC is not operated and the input key 43M1 is touched, the result of step STC is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step ST5 (see FIG. 38).

In FIG. 78, steps STR1 and STR2 are judgment steps of the "permission conditions" that determine whether or not cooking in the combined cooking mode KM3 is permitted.
Step STR1 is a step for judging "permission condition 1."
Here, "permission condition 1" means
(1) The peak cut value setting is 5000 W or more;
(2) If a power reduction command signal is received from an external home gateway 411, the peak cut value of the power reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step STR1 is "Yes."

The "permission condition 2" in the next step STR2 is the following three.
(1) In the induction heating source 9, if a central heating section 17HM (not shown) is provided, the central heating section is not in heating operation.
(2) Either or both of the oven heating means 188 and the microwave heating means 189 are not in heating operation.
(3) Neither the right heating section nor the left heating section of the induction heating source 9 is in heating operation (or only one of them is in heating operation).

If the above three conditions are met, the determination in step STR2 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to STR3 (see FIG. 79).
If the determinations in steps STR1 and STR2 are "No", the process proceeds to step STR12, and the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 inform the user that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning of the requirement of "5000 W or more" in "Permission Condition 1" above. For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the upper cooling fan 60.

The reason why the required demand (pre-securing of power demand) for implementing the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is 5,000 W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power of each heating source during operation when the collaborative cooking mode is executed is as follows:
(1) When operating the range (microwave heating source 189): 1000 W
(2) Oven operation: 2000W (upper heater: 1000W, lower heater: 1000W)
(3) Range grill operation: 1500W (microwave heating source 189: 500W, upper heater: 1000W)

On the other hand, the maximum power for the "automatic control menu" (two types: deep frying and optimum temperature) of the induction heating source 9 is 1500W.
For this reason, before enabling the collaborative cooking mode, it is necessary to consider the power required when the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 189, and the induction heating source 9 are operating simultaneously.

As described above, when using three heating sources simultaneously, the maximum power required is 3500W in total, consisting of the 1000W microwave heating source 189, the 1000W oven heating source 188 (2000W is alternately energized at 1000W increments), and the 1500W induction heating source 9.

When the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 5000W:
When the right heating section 17HR is performing heating at 3000 W (normal heating, i.e., "non-linked cooking mode"), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
When coordinated cooking mode KM3 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for coordinated cooking, so coordinated cooking can be started by reducing the heating power of the right heating unit 17HR to 1500W (from 3000W).

If the demand (pre-securing power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food (requiring a maximum of 1500W) is being done in the right heating section 17HR, the remaining demand is 2500W.
When performing coordinated cooking from this state, the remaining demand is 1000 W short of the 3500 W of power required for coordinated cooking mode KM3, so it is necessary to reduce the heat of the right heating unit 17HR. However, if the heat is reduced while the above-mentioned "automatic control menu" is being executed, cooking will not go well, so the heat cannot be reduced in this "automatic control menu".
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the necessary heat for induction heating cooking's "automatic control menu" (two types: deep frying and optimum temperature).

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the coordinated cooking mode, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (power demand secured in advance) of 5000 W, which is the sum of the power required for coordinated cooking (3500 W) and the power required for the automatic control menu of the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (1500 W).

Next, we will explain Figure 79.
In the coordinated cooking mode of this embodiment 1, there is a pattern (first coordinated cooking mode) (see Figure 65) in which the induction heating source 9 is driven first, and then the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are driven.
There is also a second coordinated cooking mode in which the order is reversed.

The steps in FIG. 75 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
In step STR3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and information on the coordinated cooking mode is displayed. As shown in Fig. 64, the "name of the food to be cooked" (e.g., "hamburger steak") 330 is displayed as a type of identification information to select a cooking menu for each coordinated cooking mode.

In the next step STR4, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated. As explained in FIG. 64, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food to be cooked in the linked cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) changes by sequentially moving upward or downward.

In this embodiment 1, since there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked, in the state shown in FIG. 64, for example, by operating the left input key 43M1 once, the identification information 330 will change from "hamburger steak" to "gratin."

If the input key 43M1 is not operated (within a certain period of time), step STR5 is judged as "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR5.
Step STR5 is a step for selecting one of the two heating unit specifying parts 333R and 333L displayed on the first specifying screen. When the user operates the pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right, the user can select one of the heating unit specifying parts 333R and 333L.

The right heating unit 17HR may be set as the default, and the heating unit specification section 333R may be displayed first on the first specification screen 30SP, and the process may proceed directly to step STR7. In the example described in FIG. 64, when making hamburger steak using coordinated cooking, the left heating unit 17HL is set as the default, and the heating unit specification section 333L is displayed so that the left heating unit 17HL is selected preferentially.

The next step STR6 determines whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the collaborative cooking mode. If the input key 43MT has been operated, the result is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step ST4 (see FIG. 81).

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the result is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step STR7.
If the input key 43MS is operated, the operation proceeds to step STR8 according to the operation program.
In step STR8, the control conditions such as the finally selected heating unit (e.g., the right heating unit 17HR) and the microwave heating output value of 500 W are displayed in the first specific screen 30SP, and the process proceeds to the next step STR9, where the process moves to the linked cooking mode. In other words, after this, if the input key 44R is pressed, the process automatically proceeds to cooking in the linked cooking mode.

The display content of the first specific screen 30SP for step STR8 is that the first cooking step 1 uses the right heating unit 17HR, and the next cooking step 2 uses the microwave heating source 189. This information is displayed in the step display section 332. The content and transitions of these display screens will be explained in detail later.

When the cooperative cooking mode is entered, induction heating cooking starts from the moment the input key 44R on the right operation unit 40R is pressed. As explained in FIG. 39, induction heating does not start immediately. Step STR9 and beyond is step MS4 shown in FIG. 39.

If the input key 43MS is not operated in step STR7, the result is determined to be "No" and the process returns to step STR3. If steps STR3 to STR7 are still cycling through, for example, 30 minutes after the input key 43MC is operated, the main power may be automatically turned off or the process may return to step ST4 (see Figs. 78 and 81).

Next, we will explain FIG. 80.
FIG. 80 shows the determination processes in steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG.
Step STX1 is the stage where the input key 43MC is operated.
The next step STX2 is a stage in which the integrated control device MC checks the latest state of the cooking appliance with respect to the above-mentioned permission conditions 1 and 2.

The next step STX3 is a judgment process stage that corresponds to steps STR1 and STR2 in FIG. 78. In this step STX3, the integrated control device MC compares the latest state of the cooking device with the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above, and judges whether the state satisfies permission conditions 1 and 2.

In step STX3 of FIG. 76, notifications 1 to 4 indicate the contents notified to the user by the voice synthesizer 95.
Moreover, Display 1 to Display 4 indicate the contents displayed on the integrated display section 30. Note that Display 1 to Display 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 30SP that is displayed from step STR3 in Fig. 79 onwards, but are displayed on the integrated display section 30 where the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed. In other words, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed unless the prerequisites for switching to the coordinated cooking mode (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met.

Next, we will explain Figure 81.
The control mode in Fig. 81 is for a (second) coordinated cooking mode different from the (first) coordinated cooking mode in Fig. 79. There are two heating sources used in the coordinated cooking mode in Fig. 81, the first to be used is the microwave heating source 189, and the second to be used is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9. The control mode in Fig. 81 differs greatly from that in Fig. 79 in step STR11.

In the "warm" (automatic range) setting of the range grill cooking (combined cooking) menu mentioned above, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops microwave oscillation when the "target temperature" is reached. Therefore, if heat from a previous cooking session remains inside the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the start, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating. Note that the default value for the "target temperature" here is 80°C, but this can be set higher or lower using the central operation unit 40M.

In step STR11, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 is higher than the reference temperature (e.g., 70°C), there is a concern that the temperature measuring unit 158 will detect the high temperature too early and stop microwave heating before cooking is complete.

In the control shown in FIG. 81, if the temperature of the heating chamber 113 exceeds the reference temperature, the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L display the fact that the coordinated cooking mode KM3 cannot be executed at that time (STR12). Furthermore, this may also be displayed on the integrated display unit 30. It is more reliable to notify by voice using the voice synthesis device 95. Note that the reason that this is displayed on the left and right display units 31L and 31R is because at this stage the user has not yet selected either the left or right heating unit 17HL, 17HR.

In addition, the first specific screen 30SP, which is displayed when permission conditions 1 and 2 are met, is not displayed at this stage, so in addition to or instead of being displayed on the right display unit 31R and the left display unit 31L, it may be displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (STR12).
In other words, in Figures 78 and 80, the first condition (permission condition 1) and the second condition (permission condition 2) determined whether or not to transition to the collaborative cooking mode, but step STR11 in Figure 81 can be said to correspond to the third condition (permission condition 3).

In this way, the user can be notified that the heating source to be used first (in this case, the microwave heating source 189) is unavailable during the collaborative cooking mode selection stage.

In addition, when displaying or informing the user in step STR12 that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 is too high to start cooking, the device may also convey useful information to the user, such as that the temperature in the heating chamber 113 will drop more quickly if the door 114 is opened.

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the left heating unit 17HL is used during execution of the combined cooking mode KM3, regardless of the combined cooking mode KM3.
In this embodiment 1 of Figure 82, the heating source used in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 first (cooking process 1) is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, and the heating sources used next (cooking process 2) are the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

When the cooking process in the above-mentioned linked cooking mode has already progressed to the heating stage (cooking process 2) of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and the user wishes to use the left heating unit 17HL to perform another cooking operation, and operates the left operating unit 40L, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SH1).

In the next step SH2, just like the "permission condition 1" described above, it is determined that the usage will not exceed the total power regulation value of 5000 W, for example.

If the determination in step SH2 is "No", the process proceeds to step SH8, where, for example, the maximum heat value of the left heating unit 17H is limited so that the sum of the maximum amount of power when the left heating unit 17HL is used and the amount of power of the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) during coordinated cooking does not exceed the regulated value of the power control unit 72, and the notification unit AN notifies the user of the limited value.

On the other hand, when cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being performed with the heating source, if lowering the power (induction heating power) used by the left heating unit 17HL would still exceed the total permitted power amount, then in step SH8, disallowance processing for the left heating unit 17HL is performed. Specifically, a message indicating that it cannot be used is displayed on the left display unit 31L, and a voice notification is given by the voice synthesizer 95. The reason for the unavailability is also notified by the voice synthesizer 95.

In the next step SH3, the user's input operation result is analyzed to determine whether it is an "allowed control menu" that does not fall under a prohibited control menu (hereinafter referred to as a "prohibited control menu").

The "prohibited control menu" is determined in advance taking into consideration the amount of electricity to be used (required for cooking). For example, two items are specified: "(automatic) deep frying" as described in Figure 51, and rice cooking.
Both the (automatic) deep frying and rice cooking employ control methods that anticipate situations in which a large amount of electricity will be used during the cooking process, and so there is a concern that in order to secure that electricity, there may be disruptions to the power supply to the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) while the linked cooking mode KM3 is running.

For the above reasons, in step SH3, a determination is made as to whether the item corresponds to an "authorized control menu." For example, a check is made to see whether the item is "water heater," which is one of the authorized control menus.

In step SH3, if it is determined that the device does not fall under the "permission control menu," the above-mentioned denial process is performed, and a notification is given that the device cannot be used.

If the answer in step SH3 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SH4, where the drive mode of the IH coil 17L of the left heating unit 17HL is automatically determined, and the heating power value set by the user or the heating power value selected by the IH control unit 90 is determined. If the input key 44L is subsequently pressed, the process proceeds to the next step SH5.

Next, the inverter circuit 81L starts to be driven, and induction heating cooking begins (SH5). After this, monitoring is performed to see if a stop command from the user is input by the input key 44L (SH6), and if a stop command is received, the induction heating operation is immediately stopped. Then, the left display unit 31L displays the end of cooking. In addition, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice that cooking is complete (SH7).

In step SH8, if a change to the permitted conditions (for example, lowering the heat) is possible, the change is made and notified.
If there is a reason why the left heating unit 17HL desired to be used cannot be permitted to be used, a notification of denial is made. If the change processing has been completed, the process returns to step SH2.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when additional heating is performed after the heating source that was initially used has finished heating in one cooking process of the linked cooking mode.

The control shown in FIG. 83 is for cooking in the linked cooking mode, where the microwave heating source 189 used in cooking step 2 is driven for a time set by the user (e.g., 5 minutes). For convenience of explanation, the operation of the oven heating source 188 is omitted.

In the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 83, the heat source used in cooking step 1 of the coordinated cooking mode is the right heating unit 17HR, which is set by default, as described in FIG. 79. The heat sources used in the following cooking step 2 are the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188.

A situation will be described in which a user uses the microwave heating source 189 to perform cooking step 2 in one of the collaborative cooking modes KM3 described in FIG.
After the cooking process 1 in the right heating unit 17HR is completed, when the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M is next operated, the operation signal is received by the integrated control device MC (step SJ1).

In the next step SH2, the inverter circuit 121A starts to be driven (SJ2), and measurement of the set time for timer cooking (in this case, 5 minutes) starts (SJ3).
The microwave heating output value remains at the default value (500 W), but the user can change the heat output by operating the central operation unit 40M (SJ4, SJ5).

On the other hand, the heating chamber control unit 159 starts energizing the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B constituting the oven heating source 188 .
In this embodiment 1, the energization of upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B starts simultaneously with the start of the oscillation operation of magnetron 122 of microwave heating source 189.

The upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B are energized while the magnetron 122 is oscillating. In other words, the food to be cooked is heated simultaneously by microwaves and electrical radiation heat (cooking process 2).

As described above, the energization period of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B is the same as the microwave heating period, so in the following explanation, only the microwave heating time will be explained, and the explanation of the heating time of the upper heater 163A and the lower heater 163B will be omitted.

In step SJ6, when the input key 43MT for commanding the stop of microwave heating is operated (SJ6), the driving of the inverter circuit 121A is stopped and the time measurement is also reset (SJ7).
If the input key 43MT for commanding to stop heating is not operated, steps SJ4 to SJ6 and SJ10 are repeated within the set time of the timer cooking. If the set time of the timer cooking has elapsed, the process proceeds to step SJ7.

In step SJ8, a display is displayed to allow the user to decide whether or not to continue the microwave cooking that was temporarily stopped for an additional predetermined time or for a time specified by the user. Specifically, the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays text such as "Do you want to extend the cooking time? If you want to extend the cooking time, press the time key."

The reason for allowing such an extension is that if the user determines after checking the cooking condition of the food that it is still not heated enough, heating (in this case microwave heating and radiant heating) can be resumed quickly to cook the food in a better condition.

When the user presses the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M, it is determined in step SJ9 that an operation signal has been received, and if an operation signal has been received, a "Yes" determination is made.
Then, the process returns to step SJ3. Alternatively, the program may be set so that if the input key 43M3 is operated once before pressing the input key 43MS, the cooking time is extended by a fixed time (e.g., 3 minutes), or so that pressing the input key 43M3 once extends the cooking time by 3 minutes and pressing it twice in succession extends the cooking time by 5 minutes. Even if cooking is started again, the heating operation can be stopped immediately by pressing the input key 43MT.

On the other hand, if the user does not press the input key 43MS of the central operation unit 40M (for example, if the user does not press it within the "hold time: 15 seconds"), the process proceeds to step SJ11, and the operation of the final cooking step of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 ends. Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays this fact, and the voice synthesizer 95 also performs an announcing operation (SJ11). Note that if the door 114 has not been opened even once since step SJ8 and the hold time has elapsed, the voice synthesizer 95 may sound an alarm to alert the user.

When the cooking process of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is completed, the integrated control device MC automatically stores in the memory device MM in chronological order the control conditions under which the microwave heating source 9, the microwave heating source, and the oven heating source 188 operated (when storing, the end date and time of the cooking process is recorded at the same time).

After that, when a specified command signal is received from the central operation unit 40M, the previous stored coordinated cooking mode and control conditions are called up from the memory device MM and displayed on the integrated display unit 30, and the function has the effect of using them to implement the next coordinated cooking mode KM3. Note that it is also possible to call up not only the previous coordinated cooking mode, but also all cooking history (including information on the date and time when cooking was performed) from the past few times or over a certain period (for example, one month) and allow the user to select the desired one from among them. By pressing the input key 43KP to switch to "function mode", the user can set various aspects of the repeatability of the cooking history.

As described above, the start of the RG cooking process also starts the flow of electricity to the oven heating source 189, so the integrated display unit 30 does not display information on whether or not to extend the heating time of the oven heating source 189 alone. However, if the sequence is to operate the microwave heating source 189 first and then the oven heating source 188, or if they are operated in the reverse order, it is possible to set the microwave heating time extension and the oven heating source 188 time extension separately.

Next, reference will be made to Figures 84 and 85.
Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected. Fig. 85 is a flow chart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Figure 84 shows the input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular the steps of the assistance operation when the user makes an input error or is unsure of how to operate.

The steps in FIG. 84 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
When the user operates the input key 43MC, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 (step SL1).

The first specific screen 30SP displays identification information 330, 330A, and 330B for selecting a coordinated cooking menu as information for the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (see FIG. 64) (step SL2).

In the next step SL3, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated. As described in FIG. 79, by operating the two input keys 43M1, the display of the identification information 330 indicating the name of the food that can be cooked in the coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) changes by sequentially moving upward or downward, and the identification information 330 corresponding to another food is displayed in the center of the first area 30L (step SL9).

In this Figure 84, the step of selecting one of the heating unit specifying units 333R and 333L described in Figure 64 is omitted from the illustration.

In the next step SL4, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 43MT has been operated, the determination is "No" and the process returns to step ST4 in FIG. 81. In other words, the process returns to the state of the standby initial screen 30Z.

On the other hand, if the input key 43MT has not been operated, the result is "Yes", and the process proceeds to next step SL5.
Next, if an input key on the central operation unit 40M that is not necessary for setting the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is operated, step SL5 is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL11.

Here, "input keys that are not necessary for setting the collaborative cooking mode KM3" are, for example, input key 43KP of the central operation unit 40M. Also, input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R.

As explained in FIG. 67, when the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is selected with the input key 43MC, the right heating unit 17HR is occupied, and input using the input keys 43R1 and 44R of the right operation unit 40R is invalid. However, it is possible that the user may not notice this.

Therefore, in step SL11, the notification unit AN notifies that the operation is incorrect. For example, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of an erroneous operation as soon as the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated. Note that when the right heating unit 17HR is occupied and the integrated control device MC is controlled so that it cannot detect whether the input keys of the right operation unit 40R are touched or not, the erroneous operation of the input keys 43R1 and 44R cannot be detected. However, as described above, when the input itself from the input key 43R1 etc. is enabled and the integrated control device MC processes it so that it does not consider it to be a valid signal, the erroneous operation can be detected.

In step SL11, it is notified that the operation is incorrect, and then the process proceeds to step SL12. In step SL12, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the correct operation and the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL13). Then, the process returns to step SL3, and it is recommended that the user redo the operation.

If it is determined in step SL5 that no erroneous input key has been operated, the determination in step SL5 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step SL6.
In this step SL6, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL13, where detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, an outline of the food to be cooked corresponding to the identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL7 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL8 in which cooking process 1 is started in accordance with the program of the coordinated operation. Note that a preheating process may be started before cooking process 1 in order to start the preheating operation. Note that if the input key 43MS has not been operated, the process returns from step SL7 to step SL3.

Next, we will explain Figure 85.
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the integrated control device MC when the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
FIG. 85 shows input steps in the central operation unit 40M, and in particular shows steps of assistance operations when the user makes an input error or is unsure of how to operate.

When the user operates the input key 43M1 (step SL20), the integrated control device MC displays the second specific screen 30SC on the integrated display section 30.
Furthermore, the second specific screen 30SC displays a control menu for cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 (see FIG. 59) (step SL21).

In the next step SL22, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated again. As described in Figures 59 to 63, by operating the pair of left and right input keys 43M1, the display of the specific text 30J indicating the names (including abbreviations) of the control menus that can be used in the composite cooking mode KM2 changes by sequentially moving upward or downward, and the specific text 30J of another control menu is displayed in the center of the first area 30L.

If the input key 43M1 is not operated in step SL22, the display of the specific text 30J of the control menu "Warm" that is defined as the default display is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SL23.

If the input key 43M1 is operated, step SL22 is determined as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL28.
In step SL28, as described above, a specific text 30J indicating the name (including the abbreviation) of another control menu that can be used in the combined cooking mode KM2 is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to next step SL23.

In the next step SL23, it is determined whether the input key 43M2 has been operated. By operating the input key 32M2, the control conditions such as the heating time information 30S shown in the second area 30M can be changed to other control conditions (see FIG. 62).

When the user operates the input key 43M2, step SL23 is judged as "No" and the process proceeds to step SL29. In step SL29, another control condition is displayed in the center of the second area 30M, and the process proceeds to the next step SL24.

In the next step SL25, if an input key on the central operation unit 40M that is not necessary for setting the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the result is determined to be "No" and the process proceeds to step SL30.

Here, "input keys that are not necessary for setting the composite cooking mode KM2" are, for example, input keys 43KP and 43MC on the central operation unit 40M. Also, input keys 43R1 and 44R on the right operation unit 40R.

In step SL30, the notification unit AN notifies the user that the operation is incorrect. For example, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user of the incorrect operation as soon as the input key 43KP or the input keys 43R1 and 44R are operated. Then, the process proceeds to step SL31.

In step SL31, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as the guide key, has been operated.

When the guide key (input key) 43M3 is operated, the correct operation and the incorrect operation are displayed in the third area 30R (step SL32). Then, the process returns to step SL22, and it is recommended that the user redo the operation.

If no erroneous input key operation is found in step SL24, step SL24 is judged as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL25.

In step SL25, it is determined whether the input key 43M3, which also serves as a guide key, has been operated. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL32, where detailed information such as the correct operation content is displayed. Also, at this stage, reference information 30P1 regarding the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC may be displayed.

If it is determined in the next step SL26 that the input key 43MS has been operated, the process proceeds to step SL27, which starts cooking process 1, in accordance with the operation program of the composite cooking mode KM2.

(Various displays and input operation section in collaborative cooking mode)
Next, we will explain Figures 86 to 113.
These figures show the control operations of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 and left display unit 31L) when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

FIG. 86 is a plan view showing the control operations of the input operation unit 40 and the display unit (integrated display unit 30 and left display unit 31L) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected.
In the figure, the symbol FG denotes the user's fingertip.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as shown in FIG.
Then, three pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the collaborative cooking menu are displayed. These pieces of identification information correspond to the three items to be cooked, namely, "hamburger steak,""gratin," and "roast beef." These pieces of identification information 330, 330A, and 330B are displayed simultaneously.

In FIG. 86 and the next FIG. 87, the process display section 332 is omitted from the first specific screen 30SP.
Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330. In the examples of Figures 86 and 87, the additional information 331 displays "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL."

The individual light emitting portion 27M6 adjacent to the input key 43MS flashes as shown by the broken circle in FIG. 86, guiding the user to operate the input key 43MS.
On the other hand, when the heating source to be used first in the coordinated cooking mode is the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, the light-emitting display sections 27L2 and 27L3 emit light as shown in FIG.

Then, operating the input key 43MS switches to the coordinated cooking mode KM3. At that time, the input function of the input key 44L is enabled, so when this input key 44L is pressed, cooking is performed using the left heating unit 17HL.

At the same time, the heat power indicator 67L, which indicates the heat power level during induction heating cooking in the left heating unit 17HL, lights up (the number of heat power indicators that light up is determined by a default value).
Even if the left heating unit 17HL is used individually (irrespective of the cooperative cooking mode KM3) during the cooperative cooking mode, if the operation of the left heating unit 17HL is prohibited by the integrated control device MC (occupied state) as described above, the light-emitting indicator 27L3 will not emit light in Fig. 86. The heat power indicator 67L will also not be lit.

Furthermore, as described above, even if the left operation unit 40L for the left heating unit 17HL is operated during cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the left heating unit 17HL cannot be used, regardless of the coordinated cooking mode KM3. This is displayed as reference information in the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30. For example, a message such as "Left IH cannot be used because coordinated cooking is in progress" or "Left IH and heating chamber are currently not available because coordinated cooking is in progress" is displayed.

As is clear from the above explanation, the operation unit (input key 43MS) for starting the execution of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is located in the center of the top surface of the top plate 15, so the user's gaze naturally focuses on the center. Furthermore, the selection of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the guidance display leading up to the start of cooking are also concentrated on the integrated display unit 30 in the center.

Furthermore, the central operation unit 40M also has an input key 43MS for proceeding to the next heat source when cooking process 1 of the left heating unit 17HL, which is the first heat source, has been completed.
In other words, the main input operations of selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3, starting the first cooking process 1, and starting the next cooking process 2 can all be performed centrally at the front left/right center of the cooking appliance 1 (central operation unit 40M).

Next, we will explain Figure 87.
FIG. 87 is a plan view showing the operations of central operation unit 40M and left operation unit 40L and the display contents of first specific screen 30SP when the cooperative cooking mode of cooking appliance 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC on the central operation unit 40M is pressed, the three identification information 330, 330A, and 330B included in the collaborative cooking menu are simultaneously displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (display screen 8A), as shown in FIG. 83 (B).

Additional information 331 is displayed to the right of the identification information 330, 330A, and 330B. In the example of FIG. 87, the additional information 331 indicates that "induction heating can be started in the left heating section 17HL."

When the left input key 43M1 is pressed once more, the identification information 330 of the food to be cooked (named "Hamburger") that was displayed in the center of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 moves backwards, and instead the identification information 330B of "Roast beef" that was displayed in the front is displayed in the center (display screen 8B).

Each time the left input key 43M1 is pressed once as described above, the identification information 330 (indicating the name of the food being cooked) displayed in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30 is updated one by one in a fixed order.

When the right input key 43M1 is pressed, each time it is pressed, the display screen is selected in the reverse order, for example, from the display screen 8D in FIG. 87(B) to the display screen 8C.
Although only four coordinated cooking menus are shown in Fig. 87, as described above, there are a total of eight coordinated cooking menus. These display screens 8A to 8D are all first specific screens 30SP.

Next, we will explain Figure 88.
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of coordinated cooking menus available when the coordinated cooking mode KM3 of the cooking appliance is selected.
As is clear from FIG. 88, the eight coordinated cooking menus are displayed in sequence (forward or backward) on the first specific screen 30SP by operating the input key 43M1.

Next, we will explain Figure 89.
FIG. 89 is a table showing the display contents of the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display section 30 when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Immediately before the start of the cooking process, the process display section 332 has several types as shown in FIG. 89 according to the cooking menu (8 types from hamburger steak to gratin).

The additional information 331 is consistent throughout the entire cooperative cooking mode, as shown by additional information A and additional information B. The additional information A and additional information B are displayed alternately for a fixed period of time (for example, every 5 seconds).
Furthermore, in the additional information B, the heating section of the induction heating source 9 to be used is indicated as "changeable" because there are two heating sections, the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR.

Next, the cooking process will be briefly explained for the eight types of food shown in FIG.
Part 1: Cooking menu (4 types) for range grill cooking using induction heating source 9
Hamburger steak: Optimal temperature preheating → Optimal temperature cooking → Range grill cooking "Optimal temperature preheating" refers to preheating the object N, such as a frying pan, to the appropriate temperature (e.g. 180°C). In that optimal temperature state, optimal temperature cooking (using induction heating source 9) is performed as cooking process 1. No edible oil is added to the object N.
The range in which the user can set the "optimum temperature" on the induction heating source 9 is from 140°C to 220°C in 20°C increments.
When cooking on the grill range, the heat can be changed for a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) from the start of cooking so that the finished state can be changed.
Roast beef, paella, gratin: Same as hamburger above.

Part 2: Cooking menus (4 types) using induction heating source 9 from range grill cooking
Fried chicken: Preheat frying → heat range grill → cook fried food.
"Preheating fried food" refers to putting a specified amount of cooking oil (200 g or approximately 220 cc or more) into the heated object N (a pan for deep frying, etc.) and preheating it to a specified temperature with an induction heating source 9.
The range that the user can set for the "deep-frying preheat" on the induction heating source 9 is from 140°C to 200°C in 10°C increments.
When cooking on the grill range, the heat can be changed for a certain period of time (for example, 20 seconds) from the start of cooking so that the finished state can be changed.
Tonkatsu, Tempura: Same as "Karaage" above.
Stir-fried vegetables: Preheat to the appropriate temperature → heat in the microwave → cook at the appropriate temperature.
"Preheating to an appropriate temperature" refers to preheating an object to be heated N, such as a frying pan, to an appropriate temperature. The appropriate temperature state is achieved by the induction heating source 9. After that, as cooking process 1, microwave cooking is performed in the heating chamber 113.
The range in which the user can set the "optimum temperature" on the induction heating source 9 is from 140°C to 220°C in 20°C increments.

The next figure 90 is a plan view showing the control operations and display contents of the input operation unit 40, integrated display unit 30, and left display unit 31L when the linked cooking mode of the heating cooker 1 is selected.

When the input key 43MC of the central operation section 40M is pressed, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display section 30 as shown in FIGS.
The first specific screen 30SP displays identification information 330 of the three coordinated cooking modes. That is, as shown in Fig. 90, the identification information 330 of "hamburger" is displayed in the center in the front-rear direction of the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30. At the same time, additional information 331 and a cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 are displayed in a list state on the first specific screen 30SP.

When the identification information 330 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, that is, at the initial stage when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, the user can select either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L.

The example in Figure 90 shows a case where the left heating unit 17HL is set as the default recommendation. As shown in Figure 90, the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which is displayed with the word "Left" written in white, is always displayed on the initial first specific screen 30SP.

A pair of left and right input keys 43M2 can be used to select either the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L. For example, by pressing the left input key 43M2, the left heating unit selection mark 334L can be selected, and as shown in FIG. 90, the mark is changed to a white character to indicate that it has been selected.
Conversely, in the state of FIG. 90, by pressing the right input key 43M2, the right heating unit selection mark 334R can be selected.

When the identification information 330 for the coordinated cooking mode is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (by pressing the input key 43MC) (see FIG. 66) or when the input key 43MS is pressed (see FIG. 67), the left heating unit 17HL is occupied in order to execute the coordinated cooking mode. Therefore, the left heating unit 17HL is in a state in which it cannot accept settings for other control menus (by the integrated control device MC).

Therefore, the user places an object to be heated N, such as a frying pan, above the left heating unit 17HL and presses the input key 44L. Then, induction heating starts automatically. Note that the operation of pressing the input key 44R may be omitted, and the induction heating in the left heating unit 17HL may be automatically started after a certain time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the input key 43MS was pressed.
As described above, when the heating operation of the left heating unit 17HL is started, the right heating unit 17HR is released from its occupied state, and therefore the input of the single cooking mode in the right operation unit 40R can be started immediately.

It is also possible to cancel the occupation of the right heating section 17HR when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected using the pair of left and right input keys 43M2. However, because the selection of the heating section using the input keys 43M2 can be easily changed, the occupation of the right heating section 17HR is not canceled when the left heating section selection mark 334L is selected, as described above.

The "optimum temperature 180°C" means that the temperature to preheat the heated object N, such as a metal pot or frying pan that is the container for the cooked food "hamburger steak" in this case, is 180°C. In other words, the IH control unit 90 automatically controls the heat level so that the temperature of the bottom surface of the heated object N becomes 180°C through the action of the inverter circuit 81L and the temperature detection circuit 93, etc.

As the preheat temperature rises, the heat display unit 67L, which shows the heat level during induction cooking, does not display the heat level, but rather displays the degree of rise in the preheat temperature and the degree of reaching (approaching) the target preheat temperature.

In Figure 90, the dashed circle shown in the heat display unit 67L indicates the current temperature range, and as the temperature rises, the dashed circle gradually moves to the right. In other words, the state of temperature rise can be seen from the illumination state of the heat display unit 67L. Details will be explained in Figure 91.

Additional information 331 displays "You will be notified when the set temperature is reached" as shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 is displayed in text in a strip shape that crosses horizontally across the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display section 30.

As can be seen from the cooking process display section 332 in FIG. 90, when cooking hamburger steaks in a coordinated manner, the preheating process is started first by the induction heating source 9, followed by cooking process 1, and finally cooking process 2, which involves range grill heating (RG heating).

As shown in FIG. 90, until the moment the collaborative cooking mode is started, the user's fingertips FG and line of sight are on the front right of the integrated display unit 30, in other words, the central operation unit 40M, in order to operate the input keys 43MS.
After that, the user's line of sight moves to the left heating section 17HL as shown by the arrow. That is, when the object N containing the object to be heated is placed above the left heating section 17HL, the user's line of sight moves leftward.

After starting the collaborative cooking mode, the user's line of sight and body will move from the center to the left, as shown by the large horizontal arrow in Figure 90. However, this movement to the left is not large, and will not place a burden on the user.

Next, we will explain Figure 91.
FIG. 91 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is selected, and displays the change in preheating temperature in chronological order.

Figure 91 (A) shows the left-hand portion of the heat power indicator 67L. The dashed circle indicates the current temperature range. For example, if the target preheat temperature is 180°C, the four heat power indicators 67L are illuminated from the beginning of the induction heating cooking process. The leftmost light-emitting element is flashing, as shown by the dashed circle. This flashing state indicates the current temperature level.

As the preheat temperature rises, the current temperature also rises, so the position of the "flashing part" mentioned above moves gradually to the right. When the preheat temperature is reached, the flashing part stops.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 91(B), in the early stages of the induction heating preheating process (e.g., within 20 seconds after the start), the target value of the preheating temperature can be changed by operating either of the input keys 43L2 and 43L3 on the left operation unit 40L.

For example, the preheat temperature can be lowered by one step each time the left input key 43L2 is pressed. Conversely, the preheat temperature can be raised by one step each time the right input key 43L3 is pressed. In this way, the process of changing the preheat temperature is displayed on the left display unit 31L each time, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), so the user can easily check the displayed contents.

Next, we will explain Figure 92.
FIG. 92 is a plan view showing the control operations of the left operation unit 40L and the left display unit 31L when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected.

When the object N placed on the left heating section 17HL reaches the set preheat temperature, the heat power display section 67L stops flashing.
When the heating temperature reaches the preheating temperature in this manner, the integrated display section 30 displays "preheating completed" using additional information 331, as shown in FIG.

The display content of the cooking process display section (cooking process information section) 332 changes. Specifically, the display of "IH preheating" is replaced by the display of "IH heating" of the next cooking process 1 in white letters. In other words, this indicates that the cooking process will proceed to the IH heating (induction heating) process.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage has come where induction heating can be fully implemented. In other words, the user can understand that the temperature of the heated object N, such as a frying pan, placed on the left heating unit 17HL has reached a temperature suitable for heating the object.

The pair of input keys 43L2, 43L3 on the left operation section 40L has the function of specifying the heating power (power consumption) in the left heating section 17HL. Therefore, when moving from the preheating process to the actual heating process (cooking process 1), each time these input keys 43L2, 43L3 are touched once, a specific heating power level one step higher or one step lower can be selected from the data table of prescribed heating power values. This allows the user to freely raise or lower the temperature of the heated object when induction heating.

Next, we will explain Figure 93.
FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram showing the change in the display content of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP) when the collaborative cooking mode is selected.
93(A), when the preheating process is completed, the integrated display unit 30 informs the user that cooking process 1 (full-scale induction heating) can be started. Moreover, cooking process 1 can be stopped at any time by pressing the input key 44L of the left operation unit 40L.

The display of (A) and (B) in FIG. 93 is automatically switched repeatedly at intervals of, for example, 5 seconds. Then, after full-scale induction heating cooking process 1 has begun, only FIG. 93 (C) is displayed. The heat at this point is shown to be "slightly weak." It also shows that the user can adjust this heat level (information indicating the output level, 30V; in this case, the heat of induction heating). FIG. 93 (D) is an example showing the situation immediately after cooking process 1 (induction heating) has been completed.

Next, FIG. 94 is a plan view showing the display content of the integrated display unit 30 when the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected. The display content has been slightly changed from that of FIG. 93, and a preheating temperature value (e.g., 180°C) is included in the additional information 331. The display content shown in FIG. 93(B) may be changed as shown in FIG. 94.

FIG. 94 shows a stage where induction heating cooking process 1 has not yet started when the combined cooking mode KM3 is selected.
Therefore, in order to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS, the individual light emitting portion 27M6 is in a flashing state as indicated by the dashed circle.

To clarify the timing when the preheating process ends and the next cooking process 1 starts, if the user is required to press the input key 43MS again, a step of pressing the input key 43MS may be added as shown in FIG. 94. In that case, the individual light-emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS may be used to notify the user.

In FIG. 94, as shown by the dashed circle, the individual light-emitting element 27M6 is blinking to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS.

In the state of Figures 93 and 94, even if the input key 43M1 is operated, the integrated display unit 30 cannot display the control menu for the combined cooking mode KM2, including "manual range" and "automatic range". To stop the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 at this stage, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT. In other words, pressing the input key 44L (or 43L1) on the left operation unit 40L only ends cooking step 1 of the left heating unit 17HL that is used first, and does not cancel (cancel) all settings of the linked cooking mode KM3.

Next, we will explain Figure 95.
95 shows a scene where the user ends the induction heating cooking process 1 by pressing the input key 44L (43L1) of the left operation unit 40L. Since the heating operation has already ended, the heat power display unit 67L does not emit any light.

Meanwhile, the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 displays that the cooking process has progressed to cooking process 2, i.e., "range grill cooking" (RG cooking), based on the cooking process information (cooking process information section) 332. Specifically, the progress from the white display of "IH heating" to the final cooking process 2, RG cooking, is displayed in white letters.
From this information, the user can easily understand that the stage has come to carry out cooking step 2, which combines microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188.

The command to start cooking step 2 in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 must also be given using the input key 43MS on the central operation unit 40M. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 95, the individual light-emitting unit 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS flashes, as indicated by the dashed circle, to prompt the user to operate the input key 43MS.

On the other hand, the stage in FIG. 95 is after the user has ended induction heating cooking step 1 using input key 44L (43L1) of left operation unit 40L, so the left heating unit 17HL is no longer occupied. Therefore, by operating input key 44L (43L1) of left operation unit 40L, the left heating unit 17HL can be used to start cooking in independent cooking mode KM1, which is different from cooperative cooking mode KM3.

At this stage, if you input using the left operation unit 17HL, you can start another cooking menu using the induction heating source 189. However, because the linked cooking mode KM3 has not yet been released, you cannot perform another cooking operation that uses the heating chamber 113 (cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2). The left heating unit 17HL has simply been released from occupation.

Next, we will explain Figure 96.
FIG. 96 shows that when the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected, the microwave heating output level can be adjusted when proceeding to the "range grill cooking" (RG cooking) stage of cooking process 2.

Specifically, the microwave heating output level is displayed in five stages, such as "slightly weak" and "weak" in the second area 30M of the integrated display section 30. This display information is the same as the "information 30V indicating microwave output level" described in FIG. 93. Therefore, the user can select the microwave heating output level by operating a pair of input keys 43M2.

Next, we will explain Figure 97.
FIG. 97, like FIG. 96, shows that when the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected, the microwave heating output level can be adjusted when proceeding to cooking process 2.

97(B), the microwave heating output level is displayed in a total of five stages from "strong" to "weak" in the second area 30M. The user can select such microwave output level by operating the input key 43M2.
Therefore, in the final step (cooking step 2), the user can adjust the microwave heating intensity depending on the finished state of the food to be cooked. Note that, as described above, the heating intensity can be adjusted in this manner only within a certain period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) after entering cooking step 2.

In the final cooking step 2 described in FIG. 97, the user's operations and line of sight are concentrated in the range of the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M. This allows the user to stay in the center of the front of the cooking appliance 1 and concentrate on completing cooking step 2.

During cooking step 2, if the user wishes to remove the food inside heating chamber 113 from inside heating chamber 113 and check it directly, the user can simply open door 114 at any time. When door 114 is opened, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 instantly stops the microwave transmission and also stops the power supply to upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B.

If the door 114 is closed again and the input key 43MS is pressed again, microwave heating will start instantly again. Note that if the door 114 is opened in the middle of cooking step 2 as described above, the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129 will continue to operate.

Next, we will explain Figure 98.
FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram showing the operations in the final stage after cooking process 2 in FIG. 97 and the display contents of the integrated display section 30 (first specific screen 30SP).

When the user wishes to end the final heating and cooking process (cooking process 2), he or she operates the input key 43MT once. Pressing this ends the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM3. However, at this point, the series of control sequences of the linked cooking mode KM3 has not yet been canceled. Therefore, after such a temporary stop, in order to perform microwave heating or oven heating again, another input operation is required on the central operation unit 40M.

In this embodiment 1, in order to make it easy to perform additional heating, when RG (range grill) cooking is ended, microwave heating will start again if the time is set again with input key 43MS within a certain time (note that the additional time can be controlled so that pressing input key 43M2 or 43M3 once sets it to 1 minute, pressing it twice sets it to 2 minutes, etc.).

As mentioned above, after RG cooking has ended (including when it has ended automatically), microwave heating can be started again by setting the time again using input key 43MS "within a certain period of time," and this "certain period of time" is, for example, 10 minutes.

To allow the user to know the timing to end the RG cooking process, which is the final process of heating and cooking (cooking process 2), as shown in FIG. 98(B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on display screen 10B after display screen 10A. It is configured to display that cooking process 2 will soon end. Display screen 10B in FIG. 98(B) displays that cooking process 2 in the heating chamber 113 will end in 12 seconds.

This display screen 10B is displayed as a result of the process in which the temperature detection circuit 93 detects the temperature rise inside the heating chamber 113, determines the load of the food being cooked, etc., and the integrated control device MC predicts the time it will take to complete the process.

In addition, instead of detecting the temperature rise of the food or the heating chamber 113 to predict when cooking will be completed, the user may set a timer in advance and end cooking step 2 by time control. In this case, the load judgment described above is not necessary.

As described above, if the user sets the timer in advance and ends cooking step 2 by time control, reference information 2 can be notified (step SA13, FA2) as described in FIG. 74. That is, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the first specific screen 30SP changes to the content displayed on display screen 10B after display screen 10A, and displays information that matches reference information 2 as part of the notification (FA2).

Display screen 10C in Figure 98 (B) is an example showing that heating can be started again within a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds, except 15 seconds if door 114 is opened) immediately after cooking process 2 is completed.
The "time button" on the display screen 10C refers to the input key 43M3. Since the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature due to cooking immediately prior to this, additional information 331 such as "Caution: Grill is too hot" is displayed to enhance user safety.

As shown in Figures 92 and 93, the user can stop the cooking process (induction heating) of the collaborative cooking mode KM3 at any time, even during cooking process 1 (induction heating). In this case, to stop it, it is sufficient to press the input key 43MT once. However, to cancel the collaborative cooking mode KM3 and prevent it from proceeding to the next cooking process 2, it is necessary to press the input key 43MT once more.

In contrast, as shown in Figures 98(A) to (C), when the user is at cooking step 2 (in this case, the range grill) in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, all he or she needs to do to stop cooking step 2 at any time is press the input key 43MT once. Also, in this case (assuming there is no cooking step 3), there is no cooking step to proceed to next, so there is no need to press the input key 43MT once more. Note that pressing the input key 43MT a second time will not initiate any undesirable operation.

(Transition of the first specific screen)
Next, changes to the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 during the period until the transition to the combined cooking mode KM3 described with reference to FIG. 71 is started will be described in detail.

Figures 99 to 101 show the correspondence between the contents of displays E1 to E5 described in the "Central Display Section" of item E and the input operation section in the explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the various processes and operations described in Figure 71.

The state in Figure 99 shows the stage "E1: Initial screen for collaborative cooking" and shows the relationship between the initial screen when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the central operation unit 40M.

100(A) shows the relationship between the screen at the stage of "E2: Change Menu" and the central operation unit 40M. This is the stage at which the input key 43M1 is operated to select one desired food item from the linked cooking modes, and to select the cooking menu of the corresponding linked cooking mode KM3.
For example, "hamburger steak" can be changed to "tempura" or "roast beef."

Figure 100 (B) shows the stage of "E3: Change selected heating source (select right IH)." This shows the stage where the user selects the right heating unit 17HR while looking at the first specific screen 30SP. This selection is made using the input key 43M2.

Next, FIG. 101 (A) shows the stage of "E4: Guidance displayed for pressing input button of right IH." This is the stage where the first specific screen 30SP displays a message indicating that the input key 44R located on the right operation unit 40R needs to be operated in order to start coordinated cooking. In other words, the user is being recommended to press the input key 44R in order to start cooking step 1 of coordinated cooking.

Figure 101 (B) shows the "E5: IH preheating display" stage. At this stage, the first specific screen 30SP shows that the preheating operation has begun in the right heating section 17HR. As described above, the right display section 31R displays information on the actual temperature rise until the preheating (target) temperature of 180°C is reached. In response to this, information (additional information 331) such as "IH preheating in progress", "Preheating completed", and "Notification that the temperature has reached the set temperature" is displayed within the first specific screen 30SP.

Next, Figs. 102 to 108 show the correspondence between the contents of displays E11 to E17 in the "center display section" of item E and the input operation section in explanatory diagram 2, which shows the relationship between the various steps and operations of cooking "hamburger steak" (linked cooking mode) described in Fig. 72.

Figure 102 (A) shows the stage of "E11: IH preheating display" explained in item E (center display section) of Figure 72. The first specific screen 30SP displays a message (additional information 331) indicating that preheating has started by the right heating section 17HR and that the set temperature will be reached.

Figure 102 (B) is the stage of "E12: IH heating display" also explained in Figure 72. At this stage, preheating has been completed, and the additional information 331 indicates that heating is now possible with the right heating unit 17HR. In other words, this indicates that it is time to proceed to the induction heating (IH heating) process.

The stage in FIG. 103 shows the display content that is displayed a certain time (e.g., one minute) after the display in FIG. 102 appears. The display in FIG. 103 is not shown in item E in FIG. 72.

At the stage shown in FIG. 103, it is shown that in order for the user to end the currently running cooking process 1 using the induction heating source 9, it is necessary to press the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L. Note that the program may be modified in advance so that cooking process 1 can be ended using input key 43L1 instead of input key 44L.

The next figure, Figure 104, is the stage of "E13: Grill door opening and closing operation guidance display" explained in Figure 72. At this stage, since induction heating (cooking process 1) has been completed, the additional information 331 prompts the user to move the food to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 (to carry out cooking process 2).

The next figures 105 (A) to (C) show the stage of "E14: Alternating display of heat power change display and start guidance display" explained in Figure 72. At this stage, it is displayed that the heat power of range grill cooking (combined cooking) in the heating chamber 113 can be changed, and further, it is displayed that grill heating cooking in such a heating chamber can be started by pressing the start button (input key 43MS).

In FIG. 105(C), the input key 43MS is in a blinking state as indicated by the dashed circle, indicating that it is waiting for a user operation. Note that the displays in FIG. 105(A) and FIG. 105(B) are alternated, for example, every 5 seconds.

The next Figures 106 (A) to (C) show the "E15: Grill Heating Display" stage described in Figure 72. Here, it shows that the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 is being heated by the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 (cooking process 2).

Figure 106 (A) shows that the heat can be adjusted, and Figure 106 (B) shows that the microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 are driven simultaneously for combined heating. Figure 106 (C) shows that this RG cooking process (cooking process 2) will end in 2 minutes and 30 seconds.

The next figures 107 (A) and (B) show the stage of "E16: Alternating display of extension operation guide and end operation display" explained in Figure 72. Here, the RG heating process has ended, so it is displayed that the time can be extended using the time button (input key 43M3) and grill heating can be performed again.

If the user does not wish to perform extended heating, the display indicates that the user can press the cancel button (input key 43MT) once to end the linked cooking mode without performing extended heating. Note that the first specific screen 30SP with the contents of FIG. 107(A) and FIG. 107(B) are displayed alternately, for example, at intervals of a few seconds.

The next figure 108 shows the "E17: Time setting display" stage. Here, the heating and cooking time can be extended using input key 43M3, and by pressing input key 43MS, heating and cooking can be continued again inside heating chamber 113 for the extended time.

Figure 108 shows the result of setting the extension time (extension time is 2 minutes 30 seconds). After this time setting display, the aforementioned "E15: Grill heating display" and "E16: Alternating display of extension operation guide display and end operation display" are performed.

Next, we will explain Figures 109 to 113.
Figures 109 to 113 show the contents of displays E21 to E26 described in the "central display section" of item E and the state of the input operation section in explanatory diagram 3 showing the relationship between the various steps and operations of cooking "fried chicken" using the collaborative cooking mode KM3 described in Figure 73 (collaborative cooking mode).

Figure 109 (A) shows the stage of "E21: IH preheating display." Here, it can be seen that the preheating operation is being performed on the left heating section 17HL. In other words, induction heating has already started on the object to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL.

Figure 109 (B) shows the stage of "E22: Grill door opening and closing operation guidance display." Here, the display prompts the user to open the door 114 and place the food to be cooked (food) in the heating chamber 113 to perform the grill heating process B23 (see Figure 73).

The next figures 110 (A) to (C) show the stage "E23: Alternating display of heat level change indication and start guidance indication." Here, when cooking fried chicken by driving the "range grill driving unit," it is displayed that the heat level can be adjusted and that cooking can be started by pressing input key 43MS.

The displays of FIG. 110(A) and FIG. 110(B) are alternated, for example, every five seconds.
Furthermore, if the door 114 is left open, the display in Fig. 110(C) is performed. Note that even if the input key 43MS is pressed while the door 114 is left open, the heating operation will not start. If the door 114 is left open, even if a command signal from the input key 43MS reaches the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC will not issue a heating start command unless the door 114 is closed.

Next, Figures 111(A) and (B) show the stage "E24: Microwave heating display".
Fig. 111(A) shows that the heat of cooking can be changed when the "range grill driving unit" is driven. Note that the period during which the heat can be adjusted is limited to a certain time (e.g., 20 seconds) after the start of cooking step 1 (range heating).

Figure 111 (B) shows the content that is displayed after cooking has started, and is an example of displaying the time remaining until cooking is completed. This is the stage at which cooking process 1 has started.

The next Fig. 112 (A) (B) shows the stage of "E25: Alternating display of extension operation guide display and IH preheat completion display". Here, it is displayed that after the cooking process B24 (see Fig. 73) performed by driving the "range grill driving unit" is completed, the time can be extended by pressing the time button (input key 43M2) to extend the heating cooking time.
The display screen of FIG. 112(A) and the display screen of FIG. 112(B) are displayed alternately as a first specific screen 30SP, for example, at intervals of several seconds.

The next figure, 113, is the "E26: Time setting display" stage. Here, it is displayed that the cooking process B24 will be extended for an additional period, for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds. If the "Range Grill (RG)" heating is completed at this stage in Figure 113, it is possible to proceed to cooking process 2 in the left heating section 17HL, which has already completed preheating.

(Home appliance operation management system)
Next, Fig. 114 to Fig. 123 will be described. Fig. 114 to Fig. 123 relate to an operation management system for a home appliance that uses the cooking appliance 1 that is the subject of the present disclosure.

Figure 114 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401 and the cooker 1 during cooking in the coordinated cooking mode. Figure 114 shows the control operation on the cooker 1 side. Figure 115 is a system configuration diagram 1 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooker 1 in the example shown in Figure 114.

FIG. 116 is a system configuration diagram 2 showing the exchange of information between the refrigerator 401, the home gateway, and the cooking appliance 1 in the example shown in FIG. 114.
Fig. 117 is a plan view showing the display contents of the integrated display unit 30 in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after start-up in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 119 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit immediately after start-up in the cooking appliance 1.

Figure 120 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup in the cooking appliance 1. Figure 121 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after startup. Figure 122 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway shown in Figure 1. Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the exchange of information between the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 when the linked cooking mode is implemented.

Referring to Figure 114 .
The operational steps shown in FIG. 114 are defined in a control program that executes the coordinated cooking mode of the integrated control device MC.
The stock inquiry signal RQ1 is sent at a point prior to this first step SD1, that is, at the stage of step ST2 in FIG.

The operational steps shown in FIG. 114 show what happens after the user's operation (A23) shown in FIG. 76. In step SD1, when "fried chicken" is selected as a cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 and cooking process 1 is started, the ingredients start to be heated by microwaves.

This step SD1 corresponds to step SB1 in Figure 75. At this stage, a voice notification is issued saying "Range, starting standard finish" as in notification F24 in Figure 73.

Next, measurement of the elapsed time TN3 from step SD1 begins (SD2). This step SD2 corresponds to step SB2 in FIG. 75. Note that while step SB2 in FIG. 75 measures the temperature rise, step SD2 in FIG. 114 measures the elapsed time TN1.

In the next step SD3, the contents of the started integrated cooking mode KM3 are verified. In this case, the identification information 330 is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30, and the integrated control device MC can verify that cooking of "fried chicken" is being performed.
It is also clear at this point that cooking process 1 of the fried chicken will use heating chamber 113. In other words, it is clear that once cooking process 1 is completed, heating chamber 113 will no longer be used.

In addition, step SD3 may be omitted and dedicated programs may be prepared for each of the linked cooking modes (e.g., fried chicken, hamburger steak, and gratin).

In the next step SD4, it is determined whether or not the current mode is a specific coordinated cooking mode. This "specific coordinated cooking mode" is, for example, one of the following:
(1) Foods that can generally be classified as side dishes, such as fried chicken, hamburger steaks, and gyoza dumplings.
(2) Items cooked in each coordinated cooking mode (e.g., hamburger steak) and items that are usually eaten at the same time (e.g., soup, french fries).

If the answer is "No" at step SD4, the operation of FIG. 114 ends at this point.
In the next step SD5, it is determined whether cooking process 1 is being performed in heating chamber 113. If "No" in this step SD5, the operation of Fig. 114 ends at this point.

If step SD5 is "Yes", proceed to the next step SD6. In step SD6, a query signal RQ3 (see FIG. 115) is sent to the home gateway 411 to inquire about the inventory information of ingredients stored in the refrigerator 401.

At the time when the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on, the stock inquiry signal RQ1 has already been transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 as described with reference to FIG.
In this embodiment 1, the conditions are further narrowed down, and at the stage where it is determined that there is a high possibility that stock information is required (step SD6 in FIG. 114), a stock inquiry signal RQ3 is sent.

In the next step SD7, the food inventory information is obtained from the home gateway 411. The integrated control device MC then temporarily stores this information in the memory device MM.

In the next step SD8, the received ingredient inventory information is analyzed.
In this step SD8, a search is performed to find ingredients that are highly related to the cooking being performed in the linked cooking mode (in this case, fried chicken). The "related" here refers to ingredients that are often eaten together with the side dish of fried chicken (for example, frozen vegetables) or rice as a staple food. Therefore, in the following explanation, it is assumed that "frozen rice" is extracted in this step SD8.

If step SD7 returns a "No" result, the process in FIG. 114 ends without any notification to the user.

In the next step SD9, it is determined whether the elapsed time TN1 has elapsed. Then, in the next step SD10, a notification is given that cooking step 1 will soon end. Note that this notification is not shown in FIG. 72. Also, this notification may be omitted.

In the next step SD11, after the end of cooking step 1, a menu for another heating cooking method that effectively utilizes heating chamber 113 that will not be used for cooking fried chicken is notified.
As described above, "frozen rice" is notified as a recommended cooking menu.

In the next step SD12, it is determined whether the user has performed an operation to stop cooking process 1. If the user has performed a stop operation in this step SD12, the process proceeds to step SD13, and the microwave heating operation of cooking process 1 in the heating chamber 113 is stopped.

In the next step SD14, a notification that cooking process 1 is completed (F25: see FIG. 73) is made.
Then, the user takes out the food to be cooked (fried chicken ingredients) from the heating chamber 113 and places it in the food to be heated (frying pan, etc.) N, which has already been preheated to a high temperature, and cooking process 2 begins. At this stage, the cooking oil placed in the food to be heated N has already reached an appropriate temperature.

As can be seen from the above description, in step SD8, which is a stage before the cooking process 1 is completed, the user can know the recommended cooking menu.
Moreover, since the recommended control menu is based on the inventory information from refrigerator 401, the user can effectively use heating chamber 113 to cook another dish prior to cooking step 2.

As described above, for the cooking menu of the "fried chicken" linked cooking mode KM3, the rice, which is the staple food, can be defrosted and the heated food (rice) can be prepared simultaneously, so the actual total time from starting to finishing the linked cooking can be shortened. This can improve user convenience.

As described above, when the heating chamber 113 that has completed cooking step 1 in the integrated cooking mode is used within a short period of time after the end of cooking step 1, it is expected that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 will be high.
As described above, in the "warm" (automatic range) control menu that uses microwaves, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the wall temperature of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops the microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if high heat remains in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature is high from the beginning, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, when using the heating chamber 113 after completing cooking step 1 in the coordinated cooking mode, the user can select the "manual range" control menu (single heating cooking). In other words, the user can set the microwave heating time.

As explained in FIG. 66, when the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 in order to perform coordinated cooking, the left heating unit 17HL becomes unusable, but no processing (by the integrated control device MC) is performed to continue occupying the heating chamber 113 until after cooking process 1 is completed. Therefore, there is no problem in executing the recommended control menu.

Furthermore, if a control method is adopted in which the heating chamber 113 continues to be occupied even after cooking step 1 of the coordinated cooking has been completed in the heating chamber 113 (after cooking step 2), the control program may exceptionally release the heating chamber 113 from its occupied state only when there is a "recommended control menu" as described in step SD8 above.

Next, we will explain Figures 115 and 116.
115 and 116 are diagrams for explaining, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 after the main power of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on.
The following will be described with reference to FIG. 115, assuming that the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is executed.

The home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 are always connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99 from the time they are installed in the kitchen KT.
The home gateway 411 issues a command signal to the alarm device 445 to monitor in "at-home mode" (step SE1 in FIG. 115). "At-home mode" refers to an operation pattern when there is at least one resident in the house HA. When all the residents are away from home, the mode is switched to "home sitting mode."

The user presses the operation button 98 (see FIG. 19) of the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 to turn on the power (step SE2 in FIG. 115). Then, cooking begins in response to the user's input operation.

As explained in FIG. 114, the cooking device 1 transmits an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 at the start of cooking process 1 (step SD1). . This inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent from the wireless communication unit 49 to the communication unit 446 of the home gateway 411.

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives detection information from the human detection unit 413H, which detects the presence and movement of people in the kitchen KT, and determines that it is time to cook, and switches to mutually linked operation with the cooking appliance 1 (step SE3).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 further transmits an inventory data search command signal RQ2 to the refrigerator 401.
This inventory inquiry signal RQ2 is sent from communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 to a wireless communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401. Other signals are also transmitted and received via wireless communication between communication unit 446 and the communication unit (not shown) of refrigerator 401.

Refrigerator 401 searches for the inventory of food stored in refrigerator compartment 401B and multiple freezer compartments 401A, updates the inventory information, and stores it in its own memory (step: SE4). Food stored in the refrigerator comes in various forms, such as food that has been partially processed at home or bagged food purchased outside. Many methods have already been proposed for identifying and searching this inventory information, including the use of images taken with a camera, RF tags, and two-dimensional codes.

Additionally, various methods have been proposed, such as a method of manually inputting data such as the name and attributes of food when putting food into refrigerator 401, or a method of automatically reading information about food, etc. optically or magnetically and storing inventory information.
In the present embodiment, since there are no restrictions on the identification of food when it is placed in refrigerator 401 or after it has been placed therein, either method may be used.

Refrigerator 401 transmits the collected inventory information data all at once to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as a reply signal RS1.
Home gateway 411 temporarily stores the inventory data transmitted in reply signal RS1 in storage device 450 (SE5). Note that "temporarily" here refers to the period from when the inventory information data is transmitted again from refrigerator 401 until it is received, and does not mean that the data is stored continuously for a long period of time. The inventory data in storage device 450 is always overwritten with the latest data and saved.

As explained in FIG. 114, when cooking process 1 is being performed in the heating chamber 113 of the cooking appliance 1, an inventory inquiry signal RQ3 is sent to the home gateway 411 at a predetermined timing (step SD6 in FIG. 114) (SE6).

The home gateway 411 transmits the latest inventory data stored in the memory device 450 as an inventory data signal RS2 from the communication unit 446 to the wireless communication unit 49 of the cooking appliance 1.

In the cooking appliance 1, the inventory data received by the wireless communication unit 49 is stored in the memory device MM (SE7). Then, as described in step SD8 of Fig. 114, the integrated control device MC notifies the user of another cooking menu (such as the names of ingredients or dishes) that is directly related to one cooking menu of the active cooperative cooking mode from the inventory data (SE8).
In the example of Figure 114, only "fried chicken" has been described as the coordinated cooking mode in which cooking process 1 is performed in heating chamber 113, but as shown in Figure 89, "stir-fried vegetables,""porkcutlet,""tempura," etc. may also be used.

Next, we will explain Figure 116.
FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the operations following step SE8 in FIG.
When the cooking appliance 1 has completed all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode (SE9), it transmits main data indicating the contents of the coordinated cooking (hereinafter referred to as "cooking execution data") to the home gateway 411 as a signal BS1.

Here, the "cooking execution data" refers to at least one of the following pieces of information:
(1) Identification information 330 that can identify the food to be cooked. For example, the name of the food to be cooked (including abbreviations), such as "fried chicken" or "stir-fried vegetables."
(2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked; (3) Information indicating the control conditions for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 (e.g., microwave output of 500 W, heat of 1500 W during induction heating, or “medium heat”); (4) Information indicating the time required from cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2; (5) Information indicating the end time of cooking process 2 (or the final cooking process); (6) Information indicating the time required from the start of the preheating process to the end of all cooking processes 2; (7) Information identifying the heating source that performed the heating/cooking operation (e.g., left heating unit 17HL); (8) Information regarding restrictions the user will be subject to during the next heating/cooking operation (e.g., that microwave (automatic) heating cannot be performed because the heating chamber 113 is too hot).
(9) Information related to the safety of the user, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber 113

The "(2) information on the weight or volume of the food being cooked" is, for example, information such as "fried chicken: 300 g." This can be estimated by the integrated control device MC from the rate of temperature rise of the food being cooked (fried chicken) in cooking step 1.

The “cooking execution data” can be useful information for the home gateway 411 and the refrigerator 401 .
In addition, the “cooking execution data” can also be useful information for the alarm device 445.

For example, among the "cooking implementation data," "(4) information indicating the time required to complete cooking process 2," "(5) information indicating the end time," and "(6) information indicating the time required to complete all cooking processes 2" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway 411. By accumulating this data, it becomes possible to estimate the time periods during which cooking is concentrated in the kitchen KT.

Furthermore, among the "cooking implementation data," "(9) information related to the user's safety, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber" can also be useful information for the temperature monitoring device 440. This is because it can tell the "deviation" between the current temperature on the cooking device 1 side and the temperature optically measured and estimated by the temperature monitoring device 440 side.

The "cooking execution data" can be useful information for the refrigerator 401. For example, the "cooking execution data" can be used by the schedule management unit 451 to estimate periods of time when cooking is concentrated, and it can then be used to predict when food will be stored in the refrigerator 401.

A refrigerator that acquires environmental information indicating the state of the external environment from an external electrical device (e.g., an air conditioner or a cooking device) and controls the operating state of each part, such as a cooling device, has been proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-211153. However, in the conventional proposals, the environmental information provided by the cooking device 1 was often vague and was not necessarily useful from the refrigerator's perspective. In contrast, the "cooking execution data" in this embodiment 1 is based on a specific control menu and is highly useful.

The home gateway 411 converts the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 to the refrigerator 401 and sends it as a signal BS2 including the "cooking execution data". The contents of the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 and the "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS2 may basically be the same, but they may also be different. The "cooking execution data" sent by the sending signal BS1 includes information useful to the temperature monitoring device 440 and the alarm device 445, but since this information is not necessary for the refrigerator 401, it may be deleted by the home gateway 411 before being sent to the refrigerator 401.

The refrigerator 401 analyzes the contents of the "cooking execution data" and collects and analyzes data that is useful for the operation of the refrigerator 401 (SE10).
Next, the refrigerator 401 changes the operating conditions of the refrigerator 401 based on the analysis result of the "cooking execution data" (SE12).

The central control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 stores the "cooking execution data" in the storage device 450. It also updates the "cooking history data" in the schedule management unit 451. This records the execution date and time of this one heating cooking (linked cooking), the time period, the cooking menu (e.g., the name of the cooking process "fried chicken"), and other related information (e.g., estimated fried chicken weight "300g").

Furthermore, if specific ingredients or cooking menus such as "frozen rice" are recommended based on the inventory data specifically notified in step SE8 (see step SD8 in FIG. 114), the schedule management unit 451 may also include the fact of the recommendation in the "cooking history data" recorded. If such daily cooking activities are accumulated as data, the schedule management unit 451 that utilizes artificial intelligence or the like will have improved "learning and prediction" capabilities, and the value of providing information to the user will gradually increase.

After all cooking steps in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 have been completed, the cooking appliance 1 transmits an operation end notice signal BS3 to the home gateway 411 (SE9).
Thereafter, the main power switch 96 is opened (OFF) (SE13).

When the main control unit 447 of the home gateway 411 receives the operation end warning signal BS3, it ends the "interconnected operation mode". It then switches the alarm device 445 to the "monitoring mode" (SE14). This allows the temperature change in the interior space of the kitchen KT to be monitored regardless of whether the user is in the kitchen KT.

(Inventory information display example 1)
FIG. 117 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit 40M and the peripheral area of the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 117 shows the scene of step SD11 in FIG.

The example shown in FIG. 117 is the stage where "fried chicken", one of the cooking menus in the collaborative cooking mode, is being performed.
While cooking step 1 is being performed in heating chamber 113, integrated display section 30 displays the presence of "frozen rice" as inventory information. The voice synthesizer 95 also notifies the user by voice.

117, if the input key 43MT is pressed once, the microwave cooking in cooking step 1 will be stopped. The collaborative cooking mode setting will not be cancelled.
Therefore, if the door 114 is opened, the food to be cooked is removed from the heating chamber 113, and the food to be cooked is placed on the food to be cooked N placed on the left heating section 17HL, induction heating cooking (cooking step 2) can be started from that point. Note that, as shown in this integrated display section 30, the input key 44L (which may be changed to 43L1) of the left operation section 40L is pressed at the initial preheating start stage as explained in Figure 73 (see operation A21 in Figure 73), so there is no need to newly operate the left operation section 40L.

As explained in FIG. 94, the user may be asked to press the input key 43MS once when transitioning to cooking process 1 so that the integrated control device MC can clearly grasp the data indicating the timing of transition from the preheating process to cooking process 1.

(Inventory information display example 2)
FIG. 118 is an enlarged plan view showing the integrated display section 30 of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 118 shows an example in which the display contents of the integrated display section 30 in FIG. 117 are changed.

The example shown in FIG. 118(A) displays time-saving information 333, which indicates that time can be saved, and cooking recommendation information 338, "warming," in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30.

The second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the larger display surface is used to display "Can be heated and defrosted in the heating chamber." In other words, it indicates that "heating" and "defrosting" can be performed using the heating chamber 113.

In FIG. 118(A), symbols 335U and 335D indicate that there is more information available, and pressing one of the input keys 43M2 (a pair of left and right keys) corresponding to this symbol will display the next information.

In FIG. 118(A), symbols 336 and 336D indicate that there is more information available, and pressing one of the input keys 43M3 (a pair of left and right keys) corresponding to this symbol will display the next information.

In FIG. 118(A), if the user operates either input key 43M2 or 43M3, the next information is displayed, reducing the number of situations in which the user becomes confused about how to operate the device.

In another example shown in FIG. 118(B), refrigerator information 334 is displayed in text form in the first area 30L of the integrated display section 30.
In addition, the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 are combined, and the expanded display surface is used to display information 339 on two types of individual ingredients, "frozen rice" and "oden." In other words, the user is informed that the ingredients in the refrigerator 401 are "frozen rice" and "oden."

The individual ingredient information is information that identifies one food item. The "ingredient information" of the refrigerator 401 refers to a collection of the individual ingredient information 339.

The display of FIG. 118(A) and FIG. 118(B) may be alternated, for example, every few seconds, or only one of them may be displayed. In either case, the user can understand that, in the middle of cooking step 1, another dish can be prepared in the heating chamber 113 using the ingredient information stored in the refrigerator 401.

FIG. 119 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 119 shows an example in which the display contents of FIG. 52 have been improved.

In this FIG. 119, display screen 1, display screen 2A and display screen 2B are the same as those explained in FIG. 52, so the explanation will be omitted.
The display screen 2C is a screen displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B. In this display screen 2C, a recommendation 30R1 is used to prompt the user to perform an input operation to select a heating source. The guidance screen 30SA is displayed after this display screen 2C.

Next, FIG. 120 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 120 shows yet another example in which the display contents of FIG. 52 are improved.
In this FIG. 120, the display screen 2D is a screen that is displayed after the display screen 2A or the display screen 2B.

Display screen 2C in FIG. 120 informs the user that the cooking appliance 1 is automatically checking food ingredient information in the refrigerator 401. In other words, it notifies the user that the inventory information acquisition operation is being performed. Note that the guidance screen 30SA may be displayed after display screen 2D.

In step ST2 shown in FIG. 38, we explained that the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 is sent. The operation in that step is displayed on the display screen 2D in FIG. 120.

Next, FIG. 121 is an enlarged plan view showing the transition of the display screen of the integrated display section 30. As shown in FIG.
After the display screen 2D shown in Fig. 120, the user is notified by the display screen 2E that the ingredient information has been acquired. Immediately thereafter, the display screen 2E notifies the user that the specific ingredients are "frozen hamburger steak" and refrigerated "gyoza". Note that the heat source can be freely selected before the display screens 2D to 2E are displayed. If the heat source is selected (see step STC in Fig. 38) immediately after the display screen 2C appears, the display screens 2D to 2E are not displayed. Note that the guide screen 30SA may be automatically displayed after this display screen 2F.

(Example of Home Gateway Operation)
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the operation of the home gateway.
As described with reference to FIG. 115, while the alarm device 445 is operating in the "home mode", the schedule management unit 451 of the home gateway determines whether the "cooking time slot" has begun.

The "cooking time slot" may be manually input by the resident using the input unit 449 (see FIG. 4). For example, the cooking time slot may be set to be from 6:30 to 7:30 a.m. on weekdays.
In addition, the data processing unit built into the schedule management unit 451 analyzes the operating hours of the cooking appliance 1 for the past 30 days, for example, and determines that the average time period is between 6:20 and 7:30 a.m.

In the above-mentioned situation, in step SF1, it is determined whether the current time is within the cooking time slot.
In step SF1, if the current time is 6:25, then as described above, it is within the average time period (6:20 to 7:30 a.m.), so the answer is determined as "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SF2.

In step SF2, it is determined whether or not the human detection sensors 452, 453 of the human detection unit 413H have detected a human.
For example, if a resident moves through the space in front of the refrigerator 401 and the cooking appliance 1, or stands still in front of the refrigerator 401 or the cooking appliance 1, such human movement is detected.

If a person is detected in step SF2, the process proceeds to the next step SF3.
In step SF3, it is determined whether or not the door (not shown) of refrigerator 401 has been opened based on operation information from refrigerator 401. If it is detected that the door has been opened and then closed (SF4), the latest status of the foods stored in refrigerator 401 is confirmed in the next step SF5.

The confirmation of inventory information in step SF5 is the "inventory data search command signal RQ2" as described in FIG. 115.

Refrigerator 401 transmits the collected inventory information data collectively as a reply signal RS1 to communication unit 446 of home gateway 411 as described in FIG.
Main control unit 447 of home gateway 411 compares the latest collected inventory information data with the inventory information data previously sent from refrigerator 401, and if there is no change, ends the process in step SF6.

In step SF6, if there is a change from the previous inventory information data, the inventory information data stored in the storage device 450 is rewritten (overwritten) with the new data (SF7).

Then, the process prepares for an inventory inquiry signal RQ1 from the cooking appliance 1 to arrive.
As described above, the home gateway 411 acquires inventory information of the refrigerator 401 even before the main power switch 97 of the cooking appliance 1 is turned on, and operates to provide the inventory information quickly when an inquiry is made from the cooking appliance 1.

It is believed that a certain amount of time is required to investigate the inventory of food stored in refrigerator 401 in detail, and there is also a concern that if the door of refrigerator 401 is left open, light from external lighting will become disturbance light and interfere with optical detection, image analysis, etc. For these reasons, the inventory information is quickly obtained immediately after the door of refrigerator 401 is closed.

The above configuration makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the inventory data collection reply signal RS1 described in FIG. 115 is delayed from the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, the system allows the cooking appliance 1 to obtain the latest inventory information.

(Displaying information on individual ingredients during the heating pause period)
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing another operation program for acquiring individual ingredient information 339 of the refrigerator 401 in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 of the cooker 1.

In the operation program of FIG. 114, inventory information is automatically acquired midway through cooking process 1 in heating chamber 113, and a recommended cooking menu is notified.
In contrast, the example shown in Figure 123 notifies the user that another cooking process can be performed during the "heating pause period (transition period TR)" between cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 in the coordinated cooking mode, and makes it possible to notify the user in response to commands.
Therefore, the operation according to the operation program of Fig. 114 and the notification method according to the operation program shown in Fig. 123 are not in conflict with each other, so both notification programs may be adopted (used together).

The heating cooker 1 described up to FIG.
(1) Operate the induction heating source 9 (IH) Single cooking mode KM1
(2) Operate the microwave heating source 189 (range) in the single cooking mode KM1
(3) Operate the oven heating source 188 (oven) Single cooking mode KM1
(4) an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, or either one of them, and the induction heating source are operated sequentially through a transition period TR whose start and end timings are determined depending on a user's input operation;
It has the function of executing in response to user input operations.

Furthermore, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed in the heating chamber 113 and a cooking process 2 performed outside the heating chamber after the transition period TR,
The integrated control device MC was configured to notify, during the cooking process 1, at least one of a cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 and individual ingredient information of the refrigerator related to the cooking menu after the cooking process 1 is completed, via the notification unit AN.

In contrast, the example shown in FIG. 123 notifies the user that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with cooking process 2) even during the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in FIGS. 66 to 68) after cooking process 1 is completed, and can notify the user in response to a command.

In FIG. 123, step SG1 is the stage at which the collaborative cooking mode is selected and the user selects the cooking menu desired by the user (e.g., fried chicken) from the identification information 330 shown on the first specific screen 30SP.

In the next step SG2, similar to step SD5 in FIG. 114, it is determined whether cooking process 1 of the selected combined cooking mode KM3 is to be performed in the heating chamber 113.
If the answer is "Yes" at step SG2, the process proceeds to next step SG3.

In the next step SG3, an inquiry is made to the home gateway 411 about inventory information. In this step SG3, the inventory information, particularly information about frozen foods and reheated foods, is obtained. Note that in this Figure 123, the step of receiving inventory information and temporarily storing it, such as step SD7 in Figure 114, is omitted, but the operating program in this Figure 123 also performs similar processing.

The next step SG4 is to determine whether cooking process 1 being performed in heating chamber 113 has ended.

If cooking process 1 has ended at step SG4, the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in Figures 66 to 68) begins from that point. In other words, the heating operation of the coordinated cooking is paused, and the device is waiting for a command from the user to start cooking process 2.

During such a transition period TR, step SG5 determines whether another cooking operation can be performed. This is the process equivalent to step SD8 in FIG. 114.

If step SG5 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SG6, where the integrated display unit 30 and the voice synthesizer 95 notify the user that there are suggestions for other cooking options that can be prepared in the heating chamber 113. If the determination result of step SG5 is "No", the process ends.

In the subsequent step SG6, if a specific input key on the central operation unit 30M or the input key 47 (see FIG. 19) is operated, the result is determined to be "Yes."

In step SG7, one or more other cooking menus that can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (for example, "warming gyoza") are displayed. The display may be on the integrated display unit 30 that displays the cooking steps in the linked cooking mode. Then, the process proceeds to step SG8, where the process waits for a command to start cooking step 2.

(Inventory information display example 3)
Fig. 124 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30 of the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 125 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30. Fig. 126 is an enlarged plan view showing the periphery of the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30.

Figure 124 shows an example of the display of the integrated display section 30 in the scene of step SG6 in Figure 123. As is clear from this Figure 124, the first area 30L to the third area 30R (see Figure 21) of the integrated display section 30 are combined into one, forming a horizontally long display area.

In FIG. 124, reference numeral 338 denotes recommended information indicating in text that there is another cooking menu that can be performed in the heating chamber 113, and reference numeral 337 denotes a display guide section that explains the operation of the input key 43M2 to display the suggested cooking menu of the recommended information.

In the state shown in FIG. 124, the individual light-emitting element 27M4 corresponding to the input key 43M2 flashes as indicated by a dotted circle to prompt the user to perform an input operation. In this state, pressing one of the (two) input keys 43M2 causes individual ingredient information 339, such as a specific recipe recommendation (e.g., "frozen rice"), to be displayed on this first specific screen 30SP.

In FIG. 124, when the input key 43M2 is pressed, the display screen changes to that shown in FIG. 125. The recommended information 338 shown in FIG. 124 changes to the content shown in FIG. 125.

In FIG. 125, 339 is individual ingredient information that indicates in text another cooking menu (recommended cooking) that can be performed in the heating chamber 119. In the example shown in FIG. 125, the weight and freezing temperature of refrigerated "gyoza" and frozen "rice" are displayed. In other words, the individual ingredient information also includes information on the name and weight of each ingredient, as well as the refrigerated or frozen state (temperature, etc.). Note that it may also include related information such as expiration date information and the start date (date) of storage in the refrigerator 401.

Next, Fig. 126 shows the display contents that will automatically switch if the display contents shown in Fig. 124 remain the same for a few seconds. In other words, after the state shown in Fig. 124 is reached, if a few seconds pass without the input key 43M2 being pressed, the display will switch to the display screen shown in Fig. 126. Also, if a few seconds pass in this state of Fig. 126, it will automatically return to the display of Fig. 124.

As is clear from Figures 124 to 126, the integrated control device MC is configured to notify, during cooking process 1, at least one of the cooking menu that can be executed in the heating chamber 113 and the refrigerator inventory information related to the cooking menu after the cooking process 1 is completed, by the notification unit AN.

As described above, in the example shown in Figures 124 to 126, after cooking step 1 is completed, during the transition period TR (the "heating pause period P3" in Figures 66 to 68), it is notified that another cooking can be performed in the heating chamber 113 (simultaneously with cooking step 2), and information about the ingredients to be used in the "another cooking" can be notified in response to a user's command.

For this reason, for example, when one cooking A (e.g. fried chicken) in the linked cooking mode has entered cooking step 2 in the left heating section 17HL and is in the final finishing stage, another cooking B (thawing and warming frozen rice) can be carried out simultaneously in the heating chamber 113. In other words, when cooking A and cooking B are to be eaten in one meal, cooking can be done in parallel, rather than starting cooking B after cooking A is finished. This shortens the overall cooking time and improves user convenience.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that heats the object N by heating parts 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in a heating chamber 113 located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
An alarm means AN having a voice alarm unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and a display unit (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the first information 501 for identifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second information 502 for identifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 are notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and the integrated display unit 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting the various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2), the user can easily select the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc. of the common operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
a standby initial screen 30Z displaying information common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 on the integrated display unit 30;
A guide screen 30SA is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, the guide screen 30SA displaying the first information 501 and the second information 502;
Either the guidance screen 30SA or the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed first, and the other is displayed later, or both are displayed alternately multiple times.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 52 to 56).

As a result, the user can check information common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, such as warning information (standby common information 30N), on the standby initial screen 30Z, and can further obtain the first information 501 and the second information 502 on the guidance screen 30SA, eliminating any confusion the user may have about operation before cooking begins, and realizing a cooking device 1 that is easy to operate and convenient to use.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The first information 501 and the second information 502 are notified by voice by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 at the timing when they are displayed on the guidance screen 30SA.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 52 to 56).

As a result, the user can obtain the first information 501 and the second information 502 not only visually but also through sound, which is expected to further improve operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The integrated control device MC displays a standby initial screen 30Z on the integrated display unit 30, and subsequently displays a guide screen 30SA in place of the standby initial screen 30Z.
The guidance screen 30SA displays the first information 501 and the second information 502 in a list form.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 52 to 56).

As a result, the user can check the first information 501 and the second information 502 on the guide screen 30SA that is displayed after the standby initial screen 30Z, eliminating the possibility of the user becoming confused about how to operate the device before cooking begins, and realizing a cooking device 1 that is highly user-friendly and convenient.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
When the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC is selected, the integrated control device MC ends the display of the guidance screen 30SA or the standby initial screen 30Z on the integrated display unit 30 and displays a first specific screen 30SP, and when the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 is selected following the selection operation of the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC, the integrated control device MC ends the display of the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30 (instead of displaying the first specific screen 30SP) and displays a second specific screen 30SC.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 52 to 56).

For this reason, the user will not see the guidance screen 30SA or the standby initial screen 30Z and the first specific screen 30SP at the same time, but will see the display screen (first specific screen 30SP, second specific screen 30SC) corresponding to either the first cooking mode selection section 43MC or the second cooking mode selection section 43M1 displayed separately.
This prevents the user from being confused by multiple screens being displayed at the same time, and allows the user to be guided to the correct operation.

Furthermore, with regard to the first disclosure, the cooking menu executed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is prepared for each specific food to be cooked (e.g., “hamburger steak”, “gratin”, “fried chicken”, etc.), and the order of driving the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 is specified.
The document discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 64, 86 to 113).

Therefore, if the food to be cooked is selected using the identification information 330, the cooking process and heating means appropriate for the food to be cooked are automatically selected, making it easy to cook in the combined cooking mode KM3, which uses two heating means.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The control menu executed in the composite cooking mode KM2 specifies the order in which the heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188) are driven and the combination of control conditions (heating power, heating time, etc.).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 34, 37, and 58 to 63).

As a result, if the user selects one of the desired control menus, the order in which the heating sources are driven and the control conditions are automatically selected, making it easy to cook in the combined cooking mode KM2, which uses two heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188).

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The input operation unit 40 further includes third cooking mode selection units 43L1 and 43R1.
The third cooking mode selection units 43L1 and 43R1 are for selecting a control menu of a cooking mode in which the first heating means HM1 is used alone (e.g., “boil water” or “keep warm”),
In addition to the first information 501 and the second information 502, the guidance screen 30SA displays third information 503 that identifies the third cooking mode selection units 43L1 and 43R1.
When the third cooking mode selection unit 43L1, 43R1 is selected, the integrated display unit 30 ends the display of the guidance screen 30SA or the standby initial screen 30Z, and instead displays the third specific screen 30ST.
The document discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 53 and 54).

Therefore, when the user desires the third cooking mode, the user can easily recognize the input keys 43L1 and 43R1 to be operated, and can easily perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM12 using the induction heating source 9 in addition to the cooking mode using two heating sources (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188).

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
Further comprising a heating chamber control unit 159 and a microwave heating control unit 130 which receive command signals from the integrated control device MC;
The heating chamber control unit 159 controls the energization of the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating control unit 130 controls the energization of the microwave heating source 189.
The heating chamber control unit 159 acquires a detected temperature from a temperature sensor TS2 that detects the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and controls the temperature of the heating chamber.
The microwave heating control unit 130 acquires a detected temperature from a non-contact temperature sensor 160 that detects the temperature inside the heating chamber 113 and controls the microwave heating source 189;
In both the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2, in the cooking process using the heating chamber 113, the integrated control device MC controls the heating chamber control unit 159 and the microwave heating control unit 130 independently of each other.
The document discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 30 and 65).

As a result, the integrated control device MC can perform appropriate control in both the coordinated cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2 according to the temperature of the heating chamber 113 and the object being cooked, realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 that can handle a variety of cooking methods.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
When the integrated cooking mode KM3 is selected by the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC, if a predefined permission condition (e.g., a set value of a maximum amount of power) is not satisfied, the first specific screen 30SP is not displayed.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 78 to 80).

As a result, there will be no need to worry about a power shortage in the middle of collaborative cooking mode KM3, forcing the cooking process to be interrupted, and users can safely select collaborative cooking mode KM3.

Also, as mentioned above, if the user is notified that the heating source to be used first (e.g., microwave heating source 189) is unavailable at the stage of selecting the collaborative cooking mode KM3, unnecessary input by the user can be avoided and confusion will not occur.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
When the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 is operated while the cooking menu is displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, information on the cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) is updated according to the number of times or time of the operation, and is changed to “roast beef.”
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 87 to 89).

As a result, on the first specific screen 30SP, the desired cooking menu can be easily selected and confirmed according to the number of times the second cooking mode selection unit (input key) 43M1 is operated or the continuous time of touch operation, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved user operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The control menu executed in the composite cooking mode KM2 specifies the order in which the multiple heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) are driven and the combination of control conditions.
The control menu is displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.
When the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 is operated while the information on the control menu is being displayed, the information on the control menu is updated according to the number of times or time of the operation.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see, in particular, Figures 59 to 63).

As a result, on the second specific screen 30SC, the desired control menu can be easily selected and confirmed according to the number of times the second cooking mode selection unit (input key) 43M1 is operated or the continuous time of touch operation, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved user operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooperative pre-heating cooking mode using at least one of the first heating means HM1 or the second heating means HM2,
When the linked preheating cooking mode is started, the first specific screen 30SP displays at least one of information indicating the start of a preheating process (see FIG. 90), information indicating that a preheating operation is in progress, preheating completion information indicating that the preheating target temperature has been reached (see FIGS. 92 and 93), and information indicating the preheating target temperature (see FIG. 94).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This allows users to easily cook using the integrated preheat cooking mode.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The first specific screen 30SP and the second specific screen 30SC each have a first area 30L and a second area 30M,
In the cooperative cooking mode, identification information 330 indicating a specific food to be cooked is displayed in the first area 30L, and information indicating control conditions applicable to the food to be cooked is displayed in the second area 30M.
The document discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see FIG. 96 in particular).

As a result, when cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the user can specify the cooking menu for a specific food based on the identification information 330 and also check the control conditions that can be applied to that cooking menu, making it easy to cook in the collaborative cooking mode KM3.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The control menu executed in the combined cooking mode KM2 includes a first type menu for automatically switching between the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, a second type menu for driving only the microwave heating source 189, and a third type menu for driving only the oven heating source 188.
The document discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above (see FIG. 37 in particular).

Therefore, by selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, the user can easily perform cooking by selecting from various control menus.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The integrated control device MC is configured to automatically turn off the main power switch 97 when the time that has elapsed without operation of either the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC or the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 exceeds a certain time limit (30 minutes) from the time that the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed or the first information 501 and the second information 502 are audibly notified by the voice notification unit 95.

As a result, if the user stops inputting data for some reason and a certain amount of time passes, the power will be automatically turned off, improving safety and preventing unnecessary power consumption.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
Further, the integrated control device MC has a function setting input means (input key 43KP) for changing a function of the integrated control device MC,
The function setting input means 43KP can be arbitrarily set so that the first information 501 and the second information 502 are not notified by voice from the voice notification unit 95.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This allows users to choose not to receive voice guidance depending on their preferences.

Furthermore, if the function setting input means (input keys) 43KP is automatically set to not display the guidance screen 30SA (see Figures 54 and 55) in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode", the display process can be similarly simplified, and the input operation can be further simplified.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 incorporating a heating chamber 113 and having a top plate 15 on its upper surface;
An induction heating source 9 that induction heats an object N placed on heating parts 17HL and 17HR installed at a plurality of positions on the top plate from below the top plate 15;
An oven heating source 188 for heating the food placed in the heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber 113;
Display means (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 30L, 30R) for displaying operation information of the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, respectively;
A control unit MC for controlling the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, the microwave heating source 189 and the display means;
An input operation unit 40 that inputs commands from a user to the control unit MC,
The control unit MC, in the display means,
(1) Displaying the initial standby screen 30Z,
(2) After displaying the standby initial screen 30Z, a guide screen 30SA is displayed in which a first information 501 for specifying a first cooking mode selection section 43MC for selecting a first cooking mode and a second information 502 for specifying a second cooking mode selection section 43M1 for selecting a second cooking mode are displayed in a list form;
(3) A cooking menu or a control menu is displayed after a selection operation of the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC or the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 is performed.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting various cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2), the first information 501 and the second information 502 are displayed in a list form, so that the user can easily recognize and select the desired various input keys 43MC, 43M1.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the cooking device 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 incorporating a heating chamber 113;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed in a location other than the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
Display means (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 30L, 30R);
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the display means (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 30L and 30R);
An input operation unit 40 that inputs commands from a user to the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC, in the integrated display unit 30,
(1) Displaying the initial standby screen 30Z,
(2) After that, first information 501 specifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC for selecting the first cooking mode, second information 502 specifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 for selecting the second cooking mode, and third information 503 specifying the third cooking mode selection units 443L1, 443R1 for selecting the third cooking mode are displayed in a list state,
(3) Furthermore, when the first cooking mode selection section 43MC is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, when the second cooking mode selection section 43M1 is selected, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, and when the third cooking mode selection section 43L1, 43R1 is selected, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting one of the three cooking modes (first to third cooking modes), the first information 501, second information 502 and third information 503 are displayed in a list form, so that the user can easily recognize and select the desired various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43L1, etc.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

In addition to the above description, the first embodiment discloses the following cooking device 1.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N by heating parts 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in a heating chamber 113 located separately from the heating units 17HL and 17HR;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A display means for displaying cooking information (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L, 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a specified order.
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the multiple heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined and used in combination, and a single cooking mode KM1 in which one of the multiple heating sources is used alone.
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 serves as a means for selecting one control menu from among a plurality of control menus belonging to the composite cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, in either of the two cooking modes (combined cooking mode KM2 and single cooking mode KM1), the user can easily check the control menu corresponding to the two types of heating sources (the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189) and select one of them by operating the input key 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M. In addition, there is no need to increase the number of input keys as the number of heating sources increases, and a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved user operability can be realized even when the installation space for the input operation unit 40 is limited.

In the first embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
An integrated display unit 30;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed in an open space;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating in the closed heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
An integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC, a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1, and a start unit (input key) 43MS shared by these two cooking modes,
When the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the start unit 43MS are operated in sequence, the integrated control device MC drives the target heating means according to the cooking menu corresponding to the food to be cooked,
When the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC is not operated and the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 and the start unit 43MS are operated in sequence, the integrated control device MC drives the target heating means according to a control menu corresponding to a heating operation pattern,
The cooking menu specifies the order in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven to heat and cook a specific food item,
The integrated display unit 30 displays a guide screen 30SA in which first information 501 for specifying a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC for selecting a first cooking mode and second information 502 for specifying a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 for selecting a second cooking mode are displayed in a list state, and then a first specific screen 30SP in a state in which information indicating the cooking menu (identification information 330) is displayed and a second specific screen 30SC in a state in which information indicating the control menu (text information 30J) is displayed are switched and displayed in response to operations of the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, in either of the two cooking modes, by operating the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 displays either a first specific screen 30SP displaying information indicating the cooking menu (identification information 330) or a second specific screen 30SC displaying information indicating the control menu (text information 30J) in response to the operation of the first and second cooking mode selection units 43MC and 43M1. Therefore, in either of the two cooking modes, the user can easily select and confirm the desired cooking menu or control menu, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved user operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) When updating the display of the information (identification information 330) indicating the cooking menu, the information on the control conditions displayed corresponding to the cooking menu is also updated at the same time (see information 30V on the control conditions in FIG. 93 ).
(2) When updating the display of the information (text information 30J) showing the control menu, the display of the information on the control conditions displayed in correspondence with the control menu is also updated at the same time (see output value information 30X in FIG. 60 ).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the user can easily recognize the cooking menu or control menu and the control conditions on the first specific screen 30SP or the second specific screen 30SC and start cooking, realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The control menu includes a plurality of heating patterns for "parboiling" that can be commonly applied to a plurality of types of food to be cooked (vegetables) (see "parboiling leafy vegetables" and "parboiling root vegetables" described in FIG. 34).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

This allows the "parboiling" of vegetables to be performed for multiple types of food (vegetables), expanding the cooking repertoire, making it possible to realize a highly convenient heating cooker 1.

Furthermore, in the heating chamber 113, it is possible to heat the food to be cooked using a combination of microwaves and radiant heat, etc., and it is expected that various foods can be effectively and efficiently heated by two heating sources with different heating principles. This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device 1 that can handle various foods to be cooked.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
When the information (identification information 330) indicating the cooking menu is displayed, information on a control condition A previously determined corresponding to the cooking menu is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (see information 30V on the control condition in FIG. 93 ).
The input operation unit is provided with a first condition selection unit (input key) 43M2 for changing the control condition A.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the information indicating the control conditions corresponding to the cooking menu can be confirmed via the integrated display unit 30, and the control conditions can be easily changed using the first condition selection unit (input key) 43M2, realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved user operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
When the information (text information 30J) showing the control menu is displayed, information on control condition B previously determined in correspondence with the control menu is displayed on the integrated display unit (see output value information 30X in FIG. 60 ).
The input operation unit 40 is provided with a second condition selection unit (input key) 43M2 for changing the control condition B,
The second condition selection unit (input key) 43M2 shares the same input key as the first condition selection unit (input key) 43M2.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, in an input operation unit 40 with a limited installation area, the single input key 43M2 performs two functions, so there is no need to increase the area occupied by the input operation unit 40. In other words, the control conditions can be easily changed by the input key 43M2, and a highly convenient cooking device 1 with improved user operability can be realized.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
In response to the operation of the input operation unit 40, the integrated display unit 30 switches between a first specific screen 30SP of a first cooking mode and a second specific screen 30SC of a second cooking mode from the standby initial screen 30Z,
The input operation unit 40 includes a selection unit 43M1 that displays a control menu for using the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 alone in the second specific screen 30SC and allows only one of them to be selected.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, by operating the input key 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M, the user can easily check the control menu corresponding to the two types of heating sources (the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189) and select one of them. In addition, there is no need to increase the number of input keys as the number of heating sources increases, and a highly convenient heating cooker with improved user operability can be realized even when the installation space for the input operation unit 40 is limited.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The selection unit (input key) 43M1 has at least a first function and a second function for the integrated control device MC,
The first function is to change the display of the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) to the display of the second specific screen 30SC,
The second function is to update the display information of the control menu displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.

As a result, one input key 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M performs the first function and the second function, so there is no need to increase the number of input keys as the number of heating sources increases, and even with limited installation space for the input operation unit 40, a highly convenient heating cooker with improved user operability can be realized.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The common operation unit 40M has a first input key 43MC for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second input key 43M1 for selecting a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3,
The common operation unit 40M has a third input key 43M1 for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 and a fourth input key 43M2 for selecting a control condition of the composite cooking mode KM2,
The second input key 43M1 and the third input key 43M1 share one switch (electrical component).
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, in the shared operation unit 40M, the input key 43M1 for selecting the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and the second input key 43M1 for selecting the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 can be used together. This allows efficient input of the two cooking modes in the input operation unit 40, which has limited installation space, and improves user operability.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a first cooperative cooking mode having a cooking process 1 and a cooking process 2, and using the first heating means for the cooking process 1, and a second cooperative cooking mode using the second heating means HM2 for the cooking process 1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, two types of combined cooking modes KM3 can be used, providing a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wider range of cooking than ever before.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
In both the first coordinated cooking mode and the second coordinated cooking mode,
(1) In the common operation unit 40M, the user selects the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and decides to start the cooking process 1 (by using the input key 43MS),
(2) The end of the cooking process 2 is performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R when the cooking process 2 is performed by the first heating means, and is performed by the shared operation unit 40M when the cooking process 2 is performed by the second heating means.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

For this reason, in both types of linked cooking modes KM3, the cooking process can be determined using the shared operation unit 40M, and cooking process 2 can then be ended using the input operation unit that corresponds to the heat source used in cooking process 2. This eliminates the risk of confusion caused by the input operation unit from the start to the end of cooking, and provides a user-friendly heating cooker.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The common operation unit 40M includes a common input key 43MS for instructing the start of the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2, and a common input key 43MT for instructing the end of the operation.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, for both the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode, the start of cooking and the end of the cooking mode can be determined using common input keys on the shared operation unit 40M. This makes it possible to provide a user-friendly heating cooker.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The input key 43MT has a function of canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode up to the cooking process 2 at the stage of the cooking process 1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 can be cancelled at any time using the common operation unit 40M regardless of the progress of the cooking process, making it possible to provide a cooking device that is easy to use. It also makes it possible to avoid confusion that may occur if the user wants to quickly stop the heating operation while the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is in operation.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The input key 43MT has a function of allowing a user to end the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 using the second heating means at any time in the integrated cooking mode KM3,
When the input key 43MT is operated once during the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the cooking process being executed is stopped, and when the input key 43MT is operated twice in succession, the operation of the cooperative cooking mode being executed is canceled.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 can be easily ended, and both stopping and canceling the cooking process can be achieved by operating a single input key 43MT, making it possible to provide a user-friendly heating cooker.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The notification unit AN includes an integrated display unit 30 that performs a display operation when the common operation unit 40M is operated, and individual display units 31L and 31R that perform a display operation related to the operation of the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R allow the user to easily check the input results and cooking status, providing a user-friendly cooking device.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The integrated display unit displays cooking process information 332 showing the progress of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the cooking process information 332 displayed on the integrated display unit 30 allows the user to easily check the progress of cooking, providing a user-friendly cooking device.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
In the stage where the operation for selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is being performed in the common operation unit 40M, some or all of the input functions of the individual operation units 40L and 40R are restricted.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, after switching to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, some or all of the input functions in the first individual operation unit 40R or the second individual operation unit 40L corresponding to the heating units 17HL, 17HR are disabled, so that even if the user mistakenly operates the individual operation units 40L, 40R, the heating operation of the cooking process will not be stopped unintentionally. In other words, it is possible to prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
When the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 of the coordinated cooking mode is started by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the common operation unit 40M is restricted from inputting for a new cooking using the second heating means.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, after the operation of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is started by the individual operation units 40L and 40R, some or all of the input functions of the shared operation unit 40M are disabled, so that even if the user mistakenly operates the shared operation unit 40M, the heating operation of the cooking process will not be stopped unintentionally. In other words, it is possible to prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
In the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC notifies the end of the cooking process 1 or the preparation for the cooking process 2 by the notification unit AN before the end of the cooking process 1, and then transitions to a heating pause period upon the end of the cooking process 1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

This allows the user to obtain information such as the completion of a cooking process and preparation for the next cooking process during the collaborative cooking mode KM3, providing a cooking device that is easy to operate.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The main body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
Upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are disposed in the upper space 300A to introduce outside air without passing through the lower space and pass cooling air through the upper space 300A.
Lower cooling fans 128 and 129 are disposed in the lower space 300B to introduce outside air without passing through the upper space 300A and pass cooling air through the lower space 300B.
The integrated control device MC is cooled by the upper cooling fans 60 and 61.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

Due to this configuration, the operation and cooling of the induction heating source 9 in the upper space 300A and the cooling of the microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188, heating chamber 113, etc. in the lower space 300B can be carried out independently without affecting (interfering with) each other.
Furthermore, the integrated control device MC is also cooled by the cooling air flowing inside the upper space 300A, which prevents overheating of the internal components of the cooking device 1 and ensures stable operation.

Further, with respect to the first disclosure,
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 is for executing a cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2,
The integrated control device MC includes:
(1) receiving an input from the common operation unit 40M and selecting the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(2) The cooking process 1 is started and ended in response to commands from the individual operation units 40L and 40R.
(3) During the cooking process 1, a part or all of the input functions for the second heating means in the common operation unit 40M are disabled,
(4) when the cooking process 1 is completed, the input function for the second heating means in the common operation unit 40M is restored;
(5) The cooking process 2 is started and ended according to instructions from the common operation unit 40M.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, after selecting a cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 in the central operation unit 40M and switching to the linked cooking mode, the start and end of the heating operation for cooking process 1 can be determined by the first individual operation unit 40R or the second individual operation unit 40L corresponding to the heating unit, and since some or all of the input functions for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M are disabled during this period of cooking process 1 (from start to finish), even if the user mistakenly operates the central operation unit 40M, the heating operation for cooking process 1 will not be stopped unintentionally. In other words, it is possible to prevent user operation errors and cooking failures.

Furthermore, when cooking step 1 is subsequently completed, the input function for the second heating means HM2 in the central operation unit 40M can be restored, and cooking step 2 using the heating chamber 113 can be controlled by the central operation unit 40M. This improves user operability, making it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment has
The notification unit AN has an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the common operation unit 40M and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
The first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30,
The first specific screen 30SP displays at least one of the following information: identification information 330 of the cooking menu; information (331) indicating the heating source used in the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2; information (332) indicating the progress of cooking; and information regarding the control conditions applied to the cooking menu (see FIG. 89 , 30V).
The configuration was disclosed.

This allows the user to know various information about cooking process 1 and cooking process 2, eliminating the user's anxiety and preventing the user from misunderstanding or operating incorrectly, making it possible to provide a highly convenient cooking device.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 according to the first embodiment has
The integrated control device MC,
(1) When the collaborative cooking mode KM3 is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units.
(2) Displaying a plurality of cooking menu options (e.g., “hamburger steak” and “fried chicken”) on the first specific screen 30SP,
(3) When one of the cooking menu candidates is selected, automatically determining either the first cooperative cooking mode or the second cooperative cooking mode;
(4) requesting input of control conditions to be applied to the selected cooking menu from the common operation unit 40M;
(5) restricting input functions of the individual operation unit and the shared operation unit 40M during the preheating process, the cooking process 1, and the cooking process 2;
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, with one cooking device 1, the combined cooking mode KM3, which has different heating locations and heating means, can be selected, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, when the linked cooking mode KM3 is selected, the user can check the desired cooking menu options on a dedicated display screen (first specific screen 30SP) and then switch to operation in the linked cooking mode.

Furthermore, during the preheating process, cooking process 1, and cooking process 2, the input functions of the individual operation units 40L, 40R and the common operation unit 40M are restricted, thereby preventing user operation errors and preventing cooking failures, thereby providing a highly convenient heating cooker.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The main body 110 further includes an input operation unit 40 as an input means,
The input operation unit 40 further includes a function setting input means (input keys 43KP) for changing the functions of the integrated control device MC,
At least one of the display method of each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 or the display method of each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be changed by the function setting input means 43KP.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.
For example, the input key 43KP can be used to set the priority of each cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and each control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 when displayed on the integrated display unit 30.

Because of this configuration, when the function mode is selected, the user can change the display method of the control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2 and the display method and display priority of the linked cooking menu KM3, providing a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated preheating cooking mode KM4 having a preheating process of preheating the object N by using the first heating means HM1, a cooking process 1 of heating the object (e.g., "fried chicken") by the second heating means HM1 after the preheating process, and a cooking process 2 of using the first heating means HM1 after the cooking process 1.
The present inventors have disclosed a cooking device 1 characterized by the above features (see Figs. 73, 76 and 77).

This configuration allows for a coordinated cooking menu in which an object to be cooked N, such as a frying pan or pot, placed on the top plate 15 is preheated, while the object to be cooked (e.g., fried chicken) is heated and cooked in the heating chamber 113 by the second heating means (cooking step 1), and then heated and cooked by the induction heating source 9 (cooking step 2). This makes it possible to provide a highly convenient heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

As another cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4, a cooking device 1 was also disclosed that has the function of executing a cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 that includes a preheating step of preheating the object N using the first heating means HM1, a cooking step 1 of placing an object (e.g., a hamburger steak) on the object N (e.g., a frying pan) preheated by the first heating means HM1 after the preheating step and heating the object, and a cooking step 2 of moving the object into the heating chamber 113 and heating it by the second heating means HM2 after the cooking step 1 (see Figs. 64 and 72).

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The notification unit AN includes a display unit (integrated display unit) 30 that displays identification information 330 of the applicable food to be cooked (e.g., “hamburger steak”) when the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected by the input operation unit 40.
The configuration was disclosed (see FIG. 64).

This configuration makes it possible to provide a highly operable cooking device that allows the user to easily select a specific food to be cooked (e.g., "hamburger steak") to which the coordinated preheat cooking mode KM4 is to be applied using the identification information 330.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
The cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 and a cooking step 2 by the second heating means HM2,
When the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality during the execution of the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2, the control unit MC
(1) Stopping the heating operation of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 in which the heating operation was being performed;
(2) canceling the operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM3;
(3) The operation of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 continues from the time when the heating operation of the heating means of the cooking process 1 or the cooking process 2 that was performing the heating operation is stopped until a stop condition A is satisfied.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

Due to this configuration, if an abnormality is detected in either cooking step 1 or cooking step 2, all of the heating means that were being driven are stopped, the operation of the linked cooking mode KM3 is cancelled, and the upper cooling fans 60, 61 that were cooling the inside of the upper space 300A are then stopped, so that a highly safe and convenient heating cooker can be provided that can handle a wide range of cooking using the linked cooking mode.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of the first embodiment,
It has a function of determining the degree of progress of cooking process 1 or cooking process 2 in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 by detecting, for example, the elapsed time or the rising temperature (TN1, TN2, etc.), and automatically notifies the user of reference information at an intermediate stage of cooking process 1 or cooking process 2.
Therefore, even if the number of types of heating sources increases, the user can be informed of the progress of cooking to dispel anxiety, and by pausing the heating operation midway to check, mistakes such as impairing the execution of efficient coordinated cooking can be avoided. This is expected to further improve the user's sense of security and ease of use.

Furthermore, when cooking using the linked cooking mode, once cooking step 1 occupying the heating chamber 113 has finished, the user can be notified in advance that another cooking step can be performed using the heating chamber 113. This reduces the time the user spends on cooking, enabling faster cooking than before, and is expected to reduce the burden on the user and improve usability.

The integrated control device MC acquires reference information related to the cooking to which the collaborative cooking mode is applied from the information processing device 411 via the transceiver unit 49.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode.

Furthermore, when cooking with heat in the linked cooking mode, information on ingredients in the refrigerator 401 can be obtained as reference information related to cooking to which the linked cooking mode is applied, which is expected to reduce the burden on the user when cooking and improve usability.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC transmits cooking execution data related to the cooking performed by applying the cooperative cooking mode KM3 to the information processing device 411 via the transmission/reception unit 49.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

This configuration allows the use of three types of heating sources, including the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189, and also provides a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods using the combined cooking mode KM3.

Furthermore, when cooking is performed in the linked cooking mode KM3, data on the cooking process is provided to an external information processing device (home gateway) 411, which can be useful information for the home gateway 4110 and the refrigerator 401. The use of such information can ultimately contribute to improving the convenience and safety of users, as well as maintaining and improving a comfortable space.

Furthermore, for each cooking menu item in the linked cooking mode KM3, such as "hamburger steak" or "fried chicken," the heat sources for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 are displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, and useful information for the user, such as the first reference information FA1 and the second reference information FA2, is also displayed, thereby reducing cooking mistakes by the user and providing a heating cooker with improved convenience.

Furthermore, in the cooking steps 1 and 2, at least one of the heating conditions of the microwave heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9 is automatically determined by the integrated control device MC. For example, in "manual range" (see FIG. 34), the user can select the microwave output during microwave heating from 100 W, 200 W, and 500 W, but the default value is 500 W. In other words, unless otherwise specified, the output is set to 500 W.
This reduces the number of input operations required by the user and improves usability.

The combined cooking mode is classified by a control menu for driving the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 (see Figs. 34 and 37).
The second specific screen 30SC is configured to display information for specifying the control menu (for example, specific sentences 30J such as "Warm" and "Microwave Manual" in FIG. 59).
This allows the user to easily select the control menu.

The reference information acquired by the integrated control device MC from the home gateway 411 via the transmitting/receiving unit (wireless communication unit) 49 was information on ingredients that can be cooked by heating.
This eliminates the need to go to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to obtain information about ingredients, which reduces the user's workload.

The integrated control device MC is configured to store the reference information (ingredients information) in the memory device MM until cooking in one of the integrated cooking modes is completed.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations to record reference information each time, or to write it down on paper.

The food ingredient information is information stored in the refrigerator 401. Furthermore, the food ingredient information includes information on the refrigeration temperature or freezing temperature of the food ingredient.
Therefore, when cooking in the coordinated cooking mode with the heating cooker 1, this can be used as a reference when determining the control conditions (including one or more combinations of heat, heating intensity, target temperature, etc.), and better finished cooking can be expected.

The integrated control device MC was configured to transmit a signal (see RQ1 and RQ3 in FIG. 115) requesting the provision of the ingredient information from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 before the start of the cooking process 1.
.
This eliminates the need to go to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to obtain information about ingredients, which reduces the user's workload.

Before the start of the cooking process 1, the integrated control device MC transmits a signal from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 requesting the provision of the reference information, and further notifies the user of the integrated display unit 30, which is one of the notification units AN, that reference information is requested (see Figure 117).
Therefore, the user can refrain from moving to the refrigerator 401 in the middle of cooking to check, thereby reducing the user's effort.

The integrated control device MC is configured to store the cooking execution data in the memory device MM after the cooking process 2 is completed.
Therefore, the user does not need to perform any special operations or write down on paper in order to record the cooking execution data.

The cooking execution data is transmitted after the end of the cooking step 2, and includes at least one of the following pieces of information:
(1) Information indicating the name of the food to be cooked; (2) Information regarding the weight or volume of the food to be cooked; (3) Information indicating the control conditions for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2; (4) Information indicating the time required from cooking process 1 to the end of cooking process 2; (5) Information indicating the end time of cooking process 2; (6) Information identifying the heat source used for cooking; (7) Information regarding restrictions the user will be subject to during the next cooking process; (8) Information related to the safety of the user, such as the current temperature of the heating chamber. This eliminates the need for users to perform special operations or record cooking execution data accurately and in detail, or to record it on paper.

The integrated control device MC is configured to store, after the cooking in the coordinated cooking mode is completed, information on the time required to complete the cooking in the memory device MM.
This eliminates the need for the user to perform special operations or to write down on paper the information on the time required for cooking each time.

In the home appliance operation management system of embodiment 1, when the information processing device (home gateway) 411 detects the presence of a person in the space in which the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 are installed and receives startup information from the cooking appliance 1, it determines that it is the cooking time period and issues a command to collect inventory data to the refrigerator 401 (see step SD6 in FIG. 114).

As a result, when a user (resident) is near the refrigerator 401 or cooking appliance 1 and is likely to cook, inventory data collection operations can be performed automatically, and furthermore, the user is not required to perform any special input operations to collect the data when cooking, and useful information can be obtained without much effort, resulting in an overall highly convenient operation management system.

Embodiment 2.
127 to 128 show a cooking device according to the second embodiment.
Fig. 127 is a block diagram showing the main control-related parts of a (built-in type combined) cooking device. Fig. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and cooking steps, etc., in the cooking device of Fig. 127, from the selection to the transition from the cooperative cooking mode, in a chronological order. The same or corresponding parts as those in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation may be omitted.

The second embodiment differs significantly from the first embodiment in that a steam generator (boiler) 500 is added as one of the second heating means HM2.

The position and direction from which the steam generator (boiler) 500 blows out superheated steam into the heating chamber 113 may be from the side wall surface of the heating chamber 113 as shown in FIG. 127, or it may be blown upward from below tableware made of highly heat-resistant plastic, porcelain, glass, etc., or a dedicated tray 145.

Next, we will explain Figure 128.
124 shows a case where preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and cooking step 1 is performed in parallel with this preheating operation. This is the case of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 (coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4) where cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2, and cooking step 2 is performed by the left heating unit 17HL.

In Figure 128, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to starting and ending the cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, pressing 43MS transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (the next preheating process is entered from this preparation period P1 stage).

Furthermore, when the user selects the left heating unit 17HL (presses at least input key 44L), the preheating step (P2) is executed in the left heating unit 17HL. After input key 44L, at least one of input keys 43L2 and 43L3 may be pressed to actually turn on the heat (a standby state is maintained until 43L2 or 43L3 is pressed).

The input of pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3 is limited to a certain period of time (e.g., 20 seconds) from the time the input key 44L is pressed before it becomes a valid signal to the integrated control device MC. After this period, the control conditions such as heat cannot be changed by input key 43L2, etc.

As shown in FIG. 127, the preheat target temperature may be set by pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than input key 44L on left operation unit 40L. Also, since control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed on left display unit 31L in the default settings, it is not necessary to operate input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 128, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

Meanwhile, in the left heating unit 17HL, the preheating operation continues (preheating process). When the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L is pressed, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, so that the "preheating process" of induction heating stops at this stage and the heating cooking period P2 ends. To maintain preheating until cooking process 2, do not press the input key 44L (43L1).

In addition, depending on the size of the object to be heated N and the heat during preheating, it may take several minutes after starting to pass current through the induction heating source 9 to reach the specified (target) preheat temperature, so there is no need to interrupt the preheating operation midway.

Next, when the input key 43MS is pressed again, the cooking process 1 (heating cooking period P3) in the heating chamber 113 begins. Note that the door 114 is opened in advance and the food to be cooked is placed on top of 145. If the door 114 is not closed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 will not be sent from the integrated control device MC even if the input key 43MS is pressed.

Similarly, unless the door 114 is closed, steam will not be blown out from the steam supplier 500 (power is supplied to the steam supplier 500 when the input key 43MS is pressed during the preparation period P1).

Inside the heating chamber 113, high-temperature steam surrounds the food to be cooked and microwaves are irradiated, so even frozen foods are thawed in a short time. In addition, the radiant heat from the oven heat source 188 heats up the atmosphere inside the heating chamber 113, further accelerating the cooking (including thawing) of the food to be cooked.

When input key 43MT is pressed once, cooking process 1 ends, and at this stage heating pause period P4 begins. In other words, transition period TR begins. At this stage, of input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS on central operation unit 40M, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 are all enabled.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128, the input functions of the input keys 44L, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit 40L are all maintained as valid, so the preheating control conditions can also be changed in the left heating unit 17HL.

When the user presses the input key 43MT once to enter the transition period TR, the food item that is in the middle of cooking is moved from the heating chamber 113 onto the food item N that has already been heated by the left heating unit 17HL. In this case, since the frying pan, pot, etc. are preheated by the induction heating source 9, the plate or container that was used in the heating chamber 113 is not moved onto the left heating unit 17HL.

If the door 114 is opened during cooking step 1 without pressing the input key 43MT even once, cooking in the heating chamber 113 will stop at that point, and the food to be cooked can be moved from the heating chamber 113 to the food to be heated N on the left heating section 17HL.

Next, when the input key 44L of the left operation unit 40L is touched, the cooking process 2 of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is started in the left heating unit 17HL. That is, the food to be cooked is heated and cooked on the food to be cooked N, which has already been heated to a high temperature in the preheating process.
Then, by pressing the input key 44L, the cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing. The function of this input key 44L may be assigned to another input key 43L1.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released at the same time as cooking process 2 ends (FIG. 128 shows the linked cooking mode KM3 being released by pressing input key 43MT, but it is also possible to press input key 43MT in this way).

Therefore, if you want to perform additional heating again with the left heating unit 17HL immediately after the end of cooking process 2, you can press the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L again and then operate the input keys 43M1, 43M2, etc. to perform heating and cooking in the single cooking mode KM1 (this is not part of the collaborative cooking mode KM3, but is a cooking process in the single heating mode KM1).

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (e.g., within 2 minutes) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode, and the process may wait for the user's input (operation of the input key 43M1).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can check the doneness of the food and immediately touch the input key 44L (43L1) if the food is not heated enough. This method also improves the ease of use for the user.

In this way, if the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 2 minutes) after cooking process 2 is completed, a message is displayed indicating that it will be treated as part of coordinated cooking mode KM3, and when processing waits for user input (operation of input key 43M1), in order to avoid misunderstanding by the user, the integrated display unit 30 may display a message such as "The coordinated cooking process has not yet been completely completed. To end it, please press the stop switch again." In this case, the "stop switch" refers to the input key 43MT.

In this second embodiment, if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, the heating source and the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped and an alert is issued, as described in the first embodiment (particularly Figures 45 and 46).

Variation example 1 of embodiment 2.
The cooking device 1 disclosed in the second embodiment may be modified as follows.
That is,
A main body 110 (main body case HC) having a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated N is placed;
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 arranged in the main body 110 and heating the object to be heated N;
A heating chamber 113 disposed inside the body 110;
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are disposed inside the main body 110 and serve as a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed inside the heating chamber 113;
First operation units 40R and 40L for setting heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and for issuing commands to start and stop a heating operation;
A second operation unit 40M (input keys 43MS, 43MT) that is disposed in the main body 110 separately from the first operation units 40R, 40L and sets heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commands the start and stop of a heating operation;
A main operation unit (operation unit for a main power switch 97) 98 that is disposed in the main body 110 and that collectively stops heating by the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on heating conditions set by the first operation unit 40R and the second operation unit 40M,
The integrated control device MC has a function of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 in which a preheating process of preheating the object N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process of heating the object N using the second heating means HM2 are performed in the same time period for one object to be cooked,
In the process of executing the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4, when the first heating means HM1 is executing the preheating step and the second heating means HM2 is executing the cooking step 1,
(1) a first stop function that stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 and cancels the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 when a stop command is received from the main operation unit 98;
(2) A second stop function that stops the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1 when a stop command (e.g., by the input key 44L) is received from the first operation unit 40R, 40L, and maintains the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 for a "certain time" (e.g., 2 minutes);
(3) A function of restarting cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 when a restart command (for example, by input key 44L) is received within the "certain time";
The cooking device 1 is equipped with the above-mentioned components.

With this configuration, when cooking is finished, all power sources can be shut off at once using the main operating unit 98.

In addition, in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, to stop only the preheating operation, the preheating operation can be stopped by the first operating units 40R, 40L of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that performs the preheating operation.

Even if the preheating operation is stopped in this way, the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 remains in effect. Therefore, the execution of cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, and cooking process 1 is not adversely affected.

With this configuration, even if the preheating of the object to be heated N is temporarily stopped, cooking in the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 can be easily resumed, providing a cooker that is highly convenient for the user.

Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1 of this modified example, the main body 110 further includes an abnormality detection unit EM that detects an abnormal state caused by the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and emergency stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1.
When the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 is urgently stopped by the abnormality detection unit EM, the setting information of the preheating target temperature as a setting condition of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 may be configured to be stored (maintained) in a memory device MM of the integrated control device MC.

This configuration eliminates the need to reset the preheat target temperature once it has been set and restart the preheat process, which is expected to improve usability for users.

Variation 2 of embodiment 2.
The cooking device 1 may be modified to have the following configuration.
That is,
A main body 110 having a top plate 15 on which an object to be heated N is placed;
An induction heating source 9 as a first heating means HM1 arranged in the main body 110 and heating the object to be heated N;
A heating chamber 113 disposed within the body 110;
A microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188 are disposed in the main body 110 and serve as a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked housed in the heating chamber 113;
First operation units 40R, 40L are disposed on the top plate 15 and set heating conditions of the first heating means HM1 and issue commands to start and stop a heating operation;
A second operation unit 40M that is disposed in the main body 110 separately from the first operation units 40L and 40R and sets heating conditions of the second heating means HM2 and commands the start and stop of a heating operation;
A main operation unit (main power switch operation unit) 98 that is disposed in the main body 110 and that collectively stops heating by the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 based on heating conditions set by the first operation units 40R, 40L and the second operation unit 40M;
The integrated control device MC has a function of a coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 in which a preheating process of preheating the object N on the top plate 15 using the first heating means HM1 and a cooking process of heating the object N using the second heating means HM2 are performed in the same time period for one object to be cooked,
In the process of executing the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4, when the first heating means HM1 is executing the preheating step and the second heating means HM2 is executing the cooking step 1,
(1) a first stop function that stops the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 and cancels the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 when a stop command is received from the main operation unit 98;
(2) a second stop function that, when receiving a stop command from the first operation unit 40R, stops the preheating operation by the first heating means HM1, maintains the setting of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 for a "certain time" (e.g., 2 minutes), and continues the cooking process 1 by the second heating means HM2;
(3) A function of restarting cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 when a restart command (for example, by input key 44R) is received from the first operation unit 40R within the "certain time period";
(4) a third stop function that, when a cancel command is received from the second operation unit 40M (e.g., by the input key 43MT), cancels the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 and stops the heating operation by the first heating means HM1 and the heating operation by the second heating means HM2,
It is a heating cooker equipped with

Therefore, when cooking is finished and all power sources are to be cut off at once, the power sources can be cut off at once using the main operation unit 98. Also, in the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, the preheating operation can be stopped for a "certain period of time" (e.g., 2 minutes) using the first operation units 40R and 40L of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9).

Furthermore, by operating the second operation unit 40M (input key 43MT of the central operation unit), the setting of the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 itself can be cancelled.

As described above, the stopping method can be appropriately selected depending on the user's purpose. Furthermore, even if the preheating by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped by operating the first operating units 40L, 40R, the execution of cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 is not stopped, so there is no adverse effect on the heating and cooking by the second heating means HM2. This is expected to improve user convenience.

Summary of embodiment 2.
As in the first embodiment, in the cooking device 1 of the second embodiment, the cooking device 1 has the following configuration as disclosed in the first disclosure.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that heats the object N by heating parts 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in a heating chamber located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
An alarm means AN having a voice alarm unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and a display unit (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the first information 501 for identifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second information 502 for identifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 are notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and the integrated display unit 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, the single cooking mode KM1, etc.), the user can easily select the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc. of the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

In other configurations of embodiment 2, the same effects can be expected for the same configuration as embodiment 1.

The control menu for using the steam supplier 500 alone includes thawing frozen foods, but for this thawing, the microwave heating source 189 may be used at the same time depending on the temperature and type of frozen food, and the oven heating source 188 may also be used in combination.

As in the first embodiment, the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM3 is selected in the common operation unit 40M to select the cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4 and to decide to start the cooking process. The common operation unit 40M can be used to start and end cooking process 1, and the individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the induction heating source 9 are used to start and end cooking process 2 and to end the preheating process. This makes the operation rules simple, and is expected to prevent user operation errors and confusion. Therefore, a heating cooker with improved operability can be provided, even though it has two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Embodiment 3.
Fig. 129 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device 1 of embodiment 3. Fig. 130 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys and the cooking steps in the input operation unit from the selection to the transition of the cooperative cooking mode in chronological order. The same or corresponding parts as those of embodiments 1 and 2 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation may be omitted.

In this embodiment 3, as in embodiment 2, the preheating process is performed using an induction heating source 9, but it is taken into consideration that a heated object N such as a large-diameter frying pan used during preheating may interfere with the operation of the individual operating units 40L, 40R corresponding to the induction heating source 9.
Specifically, the present embodiment differs greatly from the first and second embodiments in that the start and end of preheating, cooking step 1, and cooking step 2 can all be performed by the common operation unit 40M.

Next, we will explain Figure 129.
The input operation section 40 formed on the front upper surface of the top plate 15 includes three sections: a left operation section 40L, a central operation section 40M, and a right operation section 40R (not shown).
The left operation unit 40L is used for inputting operations for the induction heating source 9 only, and may be called an "individual operation unit."

The central operation unit 40M is sometimes called the "shared operation unit" because it is used in common by both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This "shared operation unit" also serves as the "cooperative operation unit" 40MC for executing the cooperative cooking mode.

A total of five touch-type input keys 43L1-43L4, 44L are arranged on the left operation section 40L. As explained in the first embodiment, these input keys 43R1-43R4, 44R are assigned one or more input functions, and have the same basic functions as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the functions of the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, 43MT, etc. arranged on the central operation unit 40M are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The object to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL is, for example, a frying pan with a relatively large diameter, with a bottom diameter of about 280 mm to 300 mm. NH is a handle that is detachably attached to the rim of the object to be heated N (frying pan). In other words, it is a handle (grip) that can be removed at the user's discretion. Note that this object to be heated N is not a frying pan dedicated to this cooking device 1, but a general-purpose frying pan.

The object to be heated N has dimensions that allow it to be inserted into the heating chamber 113 through the front opening 113A of the heating chamber 113 and the door 114 to be closed. In this case, however, the handle NH must be removed.

FG indicates the user's fingertip.
The handle NH is shown to extend horizontally in Fig. 129, but in reality it may be inclined diagonally upwards. Also, it may be a handle that rises vertically halfway and has an L-shape when viewed from the side.

Next, we will explain Figure 130.
In Fig. 130, preheating is performed by the induction heating source 9, and after this preheating operation, cooking process 1 is performed directly. The subsequent cooking process 2 is the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the second heating means HM2.

In FIG. 130, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to starting and ending the cooking process are shown in hollow rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS of the central operation unit 40M are all valid. When the input key 43MC is pressed to display the first specific screen 30SP, pressing 43MS transitions to the linked cooking mode KM3 (the next preheating process is entered from this preparation period P1 stage).

Furthermore, when the user selects the left heating unit 17HL (presses the input key 44L at least once), the preheating step (P2) is executed in the left heating unit 17HL.
As shown in Fig. 130, the preheat target temperature may be set by pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3 other than the input key 43L1 on the left operation unit 40L. Also, since the control conditions such as heat and heating time are automatically displayed on the left display unit 31L in the default settings, it is not necessary to operate the input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

On the other hand, when the heating and cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of 43MC and 43M1 of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43MS, and 43MT of the central operation unit 40M are disabled (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In FIG. 130, the dashed frame indicates that the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the central operation unit 40M have been disabled.

Meanwhile, in the left heating unit 17HL, the preheating operation continues (preheating process). If the input key 44L on the left operation unit 40L is pressed again, the touch signal from that input key is recognized as an "OFF" signal by the integrated control device MC, and the "preheating process" of induction heating stops at this stage, and the heating cooking period P2 ends. To maintain preheating until cooking process 2, the input key 44L is not pressed.

When the object N reaches the (target) preheat temperature set by the user or the default setting temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies the user by voice that preheating is complete. The first specific screen 30SP also displays that preheating is complete.

Therefore, the user places the food to be cooked on the food to be cooked (frying pan) maintained at a high temperature and cooks it (cooking step 1).
During cooking step 1, no other cooking can be performed in heating chamber 113. Since the input functions of input keys 43MC and 43M1 are disabled, heating chamber 113 is occupied.

In other words, the end of cooking step 1 cannot be stopped by the input key 44L of the left operation unit 40L. Note that if the input key 43MT is pressed twice in succession at this point, all of the linked cooking modes KM3 will be cancelled.

By pressing the input key 43MT on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can end cooking process 1 by the left heating unit 17HL at any time.

Next, while the handle NH is still attached (locked) to the object N, the user lifts the object N from the left heating section 17HL and moves it to the heating chamber 113 with the door 114 open. Finally, the user removes the handle NH.

In this way, the food to be cooked is placed on top of the food to be heated N and is contained in the heating chamber 113.
If the door 114 is not closed, even if the input key 43MS is pressed, the drive signal to the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is not transmitted from the integrated control device MC.
Then, when the input key 43MS is pressed next, the cooking process 2 in the heating chamber 113 (heating cooking period P5) starts.

In addition, in cooking step 2, high-temperature steam may be supplied from the steam supplier 500 as shown in embodiment 2.

In this manner, the food is cooked inside the heating chamber 113. By pressing the input key 43MT once, the user can end cooking step 2 at the time desired.

Note that at the cooking step 2 stage, the left heating section 17HL is no longer occupied, so other food items can be cooked in the left heating section 17HL.

Note that cooking step 2 may end automatically when the time set in timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. If it ends automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released at the same time as cooking step 2 ends (in FIG. 130, it is not stopped automatically, but rather the linked cooking mode KM3 is stopped at any time by pressing the input key 43MT. In the case of optional stopping, the input key 43MT may be pressed one more time as shown in FIG. 130).

It is also possible to control the linked cooking mode KM3 so that it is not automatically cancelled when cooking step 2 is completed. If the start switch (input key 43MS) is pressed within a certain period of time (e.g., within one minute) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after completing cooking step 2, a message is displayed indicating that the linked cooking mode KM3 will be treated as part of the linked cooking mode, and the process may wait for user input (operation of input key 43M1).

In this way, after cooking step 2 is completed, the user can check the doneness of the food and immediately touch input key 43MS if it is not cooked enough. This method also improves usability for the user.

In this third embodiment, if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, the heating source and the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped and an alert is issued, as described in the first embodiment (particularly Figures 45 and 46).

Summary of embodiment 3.
As in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 of the third embodiment also has the following configuration.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N by two heating parts 17HL and 17HR located at two positions separated from each other on the left and right;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in a heating chamber located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
An alarm means AN having a voice alarm unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and a display unit (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the first information 501 for identifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second information 502 for identifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 are notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and the integrated display unit 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, the single cooking mode KM1, etc.), the user can easily select the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc. of the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

In other configurations of embodiment 3, the same effects as those of embodiment 1 can be expected.

Further, the input operation unit 40 in the third embodiment includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a specified order.
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the multiple heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined and used in combination, and a single cooking mode KM1 in which one of the multiple heating sources is used alone.
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 serves as a means for selecting one control menu from among a plurality of control menus belonging to both the composite cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, in either of the two cooking modes (combined cooking mode KM2 and single cooking mode KM1), the user can easily check the control menu corresponding to the two types of heating sources (the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189) and select one of them by operating the input key 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M. In addition, there is no need to increase the number of input keys as the number of heating sources increases, and a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved user operability can be realized even when the installation space for the input operation unit 40 is limited.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 of the third embodiment has the following configuration.
That is,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for an integrated preheat cooking mode KM4 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a predetermined order,
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N by the first heating means HM1, a cooking step 1 of heating and cooking the object N by the first heating means HM1 following the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of moving the object N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 to the heating chamber 113 after the cooking step 1 is completed, thereby transferring the object to be cooked to the heating chamber 113 and further heating the object to be cooked.
The linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the common operation unit 40M, the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is selected (operated by the input key 43MC) and the preheating process is started (operated by the input key 43MS),
(2) The cooking process 1 is ended by the common operation unit 40M (by operating the input key 43MT).
(3) The cooking process 2 is started and ended by the common operation unit 40M (operation using the input keys 43MS and 43MT).
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 having the above-mentioned features.

With this configuration, a single cooking device can select a linked preheat cooking mode, which is a type of linked cooking mode in which the heating location and heating means are different, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the cooperative preheat cooking mode allows the shared operation unit 40M to determine a series of operations from the start to the end of the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4, so the operation rules are simple, and it is expected that user operation errors and confusion will be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability, even though it is a cooker with two or more heating sources and input operation units.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 3, when using a heated object N such as a frying pan with a relatively large diameter, as shown in FIG. 129, the position of the handle NH may be directly above or cross the vicinity of the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R (hereinafter referred to as an "intersecting situation").

If cooking process 1 is continued with the handle NH attached from the start of cooking process 1, there is a concern that the fingertips FG may come close to the handle NH when the left operating unit 40L or the right operating unit 40R is operated to end the heating operation (cooking process 1). In particular, when trying to move the object to be heated N in a hurry, the fingertips may unintentionally touch the handle NH.

In this third embodiment, taking into consideration the fact that a large-diameter frying pan is used to cook a large amount of dumplings and the like using the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the operation to end cooking process 1 can be performed on the shared operation unit 40M.

Therefore, even if the individual operation units 40L, 40R and the handle NH cross each other as described above, a control command to stop cooking process 1 can be safely given using the common operation unit 40M.
In other words, according to the third embodiment, a cooking appliance 1 with further improved safety can be provided.

Embodiment 4.
Fig. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the input keys in the input operation unit and the cooking steps, etc., in chronological order from the selection to the transition of the cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 4. The same or corresponding parts as those in embodiments 1 to 3 are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof may be omitted.

The fourth embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that a preheating step is performed in the heating chamber 113 .
The following describes Figure 131.
In the fourth embodiment, preheating is performed by the second heating means HM2, and after this preheating operation, cooking process 1 is performed directly in the heating chamber 113. The subsequent cooking process 1 is the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 (linked preheating cooking mode KM4) performed by the first heating means HM1.

In FIG. 131, the input functions of the main input keys are valid, and those related to starting and ending the cooking process are shown in white rectangular frames. Note that not all input keys are depicted.

During the preparation period P1, the input functions of the input keys 43MC, 43M1, and 43MS on the central operation unit 40M (shared operation unit 40M) are all valid. Press the input key 43MC to display the first specific screen 30SP. From the cooking menu displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, select the identification information 330 of the desired food to be cooked and press the input key 43MS.
Then, the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4 is entered (the next preheating step is entered from this preparation period P1 stage).

When the integrated control device MC displays the identification information 330 on the first specific screen 30SP, it specifies that the preheating process is to be performed in the heating chamber 113 by the oven heating source 188. Therefore, the user can understand that the preheating operation will be performed in the heating chamber 113 before pressing the input key 43MS.

Even if the user does not operate the common operation unit 40M, if the door 114 is closed before pressing the input key 43MS, power is supplied to the oven heating source 188 and the heating cooking period P2 (preheating process) is executed.

On the other hand, when the heating cooking period P2 begins, the input functions of the input keys 44L, 43L1, 43L2, and 43L3 are disabled in the left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L corresponding to the left heating unit 17HL to be used in cooking process 2 in the coordinated preheating cooking mode KM4 (in reality, even if an input operation signal reaches the integrated control device MC, it is ignored by the integrated control device MC).

In Figure 131, the disabled input functions of the input keys 44L, 43L2, and 43L3 of the left operation unit (individual operation unit) 40L are indicated by dashed frames (note that, although not shown, the input function of the input key 43L1 may also be disabled).
During this heating cooking period P2, the input function of the right operation unit 40L remains valid, so the right heating unit 17HR can be used for another cooking operation (however, the linked cooking mode KM3 and combined cooking mode KM2 cannot be set).

When the internal atmospheric temperature of the heating chamber 113 reaches the (target) preheating temperature set by the user (e.g., 200°C) or the default set temperature, the voice synthesizer 95 notifies by voice that preheating is complete. The first specific screen 30SP also displays that preheating is complete.

The user then opens the door 114 and places the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113. At that time, with the next cooking step 2 in mind, the food to be cooked may be placed on the food to be cooked (frying pan) as shown in FIG. 128. Even if the food to be cooked N is made of metal, it can be cooked using microwave heating if it has an open top like a frying pan. Alternatively, the food to be cooked may be placed on a cooking plate made of heat-resistant plastic or heat-resistant glass.

During the heating and cooking period P3, not only the oven heating source 188 is operated, but also the microwave heating source 189 may be driven to heat the food to be cooked by the synergistic effect of radiant heat and microwaves.

Between preheating step 1 and cooking step 1, no other cooking can be done in the heating chamber 113. The input functions of input keys 43MC and 43M1 are enabled, but no other cooking modes can be set unless the linked preheating cooking mode KM4, which includes the preheating step, is cancelled (by pressing input key 43MT twice).

By pressing the input key 43MT on the shared operation unit 40M, the user can end cooking process 1 at any time.

The integrated control device MC may provide the user with progress information as needed using additional information 331 (see FIG. 64 in the first embodiment, etc.) to help the user complete cooking process 1. In addition, the integrated control device MC may provide third reference information (see FIG. 73 and FIG. 75 in the first embodiment) FA3 or the like to inform the user that a predetermined time (TN3) (see FIG. 75) has passed since the start of cooking process 1.

When the input key 43MT is pressed, the cooking process 1 ends and a heating pause period P4 begins.
When the heating pause period P4 begins, the input functions of the input keys 43MC and 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M are restored (restrictions are lifted).

On the other hand, when the heating pause period P4 begins in the individual operation unit 40L, the input functions of the input keys 44L, 43L2, and 43L3 are restored, so induction heating cooking can be started at any time by placing the object to be heated N on the left heating unit 17HL.

Next, during heating pause period P4, the user opens door 114 and removes the food to be cooked from heating chamber 113.
At that time, if the object N (frying pan) from which the handle NH has been removed as described above is being used, the handle NH is attached, and the object N with the object placed thereon is removed from the heating chamber 113. Then, the object N is moved above the left heating unit 17HL.

In this way, the food to be cooked remains on top of the food to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL, so when input key 44L is pressed again, cooking step 2 (heating cooking period P5) begins. Note that the heat can also be adjusted by pressing input keys 43L2 and 43L3.

In the above manner, the food to be cooked is heated and cooked in the left heating section 17HL, and cooking step 2 is completed by pressing the input key 44L in the left individual operation section 40L once.
At this stage, if the input key 43MT of the common operation unit 40MC is pressed, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (cooperative pre-heating cooking mode KM4) is completely cancelled.

Note that at the stage of cooking process 2, the heating chamber 113 is no longer occupied, so other food items can be heated and cooked in the heating chamber 113.

Note that cooking process 2 may end automatically when the time set by timer cooking or the time set by default has elapsed. Whether it is ended by the user or automatically, the linked cooking mode KM3 is released at the same time as cooking process 2 ends (FIG. 131 shows the linked cooking mode KM3 being released by pressing input key 43MT, but it is also possible to press input key 43MT in this way).

Note that the cooperative cooking mode KM3 may be controlled not to be automatically cancelled immediately after the end of cooking process 2. If the start switch (input key 43L2 or input key 43L3) is pressed within a certain time (for example, within 10 minutes) on the first specific screen 30SP of the integrated display unit 30 immediately after the end of cooking process 2, a message may be displayed indicating that the cooperative cooking mode is to be treated as part of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, and the process may wait for the user to input to resume cooking (operate input key 43L1 or 44L).
In this way, after the cooking step 2 is completed, the user can check the doneness of the food and if it is not heated enough, touch the input key 43L2 or 43L3 within a certain period of time (for example, 10 minutes). This method also improves the convenience for the user.

In this fourth embodiment, if the abnormality detection unit EM detects an abnormality between the preheating step and the cooking step 2, the heating source and the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, and 129 are stopped and an alert is issued, as described in the first embodiment (particularly Figures 45 and 46).

Summary of embodiment 4.
As in the first embodiment, the cooking device 1 in the fourth embodiment is also the cooking device 1 according to the first to third disclosures.

Therefore, when selecting various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, the single cooking mode KM1, etc.), the user can easily select the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc. of the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

Furthermore, in this fourth embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed on an upper surface of the main body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
An information unit AN (integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, right display unit 31R) for providing information;
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the notification unit AN;
An input operation unit 40 for giving commands to the integrated control device MC,
The input operation unit 40 has individual operation units 40L and 40R dedicated to the first heating means HM1, and a shared operation unit 40M for the second heating means HM2 and the first heating means HM1,
The integrated control device MC has an operation program for an integrated preheat cooking mode KM4 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a predetermined order,
The linked preheating cooking mode KM4 includes a preheating step of preheating the object N by the second heating means HM2, a cooking step 1 of heating and cooking the object N by the second heating means HM2 after the preheating step, and a cooking step 2 of further heating the object N (frying pan) used in the cooking step 1 by moving the object N (frying pan) onto the heating section 17HL (or 17HR) of the induction heating source 9 after the cooking step 1 is completed.
The common operation unit 40M further includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC notifies the first information 501 for identifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second information 502 for identifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and the integrated display unit 30,
The linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is
(1) In the common operation unit 40M, the selection of the linked preheating cooking mode KM4 (input key 43MC) and the decision to start the preheating process and the cooking process 1 (input key 43MS) are performed;
(2) The preheating step is ended by the common operation unit 40M (input key 43MT),
(3) The cooking process 1 is started and ended by the common operation unit 40M (by the input keys 43MS and 43MT),
(4) The start and end of cooking process 2 are performed by the individual operation units 40L and 40R (by input key 44L).
The document discloses a cooking device 1 having the above features.

In this fourth embodiment, the same effects can be expected for the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, according to the configuration of embodiment 4, a coordinated preheating cooking mode, which is one type of coordinated cooking mode in which the heating location and heating means are different, can be selected in one cooking device, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking.

In addition, the cooperative preheat cooking mode allows the shared operation unit 40M to determine a series of operations from the start to the end of the cooperative preheat cooking mode KM4, and subsequently determines the start and end of cooking process 1, so that the operation rules are simple and it is expected that user operation errors and confusion will be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to provide a heating cooker with improved operability, even though it has two or more heating sources and two or more input operation units.

Embodiment 5.
FIG. 132 is a simplified plan view of a built-in type combined cooking device according to embodiment 5. FIG. 133 is a simplified perspective view of the main part of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. FIG. 134 is a simplified perspective view showing a modified example of the cooking device shown in FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a list of various cooking modes of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram showing a main cooling air duct of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the cooling air duct shown in FIG. 136. FIG. 138 is an enlarged plan view showing a central (shared) operating unit and an integrated display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. FIG. 139 is an enlarged plan view of a right operating unit and a right display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. FIG. 140 is an enlarged plan view of a left operating unit and a left display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing a main control-related part of the cooking device shown in FIG. 132. Fig. 142 is a flow chart showing the operation steps from starting up the cooking device shown in Fig. 132 to displaying the guide screen and the first to third specific screens. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in the first to fourth embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof may be omitted.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 132 differs significantly from embodiment 1 in that all or a portion of the cooling air after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is discharged directly to the outside of the cooking device 1 without passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 132 is also significantly different from the first embodiment in that the induction heating section 17H includes a central heating section 17HM in addition to the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR. Since the central heating section 17HM is provided, the positions of the left heating section 17HL and the right heating section 17HR are slightly shifted forward compared to the first embodiment.

TS11 is a thermistor that functions as a contact-type temperature sensor, and is disposed in the center (hollow) of the IH coil 17M for the central heating section 17HM. Like the temperature sensor TS4 in embodiment 1, this temperature sensor TS11 is in direct contact with the underside of the top plate 15, or in contact with the underside of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive intermediary object. This allows it to measure the temperature of the top plate 15. A signal indicating the temperature measurement result is then sent to the integrated control device MC.

Reference numeral 17MS denotes a circular position mark printed or otherwise indicated on the upper surface of the top plate 15 to indicate a desirable position for placing an object to be heated N, such as a metal pan.
The central IH coil 17M constituting the central heating unit 17M is driven by a second IH control unit 90M2 (described later) (see FIG. 141).

The central operation unit 40M is provided with an input key 43M1 (see FIG. 138) as a selection unit that can select the central heating unit 17HM. By operating the input key 43M1, as explained in FIG. 34 of the first embodiment, it is possible to select "central heater," which is one of the control menus, on the integrated display unit 30. This allows the heating operation of the central heating unit 17HM to be specified.

30 is an integrated display unit located behind the central operation unit 40M. 31L is a left display unit located behind the individual operation unit 40L. 31R is a right display unit located behind the individual operation unit 40R.

As explained in the first embodiment, the integrated display unit 30 may be divided into three display areas 30L, 30M, and 30R (the display screen itself is not physically divided into three). The three display areas are the first area 30L located on the left, the second area 30M in the center, and the third area 30R located on the right, but in FIG. 138, the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to form two display regions.

The left display unit 31L and the right display unit 31R each have a display screen such as a liquid crystal display screen. The effective display area of the display screen is equal to the effective display area of the display screen of the integrated display unit 30. The planar shape is also the same (horizontally elongated rectangle).

When the push button 98 of the main power switch 97 is pressed, the display screen 30D of the integrated display section 30 automatically displays the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) as described with reference to FIGS.
On the other hand, the same standby initial screen (common screen 30Z) is automatically displayed simultaneously on the left display section 31L and the right display section 31R. This is a difference from the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the same guide screen 30SA is automatically displayed simultaneously on the left display unit 31L and the right display unit 31R. This is different from the first embodiment.

In addition, in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, in a cooking process that uses the induction heating source 9, the first specific screen 30SP is also displayed on the left display unit 31L and the right display unit 31R. In other words, cooking process information (display unit for cooking process) 332 (see FIG. 64) is displayed.

Furthermore, after the display of the standby initial screen 30Z, a guide screen 30SA is displayed, and in response to a user operation, the first specific screen 30SP is also displayed on the left display unit 31L or the right display unit 31R. These points are different from the first embodiment.

Furthermore, in the single cooking mode KM1 in which only the induction heating source 9 is used, the third specific screen 30ST as described in the first embodiment is also displayed on the left display unit 31L and the right display unit 31R. This is also different from the first embodiment.

As described above, in this embodiment 5, the display information between the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right display units 31L and 31R is kept as equal as possible, so that the user can access more abundant information on the left and right display units 31L and 31R than in embodiment 1.

Next, in FIG. 133, 129 is a fourth cooling fan (one of the lower cooling fans), which is installed directly above the intake port (second intake port) 152B (not shown) formed in the bottom plate 101U of the lower case 101.

Directly above the intake port 152B is installed a box-shaped case B151 which houses a heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122. An opening 150H larger than the intake port 152B is formed in the bottom surface of the case B151.
The case A151 is entirely made of plastic material.

In the fifth embodiment, within the lower unit 200, the lower path is configured as follows.
Internal path 1: Although not shown, the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by the outside air drawn in from the second intake port 152F by the third cooling fan 128. The rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Internal path 2: The heat dissipation section 122H is cooled by the outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake port 152B.
A communication window 309 is formed in the left wall of the case B151 housing the heat dissipation unit 122H, near the ceiling. The communication window 309 communicates with a gap GP5 (not shown), and ultimately with the inside of the heating chamber 113.
Meanwhile, a communication window 306 is opened in the rear wall surface of the case B151 at a position close to the ceiling. An exhaust duct 307 extending rearward is connected to the outside of this communication window 306. Note that the exhaust duct 307 shown in Fig. 133 is inclined as a whole so as to become higher as it approaches the terminal end 307 side, but it may be in a form extending horizontally.

The end 307E of the exhaust duct 307 extends to the right end of the gap GP1 at the rear of the upper unit 100. The exhaust (outlet) end of the exhaust duct 307 extends vertically to penetrate the gap GP1 without penetrating the upper space 300A on the upper unit 100 side, and the top surface is open.

In FIG. 133, 320 is an exhaust port corresponding to the exhaust port 20 of the first embodiment, which exhausts the cooling air RF7 from the cooking appliance 1. The exhaust port 320 is located at the rear right side of the upper unit 100, and is far away from the exhaust port 20 (see FIG. 13) which is located at the rear left side of the upper unit 100.

With this configuration, part of the cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 passes through the heating chamber 113 and reaches the exhaust duct 102 as in the first embodiment.
On the other hand, a part of the cooling air RF7 that has cooled the heat radiating portion 122H of the magnetron 122 does not reach the heating chamber 113 or the exhaust duct 102, and can be directly discharged to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 by the duct 307 immediately after cooling the heat radiating portion 122H. In other words, in the process of being discharged to the outside, the cooling air RF7 is not mixed with the cooling air in the upper air duct AH of the upper unit 100.

In the fifth embodiment, the upper air passage AH is configured as follows inside the upper unit 100.
The inverter circuit board 80 is cooled by outside air drawn in by the first cooling fan 60 through the ventilation hole 64 .
At the same time, part of the cooling air RF1 discharged from the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60 becomes secondary cooling air RF1A and cools the left IH coil 17L (see FIG. 136).

A portion of the outside air drawn in by the second cooling fan 61 through the vent 64 moves from the outlet 61A toward the left IH coil 17L located immediately above, and becomes secondary cooling air RF1A to cool the left IH coil 17L (see Figure 136).

As described above, in the structure of this embodiment 5, the air passage after the heat dissipation section 122H is branched into two, and an air passage with a shorter length to the terminal section 307E is formed in addition to the air passage that passes through the heating chamber duct 307. Therefore, the cooling air RF7 after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H can be discharged through a short air passage, and the air passage resistance can be reduced.

The (second) inverter circuit board 80M, which is equipped with an inverter circuit 81 for the central heating section 17HM, is installed horizontally at a position rearward of the inverter circuit board 80, and is configured to be cooled by a portion of the cooling air RF1 coming out of the air outlet 60A of the first cooling fan 60.

The structural differences from the first embodiment are as described above.
In making such a change, it is also possible to change the airflow capacity of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129. Specifically, taking into consideration the magnitude of the airflow resistance, the airflow capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 may be set to be smaller (compared to the third cooling fan 128) to enable power saving of the fourth cooling fan 129 or switching to a less expensive cooling fan.

Next, we will explain Figure 134.
The air passage configuration in FIG. 134 is a modified example of the air passage configuration shown in FIG.
Directly above the intake port 152B is installed a box-shaped case A151 housing a heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122. An opening 150H larger than the intake port 152B is formed in the bottom surface of the case A150.
The case A is entirely made of a plastic material.

In the modified example of FIG. 134, the communication window 309 shown in FIG. 133 is not formed.
That is, inside the lower unit 200, the lower air passage UH is configured as follows.
Internal path 1: The inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by the outside air drawn in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second intake port 152F. The rest is the same as in the first embodiment.
Internal path 2: The heat dissipation section 122H is cooled by the outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake port 152B.
The communication window 309 shown in the first embodiment is not formed in the left wall surface of the case B151 housing the heat dissipation portion 122H and in a position close to the ceiling.

On the other hand, a communication window 306, which is the only passageway to the outside, is opened on the rear wall of case B151 near the ceiling. An exhaust duct 307 extending rearward is connected to the outside of this communication window 306. Note that the exhaust duct 307 shown in FIG. 134 is inclined overall so that it becomes higher as it approaches the terminal end 307, but it may also be in a form that extends horizontally.

The end 307E of the exhaust duct 307 extends to the right end of the gap GP1 at the rear of the upper unit 100. The exhaust (outlet) end of the exhaust duct 307 extends vertically to penetrate the gap GP1 without penetrating the upper space 300A on the upper unit 100 side, and the top surface is open.

In FIG. 134, 320 is an exhaust port corresponding to the exhaust port 20 in the first embodiment, which exhausts the cooling air RF7 from the cooking appliance 1. It is located at the rear right side of the upper unit 100, and is far away from the exhaust duct 102, which is located at the rear left side of the upper unit 100.

In this modified example, the cooling air RF6 that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 does not pass through the heating chamber 113, but is entirely discharged to the outside via the exhaust duct 307.

Because of this configuration, the cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 does not pass through the heating chamber 113 in its entirety, but reaches the exhaust duct 307 directly and finally the exhaust port 320. In other words, the cooling air that has cooled the heat dissipation portion 122H of the magnetron 122 does not reach the heating chamber 113, but reaches the rear of the upper unit 100 via the duct 307 immediately after cooling the heat dissipation portion 122H, and is released outside the cooking appliance 1 as cooling air RF7.

On the other hand, the inverter circuit board 121 is cooled by the outside air drawn in by the third cooling fan 128 through the ventilation hole 164 .
The cooling air RF5 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 does not pass through the heating chamber 113, but reaches the exhaust duct 102 from the communication port 173.
Therefore, even in this modified example, the cooling airs RF5 and RF6 do not mix with the cooling air in the upper air duct AH of the upper unit 100 when they are released to the outside from the lower air duct UH of the lower unit 200 via separate paths.

The main features of this modified example are as described above.
In making such a change, it is also possible to change the airflow capacity of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129. Specifically, taking into consideration the magnitude of the airflow resistance, the airflow capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 may be set to be smaller (compared to the third cooling fan 128) to enable power saving of the fourth cooling fan 129 or switching to a less expensive cooling fan.

Next, we will explain Figure 135.
The cooking device 1 of this embodiment 5 has three cooking modes to choose from.
The first cooking mode is an integrated cooking mode KM3, which is an operation method in which the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a specified order.

The second cooking mode is the composite cooking mode KM2. The composite cooking mode KM2 automatically combines and uses multiple heating sources of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188).

The third cooking mode is a single cooking mode KM1 that utilizes the induction heating source 9.
In the table shown in Fig. 134, it is described that after the second cooking mode is selected, the single cooking mode KM1 using the central heating unit 17HM can be selected. Also, the single cooking mode KM1 using only one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 can be selected. These will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 135, the selection means (selection section) for selecting the first cooking mode (combined cooking mode KM3) is an input key 43MC.
The selection means (selection section) for selecting the second cooking mode (combined cooking mode KM2) is the input key 43M1.
In the individual operation units 40L and 40R, the selection means (selection unit) for selecting the third cooking mode (single cooking mode KM1) is the input keys 43R1 and 43L1.

The input key 43MC may be referred to as a "first cooking mode selection section."
The input key 43M1 may be referred to as a "second cooking mode selection section."
The input keys 43L1, 43R1 may be referred to as a "third cooking mode selection section."

The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 serves both as a means for selecting the cooking menu in the first cooking mode and as a means for selecting only one of a plurality of control menus belonging to the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1 (which can be selected by the central operation unit 40M).

As is clear from FIG. 135, when input key 43M1 is pressed without pressing input key 43MC, various control menus belonging to composite cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "range grill cooking") (see FIG. 34) are displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.

Furthermore, when the input key 43M1 is pressed again while the control menu (e.g., "Range grill cooking") is displayed at a predetermined position on the second specific screen 30SC (the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L), the next control menu is displayed at a predetermined position on the second specific screen 30SC (the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L).

Furthermore, when the control menu (e.g., "Range grill cooking") is displayed at a predetermined position on the second specific screen 30SC (the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L), if the input key 43M1 is pressed again, the next control menu ("Range grill reheat") is displayed at a predetermined position on the second specific screen 30SC (the center of the front-to-back direction of the first area 30L).
In this manner, the display of the control menu can be updated one by one according to the number of times the input key 43M1 is pressed, so that only one specific control menu can be selected.

That is, as shown in FIG. 135, a single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 (central heating section 17HM) can also be selected.
Furthermore, when the enter key 43M1 is subsequently pressed, a control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 in which only one of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 is used is also displayed on the second specific screen 30SC.

As explained in the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), the control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 is displayed in the order "Grill" and "Oven". When the input key 43M1 is pressed further, the induction heating control menu for "Central Heater" is displayed.

On the other hand, the selection means (selection unit) for selecting the third cooking mode (single cooking mode KM1) using the right operation unit 40R or the left operation unit 40L is the input keys 43R1 and 43L1.

In FIG. 136, RF2A is a portion of the cooling air RF2 blown out from the second cooling fan 61. This cooling air RF2A flows from left to right in the space directly below the input operation unit 40, sequentially cooling the input operation unit 40, the left and right display units 31L and 31, the integrated display unit 30, etc.

The upper space 300A has a dedicated inverter circuit 81M (see FIG. 141) for the central heating section 17HM, and the inverter circuit board 80M on which the inverter circuit 81M is mounted is cooled by the cooling air RF1 (see FIG. 136) of the first cooling fan 60.

Figure 137 is an explanatory diagram showing the main cooling air paths when the air path configuration shown in Figure 134 is applied. As is clear from Figure 137, according to the modified example of Figure 134, all of the cooling air RF6 (RF7) that has cooled the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 flows into the exhaust duct 307.

On the other hand, even if cooling air enters the heating chamber 113 through a small gap around the temperature sensor 160, no cooling air is generated due to this. Also, the gap around the temperature sensor 160 may be sealed with a sealant, in which case the amount of cooling air RF5 supplied from the third cooling fan 128 to the heating chamber 113 becomes very small or zero.

In FIG. 137, the arrows showing the flow of cooling air from the temperature sensor 160 to the heating chamber 113 are shown by dashed lines, indicating that the air volume is small or zero. Similarly, the arrows showing the flow of cooling air from the heating chamber 113 to the communication port 174 and further to the exhaust duct 102 are each shown by dashed lines, indicating that the air volume is also small or zero.

On the other hand, when the internal space of the heating chamber 113 is heated by the oven heating source 188, the air expands and is naturally released in advance in small amounts from the exhaust duct 102, so there is no problem with monitoring the temperature by the temperature sensor TS10.

In addition, since there is no longer any effect of the cooling air RF6 that has cooled the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 flowing into the exhaust duct 102, there is no effect whatsoever from the operation or non-operation of the fourth cooling fan 129 or fluctuations in the airflow rate, and the temperature sensor TS10 can stably measure the ambient temperature.

As explained in FIG. 15, the exhaust duct 102 shown in FIG. 134 has two independent internal passages 102A and 102B at the top and bottom, and the cooling air RF5 that has cooled the inverter circuit board 121 flows through the upper internal passage 102A.

When the upstream end of the internal passage 102A, i.e., the flow path cross-sectional area on the inlet side of the cooling air RF5, is reduced by one step (hereinafter, this portion is referred to as the "throttled portion"), the flow velocity of the cooling air RF5 that reaches this internal passage 102A from the third cooling fan 129 via the inverter circuit board 121 increases as it passes through the throttle portion (not shown) of the internal passage 102A.

In this way, by increasing the flow rate of the cooling air RF5 on the internal passage 100A side, the effect of attracting the air on the internal passage 100B side is enhanced when it merges with the internal notification 102B below. In other words, the air inside the internal space 102B where the heat-sensing part of the temperature sensor TS10 is exposed can be continuously exhausted to the outside without introducing the cooling air from the fourth cooling fan 129 into the heating chamber 113.

The position where the "throttled portion" is formed is not limited to the upstream end of the internal passage 102A. It may be formed at any intermediate stage up to the downstream end.
In addition, the flow passage cross-sectional area of the internal passage 102A may be set small without forming the "throttled portion." This can be easily achieved by changing the position of the separator (partition plate) 102S that divides the inside of the exhaust duct 102 into two, upper and lower, sections.

Next, FIG. 138 corresponds to FIG. 63 of the first embodiment.
138 is a schematic plan view illustrating the state of the second specific screen 30SC in which "Central IH", which is one control menu selected by the input key 43M1 as the second cooking mode KM2, is displayed in a predetermined position (center position between the front and rear) in the first area 30L of the integrated display unit 30, and the operation of the central operation unit (shared operation unit) 40M. This one control menu, "Central IH", exceptionally specifies the heating unit (central heating unit 17HM).

As shown in FIG. 138, when the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display unit drive circuit 63 causes the individual light-emitting units 27M1 to 27M4 to emit light in a unified color.

After that, when the selection input key 43M1 for the composite cooking mode KM2 is operated, the specific text 30J indicating the central heating unit 17HM, "Central IH", is displayed in the first area 30L. In other words, instead of the specific text 30J indicating a control menu such as "oven" or "warm", the name specifying the heating unit (central heating unit 17HM) is displayed as described above.

At this display stage, all four input keys 43M1-43M2 corresponding to the first area 30L and the second area 30M can accept input. Therefore, the two individual light-emitting units 27M3 and 27M4 corresponding to these four input keys 43M1-43M2 continue to emit light.

On the other hand, the individual light-emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS that commands the start of the heating operation changes from continuous illumination to blinking, as shown by the dotted circle in FIG. 138. The presence of the input key 43MS is then highlighted with light.

When the user touches the input key 43MS in the state shown in FIG. 138, the second cooking mode is entered. Then, the single heating operation by the induction heating source 9 (central heating section 17HM) is started.

In this way, in this fifth embodiment, when the input functions of the input keys 43M1 and 43MS are enabled, light emitting means (display unit drive circuit 63) is provided that causes the individual light emitting units 27M1 to 27M6 to emit light in the first light emitting mode (continuous light emission).

When the integrated control device MC displays the reference information 30P, it is configured to cause only the light-emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) to emit light in the second light-emitting mode (flashing).

Because of the above configuration, the user can easily identify the state in which the cooking device is waiting for a command to start the heating operation (in the second cooking mode) by the blinking of the light-emitting unit 27M6. Note that the light-emitting unit 27M6 also supports the touch-type input key 43MT, which can stop the induction heating operation. Therefore, even after the heating operation has started, if the light-emitting unit 27M6 is emitting light, the input function of the input key 43MT is also valid, and a command to stop the induction heating can be sent by touching it.

When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display drive circuit 63 may be configured to blink only the light emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the input key 43MS, which is the start selection element, from the beginning. The other light emitting elements 27M1 to 27M4 may be configured to emit light continuously and emit light in a form different from that of the input key 43MS of the start selection element.

As is clear from FIG. 138, in this embodiment 5, the central operation unit 40M can be used to select a control menu (e.g., "central IH") for the single cooking mode KM1 that specifies a specific heating unit (central heating unit 17HM) using the integrated display unit 30 (second specific screen 30SC) to perform cooking.

That is, in this fifth embodiment,
In the integrated display section 30, a first specific screen 30SP of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a second specific screen 30SC of the composite cooking mode KM2 are displayed by switching between them and the standby initial screen (common screen 30Z).
The second specific screen 30SC here displays various control menus for the combined cooking mode KM2, and in addition, can display a control menu for the single cooking mode KM1 that specifies the central heating section 17HM of the induction heating source 9 ("central IH").

In FIG. 138, 43P is a display unit that is displayed by printing or the like near the pair of input keys 43M1 on the left and right operation surfaces. This display unit 43P displays in text the fact that the left input key 43M1 has the function of selecting various control menus.

43H is a display unit printed or otherwise displayed near the front of the pair of input keys 43M1, which have left and right operation surfaces. This display unit 43H displays in text a message indicating that the right input key 43M1 has the function of selecting a control menu (for the single cooking mode) for the central heating unit 17HM.

By pressing the left input key 43M1, as explained in FIG. 34 of the first embodiment, the control menu and the central heating unit 17HM can be displayed in sequence on the second specific screen 30SC in the order of "Warm", "Manual range", "Grill", "Oven", and "Central heater (Central IH)" (see FIG. 138).

On the other hand, if the input key 43M1 displayed in close proximity to the display section 43H with the text "Central IH" is pressed, "Central Heater (Central IH)" can be immediately displayed on the second specific screen 30SC, regardless of the display order of the control menus as described above.

Therefore, when a user desires induction heating cooking using the central heating unit 17HM, the operation of selecting the heating source (central heating unit 17HM) can be achieved with fewer operational steps.
Therefore, according to the configuration of FIG. 138, the desired heating unit (central IH) can be selected more easily than in the first embodiment, improving operability.

The central IH may be able to implement a control menu (such as "boiling water") like the left and right heating sections 17HL and 17HR, or it may be able to implement a cooking menu for specific ingredients (such as cooking rice). This central heating section 17HM can only use a lower heating power than the heating capacity (maximum heating power 3200W) of the left and right heating sections 17HL and 17HR, but it is possible to select from five levels of heating power, for example, from heating power 1 (150W) to heating power 5 (1000W). Therefore, for example, if the cooking menu "cooking rice" is selected, the rice cooking process can be automatically carried out at a maximum heating power range of up to 1000W.

As is clear from the above explanation, in the fifth embodiment, the second specific screen 30SC is configured to display control menus for using each of the three heating sources, the induction heating source 9, the oven heating source 188, and the microwave heating source 189, individually in sequence as shown in FIG. 138, and to include a selection section 43M1 that allows the user to select only one of the menus. This is a major difference from the first embodiment.

In addition, an input key 43M1 that can display the control menu at once instead of sequentially is located behind the display unit 43H.

With this configuration, by using one input key 43M1, it is possible to select either the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 belonging to the second cooking mode (e.g., "range grill automatic") or the IH control menu belonging to the single cooking mode KM1 using the central heating unit 17HM, and perform heating and cooking with a simple operation.

Figure 139 corresponds to Figure 22 in the first embodiment. Figure 140 corresponds to Figure 23 in the first embodiment.

As can be seen from Figures 139 and 140, the positions of input keys 43L1, 43R1, 44L, and 44R are different from those in embodiment 1, but the input functions of each input key are the same as those in embodiment 1.

Next, a description will be given of Fig. 141. Fig. 141 corresponds to Fig. 30 of the first embodiment.
In Fig. 141, 17M is an IH coil (induction heating coil) disposed in a central heating unit 17HM. 81M is an inverter circuit (center) that supplies high-frequency power to the IH coil 17M of the central heating unit 17HM.

In this embodiment 5, the IH control unit 90 in the first embodiment is composed of a first IH control unit 90M1 and a second IH control unit 90M2. These first and second IH control units 90M1 and 90M2 are mainly composed of a microcomputer.

The inverter circuit 81M for the central heating unit 17HM is controlled by the second IH control unit 90M2.
Although not shown, the inverter circuit 81M is mounted on a second inverter circuit board 80M that is separate from the inverter circuit board 80. Furthermore, the switching means (IGBTs, etc.) of the second inverter circuit board 80M is mounted on a heat sink (not shown) that is separate from the heat sink 82 (see FIG. 26) described in the first embodiment.

Of the upper cooling fans 60 and 61, a portion of the cooling air from the second cooling fan 61 located at the rear is branched off to form cooling air RF1, which cools the switching means (IGBTs, etc.) of the second inverter circuit board 80M.

Figure 142 is a flowchart showing the operational steps from when the main power is supplied to the cooking appliance 1 and started up until when the guide screen 30SA, the first screen 30SP, the second screen 30SC, and the third specific screen 30ST are displayed.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment 5, the display information between the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 31L and right display unit 31R is at the same level as much as possible.

The operation steps shown in FIG. 142 are defined in the operation program of the integrated control device MC.
SM1 indicates that the main power switch 97 is closed, and corresponds to step ST1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38).
SM2 is a step in which the integrated control device MC determines whether or not there is an overall abnormality in the cooking appliance 1. The integrated control device MC also diagnoses whether or not there is an abnormality in the IH control units 90M1 and 90M2, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the microwave heating control unit 130.

If no abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to step SM3. Here, the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R are activated. The voice synthesizer 95 is also activated.

Then, the process automatically proceeds to step SM4, and the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R.

In the next step SM5, the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed for a fixed period of time (e.g., 5 or 10 seconds), and when that period has elapsed, it automatically switches to displaying the guidance screen 30SA.

The guidance screen 30SA remains displayed until at least one of the input key 43MC, which is the first cooking mode selection section, the input key 43M1, which is the second cooking mode selection section, and the input keys 43L1 and 43R1, which are the third cooking mode selection section, is operated (for a maximum of 30 minutes).

For safety reasons, if no operation is performed for 30 minutes after the first display of the guide screen 30A, the main power switch 97 will be automatically opened.

In step SM5, as described in embodiment 1, particularly in Figures 54 to 56, the guidance screen 30SA displays the display unit 510 and the first information 501 to the third information 503 in a list state, while the voice synthesis device (voice notification unit) 95 notifies the user of the contents of the guidance screen 30SA by voice from the time the guidance screen 30SA is displayed, prompting the user to perform an operation.

In the next step SM6, it is determined whether the input key 43MC has been operated. If the answer is "Yes", the guidance screen 30SA disappears from the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R (step SM9), and the first specific screen 30SP is displayed instead (step SM10).

If step SM6 is "No", the process proceeds to next step SM7.
In step 7, a determination is made as to whether the input key 43M1 has been operated. If the determination is "Yes", the guidance screen 30SA disappears from the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R (step SM11), and the second specific screen 30SC is displayed instead (step SM12).

If step SM7 is "No", the process proceeds to next step SM8.
In step 8, a determination is made as to whether either the input key 43L1 or 43R1 has been operated. If the determination is "Yes", the guidance screen 30SA disappears from the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R (step SM13), and the third specific screen 30SC is displayed instead (step SM12).

Summary of embodiment 5.
As is clear from the above description, in this fifth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the third disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is,
A main body 110 incorporating a heating chamber 113;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating an object N placed in a location other than the heating chamber 113;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 113;
A plurality of display means (an integrated display unit 30, individual display units 30L and 30R);
an integrated control device MC that controls the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the display means (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 30L, 30R);
An input operation unit 40 that inputs commands from a user to the integrated control device MC,
The integrated control device MC, in the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 30L and 30R,
(1) Displaying the initial standby screen 30Z,
(2) After that, first information 501 specifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC for selecting the first cooking mode, second information 502 specifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 for selecting the second cooking mode, and third information 503 specifying the third cooking mode selection units 443L1, 443R1 for selecting the third cooking mode are displayed in a list state,
(3) Furthermore, when the first cooking mode selection section 43MC is selected, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, when the second cooking mode selection section 43M1 is selected, the second specific screen 30SC is displayed, and when the third cooking mode selection section 43L1, 43R1 is selected, the third specific screen 30ST is displayed.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting one of the three cooking modes (first to third cooking modes), the first information 501, second information 502, and third information 503 are displayed in a list form on the guide screen 30SA, so that the user can easily recognize and select the desired various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43L1, etc.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

As is clear from the above description, in this fifth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N in at least two heating sections 17HL and 17HR arranged on the left and right sides of the upper surface of the main body 110;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A display means for displaying information (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 30L, 30R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes individual operation units 40L and 40R corresponding to the heating units 17HL and 17HR, and a shared operation unit 40M corresponding to both the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2,
The display means includes an integrated display unit 30 corresponding to the common operation unit 40M, and individual display units 31L and 31R corresponding to the individual operation units 40L and 40R,
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC, a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1, and third cooking mode selection units 43L1 and 43R1.
After the integrated control device MC and the main power switch 97 are closed (ON), the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R display a standby initial screen 30Z that displays information common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2, and subsequently display a guide screen 30SA in place of the standby initial screen 30Z.
The guidance screen 30SA displays or switches between information 1 for specifying the first cooking mode selection section 43MC, information 2 for specifying the second cooking mode selection section 43M1, and the third cooking mode selection sections 43L1 and 43R1 in a list state.
The configuration was characterized by the above.

For this reason, when selecting one of the three cooking modes (first to third cooking modes), the first information 501, second information 502 and third information 503 are displayed in a list or individually switchably displayed on the integrated display unit 30 and the left and right individual display units 31L, 31R, so that the user can easily recognize and select the desired various input keys 43MC, 43M1, 43L1, etc.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

This makes it possible to realize a highly convenient cooking device 1 with improved user operability even when the installation space for the input operation unit 40 is limited.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the fifth embodiment has
The first heating means HM1 has an induction heating source 9,
The control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM1 further include an IH control menu for independently driving the three heating sections 17HL, 17HR, and 17HM of the induction heating source 9,
The second cooking mode selection unit (input key) 43M1 can select the IH control menu using the central heating unit 17HM.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, the convenience is further improved compared to the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment.
That is, the single cooking mode KM1 using the central heating unit 17HM can also be selected by the second cooking mode selection unit (input key) 43M1, expanding the range of modes selectable by the input key 43M1. Moreover, since the input key 43M1 is not added, the area of the shared operation unit 40M is not enlarged, and the operability for the user is not impaired.

Furthermore, as described in FIG. 136, the input key 43M1 on the right side of the input keys 43M1 is provided with a display section 43H that displays in text a function for selecting the control menu (for the single cooking mode) of the central heating section 17HM, so that when the user selects the central IH (central heating section 17HM), the user can intuitively operate the input key 43M1 without hesitation.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the fifth embodiment has
The three heating sections 17HL, 17HR, and 17HM are disposed at a plurality of locations (the right central portion, the central portion, and the left central portion of the top plate 15) and are controlled independently of each other by the integrated control device MC.
The IH control menu executed by each of the heating units 17HL, 17HR, and 17HM defines heating control patterns (keep warm, fry, preheat, etc.) corresponding to a specific type of food to be cooked (e.g., "rice" for cooking rice or "fried food").

As a result, compared to the cooking device 1 of embodiment 1, the areas where induction heating can be performed are expanded, further improving convenience.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the fifth embodiment has
The control menu includes an IH control menu for solely using the central heating unit 17HM of the induction heating source 9,
When the input key 43M1 is operated, information showing the control menu of the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189 and information showing the IH control menu using the central heating unit 17HM are successively displayed one or more items at a time in the second specific screen 30SC.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, compared to the cooking device 1 of embodiment 1, the areas where induction heating can be performed are expanded, further improving user convenience.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 disclosed in the fifth embodiment,
The selection unit (input key 43M1) had a function of selecting only one of a plurality of pieces of identification information 330 displayed on the first specific screen 30SP, the identification information 330 corresponding to a plurality of cooked foods (e.g., “hamburger steak” and “fried chicken”) to which the collaborative cooking mode KM3 can be applied.

Therefore, by operating the input key 43M1, the user can select a cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM3 that corresponds to each individual food to be cooked, realizing a highly convenient heating cooker with improved operability.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 5, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) for heating the object N by a plurality of heating parts 17HL, 17HM, and 17HM, respectively;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in a heating chamber 113 located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A display means for displaying cooking information (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L, 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven in a specified order.
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 is
(1) A plurality of control menus belonging to a combined cooking mode KM2 in which the plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) of the second heating means HM2 are automatically combined and used in combination;
(2) a plurality of control menus belonging to a single cooking mode KM1 using one of the plurality of heat sources;
(3) an IH control menu using a specific heating section (central heating section 17HM) among the heating sections 17HL, 17HM, and 17HM;
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, in either of the two cooking modes (combined cooking mode KM2 and single cooking mode KM1), by operating the input key 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M, the user can check the control menus corresponding to two types of heating sources (the oven heating source 188 and the microwave heating source 189) and a specific heating section (central heating section 17HM) of one heating source (induction heating source 9) and select one of them, making it easy to select one of them.In addition, there is no need to increase the number of input keys as the number of heating sources increases, and each control menu can be displayed by the single input key 43M1.
This makes it possible to realize a highly convenient cooking appliance 1 with improved operability for the user, even when the installation space for the input operation unit 40 is limited.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, when the IH control menu of the induction heating source 9 is displayed, information (central IH) specifying the heating section (central heating section 17HM) to be operated is simultaneously displayed.
It was a composition.

As a result, when operating the input key 43M1 of the shared operation unit 40M, the control menu for the central heating unit 17HM can be easily identified and the input operation can be completed, which is expected to improve user operability.

Furthermore, in this fifth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the sixth disclosure is disclosed in the following form.
That is,
A body 110 having a top plate 15;
An induction heating source 9 that heats an object N to be heated above the top plate 15 from below the top plate 15;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An alarm unit AN (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R, and a voice alarm unit 95),
The inside of the body 110 is divided into an upper space 300A and a lower space 300B.
The upper space 300A includes the induction heating source 9, upper cooling fans 60 and 61 that introduce cooling outside air into the upper space 300A, and the notification unit (30, 31L, 31R, 95),
The lower space 300B includes the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and lower cooling fans 128 and 129 that introduce cooling outside air into the lower space 300B.
The lower cooling fans 128, 129 include a fourth cooling fan 129 that cools the heat dissipation portion 122H of the microwave heating source 189, and a third cooling fan 128 that guides hot air generated inside the heating chamber 113 to the outside.
The lower space 300B has a (first) exhaust duct 102 that exhausts the cooling air RF5 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121B that supplies high frequency power to the microwave heating source 189 to the outside via an external space 141 formed above the ceiling wall surface of the heating chamber 113,
The lower space 300B is further provided with a (second) exhaust duct 307 for guiding the cooling air RF6 that has passed through the heat radiating portion 122H of the microwave heating source 189 to the outside without passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113.
A temperature sensor TS10 is disposed on a ceiling of the heating chamber 113 or on the first exhaust duct 102 to measure the temperature of air discharged from the heating chamber 113 to the outside through the first exhaust duct 102;
During cooking using the oven heating source 188, the upper cooling fans 60 and 61 and the third cooling fan 128 are operated,
An integrated control device MC that controls the power supply to the oven heating source 188 in response to the temperature detected by the temperature sensor TS10 during cooking using the oven heating source 188,
The integrated control device MC has a function of executing an integrated cooking mode KM3 in which at least one of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 is driven in a specified order, and a composite cooking mode KM2 in which the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are automatically combined and used in combination,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC notifies the notification unit AN of information 501, 502 indicating the operation means (input keys 43MC, 43M1) for selecting either the linked cooking mode KM3 or the composite cooking mode KM2.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting the various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2), the user can easily recognize the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc. of the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

In addition, a temperature sensor TS10 that measures the ambient temperature in the heating chamber 113 and is used for temperature control during oven cooking is placed on the ceiling of the heating chamber 113 or on the (first) exhaust duct 102, and during cooking with the oven heat source 188, the upper cooling fans 60, 61 and the third cooling fan 128 are each operated, so that the temperature of the heating chamber 113 can be measured stably, and it is expected that the oven cooking will produce good results.

Further, regarding the sixth disclosure,
The upper space 300A accommodates the integrated control device MC and the IH coils 17L, 17M, and 17R of the induction heating source 9.
The upper cooling fans 60 and 61 are operated during a period in which at least one of the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, and the oven heating source 188 is driven.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, when operating in various cooking modes (linked cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, etc.), the inside of the upper space 300A is cooled by the upper cooling fans 60, 61, preventing overheating of the top plate 15, integrated control device MC, inverter circuit board 80, etc., and ensuring stable operation and a long life for each of these components.

Further, regarding the sixth disclosure,
The opening at the end of the (first) exhaust duct 102 communicates with the outside without passing through the inside of the upper space 300A,
The (first) exhaust duct 102 includes a horizontal portion communicating with the inside of the heating chamber 113, and a vertical portion continuing downstream of the horizontal portion, extending vertically, and extending up and down behind the upper space 300A (see FIG. 15 in the first embodiment).
The cooling air RF5 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 is discharged from the first exhaust duct 102.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, the vertical portion extends vertically and acts as a chimney, allowing hot air from the heating chamber 113 to be smoothly released to the outside, while being located behind the upper space 300A and isolated from the upper space 300A.

Further, regarding the sixth disclosure,
A microwave heating control unit 130 that controls the energization of the microwave heating source 189;
A heating chamber control unit 159 that controls the power supply to the oven heating source 188;
An IH control unit 90 that controls the current supply to the induction heating source,
The integrated control device MC centrally controls the microwave heating control unit 130, the heating chamber control unit 159, and the IH control unit 90.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, each of the linked cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM1 can be accurately controlled by a dedicated control unit, and can be operated in conjunction with each other.

Further, regarding the sixth disclosure,
A front side (third) cooling fan 128 that draws in outside air and generates the cooling air RF5 for the first inverter circuit board 121, and a rear side (fourth) cooling fan 129 that generates the cooling air RF6 for the heat dissipation portion of the microwave heating source 189 are disposed below the inverter circuit board 121B and below the heat dissipation portion 122H of the microwave heating source 189, respectively.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

As a result, it is possible to compactly arrange the (third) cooling fan 128 and the (fourth) cooling fan 129 in the lower space 300B, particularly in a built-in type cooking appliance 1 that is subject to significant constraints in terms of installation area and external dimensions. For example, if a cooling fan with a large diameter is used, it becomes difficult to secure a space in which to install it due to the diameter of the cooling fan, but with a configuration such as that of embodiment 5, it is possible to realize an appropriate arrangement in combination with each of the related components as described above.

Even in configurations other than those described above, the same effects can be expected for configurations that are the same as those in embodiment 1.

Embodiment 6.
Fig. 143 is a plan view of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device according to embodiment 6. Fig. 144 is a flow chart showing the operation steps from the determination of the object to be heated to the transition to the dedicated mode and the normal mode in the cooking device of Fig. 143. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in embodiments 1 to 5 are given the same reference numerals, and the explanations may be omitted.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 143 differs from the first and third embodiments in that the object to be heated N used in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is prepared exclusively for the cooking device 1.

The object to be heated N placed on the left heating section 17HL is, for example, a frying pan with a relatively large diameter, with a bottom diameter of about 280 mm to 300 mm. NH is a handle that is detachably attached to the rim of the object to be heated N (frying pan).

Reference numeral 511 denotes an IC tag built into the handle NH.
An antenna (not shown) for receiving a radio signal from the IC tag 511 is provided at a predetermined position on the lower surface of the top plate 15 .
A reader 512 for reading information received by the antenna (not shown) is accommodated inside the upper space 100A. The reader 512 is disposed below and at the rear of the input operation unit 40.

The information acquired by the reader (information reading unit) 512 is input to the integrated control device MC via the input operation unit 40. Note that when a specific object to be heated N is placed on the heating unit (17HL, etc.) of the top plate 15, there have already been many proposals to detect that the specific object to be heated N has been placed by wireless communication between an IC tag built into the object to be heated N and the control unit of the cooking appliance (representative examples are Japanese Patent No. 4089545 and Japanese Patent No. 4848741).

In FIG. 143, the handle NH is depicted as being positioned directly above the input key 43L1, but the handle NH may be positioned anywhere, and does not have to be used in the position shown in FIG. 143.

It has also been proposed to incorporate or detachably install a temperature sensor in the object to be heated N as described above, measure the temperature of the object to be heated N with the temperature sensor, transmit the measurement data to the reader (not shown) via the IC tag 511, and use the data for temperature control during cooking (for example, Japanese Patent No. 4089545). However, in this embodiment 6, such a temperature sensor is not used.

Next, we will explain Figure 144.
Fig. 144 shows the operation steps when the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed using the dedicated object to be heated N (hereinafter, referred to as the "dedicated pan"). The operation steps are defined in the operation program of the integrated control device MC.

The first step SN1 indicates the step immediately after the main power switch 97 is closed, and corresponds to step ST1 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 38) and step SM1 in the fifth embodiment (FIG. 142).
First, the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed on the integrated display section 30 and the individual display sections 31L and 31R.

In the next step SN2, the integrated control device MC starts the voice synthesizer 95. Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 automatically displays the guide screen 30SA (switching over the display of the standby initial screen 30Z).

The guidance screen 30SA will continue to be displayed until at least one of the input key 43MC, which is the first cooking mode selection section, the input key 43M1, which is the second cooking mode selection section, and the input keys 43L1 and 43R1, which are the third cooking mode selection section, is operated (for a maximum of 30 minutes from the time when the guidance screen 30SA was first displayed). If no operation is performed within 30 minutes, the main power switch 97 will automatically be opened for safety reasons.

In step SN2, as described in the first embodiment, particularly with reference to Figs. 54 to 56, the guide screen 30SA displays the display section 510 and the first information item 501 to the third information item 503 in a list form.
On the other hand, the voice synthesizer (voice notification unit) 95 notifies the contents of the guide screen 30SA by voice from the time the guide screen 30SA is displayed, and prompts the user to perform an input operation.

In the next step SN3, it is determined whether the input key 43MC has been operated. If the answer is "Yes", the guidance screen 30SA disappears from the integrated display unit 30 and the individual display units 31L and 31R (step SN4), and the first specific screen 30SP is displayed instead (step SN5).

If step SN3 is "No", the process proceeds to next step SN8.
In step SN8, it is determined whether the input key 43M1 has been operated. If the answer is "Yes", the guide screen 30SA disappears from the integrated display section 30 and the individual display sections 31L and 31R (step SN8), and the second specific screen 30SC is displayed instead (step SN9). In other words, the second cooking mode is switched to the linked cooking mode KM2. The following operation steps will not be described.

On the other hand, after step SN5 where the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, when the object to be heated N is placed on one of the heating units 17HL, 17HR, wireless communication is performed between the IC tag 511 and the reader (not shown), and the integrated control device MC identifies the specific object to be heated N from the data sent from the reader (step SN6). In other words, from the standpoint of the integrated control device MC, it is determined that the correct object to be heated N has been placed.

If step SN6 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SN7, which is the step where control transitions to the dedicated pot mode.

In this "dedicated pot mode," the characteristics are understood through prior operational testing, and the control conditions are determined on the premise that an appropriate heated object N is placed on the pot. For example, the maximum heat during induction heating is permitted to be up to 3,200 W, and the continuous heating time can be set to a long time.

On the other hand, if step SN6 is "No", the process proceeds to the next step SN10. This step SN10 is a step in which control is switched to normal mode for the general-purpose heated object N.

Here, "normal mode" has stricter control conditions than the "dedicated pot mode" on the assumption that various commercially available heated objects N are placed on it. For example, the maximum heat value during induction heating is permitted only up to 2500 W, and long continuous heating times are not permitted. Furthermore, in the cooking process in which microwave heating is performed in this normal mode, the microwave output (maximum) value is limited to 300 W or 200 W, which is a setting that enhances safety compared to 500 W in the dedicated pot mode.

Summary of embodiment 6.
As in the first embodiment, in the cooking device 1 of the sixth embodiment, the cooking device 1 has the following configuration as disclosed in the first disclosure.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that heats the object N by heating parts 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 having a plurality of heating sources (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in a heating chamber located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
An alarm means AN having a voice alarm unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and a display unit (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the first information 501 for identifying the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second information 502 for identifying the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 are notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and the integrated display unit 30.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, the single cooking mode KM1, etc.), the user can easily select the various input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc. of the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

In other configurations of embodiment 6, the same effects can be expected for the same configurations as embodiments 1 to 5.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of this sixth embodiment, the cooking device 1 of the following configuration was disclosed in relation to the fifth disclosure.
That is,
An induction heating source 9 that heats an object N to be heated by heating sections 17HL and 17HR;
A microwave heating source 189 that supplies microwaves to a heating chamber 113 located separately from the heating unit;
an oven heating source 188 for heating the internal atmosphere of the heating chamber 113 to a high temperature;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting driving conditions of the induction heating source 9 and the microwave heating source 189;
An alarm means AN having a voice alarm unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and a display unit (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and a second cooking mode selection unit 43M1.
The first cooking mode selection unit 43MC selects the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 selects the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied, the integrated control device MC notifies the first information 501 that identifies the first cooking mode selection unit 43MC and the second information 502 that identifies the second cooking mode selection unit 43M1 by a guide screen 30SA displayed on the display unit,
The integrated control device MC has a function of determining whether the object to be heated N is a dedicated object to be heated,
If the result of the determination is that the object is not a dedicated object, the upper limit value of the control condition during cooking is limited to a lower value than that in the case of a dedicated object.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Specifically, in embodiment 6, the object to be heated N is a dedicated object to be heated (frying pan) that can be used both inside the heating chamber 113 and in the space above the top plate 15, and information that it is a specific object to be heated N can be transmitted to the integrated control device MC via wireless communication means (IC tag 511 and reader 512), so that the integrated control device MC can automatically identify that a genuine object to be heated N is being used, and can apply the control conditions of a control program prepared in advance (for example, the heating power value and heating power level during induction heating, the microwave output value during microwave heating, the maximum heating temperature, the longest heating time, etc.).

As a result, the integrated control device MC can determine that the object to be heated N is legitimate, while minimizing the need for user operation, and cooking can be performed in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 using a cooking program and control conditions prepared in advance.

In addition, cooking that automatically identifies that a genuine (dedicated) heated object N is being used and applies the control conditions of a control program prepared in advance (e.g., heat value and heat level during induction heating, microwave output value during microwave heating, maximum heating temperature, maximum heating time, etc.) is not limited to the case of the linked cooking mode KM3 described in embodiment 6.
That is, the combined cooking mode KM2 or the single cooking mode KM1 may be used.

As described above, if a temperature sensor is built into or detachably installed in the object to be heated N, the temperature of the object to be heated N is measured by the temperature sensor, and the measurement data is provided to the integrated control device MC via the IC tag 511, it is expected that the accuracy and reliability of temperature control during cooking will be further improved.

Embodiment 7.
145 is a block diagram for explaining the overall control function of the cooking device according to embodiment 7. The same or corresponding parts as those in embodiments 1 to 6 are given the same reference numerals, and explanations thereof may be omitted.

In this seventh embodiment, like the fifth embodiment, the cooking device 1 has three heating parts, and one inverter circuit 81M is added corresponding to the central heating part 17HM.
Therefore, there are two IH control units 90, one of which is a (first) IH control unit 90M1 and the other is a (second) IH control unit 90M2.

In FIG. 145, the dashed arrows indicate control command signals.
The cooking device 1 according to the seventh embodiment has a total of seven control devices each mainly made of a microcomputer. This is a major difference from the first to sixth embodiments.

Of the seven control devices mentioned above, the one that is responsible for the overall control of the cooking appliance 1 is the integrated control device MC. In response to commands from this integrated control device MC, the (first) IH control unit 90M1 controls induction heating cooking other than the central heating unit 17HM. The (second) IH control unit 90M2 controls induction heating cooking of the central heating unit 17HM.

The control device 105 controls both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188. This control device 105 is a combination of the heating chamber control device 159 and the microwave heating control device 130 described in the first embodiment.

The IH control unit 90M1, IH control unit 90M2, and control device 105 described above perform prescribed control according to instructions from the integrated control device MC and return processing results to the integrated control device MC, and are therefore sometimes called slave microcomputers. In this case, the integrated control device MC is called a master microcomputer.

Of the seven control devices mentioned above, the remaining three will be described below.
The first is a right-side input control device 23 that processes input from the right-side touch keys arranged on the right operation unit 40R and display on the display unit 31R in the input operation unit 40. This right-side input control device 23 further processes input from the touch keys of the central operation unit 40M and display on the integrated display unit 30.

The second is a left input control device 24 arranged on the left operation unit 40L, which processes input from the left touch keys and display on the display unit 31L.
The third is a power switch control device 28 .

In FIG. 145, 106A is a plug connected to a commercial (AC) power source 99. Power of 200 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz is conducted to the filter circuit board 54 via the power cord 106. The filter circuit board 54 is built into the upper unit 100.

A (first) inverter circuit 81R associated with the right IH coil 17R is driven by a drive circuit 37R.
A (second) inverter circuit 81L associated with the left IH coil 17L is driven by a drive circuit 37L.
A (third) inverter circuit 81M associated with the central IH coil 17M is driven by a drive circuit 37M.
The three inverter circuits 81R, 81L, and 81M basically have the same configuration.

37M is a drive circuit for the inverter circuit 81M. 77am is an input current detection unit, and 77bm is an output current detection unit. The outputs of the input current detection unit 77am and the output current detection unit 77bm are input to the IH control unit 90M2.

The filter circuit board 54 has a main relay 107 that turns the main power supply of the cooking device 1 on and off, and a sub-relay (not shown). Figure 145 shows only the main relay.

The main relay 107 performs opening and closing operations upon receiving a predetermined relay control signal from the integrated control device MC, which is responsible for the overall control of the cooking appliance 1. The sub-relay performs opening and closing operations upon receiving a relay control signal from the power switch control device 28, as described below. The power switch control device 28 has the function of detecting the operation of the operation button 98 of the main power switch 97 and determining whether the power is turned ON or OFF. The main relay 107 and the sub-relay make up the main power switch 97.

The integrated control device MC constantly acquires operational information from the IH control unit 90, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24, and the power switch control device 28, and integrates this information to determine and control the processing.

The integrated control device MC controls the central operation unit 40M, the display operation of the integrated display unit 30, the voice synthesis device 95, and the wireless communication unit 49. This integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the power switch control device 28 are attached to a central operation board 32 (not shown) that constitutes the input operation unit 40.

The central operation board 32 is composed of a right operation board 32R and a left operation board 32L (see FIG. 145).
The right operation board 32R and the left operation board 32L are disposed below the input operation unit 40.

The right operation board 32R has mounted thereon an integrated control device MC, a right input control device 23, and a right display unit 31R.
The two operation boards 32L, 32L are formed from a plastic material that is highly electrically insulating.
The left input control device 24 and the left display unit 31L are mounted on the left operation board 32L.

A pair of left and right touch key boards (operation boards) 41L, 41R (not shown) equipped with various touch-type input keys are installed above the central operation board 32.

55 is a power supply circuit board to which commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit 54, and as shown in FIG. 145, it is equipped with a power supply circuit A34 to which power is applied via a rectifier circuit 33, and a power supply circuit B36 to which power is applied via a rectifier circuit 35. By these two power supply circuits A34 and B36, the 200V power is converted into a low voltage direct current, such as 24V, 18V, 6V, 5V, etc.

The 5V power is supplied as power to the integrated control device MC, the IH control unit 90M1, the second IH control unit 90M2, the control device 105, the right input control device 23, the left input control device 24 and the power switch control device 28.
The 6V power is used as a power source (including a backlight power source) for the integrated display unit 30, the right display unit 31R, and the left display unit 31R.

The power supply circuit board 55 is installed in the upper unit 100, and as described above, the power generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 is used as a power source for the control and various display sections within the upper unit 100.

An inverter circuit board 80 (not shown) is arranged inside the upper unit 100, and the inverter circuit board 80 (not shown) includes a right-side inverter circuit 81R equipped with a DC power supply unit 75R, and a left-side inverter circuit 81L equipped with another DC power supply unit 75L.

AC power of 200V is applied from the filter circuit 54 to the inverter circuit board 80 (not shown).

The (first) IH control unit 90M1 transmits a drive signal to the drive circuits 37L, 37R that drive the IGBTs 79a, 79b in the inverter circuits 81L, 81R. The two drive circuits 37L, 37R operate on 18V power supplied from the power supply circuit A34 and power supply circuit B36, and control the IGBTs 79a, 79. This controls the drive frequency of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R.

For example, the drive circuit A37R detects the conduction time of the power switching element 83 (semiconductor switching element) (IGBT79a, 79b) and switches the conduction time to lower the drive frequency of the inverter circuit 81R to reduce the heating power, or conversely, to increase the drive frequency to increase the heating power. These drive frequency commands are issued from the IH control unit 90M1.

Reference numeral 77a denotes an input current detection unit provided on the commercial power supply side of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R, and reference numeral 77b denotes an output current detection unit that detects the power on the output side of the inverter circuits 81L, 81R.
The detection values of the input current detector 77a and the output current detector 77b are input to the IH control unit 90M1.

In the initial stage of induction heating cooking, the IH control units 90M1 and 90M2 determine the material of the object to be heated.
For example, when the driving frequency is changed from one to another, the change in the input current value is observed, and the material of the heated object such as a pan is judged to be magnetic metal, non-magnetic stainless steel, aluminum, etc., and the driving frequency of the switching elements (IGBTs) 79a, 79b is automatically adjusted to an appropriate value. If the material of the heated object is judged to be non-magnetic stainless steel, it is driven at a driving frequency (e.g., 31 kHz) higher than the driving frequency (e.g., 23 kHz) when it is judged to be iron.

TS5 and TS6 are non-contact temperature sensors installed in the gaps of IH coils 17L and 17R, and TS3 and TS4 are contact temperature sensors installed in the center of IH coils 17L and 17R. Additionally, TS8 and TS9 are contact temperature sensors installed on the heat sink 82 of the inverter circuit board 80. The temperature detection data of each of these temperature sensors is input to the integrated control device MC.

TS11 is a thermistor that functions as a contact-type temperature sensor, and is disposed in the cavity at the center of the central IH coil 17M. Like the temperature sensor TS4 in embodiment 1, this temperature sensor TS11 is in direct contact with the underside of the top plate 15, or in contact with the underside of the top plate 15 via a thermally conductive intermediate material.

In the first embodiment, a temperature detection circuit 93 was provided, but in this seventh embodiment, such a hardware-type temperature detection circuit 93 is not provided. Temperature detection, temperature comparison, abnormality detection, etc. are performed by software (temperature detection processing unit) in the integrated control device MC.

131 is a door opening/closing detection mechanism. This door opening/closing detection mechanism 131 includes a switch that opens and closes in response to the opening and closing of the door 114, and a monitor switch that detects whether the switch is opening and closing correctly. This is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

120P is the power supply circuit section of the microwave heating device 120, which generates AC power as a low voltage (e.g., 24 V and 5 V) power source from the commercial voltage (200 V) power supplied from the filter circuit board 54.

The 5V power is supplied as a power source for the control device 105, and the 24V power is supplied to the drive circuits 177 of the third cooling fan 128 and the fourth cooling fan 129. Although not shown in FIG. 145, 200V power is supplied to the drive power source for the antenna drive motor 126.

The upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B, which heat the heating chamber 113, have their energization controlled by the controller 105 opening and closing relays 178A and 178B. The relays 178A and 178B may be semiconductor switching elements that allow for fine control of the energization rate, but in this embodiment 7, relays are used because only ON-OFF control is required. The upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B are operated by applying a voltage of 200V, the same as the commercial power supply.

132M is a door open detection switch that constitutes part of the door open/close detection mechanism 131. This switch itself is installed inside the door open/close detection mechanism 131, but in this Figure 145, it is drawn in a different position to indicate that the open/close signal is input to the control device 105.

160 is an infrared sensor (third temperature sensor) that measures the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113, and TS1 is a contact sensor that measures the temperature of the magnetron 122 of the microwave heating device 120. TS10 is a temperature sensor (thermistor type) installed in the exhaust duct 102 or the ceiling of the heating chamber 113. All temperature detection data from these sensors 160, TS1, and TS10 is input to the control device 105.

121A is an inverter circuit that supplies high-frequency power to the magnetron 122, and its oscillation is controlled by a relay 182 inserted in the power supply side circuit. The relay 182 is opened and closed by the control device 105.

60P and 61P are drive circuits that drive the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61, respectively. These drive circuits 60P and 61P operate in response to commands from the (first) IH control unit 90M1.

This Figure 145 does not show a temperature sensor that monitors the temperature of the integrated display unit 30 or the input operation unit 40, but in reality, such a temperature sensor is installed and the integrated control device MC constantly acquires temperature measurement data (at regular intervals) during cooking to monitor the temperature so that it does not become abnormal.

Since the cooking device 1 of this seventh embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed and held for, for example, several seconds to turn on the main power switch 97. This operation is detected by the power switch control device 28, which then closes the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54.

For this reason, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. Then, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55, and applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before the heating operation starts to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred. It also starts the integrated display unit 30 and displays the initial information.

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 to use the microwave heating device 120, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105. The control device 105 then sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC presumes that the user will be performing microwave cooking, displays the necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts the user to enter input to start heating.

When the user places the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 again sends a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. Therefore, when a command to start heating is given from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right-side input control device 23 detects whether or not the input key for microwave heating has been touched. Therefore, a signal indicating a command to start heating is sent from the right-side input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

Even in this seventh embodiment, in the combined cooking mode KM2, there are three patterns: a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heating is performed by the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B; a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order; and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously.

In addition, it is also possible to carry out separate heating menus for microwave heating and oven heating using upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B.
Furthermore, as described later, the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can also execute cooking menus prepared for multiple foods.

Generally, food to be cooked is placed in a heat-resistant plastic container or dish and then microwaved. If the upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B is then turned on in this state, there is a risk that the container, dish, etc. mentioned above will burn due to the high heat.

In the composite cooking menu, a warning message is displayed on the integrated display unit 30, warning users not to place plastic containers inside the heating chamber 113 and heat them. In other words, when executing the control menu "Grill Range", this warning message is a type of "Standby Common Information" 30N described in the first embodiment.

In the "Warm" (automatic range) control menu, the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if heat from a previous cooking session remains and the temperature is high from the start, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

Therefore, in this embodiment 7, the user is notified to select the "manual range" control menu (single heating cooking). Since "manual range" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, cooking can be performed without any problems even if the temperature of the food in the heating chamber 113 or the temperature of the wall of the heating chamber 113 is high. Such display text displayed on the integrated display unit 30 is also a type of "common information during standby" 30N described in embodiment 1.

When a user issues a command to start heating via the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC sends a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A to start microwave heating. At the same time, it sends an operation command signal to the drive circuits 177A and 177B of the third and fourth cooling fans 128 and 129, starting the operation of these two cooling fans 128 and 129. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 145, it drives the antenna drive motor 126 to rotate the antenna 125. This introduces microwaves into the heating chamber 113, and the food is cooked.

As is clear from the above explanation, during the period when microwave cooking is being performed, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 are not operated at all unless it is "non-normal". Therefore, the power consumption of the entire cooking device 1 can be kept low.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 of this seventh embodiment includes, in the upper unit 100, IH control units 90M1 and 90M2 that control the induction heating source 9, a control device 105 that controls both the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, and an integrated control device MC (master microcomputer) MC that integrally controls these two control devices (slave microcomputers) 90 and 105.
The upper unit 100 includes a filter circuit board 54 that receives power from a commercial power source 99, and a power supply circuit (34, 36) that converts the power from the filter circuit board 54 into a specified power supply voltage.
The control device 105, the control device 90, and the integrated control device MC are supplied with low voltage power generated by the power supply circuits 34 and 36 as a power source.
The inverter circuit 81 of the induction heating source 17, the microwave generating source 122 of the microwave heating device 120, and the upper heater 163A and lower heater 163B of the oven heating device 140 are configured to receive power (200 V power supply) distributed between the filter circuit 54 and the power supply circuits 34 and 36.

This configuration simplifies the overall power supply configuration of the cooking device 1 and is expected to suppress the propagation of unnecessary noise, ensuring reliable operation.

In addition, with this configuration, three types of heating can be performed in one cooking device 1: induction heating, microwave heating, and oven heating, making it a highly convenient cooking device that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Next, input operations and displays will be described, focusing on the touch-input guide screen 30SA, which is a feature of the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 146 is a simplified plan view showing an enlarged input operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the input operation steps and display steps of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram 4 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 152 is a block diagram showing a part of the input operation unit and the integrated control device of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram 5 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram 6 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 145. Fig. 155 is an explanatory diagram 7 showing the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking appliance shown in Fig. 145. Fig. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the display operation of the integrated display unit of the cooking appliance shown in Fig. 145. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of the first to sixth embodiments explained in Figs. 1 to 144 are given the same reference numerals.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 146 has "RG continuous cooking" set in the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 described in embodiment 1 (particularly the range grill heating in FIG. 37).

The "RG continuous cooking" is a method of cooking food by combining microwave heating and oven heating. There are two types:
(1) A pattern in which microwave heating is first performed for a fixed period of time, and after that period of time has elapsed, heating is automatically performed by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B.
(2) A pattern in which microwave heating is performed until the temperature reaches 80°C or a temperature set by the user (however, any one temperature between 80°C and 100°C can be set), and then the system automatically switches to oven heating that is scheduled for use, and heating is performed for the time set by upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B, or for the period until the temperature reaches the temperature set by the user.

As described above, "RG continuous cooking" allows cooking to proceed without the user having to give another command to start cooking midway, and reduces the burden on the user as the user does not have to be near the cooking device 1 all the time. As it uses two heating sources, it is also a type of "RG combined cooking mode."

In the RG continuous cooking control menu, the user cannot select the heat value (watts) during microwave heating, but can select the heating intensity by selecting one of "low" or "high", etc.

Such “RG continuous cooking” can be selected by the central operation section 40M1 of the input operation section 40.
In addition, in this "RG continuous cooking", the central operation unit 40M is provided with an order selection key (not shown) so that the user can select whether to perform microwave heating or oven heating first.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the seventh embodiment as well, the central operation unit 40M is provided with an input key 43KP (see FIG. 146). Therefore, when the input key 43KP is pressed, the integrated control device MC switches to the "function mode."

Next, the central operation unit 40M and the integrated display unit 30, which are one of the features of the seventh embodiment, will be described.
As shown in Fig. 146, the display screen portion of the integrated display unit 30 has a fourth area 340 in addition to the first area 30L to the third area 30R. The first area 30L, the second area 30M, and the third area 30R are the same as those described in the first embodiment, and are display areas whose actual display area is variable. However, the area of the fourth area 340 is fixed, and it is formed long and narrow so as to lie adjacent to the rear of the first area 30L to the third area 30R.

The surface of the integrated display unit 30 is covered with a glass plate, and almost the entire surface, except for the periphery, is a capacitive touch panel that senses the touch of the user's finger. Therefore, this touch panel portion is hereinafter referred to as the "operation panel" 342. Note that if the integrated display unit 30 is placed below the top plate 15, the glass plate (operation panel 342) can also be used as the top plate 15.

The entire operation panel 342 is divided into a "touch-restricted portion" corresponding to the fourth area 340, and portions (touch-recommended portions) that function as the first area 30L to the third area 30R.
Reference numeral 341 denotes an electrode formed on the back side of the touch restriction portion by vapor deposition, printing, etc. When the operation panel 342 is configured as a part of the top plate 15, the electrode 341 is formed on the back side of the top plate 15 by means of vapor deposition, printing, etc.

The electrode 341 transmits a contact detection signal to a contact detection unit (not shown), and detects from a change in capacitance that the user has touched the upper part of the electrode 341 (the upper surface of the top plate 15) while the input operation unit 40 is activated by the integrated control device MC.

Even if a heated object N (not shown) such as a metal pan is placed so that it protrudes up to the position of the integrated display unit 30 (abnormal state), the electrode 341 can detect excessive proximity of the heated object N. Therefore, the integrated control device MC can detect abnormal placement, such as when the heated object N approaches abnormally close to the integrated display unit 30 or covers it, and issue an alarm. In particular, when cooking with cooking oil such as tempura, the tempura pan (heated object) becomes hot, so if it is carelessly placed covering the top of the integrated display unit 30, the integrated display unit 30 will overheat and may cause a malfunction. However, in this embodiment 7, such a situation can be detected by the electrode 341 and an alarm can be issued to the user.

The electrodes 341 and the contact detection unit (not shown) also function as a safety device to prevent the user from touching the "touch restriction portion." In other words, the user's contact with the top plate 15, which becomes hot during induction heating, can be minimized.

68T, like displays 68L and 68R, is a display that indicates when induction cooking is being performed using central heating unit 17HM. When central heating unit 17HM is in use, it emits red light. For this reason, a light-emitting element (not shown) such as an LED that emits red light is placed below top plate 15.

As is clear from FIG. 146, the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3 provided on the central operation unit 40M in the first embodiment are unnecessary in this seventh embodiment, and are therefore deleted.
Instead, it is provided with a touch panel input device 350, which will be described in FIG. 152 and subsequent figures, and a touch gesture determination device 353 that receives operation information on the touch panel.

43MS is an input key that commands the start of the cooking process and is a push-button type mechanical switch (not shown) that is pressed when pressed. Similarly, 43MT is an input key that commands the end of the cooking process and is a push-button type mechanical switch (not shown) that is pressed when pressed.

Next, we will explain Figure 147.
The display screen 1 that is automatically displayed immediately after the main power switch 97 is turned on is the standby initial screen 30Z.
Display screen 1A shows an example of a touch input screen that utilizes guide screen 30SA.

In FIG. 147, 510 is a display section for selecting one of three modes on the guidance screen 30SA, the coordinated cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2, and the single cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9, as described in the first embodiment, particularly in FIG. 54 to FIG. 56. As shown in FIG. 147, "Coordinated cooking", "Composite cooking", and "IH cooking" are displayed in text.

Reference numeral 513 denotes a touch key (sensing unit) displayed in the first area 30L.
Reference numeral 514 denotes a touch key (sensing part) displayed in the second area 30M.
Reference numeral 515 denotes a touch key (sensing part) displayed in the third area 30R.

When the touch key 513 is touched, the integrated control device MC determines that the linked cooking mode KM3 has been selected. Similarly, when the touch key 514 is touched, the integrated control device MC determines that the combined cooking mode KM2 has been selected.

Furthermore, when the touch key 515 is touched, the integrated control device MC determines that the induction heating source 9 has been selected.
When the user touches the touch key 514, the display is switched from the guide screen 30SA of FIG. 147 to the second specific screen 30SC.

When the user touches the touch key 513, the display switches from the guide screen 30SA in FIG. 147 to the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG. 150. When the user touches the touch key 515, the display switches to the second guide screen 30SA1 as shown in FIG. 147. The "second guide screen" 30SA1 here is a screen for selecting one of the three heating sections 17HL, 17HM, and 17HR of the induction heating source 9.

In Fig. 147, 517L is a touch key (sensing part) displayed corresponding to the display part 516L of the left heating part 17HL. 517M is a touch key (sensing part) displayed corresponding to the display part 516M of the central heating part 17HM.
Reference numeral 517L denotes a touch key (sensing unit) displayed in correspondence with the display unit 516R of the right heating unit 17HR.

By touching any one of the three touch keys (sensing units) 517L, 517M, and 517R, induction heating cooking can be performed in the desired heating unit 17HL, 17HM, or 17HR. Figure 147 shows an example of the third specific screen 30ST that is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 when the touch key 147L is touched.

Next, we will explain Figure 148.
The operation steps MT1 to MT19 shown in Fig. 148 indicate input operations, display operations, voice guidance, etc., subsequent to the standby initial screen 30Z. These operation steps are defined in the control programs of the integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23, and the left input control device 24, but may be defined in the control program of the integrated control device MC alone.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the main power switch 97 is turned ON, the standby initial screen 30Z is displayed first, and the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 notifies the user by voice of the gist of the display information on the standby initial screen 30Z (step MT1).

A few seconds after step MT1, guide screen 30SA is automatically displayed on integrated display unit 30. In addition, in conjunction with the display of guide screen 30SA, voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 guides the user to select one of three touch keys 513, 514, 515 to select the cooking mode he or she desires (step MT2). Note that guide screen 30SA here refers to a screen that displays, in list form, three touch keys 513, 514, 515 and the display units 510 corresponding to each touch key, as described in FIG. 147.

In step MT2, when the touch key 513 is touched (step MT3), the first specific screen 30SP is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the display of the guidance screen 30SA disappears at the same time) (MT4). The contents of this step are also notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesis device) 95.

Then, the user checks the information displayed on the first specific screen 30SP (including the cooking menu, which includes one piece of identification information 330), changes the control conditions and cooking menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 43MS (which is a mechanical switch), which transitions to the cooking process of the linked cooking mode KM3 (MT5).

On the other hand, in step MT2, if the touch key 514 displayed on the guidance screen 30SA is touched (step MT6), the second specific screen 30SC is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the display of the guidance screen 30SA disappears at the same time) (MT7). The content of this step is also notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesis device) 95.

Then, the user checks the information displayed on the second specific screen 30SC (including specific text 30J, which is the name of one of the control menus of the composite cooking mode KM2), changes the control conditions and control menus as appropriate, and presses the input key 43MS (which is a mechanical switch) to move to the cooking process of the composite cooking mode KM2 (MT8).

In addition, in step MT2, when the touch key 515 displayed on the guidance screen 30SA is touched (step MT9), the second guidance screen 30SA1 (see FIG. 147) is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 (the display of the guidance screen 30SA disappears at the same time) (MT10). The contents of this step are also notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesis device) 95.

Then, the user checks the three touch keys 517L, 517M, 517R displayed on the second guide screen 30SA1 and the display areas 516L, 516M, 516R corresponding to each touch key, and if the left heating unit 17HL is to be used, touches the touch key 517L (MT11).

Then, the process proceeds to step MT12, where the left display unit (individual display unit) 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL is activated, and a control menu (of the induction heating source 9) that can be executed by the left heating unit 17HL (e.g., "Boil water", "Keep warm", etc.) is displayed. At the same time, information on the default control conditions (heat power, target temperature, etc.) is also displayed. Furthermore, the contents of this step MT12 are also announced by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95.

In this step MT12, the third specific screen 30ST as shown in FIG. 147 is not displayed, but it may be displayed.

The user then checks the information (including the control menu) displayed on the individual display unit 31L, changes the control conditions and/or control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 43L1 (which is a mechanical switch), which transitions to the induction heating cooking process in the left heating unit 17HL (MT13).

Similarly, when touch key 517R is touched (MT17) among the three touch keys 517L, 517M, 517R displayed on the second guidance screen 30SA1, the process proceeds to step MT18, where the right display unit (individual display unit) 31R dedicated to the right heating unit 17HR is activated, and a control menu (of the induction heating source 9) that can be executed by the right heating unit 17HR (e.g., "Boil water", "Keep warm", etc.) is displayed.

At the same time, information about the default control conditions (heat, target temperature, etc.) is also displayed on the right display unit 31R. Furthermore, the contents of this step MT18 are also notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesis device) 95. Note that in this step MT18, the third specific screen 30ST as shown in FIG. 147 is not displayed, but may be displayed.

The user then checks the information (including the control menu) displayed on the individual display unit 31R, changes the control conditions and/or the control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 43R1 (which is a mechanical switch), which transitions to the induction heating cooking process in the right heating unit 17HR (MT19).

Furthermore, among the three touch keys 517L, 517M, and 517R displayed on the second guidance screen 30SA1, if the central heating unit 17HM is to be used, touch the touch key 517M (MT14).

Then, the process proceeds to step MT15, and the control menu (for the induction heating source 9) that can be executed by the central heating unit 17HM (e.g., "Keep Warm") is displayed on the integrated display unit 30 used by the central heating unit 17HM (see FIG. 147). In other words, the third specific screen 30ST shown in FIG. 147 is displayed.

In addition, for example, explanatory text 30F may be displayed indicating that the "keep warm" temperature is approximately 80°C and that this control menu is suitable for soup. Furthermore, the content of this step MT15 is also notified by the voice notification unit (voice synthesis device) 95.

The user then checks the information (including the control menu and control conditions) displayed on the third specific screen 30ST displayed on the integrated display unit 30, changes the control conditions and/or control menu as appropriate, and presses the input key 43MS (which is a mechanical switch), which transitions to the induction heating cooking process in the central heating unit 17HM (MT16).

Next, FIG. 149 shows an example in which the display information of the second specific screen 30SC shown in FIG. 147 has been changed. The user can easily change the control menu and control conditions by directly touching the first area 30L to the third area 30R.

Figure 149 shows the situation immediately before starting cooking using the "RG manual" control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2. The light-emitting element 27M corresponding to the start selection unit (input key 43MS) is flashing to show a star-shaped figure, prompting the user to operate.

Further, FIG. 149 will be described.
In the integrated display section 30, the second specific screen 30SC displayed during the combined cooking mode KM2 is larger in size than the integrated display section 30 of the first embodiment.
In addition, in the collaborative cooking mode KM3, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed (see FIG. 151).

Generally, the standard lineup of TFT LCD modules used in this type of display unit offers sizes such as 3.5 inches, 3.97 inches, 4.3 inches, 4.6 inches, and 5.0 inches. If the one in embodiment 1 is, for example, 3.5 inches or 3.97 inches in size, in this embodiment 7, a screen size one or two sizes larger can be used. However, as shown in FIG. 150, the temperature of the top plate 15 tends to increase the closer it is to the left heating unit 17HL, right heating unit 17HR, and center heating unit 17HM. Therefore, the integrated display unit 30 is positioned further forward on the FR side than in embodiment 1 so as not to approach the high temperature display unit 69 (not shown).

The high temperature display unit 69 (not shown) displays the heating source or part that is at a high temperature by emitting LED light. There are two heating sources or parts: the top plate 15 and the heating chamber 113.

In the seventh embodiment, the various input keys 43M1 to 43M3 described in the first embodiment can be omitted, thereby making it possible to provide an integrated display unit 30 with a large display area. Therefore, as shown in Figs. 149 and 150, more information such as heat (heating intensity), target preheating temperature, heating time, etc., which are one of the control conditions, can be displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R.

FIG. 149 shows the state in which the second specific screen 30SC is displayed.
In Fig. 149, 30Y is a display section for "control conditions" such as a target temperature, heating time, etc. 30Y1 and 30Y2 are candidate display sections for displaying the next candidates for the "control conditions" such as a target temperature, heating time, etc.

As shown in Fig. 149, the display section 30Y displays heating time information 30T as one of the control conditions. Two selectable candidate heating time information 30T1 and 30T2 are simultaneously displayed in the candidate display sections 30Y1 and 30Y2, respectively (not shown in Fig. 149).
149 and 150, reference numeral 361 denotes a menu display section for displaying the name and type of the menu. This is located in the fourth area 340.

Next, we will explain Figure 150.
FIG. 150 shows the case where the combined cooking mode KM2 is performed.
In Fig. 150, the menu display section 361 is used. If the cooperative cooking menu is not implemented, the display will automatically show "Menu" as shown in Fig. 150.

As shown in FIG. 150, when the target temperature information 30T displayed in the second area 30M is "180°C", the candidate display section 30Y2 displays the target temperature information 30T1 of "185°C". In addition, the candidate display section 30Y1 displays the target temperature information 30T2 of "175°C".

In addition, in the third area 30R, if the heating time information displayed is "10 minutes," the candidate display section 30Y will display heating time information 30GY1 (when grilling) of "10 minutes 30 seconds" and heating time information 30GY2 of "9 minutes 30 seconds."

As shown in FIG. 150, the user can change one of the displayed control menus (e.g., "Oven") of the composite cooking mode KM2 to the next candidate control menu (e.g., "Grill" or "Warm") by moving the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK while touching the first area 30L to the third area 30R with the fingertip FG.

Next, we will explain Figure 151.
151 shows a state in which the first specific screen 30SP is displayed. In order to display this first specific screen 30SP, it is necessary to touch the touch key (sensing unit) 513.

363 is display information of the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 displayed in text on the menu display section 361. If the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is not implemented, the display information 361 automatically becomes "Menu" as shown in FIG. 150.

In Figures 150 to 154, 27M7 is a light-emitting element that constitutes part of light-emitting display element 27M. In embodiment 1, light-emitting element 27M6 corresponding to the start selection element (input key 43MS) was also used by the heating stop input key 43MT, but in embodiment 7, light-emitting element 27M7 is provided exclusively for the heating stop input key 43MT.

Before heating starts, the light-emitting unit 27M7 lights up continuously, and after the heating operation starts, the light-emitting unit 27M7 may change to a flashing light. Note that the light-emitting unit 27M7 does not light up before the heating operation starts, because no input is required from the input key 43MT. Once the heating operation starts, the light-emitting unit 27M7 lights up in a continuous or flashing form, as described above, so that the user can easily confirm the light visually.

Figure 151 shows the state in which the first specific screen 30SP is displayed. To display this first specific screen 30SP, it is necessary to touch the touch key (sensing unit) 513.

In FIG. 151, 360 is an icon displayed across the second area 30M and the third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30. The "icon" here refers to a figure displayed on the display screen, and touching that part issues a command signal to the integrated control device MC to display support information. In other words, it is the same as the touch keys (sensing units) 513 to 515 provided as an input function.

As shown in FIG. 151, when the user touches the icon 360 with the tip of a finger, the cooking method and precautions according to the cooking process and the food being cooked in the collaborative cooking mode KM3 at the time of the touch are displayed in the second area 30M and third area 30R of the integrated display unit 30 (first specific screen 30SP) as text and figures. The cooking method and precautions may be notified by voice using the voice synthesis device 95. The cooking method and precautions may also be displayed in a framed area as additional information 30Q.

In FIG. 151, the user can change the identification information 330, such as "hamburger steak" that identifies one cooking menu, to another identification information by touching the first area 30L of the first specific screen 30SP with the fingertip FG and moving it forward FR or backward BK. In other words, the user can select a cooking menu while keeping the fingertip touching the first specific screen 30SP.

In FIG. 151, 363 is display information for the coordinated cooking menu, which indicates that the cooking menu of the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is being displayed, as described above. If the coordinated cooking menu is not being implemented, the display changes to that shown in FIGS. 149 and 150.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, we will explain the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353.

The first area 30L to the third area 30R constituting the operation panel 351 are touch gesture input means that accept touch gesture operations performed by the user. Furthermore, a touch gesture operation is an information input operation using a specific movement of the user's fingertip FG or the like.

Touch gesture operations can include tapping, which is an operation of lightly tapping the surface of the operation panel 351 with a fingertip, flicking, which is an operation of flicking the surface of the operation panel 351 with a finger, and swiping, which is an operation of tracing the surface of the operation panel 351 with a finger (sliding a finger). However, in this embodiment 7, only two touch gesture operations are determined to be valid: a touch gesture operation in which the user's fingertip FG is moved forward and backward, and a touch gesture operation in which the user's fingertip FG is moved left and right. This will be described in more detail later.

Touch gesture operations include dragging the fingertip FG, pinching in by pinching multiple fingertips together on the surface of the operation panel 351 and narrowing the distance between the fingertips, and pinching out by widening the distance between multiple fingers on the surface of the operation panel 351. These are also identified by the operation determination unit 354 as invalid touch gesture operations.

The operation panel 351 accepts a specific touch gesture operation performed by the user and outputs input operation information (hereinafter referred to as "touch information") IP1 corresponding to the touch gesture operation.

A display screen A (not shown) is disposed directly below the operation panel unit 351. The display screen A is disposed so as to overlap the operation panel unit 351.
Furthermore, the display screen A (not shown) displays an operation image showing various information (including control conditions such as temperature, heat, etc.) regarding each of the two menus: the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3.

In this way, display screen A (not shown) is configured, for example, with a liquid crystal display. Display screen A here has the functions of a first specific screen 30SP, a second specific screen 30SC, and a third specific screen 30ST.

As shown in FIG. 152, the touch gesture determination device 353 has an operation determination unit 354 and a notification unit 359.

The operation information input unit 352 receives touch information IP1 output from the operation panel unit 351. The operation information input unit 352 outputs input information IP2 corresponding to the received touch information IP1 to the operation determination unit 354. The input information IP2 is information corresponding to the touch information IP1, and may be the same information as the touch information IP1.

The operation determination unit 354 receives touch information IP1 from the operation information input unit 352, and outputs a selection value signal IP3 as output information to the notification unit 359. The selection value signal IP3 is a selection value signal determined by the operation determination unit 354 based on the touch information IP1. In this seventh embodiment, the selection value signal is information that determines the control menu and the linked cooking menu.

The operation determination unit 354 determines the type and content of the touch gesture operation by the user from the received touch information IP1.
Operation determination unit 354 has a gesture mode discrimination unit 355 , a gesture input information determination unit 356 , and a gesture area determination unit 356 .

The reference parameter storage unit 358 stores at least slider mode parameters of the user's gestures. One example of the parameters is a parameter that is determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, and the touch time.

The gesture mode discrimination unit 355 identifies the gesture mode of the input information IP2 by referring to various parameters in the reference parameter storage unit 358. The gesture input information determination unit 356 determines the selection value signal IP3 according to the value setting method in the gesture mode identified by the gesture mode discrimination unit 355.

The gesture area determination unit 356 identifies in which area of the first area 30L to the third area 30R the user performed a touch gesture operation.

The notification unit 359 receives a selection value signal IP3 from the operation determination unit 354 for each of the first area 30L to the third area 30R. Therefore, the notification unit 359 switches the display information for each of the first area 30L to the third area 30R, and also outputs to the voice synthesizer 95 to notify the user of such switching.

The display unit drive circuit 63 receives a selection value signal IP4 from the touch gesture determination device 353. This selection value signal IP4 has the same content as the selection value signal IP3.

The display unit drive circuit 63 switches the display content of the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 according to the judgment result of the touch gesture judgment device 353. That is, the display unit drive circuit 63 outputs an image signal IP5 of an operation image to be displayed on the display screen 30D to the display screen 30D as shown in FIG. 151.

In FIG. 152, the touch panel input device 350 and the touch gesture determination device 353 are illustrated in the form of a hardware (H/W) configuration. However, the touch gesture determination device 353 shown in FIG. 152 may be realized by, for example, the right input control device 23 shown in FIG. 145 (see FIG. 145).

A storage unit for storing the touch gesture determination program is provided in the software storage device of the right-side input control device 23, and the touch gesture determination program stored in the storage unit is executed by the microcomputer of the right-side input control device 23. Note that the touch gesture determination program may be provided in the integrated control device MC instead of being provided in the right-side input control device 23.

In FIG. 152, 362 is a reference information storage unit. This reference information storage unit 362 stores the reference information 30P and additional information 30Q described in the first embodiment. Note that the configuration of the control circuit (including the integrated control device MC) and the like in this seventh embodiment is the same as that described in FIG. 141 in the fifth embodiment.

Since the cooking device 1 of this seventh embodiment is configured as described above, when starting cooking, the operation key 98 of the input operation unit 40 is pressed and held for, for example, several seconds to turn on the main power switch 97. This operation is detected by the power switch control device 28, which then closes the main relay 107 in the filter circuit board 54.

For this reason, commercial power is supplied from the filter circuit board 54 to the power supply circuit board 55. Then, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is generated by the power supply circuit A34 and the power supply circuit B36 of the power supply circuit board 55, and applied to the integrated control device MC.

When the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before the heating operation starts to confirm that no abnormalities have occurred. It also starts the integrated display unit 30 and displays the initial information (see display screen 1 in Figure 147).

In this state, when the user opens the door 114 of the heating chamber 113 to use the microwave heating device 120, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the control device 105. As a result, the control device 105 sends a signal indicating that the door 114 is open to the integrated control device MC. The integrated control device MC presumes that the user will be performing microwave cooking, displays the necessary information for starting microwave heating on the integrated display unit 30, and prompts the user to enter input to start heating. In other words, the second specific screen 30SC is automatically displayed.

When the user places food or other items to be cooked in the heating chamber 113 and closes the door 114, the door open/close detection mechanism 131 again sends a detection signal indicating that the door 114 is closed to the integrated control device MC via the control device 105. Therefore, when a command to start heating is given from the input operation unit 40 in this state, the right-side input control device 23 detects whether or not the input key for microwave heating has been touched. Therefore, a signal indicating a command to start heating is sent from the right-side input control device 23 to the integrated control device MC.

The right-side input control device 23 also detects input from the central operation unit 40M. Therefore, it transmits a selection value signal IP4 corresponding to touch information on the operation panel 311 of the integrated display unit 30 to the display unit drive circuit 63.

Referring again to FIG. 150, the operation of a user performing combined cooking using an oven heating source 188 and a microwave heating source 189 will now be described.
FIG. 150 shows the user selecting the control menu "Oven" using oven heat source 188.

In FIG. 150, three of the user's fingertips FG are drawn at the same time, but this does not show that touch gesture operations are being performed simultaneously with three fingertips FG. It shows that touch gesture operations are being performed three times, starting from the first area 30L on the left side and moving sequentially to the right side.

When a user performs a touch gesture operation (hereinafter abbreviated as "touch operation") on the first area 30L, the operation determination unit 354 of the touch gesture determination device 353 receives input information IP2 corresponding to touch information IP1 from the first area 30L that constitutes part of the operation panel unit 351.

When the control menu "Oven" is displayed in the first area 30L, if the user moves the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK (within a certain speed range) in the first area 30L while keeping the fingertip FG in contact with the first area 30L, the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 recognizes this as a regular (specific) touch gesture operation, and generates touch information.

If the touch information indicates that an operation has been performed in the forward direction (FR), the operation determination unit 354 changes the display in the first area 30L via the display unit drive circuit 63. Then, the next option, "grill" or "warm," can be displayed in the first area 30L.

Similarly, the target temperature can be selected in the second area 30M. In FIG. 150, the default value is "180°C," but this can be changed to the target temperature information 30T1 of "185°C" displayed in the candidate display section 30Y2. In addition, by touching the rear BK, the target temperature information 30T2 of "175°C" can be displayed in the center.

Similarly, in the third area 30R, if a touch gesture operation is recognized by the gesture mode discrimination unit 314, touch information is generated each time, and the display information in the third area 30R can be changed.

In this embodiment 7, the touch gesture operation recognized by the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 is set so that the direction of movement after touching is either forward FR or backward BK, so the display cannot be switched using touch gesture operations such as "pinch in" or "pinch out" as described above.

The reference parameter storage unit 358, which will be described later, stores parameters limited to the slider mode among the user gestures. Therefore, if the slider mode cannot be determined, the display cannot be switched. For example, the touch gesture operations of "pinch in" and "pinch out" described above will result in a result that does not match the parameters based on a combination of the amount of movement in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, or the touch duration, etc.

Figure 153 shows a modified example of the seventh embodiment shown in Figures 145 to 152, and is a plan view of the front portion to explain the arrangement of the central operating unit 40M and various display units.

At least the slider mode parameters of the user's gestures are stored in the reference parameter storage unit 358 in the modified example shown in FIG. 153. The slider mode is specified in two directions: forward and backward, and a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward direction (rightward direction RT and a range of ±30 degrees from this rightward direction). In other words, the slider mode is detected within an angle range of 60 degrees. One example of the parameter is a parameter determined based on one or a combination of two or more of the amount of movement of the touch gesture operation in a predetermined time, the speed of the touch gesture operation, or the touch time.

When the name of the control menu for the composite cooking mode KM2, "RG Manual" shown in FIG. 153, is touched and kept touched for a certain period of time or more (e.g., 3 or 5 seconds), information is displayed in another display area. For example, in the second area 30M or the third area 30R, an explanation of the control menu for the composite cooking mode being touched, reference information for determining the control conditions for each control menu, cooking precautions (including cooking utensils such as pots) corresponding to the control menu, etc. may be displayed. In this case, the information may be displayed in the form of a small additional screen (or speech bubble) 30AD using characters or figures. FIG. 153 shows an example in which additional information 30Q about the container for putting food in is displayed using characters.

Furthermore, audio guidance from the voice synthesizer 95 may be used to provide advice to supplement the user's operations. To make such a change, it is necessary to expand or change the gesture determination data in the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 (see FIG. 152) and the parameter information in the reference parameter storage unit 358.

Next, we will explain Figure 154.
Fig. 154 shows a case where the fingertip FG is moved to the right while touching the first area 30L, and when the fingertip FG is moved to the right in this manner, the gesture mode discrimination unit 355 determines that the previous display content should be restored. Therefore, the additional screen 30AD shown in Fig. 153 is erased.

The gesture mode discrimination unit 355 and the reference parameter storage unit 358 do not detect touch gestures only in the strict left-right direction and the forward-backward direction perpendicular to this direction of the user, but are configured to detect the trajectory of the fingertip FG with a certain detection width (a range of 60 degrees as described above). Therefore, even if the fingertip is moved slightly diagonally, the gesture mode discrimination unit 314 can determine that this is a command to cancel the additional screen 30AD. Note that instead of erasing the additional screen 30AD with a touch gesture to the right in this way, the method may be changed to automatically erase it after a certain time from display, or to immediately erase it if the additional screen 30D is touched again.

Next, we will explain Figure 155.
FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the integrated display section 30 of the cooking appliance 1 of FIG.
As is clear from Fig. 155, when the integrated control device MC is started, it first performs an initial self-diagnosis before starting the heating operation to confirm that no abnormality has occurred. It also starts the integrated display unit 30 and displays the standby common information 30N as the initial information.

Before either the microwave heating source 9 or the oven heating source 188 is selected by the input operation unit 40, the integrated control device MC displays standby common information 30N for the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 on the display screen 30D. After either the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188 is selected, the display screen 30D is divided into the first area 30L, the second area 30M, and the third area 30R, and displays the control menu and control conditions for the composite cooking mode KM2.

In addition, when a command to display the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is received, the first specific screen 30SP is displayed, and information indicating the "cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3" is displayed in the first area 30L in the first specific screen 30SP.

Hereinafter, the operations of the input operation unit 40 and the integrated display unit 30 will be specifically described with reference to FIG.
When the main power switch 97 is turned off, the integrated display unit 30 is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 97 is turned on, the integrated control device MC performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays the display screen 1 of FIG.

The display screen 1 in FIG. 155 is the same as the display screen 1 described in FIG.
Reference numeral 30B denotes two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) for directing a user to a dedicated recipe posting website via the Internet. Reference numeral 30C denotes a text that explains the meaning of the two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional information 30B and the display text 30C are a type of standby common information 30N.

After display screen 1 is displayed, display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed automatically. Also, display screens 2C to 2E may be displayed. On display screen 2A, "Caution: Bumping" is one of the warning displays.

One of the features of this seventh embodiment is that in addition to the display screens 2A and 2B described in the first embodiment, three display screens 2C, 2D, and 2E can be displayed one by one by switching between them.

Even in this embodiment 7, in the composite cooking mode KM2 (range grill cooking), there are three types of patterns: a pattern in which microwave heating is performed first, and the food is heated to a certain extent, and then heated by the upper heater 163A or the lower heater 163B; a pattern in which heating is performed in the reverse order; and a pattern in which microwave heating and heater heating are performed simultaneously.
Also, in the combined cooking mode KM3, a cooking process equivalent to "range grill cooking" may be performed.

Generally, food is cooked in heat-resistant plastic containers or dishes and then microwaved. If the upper heater 163A or lower heater 163B is then turned on in this state, there is a risk that the containers mentioned above will burn out due to the high heat.

Thus, in the display screen 2C, in the control menu for "range grill (RG)" in the composite cooking mode KM2, a warning message 30E is displayed, warning against heating a plastic container inside the heating chamber 113. In other words, when the control menu for "range grill" is executed, this warning message 30E is a type of "common information during standby" 30N.
It is also beneficial to display the warning message 30E when carrying out the cooking menu of the combined cooking mode KM3.

Display screen 2D is an example of a case where microwaves are introduced into the heating chamber 113 to perform "warm" cooking, and notifies the user that the temperature in the grill chamber (heating chamber 113) is high and that the "warm" control menu cannot be selected. 30E is a warning message 30E indicating that "automatic range" cannot be used.

In the RG control menu for "Warm" (automatic range), the non-contact (infrared) temperature measuring unit 158 detects the temperature of the food being cooked in the heating chamber 113 and the temperature of the walls of the heating chamber 113, and automatically stops microwave oscillation when the target temperature is reached. Therefore, if heat remains from a previous cooking session and the temperature is high from the start, the integrated control device MC prohibits automatic microwave heating.

As a result, as shown in display screen 2D of FIG. 155, the user is notified to select the "Microwave Manual" control menu. "Microwave Manual" is performed by setting the microwave heating time, so cooking can be performed without any problems even if the temperature of the food inside heating chamber 113 or the temperature of the walls of heating chamber 113 are high. Display text 30E on display screen 3D is also a type of "Standby Common Information" 30N.

In the display screen 2E, 30E is a caution display that warns the user that the top plate 15 is at a high temperature and not to touch it carelessly. When a heated object N such as a metal pan or metal plate is placed on the top plate 15 and induction heating is performed, the top plate 15 also becomes hot due to the temperature of the heated object N (not shown). Therefore, as in the first embodiment, a high temperature display unit 69 is provided immediately behind the heat source display unit 68, and in addition to this high temperature display unit 69, this display screen 2E is used when a similar high temperature display is to be performed in the integrated display unit 30. In this display screen 2E, the display statement 30E indicating that the top plate 15 is hot is also a type of standby common information 30N.

The display screens 2C to 2E do not have to be displayed whenever the main power switch 97 is turned on.
For example, the following patterns are classified:
(1) When the temperature of the top plate 15 is high, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2E are alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds.
(2) When the heating chamber 113 is at a high temperature, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2D are alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds. Alternatively, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2B are alternately displayed at intervals of several seconds.
(3) If there is actual (history) data of cooking using the "range grill" (one of the composite cooking menus) menu during the previous cooking or the past few cookings before the main power switch 97 is turned on, the display screen 1 and the display screen 2C are alternately displayed at intervals of a few seconds. Also, if there is actual (history) data of cooking in the implementation of the linked cooking menu, it is similarly displayed. The integrated control device MC automatically accumulates the number of times the "composite cooking menu" and the "linked cooking menu" are executed during one heating cooking, and stores this in the memory unit MM as the past heating cooking history. Therefore, after the main power switch 97 is turned on, the heating history of the heating chamber 113 (number of heatings, cumulative heating time, etc.) and the cooking history of the range grill (cumulative microwave heating time, etc.) can be known by referring to the heating cooking history.

When the top plate 15 is at a high temperature and the heating chamber 113 is also at a high temperature, the display screen 1 is displayed first for a few seconds, and then the display screens 2D and 2E are displayed alternately at intervals of a few seconds. The contents of the standby common information 30N for each of the display screens 2A to 2E as described above may be announced by voice via the voice synthesizer 95.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screen 2E in Figure 155, these displays are made using the entire display screen 30D. In other words, rather than displaying partially in any of the first area 30L to third area 30R described above, in order to secure as large a display area as possible, the first area 30L to third area 30R are displayed as an integrated display so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user sees them displayed on the entire integrated display unit 30.

The integrated control device MC sends a drive command to the control device 105 that controls the microwave heating operation, closes the relay 182, and drives the inverter circuit 121A to start microwave heating. At the same time, it sends an operation command signal to the drive circuits 177A and 177B of the third and fourth cooling fans 128 and 129 to start the operation of these two cooling fans 128 and 129. In addition, although not shown, it drives the antenna drive motor 126 to rotate the antenna 125. This introduces microwaves into the heating chamber 113, and the food is cooked.

In addition, even during the period when microwave cooking is being performed, the first cooling fan 60 and the second cooling fan 61 of the upper unit 100 continue to operate, constantly cooling the inside of the upper space 300A. This prevents overheating of important electric and electronic components related to the entire cooking appliance 1, such as the integrated control device MC and the integrated display unit 30, and allows stable operation.

Although not shown, the input operation unit 40 also includes a right operation unit 40R and a left operation unit 40L that constitute a part of the input operation unit 40.
The touch-type input key units in the right operation unit 40R and the left operation unit 40L require electrodes for detecting changes in capacitance in correspondence with each touch key area, and therefore require many components such as such electrodes and LEDs (light-emitting diodes) for illuminating each touch key. Therefore, although not shown, the components constituting the touch-type input key units are distributed and mounted on the central operation board 32 and the left operation board 38. The components of the input key 98 for the power switch 97 are also mounted on the central operation board 32.

When the user touches the input key 43MS while the desired composite cooking menu is displayed in the first area 30L to the third area 30R on the integrated display unit 30 provided on the central operation unit 40M, the conditions displayed in the first area 30L to the third area 30R are recognized as confirmed information (confirmed control menu, confirmed value) by the right input control device 23 and transmitted to the integrated control device MC. Thereafter, the control of the composite cooking menu is executed based on this confirmed information. As described above, the touch gesture determination device 353 (see FIG. 152) provided corresponding to the integrated display unit 30 of the central operation unit 40M is realized by the right input control device 23 (see FIG. 145).

When the user touches the input key 43MS while the desired linked cooking menu (its identification information 330) is displayed in the first area 30L, the control conditions for that cooking menu displayed in the first area 30L are recognized as confirmed information (confirmed control menu, confirmed value) in the right-side input control device 23 and transmitted to the integrated control device MC. After that, cooking of one cooking menu in the linked cooking mode KM3 is performed based on this confirmed information.

Next, we will explain Figure 156.
FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the display operation of the integrated display section 30 of the cooking appliance 1 of FIG.
In this modified example, the display screen 30D of the integrated display unit 30 can be easily switched by a touch operation from a state in which the name of the control menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 (specific text 30J) is displayed to a state in which the identification information 330 of the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 is displayed.
Conversely, it is also possible to easily switch from the cooking menu to a screen displaying the control menu (for the combined cooking mode KM2).

Even in this modified example, only two touch gesture operations are determined to be valid: a touch gesture operation in which the user's fingertip FG is moved forward and backward, and a touch gesture operation in which the user's fingertip FG is moved left and right.

By moving fingertip FG forward and backward as indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 156, the display screen can be switched to one in which the specific text 30J displayed in the first area 30L is moved forward FR or backward BK. This allows the desired control menu and control conditions for the composite cooking mode KM2 to be individually selected. For example, in FIG. 156, the second area 30M displays a heating (target) temperature of 180°C and a heating time of 10 minutes, and this control information can be changed to the desired conditions by moving fingertip FG forward and backward.

Furthermore, if the fingertip FG is moved toward the left side LE while still touching the first area 30L, the display screen 30D (first specific screen 30SP) of the cooking menu for the collaborative cooking mode KM3 will be displayed as shown in the right half of FIG. 156.
Thereafter, by moving the fingertip FG forward FR or backward BK while still touching the identification information 330, the identification information 330 of the next food item can be displayed on the display screen 30D.
Therefore, by displaying the specific text 30J of the desired control menu or the identification information 330 of the cooking menu in the center of the first area 30L in this manner, and then the user gives a command to start heating and cooking, the cooking process can be carried out using the desired control menu or linked cooking menu.

Next, a communication mode between the cooking appliance 1 according to the seventh embodiment and the outside will be described.
FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing, in chronological order, the exchange of information between the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG. 145 and an external information management device or the like.

The cooking device 1 shown in FIG. 157 has the configuration described below.
That is,
A heating chamber 113;
A microwave heating source 189 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 113;
an oven heating source 118 for heating the heating chamber 113;
An induction heating source 9 for heating an object N to be heated;
a notification unit AN (integrated display unit 30, voice synthesizer 95, individual display units 31L and 31R) for notifying information about cooking processes;
and an integrated control device MC for controlling each of the microwave heating source 189, the oven heating source 188, and the induction heating source 9.
The integrated control device MC includes:
After displaying the standby initial screen 30Z and the guide screen 30SA,
(1) an IH only mode in which the induction heating source 9 is operated alone; (2) a range only cooking mode in which the microwave heating source 189 is operated alone; (3) an oven only cooking mode in which the oven heating source 188 is operated alone; (4) a coordinated cooking mode KM3 in which the microwave heating source 189 and/or the oven heating source 188 and the induction heating source 9 are operated sequentially after a transition period TR whose length is determined by a command from a user;
The operating program includes:
The cooperative cooking mode KM3 includes a cooking process 1 performed before the transition period TR using the heating chamber 113, and a cooking process 2 performed at a location other than the heating chamber 113 after the transition period TR,
During the transition period TR, the integrated control device MC causes the notification unit AN to notify reference information regarding the cooking process 2 or inventory information 330R and individual ingredient information 339 indicating that cooking other than the cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 can be performed in the heating chamber 113.
The present invention is characterized in that:

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC is configured to transmit a signal requesting the provision of the reference information from the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 to the information processing device (home gateway) 411 before the start of the cooking process 1 (see FIG. 157), and further configured to notify the request for reference information by the notification unit AN (see FIG. 120 of embodiment 1).

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC is configured to receive the reference information from the information processing device (home gateway) 411 via the transceiver unit (wireless communication unit) 49 during the pause period (transition period TR) between the cooking steps 1 and 1.

The details of the configuration will be described below.
First, we will explain Figure 157.
In this embodiment 7, the information management device 411 does not exist inside the house HA. A router (not shown) is installed inside the house HA, and the cooking appliance 1 is connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 via the router. An information management device 411 having the home gateway function of embodiment 1 is installed on the Internet 416. The information management device 411 may be composed of one or more server devices. The servers may be distributed according to the main parts such as storage, search, and information processing.

In FIG. 157, steps SK1 to SK11 show the main operations of the integrated control device MC of the cooking appliance 1.
FIG. 157 shows the operational steps for executing the cooperative control mode, and illustrates the period from when it is decided to execute the cooperative control mode to when cooking process 2 is completed.

When it is decided to execute the linked control mode, the details of the operation (including, for example, information that the food to be cooked is a hamburger steak) are notified by the notification unit AN and transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK1). Note that in the following explanation, the information processing device 411 and the information processing terminal device 418 can communicate with each other via the Internet (wide area communication network) 416, so the destination of the information transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 is not specified.

Next, the start of cooking operation in the cooperative control mode is notified, and a notification is sent from wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK2).
If the cooking requires a preheating step, the start of the preheating step is notified and is transmitted to the outside via wireless communication unit 49 (step SK3).

Next, a notification is issued that cooking process 1 has actually started in the cooperative control mode, and this is also transmitted to the outside from the wireless communication unit 49 (step SK4).

Next, in cooking process 1, when a predetermined time (first time TN1) has elapsed since induction heating was started, reference information 1 (FA1) is notified. The content of this notification is also transmitted to the outside from wireless communication unit 49 (step SK5). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the heated object N has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 1 is notified (step SK5).

Next, notification information from outside in response to step SK5 is received (step SK6). This received information may include, for example, a remote control signal to reduce the heat. Depending on the content of the received notification information, the notification unit AN issues a notification to inform the user. In particular, in the case of a remote signal, a notification is necessary to prevent unnecessary confusion for the user.

Next, when cooking process 1 has automatically ended, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. Alternatively, when the user manually stops cooking process 1 at any time, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. The notification information is then transmitted to the outside (step SK7).

At the stage of step SK7, the heating operation has stopped and a transition period has begun.
Then, when the user prepares for cooking process 2 and issues a command to start cooking process 2, the notification unit AN notifies the user that the transition period has ended and cooking process 2 has started. The notification is also transmitted to the outside from wireless communication unit 49 (step SK8). In this case, the notification content includes information about the heating source for cooking process 2. If cooking has been started with a timer set, the notification also includes information about the timer setting time.

Next, in cooking process 2, for example, when a predetermined time (second time TN1) has elapsed since the start of microwave heating, reference information 2 (FA2) is notified. The contents of this notification are also transmitted from wireless communication unit 49 to the outside (step SK9). Alternatively, it is detected that the temperature of the object N to be heated has risen to a predetermined temperature, and reference information 2 is notified (step SK9).

Next, notification information from outside in response to step SK9 is received (step SK10). This received information may include, for example, a remote control signal to reduce the heat.
Depending on the contents of the notification information, the notification unit AN notifies the user.

Next, when cooking process 2 ends automatically, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. Alternatively, when the user manually stops cooking process 2 at any time, the notification unit AN notifies the user of this. The notification information is then transmitted to the outside (step SK11).

As is clear from the above explanation, the contents of the collaborative investigation of the cooking appliance 1 are transmitted to the outside in real time, so the information processing device 411 and the information processing terminal device 418 that receive the transmitted contents can grasp the progress of the cooking in a location away from the kitchen KT. Therefore, particularly in the collaborative cooking mode, cooking may take a relatively long time, lasting more than an hour, and since the operating information is received by the information processing terminal device 418, it is possible to monitor the cooking from another room in the house using the information processing terminal device 418.

In addition, if the remote control signal sent from the outside to the cooking appliance 1 is limited to two commands, namely, lowering the heat and stopping the cooking operation, there is no risk of the cooking appliance 1 operating erroneously due to erroneous operation from the outside.

Figure 158 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the input operation of the cooperative operation unit 40MC and the display information of the integrated display unit 30 and the left display unit 30L in the cooking appliance 1 of Figure 145.

Next, we will explain Figure 158.
In the order of steps SC1 to SC7, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is operated, and the integrated display unit 30 operates. As described in the first embodiment, the cooperative operation unit 40MC is disposed in the center of the left and right of the input operation unit 40 that is provided horizontally on the top surface of the main body 10.

To select the "combined heating cooking/single heating cooking mode" for the range/grill, there is a course that uses the induction heating source 9 by selecting the left heating unit 17HL or the right heating unit 17HR, and a course that uses either or both of the microwave heating source 189 and oven heating source 188 using the central operation unit 40M (linked operation unit 40MC).

The case where a course in the combined cooking mode is selected and cooking is performed will be described below.
In FIG. 158, in step SC1, the guide screen 30SA is automatically displayed on the integrated display section 30.

Next, the input key 43MC of the cooperative operation unit 40MC is pressed to transmit a command signal for selecting a course in the cooperative cooking mode KM3 (SC2).
Next, the integrated control device MC displays the first specific screen 30SP on the integrated display unit 30 (SC3). Note that the display of the guidance screen 30SA replaces the display of the guidance screen 30SA.

At least the following three pieces of information are displayed simultaneously on the first specific screen 30SP. They may be displayed in a table format.
(1) Identification information 330 for each food item in the cooperative cooking mode KM3
(2) Cooking process (cooking process 1, cooking process 2) and preheating process (3) Name or abbreviation of the heating source or heating unit (in the case of induction heating source 9) used

The user touches the first area 30L of the first specification screen 30SP to specify only one menu (type) of food to be cooked in one collaborative cooking mode.
To specify the "identification information" 330, a touch operation (slide operation) is performed in the forward and backward directions so that the target "identification information" 330 is displayed at a specific position in the first area 30L. In the first specification screen 30SP, as described in FIG. 151, it is desirable to simultaneously display the identification information 330 and the identification information 330A, 330B of the next candidate food to be cooked, etc.

When the identification information 330 corresponding to the desired food to be cooked is displayed in a predetermined position on the first specific screen 30SP (such as the center of the first area 30L), the control conditions such as the heating temperature and heat displayed in the second area 30M and the third area 30R may be changed by touch operation.

Thereafter, by pressing the input key 43MS of the cooperative operation unit 40MC, the transition to the cooperative cooking mode KM3 is confirmed (SC5).
Then, the integrated display unit 30 displays that cooking in the coordinated cooking mode KM3 is about to begin (SC6). Furthermore, the integrated display unit 30 displays the control conditions, such as the heating temperature and heat level, that have been selected up to this stage, and information indicating whether or not a cooking process and a preheating process are being performed (SC7).

In the seventh embodiment, the operation program for the coordinated cooking mode defines the following two types of sequences according to the food to be cooked, similarly to the first embodiment.
(1) The induction heating source 9 is used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating means 188.
(2) At least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 are used first, and the subsequent heating is performed by the induction heating source 9.
In addition, the pattern (2) above of using at least one or both of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating means 188 first also includes a pattern of starting the preheating operation of the induction heating source 9 first (cooking “fried chicken” described in embodiment 1; see FIG. 73).

The example in Figure 158 is a pattern in which the microwave heating source 189 or oven heating means 188 is used first in cooking step 1. The display operation of the integrated display unit 30 starts before the other two display units (31L, 31R). However, since the induction heating source 9 is used in cooking step 2, this is a pattern in which the induction heating source 9 starts the preheating step first, at the same time as cooking step 1.

The preheating process is started, and then the left display unit 31L dedicated to the left heating unit 17HL of the induction heating source 9 performing the cooking process 2 is activated to display that the preheating process has started (SY1). Then, the preheating target temperature is displayed as, for example, "200°C," and it is also displayed that preheating is in progress (SY2).
After this, the process proceeds to cooking process 1, transition period TR, and cooking process 2, but these are omitted from FIG. 158.

The specific functions of the configurations shown in Figs. 145 to 158 will now be described.
When an input key 43KP for changing the function of the integrated control device MC shown in Fig. 149 is pressed, a function setting menu is displayed on the integrated display section 30. Up to this point, the description has been given in the first embodiment.
In the seventh embodiment, the following function settings can be further made to the integrated control device MC.

(1) Narrowing down to specific information sent to the outside (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG. 157.
For example, in the case of cooking "tempura" or "fried chicken" in which cooking oil is added to the object to be heated, when a specific cooking menu (for example, "tempura" or "fried chicken") is executed in the cooperative cooking mode KM3, in order to strengthen the monitoring function, the transmission steps SK3 and SK5 shown in Fig. 157 are performed at a certain temperature stage each time. For example, when the preheating temperature is set to 180°C and preheating is started, the temperature rise process is notified in more detail (than in the example of embodiment 1) such as 160°C, 165°C, and 170°C.

(2) The inventory information acquired from refrigerator 401 can be limited to a specific range (for example, frozen foods). In this case, the condition setting can be further specified as "information on freezing temperature" and "meat," so that only information on "meat with a freezing temperature lower than a specified value" is collected.
For example, a method for aging meat in a refrigerator is known in which an independent cooling space (room) is provided in the refrigerator, and meat such as beef, pork, or chicken is placed in the freezer compartment, and the temperature of the air in the freezer compartment is maintained at 2°C to 5°C (hereinafter referred to as "aging temperature"), the humidity is maintained at 87% to 98%, and the meat is exposed to cold air within a certain range (volume of circulating cold air). Thus, if information on food ingredients stored within a specific aging temperature range is collected in this way, user convenience can be further improved.

(3) Setting of Expert Mode and Beginner Mode When the beginner mode is selected, all of the external notifications (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in FIG.
When the expert mode is selected, the external information transmission (steps SK1 to SK11) shown in Fig. 157 is limited to SK7. However, the display contents on the first specific screen 30SP are the same in the expert mode and the beginner mode.
(4) The inventory information acquired from the refrigerator 401 includes information regarding storage period and freshness.

For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-124053 proposes a refrigerator that photographs food stored in the refrigerator, stores multiple images of the food in association with the photographed images and the photographed dates and times, extracts the differences between identical images taken at different photographed dates and times, and, if there are any areas where there are no differences for a certain period of time, determines that the food has been stored for a certain period of time or more and estimates the storage period.

In addition, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-89913 proposes a refrigerator that extracts food images of food stored in a storage compartment from images of the interior of the refrigerator, generates information regarding deterioration of the food corresponding to the food image from changes in the food image over time, and transmits the food images and the information regarding the deterioration to an external mobile information terminal device via a communication device.
Therefore, in this embodiment 7, if the above-mentioned information from the refrigerator is acquired, user convenience can be further improved.

Although the reference information 1 (FA1) and the reference information 2 (FA2) of this embodiment 7 have not been described in detail, as described in embodiment 1, in addition to the elapsed time (first time TN1) from the start of cooking process 1 and the elapsed temperature, time-saving information 333 indicating that the user can shorten the cooking time and cooking recommendation information 338 may be added to the reference information FA1 and FA2 as shown in FIG. 118 of embodiment 1. Alternatively, a notification (display or audio guide) may be given instead. The refrigerator according to the present invention includes a storage compartment for storing food, a photographing device for photographing the inside of the storage compartment to obtain an image of the storage compartment, a control device for extracting food images of the food stored in the storage compartment from the image of the storage compartment obtained by the photographing device, and a communication device for communicating with a mobile terminal having a display unit, and the control device generates information on deterioration of the food corresponding to the food image from the change over time of the food image, and transmits the food image and the information on the deterioration to the mobile terminal via the communication device. The refrigerator according to the present invention comprises a storage compartment for storing food, a photographing device for photographing the interior of the storage compartment to obtain an image of the interior of the storage compartment, a control device for extracting food images of food stored in the storage compartment from the image of the interior of the storage compartment obtained by the photographing device, and a communication device for communicating with a mobile device having a display unit, and the control device generates information relating to deterioration of food corresponding to the food image from changes over time in the food image, and transmits the food image and the information relating to the deterioration to the mobile device via the communication device.

Furthermore, in the configurations shown in Figures 145 to 158, the inventory inquiry signal RQ1 sent to the home gateway 411 to obtain inventory information for the refrigerator 401, as described in Figure 115 of embodiment 1, is executed before or immediately after the start of cooking process 1 (immediately before or simultaneously with step SK4 in Figure 157).

Furthermore, in the configurations shown in Figures 145 to 158, the inventory inquiry signal RQ3 to the home gateway 411, as described in Figure 115 of embodiment 1, is transmitted during the pause period (transition period TR) immediately after the end of cooking process 1.

Furthermore, in the configurations shown in Figures 145 to 158, the inventory data signal RS2 from the home gateway 411, as described in Figure 115 of embodiment 1, is received during the pause period (transition period TR) between cooking process 1 and cooking process 2.

The communication method between the home gateway 411 and the cooking appliance 1 is a wireless LAN communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is one of the short-range wireless communication standards, or Wi-Fi (registered trademark).
On the other hand, the microwave heating source 189 also uses microwaves in a specific wavelength range (frequency band). Therefore, if wireless communication as described above is performed at the same time that microwave heating is being performed in the cooking process of the collaborative cooking mode KM3, it is conceivable that there will be mutual interference and normal communication will be hindered.

Therefore, in this embodiment 7, the inventory data signal RS2, which is expected to contain a particularly large amount of data, is received during the pause period (transition period) TR.
From a similar viewpoint, the important stock inquiry signals RQ1 and RQ3 are both transmitted during a pause period (transition period TR).

Summary of embodiment 7.
As is clear from the above description, in the seventh embodiment, the cooking device 1 has the following configuration.
That is,
A main body 110;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
In the three heating units 17HL, 17HM, and 17HR arranged on the upper surface of the main body, a first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) capable of heating the objects to be heated independently of each other;
A second heating means HM2 having a heating source (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for cooking in the heating chamber 113;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
A display means for displaying information (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L, 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes an operation unit (operation key or operation button) 98 for a main power switch 97,
After the main power is supplied by the operation unit of the main power switch 97, the integrated control device MC sequentially (or alternately) displays, on the display means (integrated display unit 30), a standby initial screen 30Z (see FIG. 147) displaying information common to the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 (e.g., that the power is on) and a guide screen 30SA (see FIG. 147);
The guide screen 30SA displays a touch input section A (touch key 513) displaying the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a touch input section B (touch key 514) displaying the selection of the composite cooking mode KM2 in a list state or sequentially.
When the touch input unit A (touch key 513) is touched, the integrated control device MC displays a first specific screen 30SP on the display means (integrated display unit 30), and when the touch input unit B (touch key 514) is touched, the integrated control device MC displays a second specific screen 30SC on the display means (integrated display unit 30).
The first identification screen 30SP displays identification information 330 for identifying a cooking menu for one food item,
Furthermore, the integrated control device MC can display identification information other than the identification information 330 from a predefined cooking menu group by touching the first specific screen 30SP.
The present invention discloses a cooking device characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting the various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the composite cooking mode KM2), the user can easily select the cooking mode by looking at the information on the guide screen 30SA and directly touching the guide screen 30SA.
This makes it easy to select control menus and cooking menus corresponding to various heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

In other configurations of embodiment 7, the same effects can be expected for the same configurations as embodiments 1 to 6.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the seventh embodiment is
The guide screen 30SA further displays a touch input section C (touch key 515) that displays the selection of the single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means (induction heating source 9).
The present invention discloses a configuration characterized by the above.

Therefore, by directly touching the touch input section C (touch key 515: see FIG. 147) displayed on the guide screen 30SA, the single cooking mode KM1 using the first heating means (induction heating source 9) can be selected, and the increased number of heating means makes it easier to select a wider range of control menus and cooking menus, resulting in a highly convenient heating cooker 1.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the seventh embodiment is
The first heating means (induction heating source 9) includes a plurality of heating parts 17HL, 17HM, and 17HR that are energized independently of each other,
When the touch input section C (touch key 515) is touched, a second guide screen 30SA1 (see FIG. 147 ) is displayed on the display means (integrated display section 30) on which a touch input section D (touch keys 517L, 517M, 517R) for designating each of the plurality of heating sections is displayed.
The present invention discloses a configuration characterized by the above.

Therefore, even if there are multiple heating units 17HL, 17HM, and 17HR, the desired heating unit can be easily selected on the second guide screen by directly touching the touch input unit D (touch keys 517L, 517M, and 517R) as described above. As a result, the increased number of heating units further improves usability, making it possible to realize a highly convenient cooking device 1, and also making it easy to select a heating unit.

Furthermore, the integrated control device MC, the right input control device 23 or the left input control device 24 detects that the user's fingertip FG is operated in a certain direction, and sequentially updates the identification information 330 of the linked cooking menu KM3 and the name of the control menu in the composite cooking mode KM2 (specific text 30J), etc., to display the next candidate.
This allows the user to intuitively switch display screens and select various menus by operating their fingertip FG, improving operability.

Embodiment 8.
Fig. 159 is a plan view 1 of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device 1 according to embodiment 8. Fig. 160 is a plan view 2 of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 159. Fig. 161 is a plan view 3 of the front part for explaining the arrangement of the input operation unit and various display units in the cooking device 1 shown in Fig. 159. Note that the same or corresponding parts as those in embodiments 1 to 7 are given the same reference numerals, and explanations may be omitted.

In this embodiment 8, the input keys 43MC, 43M1, etc., which are used to select the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3 and the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2, have been improved.

Another major difference from the first to seventh embodiments is the provision of a dial-type selection means 523 for selecting the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the control menu, etc., and for setting the control conditions (heat power during induction heating, microwave output, etc.).

FIG. 159 corresponds to FIG. 21 of the first embodiment.
The state shown in FIG. 159 is a state in which the guide screen 30SA is displayed.
The guide screen 30SA is automatically displayed after the standby initial screen 30Z (not shown) is displayed. The display contents of the guide screen 30SA are basically the same as those of the guide screen 30SA in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the central operation section 40M, located in the center of the input operation section 40, has seven input keys 43KP, 47, 520, 521, 522, 43MS, and 43MT arranged in a horizontal row, as shown in FIG. 159.

The input key 520 is an input key that can select the linked cooking mode KM3, the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM3, and the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2. It is composed of a touch-type or press-type switch.

507 is the first specific information, and is displayed as the number "1." This first specific information 507 corresponds to the first information 501 displayed as "Coordinated cooking" on the display unit 510 in the first area 30L of the guidance screen 30SA. This shows that when selecting the coordinated cooking mode KM3, it is sufficient to operate the input key 520 on which the first specific information 507 is displayed. Note that in addition to the number "1," a name or abbreviation indicating the cooking mode, such as "Coordinated cooking," may be displayed.

Several types of first specific information 507 are prepared. Only in the first operation scene of input key 520, the number "1" is displayed as shown in FIG. 159, but in the next scene, the word "Menu" is displayed as shown in FIG. 160. In this way, the display content of first specific information 507 changes appropriately depending on the display of the light-emitting portion (not shown) located below the operation surface (visible light transmitting material) of input key 520.

508 is second specific information, and is displayed as the number "2." This second specific information 508 corresponds to the second information 502 in the second area 30M, which is displayed as "Composite cooking" in the display section 510 of the guidance screen 30SA. This shows that when selecting the composite cooking mode KM2, it is sufficient to operate the input key 521 on which the second specific information 508 is displayed.

Similar to the first specific information 507, the display content of the second specific information 508 changes appropriately depending on the display of a light-emitting unit (not shown). In addition to the number "2", a name or abbreviation indicating a cooking mode such as "combined cooking" or "continuous automatic cooking" may be displayed.

509 is the third specific information, which is displayed as the number "3." This third specific information 509 corresponds to the third information 503 in the third area 30R, which is displayed as "IH cooking" on the display section 510 of the guidance screen 30SA.

The third identification information 509 indicates that when the sole cooking mode KM1 using the induction heating source 9 is to be selected, the input key 522 on which the third identification information 509 is displayed should be operated. The third identification information 509 changes its display content appropriately depending on the display of a light-emitting section (not shown), similarly to the first identification information 507. In addition to the number "3", a name or abbreviation indicating the cooking mode "IH cooking" may be displayed.

Reference numeral 523 denotes a dial-type selection means disposed at the right end of the central operation unit 40M.
When the user turns this selection means 523 after pressing any one of the input keys 520 to 522, the user can select the cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the control menu, etc., and set the control conditions (heat power during induction heating, microwave output, etc.). This will be described in the next Figure 160.

The selection means 523 can be rotated both clockwise and counterclockwise as shown by the arrow in FIG. 159. It can also be rotated more than one full rotation, but the rotation can be limited to a certain range.

When the input key 520 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 159, the integrated display portion 30 switches to the first specific screen 30SP as shown in FIG.
Fig. 160 is a diagram corresponding to Fig. 64 in the first embodiment. That is, in the first specific screen 30SP for the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the identification information 330 of "hamburger" is displayed as the default cooking menu.

As shown in FIG. 160, the first identification information 507 displayed on the input keys 520 is changed from a number to a name indicating the type of function, namely "menu."
Also, the second specific information 508 displayed on the input key 521 changes from the number "2" to "left/right", information indicating the selection scene of the heating units 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9. Note that, since there is no item to be inputted on the input key 522, nothing is displayed as the third specific information 509.

In the state shown in FIG. 160, the input key 520 has a function for selecting "menu," as shown in the first specific information 507. Therefore, when the input key 520 is pressed and then the dial-type selection means 523 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, as shown by the thick arrow, the cooking menu identification information 330 displayed in the first area 30L changes sequentially in a fixed order according to the range of rotation. In other words, it changes to the cooking menu identification information for a different cooked food.

As described above, the arrow displayed on the dial of the selection means 523 emits light from the moment at least one of the input keys 521 to 522 is selected. This prompts the user to turn the selection means 523. The color of the light emitted by the arrow may be changed before and after the selection of the input keys 521 to 522.

As shown in FIG. 160, heating unit specifying sections 333R and 333L are also displayed simultaneously with the identification information 330.
Either the heating unit specifying unit 333R or 333L can be selected by operating the input key 521. Specifically, the input key 521 is pressed, and then the dial-type selection means 523 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise as shown by the thick arrow. Alternatively, when the input key 521 is pressed once, "left" is selected as shown in FIG. 160, and when the input key 521 is pressed twice in succession, "right" is selected. Furthermore, when the input key 521 is pressed once, "left" is selected again.

As can be seen from the above explanation, when one of the input keys 520-521 is operated in the input operation unit 40, if the selection means 523 is rotated immediately thereafter, an input command signal corresponding to the switching of the input keys 520-521 can be sent to the integrated control device MC.

In FIG. 160, star marks are attached to the individual light-emitting sections 27M3, 27M4, and 27M6 corresponding to the three input keys 520, 521, and 43MS. In other words, the three input keys 520, 521, and 43MS all indicate that their input functions are enabled.

When one of the heating unit specifying sections 333R and 333L shown in FIG. 160 is selected, the display content of the first specifying screen 30SP is switched to the content shown in FIG.
As shown in Fig. 160, input key 522 becomes active, and pressing this switches to the heat input mode. Therefore, when selection section 523 is rotated, four-level heat display band 525 lights up. Therefore, when selection section 523 is rotated, the illuminated range changes left and right in response to the rotation. At the same time, a specific heat value such as "1000W" is displayed as additional information 331 (a level such as "medium" heat may also be displayed).

As is clear from FIG. 161, when setting the heat value of the induction heating source 9, the input function of only the two input keys 522 and 43MS is enabled, as indicated by the star marks on the individual light-emitting elements 27M5 and 27M6 corresponding to these two input keys 522 and 43MS.

Therefore, if the input key 43MS is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 161, the mode will transition to the coordinated cooking mode KM3. Therefore, in either the heating unit 17HL or 17HR, the preheating process (IH preheating) of the heated object N, such as a frying pan, can be started.

In FIG. 161, 524 is the fourth specific information 524 displayed on the input key 522. In the scene in FIG. 161, the fourth specific information 524 is displayed as the text "heat", but it automatically changes to information indicating other control conditions such as "time" or "temperature" depending on the input scene.

Figure 162 shows modified example 1 of embodiment 8 of Figures 159 to 161, and is a plan view of the front part to explain the arrangement of the central operating unit 40M and various display units.

The features of the cooking device 1 in FIG. 162 will be described.
The heating cooker 1 of this modified example 1 is
A main body 110 having heating units 17HL and 17HR arranged on an upper surface thereof on which an object to be heated N is placed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that is installed inside the main body 110 and heats the object to be heated N;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
A display means (integrated display unit) 30 having a display screen 30D that can be viewed from above the main body 110;
An input operation unit 40 is installed on the front part of the upper surface of the main body 110 and is elongated in the left-right direction;
An integrated control device MC that receives a command from the input operation unit 40 and controls a heating operation,
The input operation unit 40 is adjacent to the display means 30 and is located in front of it.
The input operation unit 40 has a first cooking mode selection means (input key) 530 and a second cooking mode selection means (input key) 540 for displaying a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a control menu of the composite cooking mode M2 on the display screen 30D, respectively.
The first cooking mode selection means 530 has an operation unit (operation surface) 530A or a nearby position thereof provided with a cooperation display unit 530B indicating that it is for the cooperation cooking mode KM3, and the second cooking mode selection means 540 has an operation unit (operation surface) 540A or a nearby position thereof provided with a composite display unit 540B indicating that it is for the composite cooking mode KM2.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162, the operation unit 530A of the first cooking mode selection means 530 and the operation unit 540A of the second cooking mode selection means 540 are disposed in front of the display screen 30D and on the top surface of the main body 110.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a dial-type selection means 523 that, after the operation unit 530A of the first cooking mode selection means 530 is operated, displays identification information 330 indicating the cooking menu on the display screen 30D (the displayed first specific screen 30SP) in sequence in response to a rotation operation.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a dial-type selection means 523 that, after the operation unit 540A of the second cooking mode selection means 540 is operated, displays information 30J indicating the control menu on the display screen 30D (the displayed second specific screen 30SC) in sequence in response to a rotation operation.

The display screen 30D has a first area 30L for displaying the cooking menu and the control menu, and a second area 30M for displaying information related to the information displayed in the first area 30L, arranged side by side.
The first area 30L displays the identification information 330 or the information 30J,
The second area 30M is configured to sequentially display one by one control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.) that can be applied to either the cooking menu or the control menu in response to rotating the dial-type selection means 523.

Furthermore, on the display screen 30D, a third area 30R for displaying reference information 30P, 30Q, and 331 is arranged in a horizontal straight line with the first area 30L and the second area 30M.
The reference information 30P, 30Q, 331 is configured to be at least one of the following: information related to the combination of the cooking menu or the control menu and the control conditions, information related to the content of the cooking, information related to the progress of the cooking, or information related to the user's input operations.

The "control conditions" referred to here are basically the same as those described in the first embodiment. That is, they are at least one of the following: a heating power value indicating heating intensity or power consumption, a level value indicating a hierarchy of heating intensity (heating power "high" or "low", etc.), a microwave output value, a heating target temperature, and a heating time, but are not limited to these.

The integrated control device MC has a function of determining whether or not a permission condition for transitioning to the integrated cooking mode KM3 is satisfied when the first cooking mode selection means 530 is selected. The permission condition has been described in detail in the first embodiment, and will not be described again here.
Therefore, the integrated control device MC is configured to display the first specific screen 30SP on the screen 30D when the permission conditions are met.

In addition, the "cooperative cooking mode KM3" in this modified example is,
(1) A first coordinated cooking A includes a cooking step 1A using the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) and a cooking step 2A using the second heating means HM2 after the cooking step 1A;
(2) A second coordinated cooking B includes a cooking step 1B using the second heating means HM2 and a cooking step 2B using the first heating means HM1 after the cooking step 1B. This has been described in detail in the first embodiment, particularly in 65, and will not be described again.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 40 further includes a third cooking mode selection means 550 on the display screen 30D,
An operation unit 550A of the third cooking mode selection means 550 or a position adjacent thereto is provided with a heating means display unit 550B which indicates that cooking is performed using the first heating means.
The first heating means HM1 is an induction heating source 9, and the second heating means HM2 includes a microwave heating source 189 and an oven heating source 188.
The microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188 are configured so that the energization thereof is controlled independently of each other.

560 is a display content display section that is displayed in place of the display section 510 (see FIG. 159). As shown in FIG. 162, there are three types: "Menu", "Heat and time", and "Reference", but the display content display section 560 for "Reference" is not shown in FIG. 162.

The display content display section 560 is common to the first specific screen 30SP to the third specific screen 30ST. The display content display section 560 called "Menu" is always displayed in the first area 30L.

The display content display section 560 "Firepower/Time" is always displayed in the second area 30M. Also, the display content display section 560 "Reference" is displayed in the third area 30M, but if the second area 30M and the third area 30R are combined to create a larger display area (see Figures 160 and 161), it may be displayed in the combined second area 30M.

In FIG. 162, the linkage display unit 530B, composite display unit 540B, and heating means display unit 550B are not displayed on the top surface of the input operation unit 40 itself, but are displayed as text within the operation units (operation surfaces) 530A, 540A, and 550A of the first cooking mode selection unit (input keys) 530 and the second cooking mode selection unit (input keys) 540. However, the eighth embodiment is not limited to this configuration. Text may be displayed (printed, engraved, etc.) adjacent to and in front of the operation units (operation surfaces) 530A, 540A, and 550A.

Summary of embodiment 8.
As is clear from the above description, in this eighth embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the eighth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is,
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that heats the object N by heating parts 17HL and 17HR;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) having a plurality of heating sources for cooking in a heating chamber located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit 40 for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2;
An alarm means AN having a voice alarm unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and a display unit (integrated display unit 30, individual display units 31L and 31R);
an integrated control device MC that receives commands from the input operation unit 40;
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection unit (input key 520), a second cooking mode selection unit (input key 521), and a dial-type selection means 523.
The first cooking mode selection unit (input key 520) is for selecting the combined cooking mode KM3,
The second cooking mode selection unit (input key 521) is for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2,
When the main power is supplied to the integrated control device MC, the integrated control device MC notifies the first information 501 for identifying the first cooking mode selection unit (input key 520) and the second information 502 for identifying the second cooking mode selection unit (input key 521) by the voice notification unit (voice synthesizer) 95 and the integrated display unit 30;
The control conditions such as cooking menu, control menu, heat power, etc. of the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 selected in the first cooking mode selection unit (input key 520) or the second cooking mode selection unit (input key 521) can be set by the dial-type selection means 523.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting the various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2), the user can easily select the various input keys 520 and 521 of the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select a cooking mode, which in turn makes it easy to select a control menu and a cooking menu corresponding to each heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.

Furthermore, the cooking menu, control menu, heat power, and other control conditions of the linked cooking mode KM3 or the combined cooking mode KM2 selected in the first cooking mode selection unit (input key 520) or the second cooking mode selection unit (input key 521) can be easily set by operating the dial-type selection means 523, which simplifies the user's input operation before cooking begins, thereby realizing a cooking device 1 that is highly operable and convenient.

In the above explanation, an example was given in which the heat power during induction heating was adjusted using the dial-type selection means 523, but various control conditions such as the output of the microwave heating source 189 and the oven heating source 188, the microwave irradiation time, the heating time, and the target temperature can be selected.

As is clear from the above description, in the modified example of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 162), the cooking device 1 according to the ninth disclosure is disclosed in the following configuration as described below.
That is,
A main body 110 having heating units 17HL and 17HR arranged on an upper surface thereof on which an object to be heated N is placed;
A first heating means HM1 (induction heating source 9) that is installed inside the main body 110 and heats the object to be heated N;
a heating chamber 113 formed inside the body 110;
A second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source 189, oven heating source 188) for heating the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 113;
A display means (integrated display unit) 30 having a display screen 30D that can be viewed from above the main body 110;
An input operation unit 40 is installed on the front part of the upper surface of the main body 110 and is elongated in the left-right direction;
An integrated control device MC that receives a command from the input operation unit 40 and controls a heating operation,
The input operation unit 40 is located adjacent to the display means 30,
The input operation unit 40 includes a first cooking mode selection means 530 and a second cooking mode selection means 540 for displaying a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and a control menu of the composite cooking mode M2 on the display screen 30D, respectively.
An operation unit 530A of the first cooking mode selection means 530 or a position adjacent thereto is provided with a cooperation display unit 530B indicating that the cooperation cooking mode KM3 is used, and an operation unit 540A of the second cooking mode selection means 540 or a position adjacent thereto is provided with a composite display unit 540B indicating that the composite cooking mode KM2 is used.
The present invention discloses a cooking device 1 characterized by the above-mentioned.

Therefore, when selecting various cooking modes (the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and the composite cooking mode KM2), the user can easily select the desired cooking mode on the shared operation unit 40M.
This makes it easy to select control menus and cooking menus corresponding to various heating means, thereby realizing a highly convenient heating cooker 1 with improved operability for the user.
In addition, since the cooking menu and control conditions can be displayed in sequence using the dial-type selection means 523, the operation is simple and the user operability is improved.

Other embodiments.
In the first embodiment, for the induction heating source 9 used first in the (first) coordinated cooking mode (see FIG. 65), the left heating unit 17HL and the right heating unit 17HR are prohibited or restricted from operating in any mode other than the coordinated cooking mode KM3 by the input operation unit 40, but further induction heating units may also be included as targets.

Furthermore, in the second coordinated cooking mode (see FIG. 65), the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, are driven simultaneously to start the cooking process, so in this case, it is possible to prohibit or restrict the microwave heating source 189 or the oven heating source 188, or both, from operating in a cooking mode other than the coordinated cooking mode KM3. In both the first and second coordinated cooking modes, by prioritizing the securing of the heat source required for the cooking process, a wide range of cooking can be performed using multiple heating means in the coordinated cooking mode.

In the description of embodiment 1, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3, the integrated control device MC is configured to display a first display screen 30SP dedicated to the cooperative cooking mode KM3, or to display a second display screen 30SC for the composite cooking mode KM2 on the integrated display unit 30, the left display unit 31L, etc., as a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode KM2 or the cooperative cooking mode KM3.
Instead of switching the entire screen in this manner, the basic configurations of the first display screen 30SP and the second display screen 30SC may be unified to clearly distinguish between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM3.

For example, the first display screen 30SP may clearly indicate in text that it is displaying the coordinated cooking mode KM3, while the second display screen 30SC may clearly indicate in text that it is displaying the composite cooking mode KM2. This makes it even easier to distinguish between the two display screens.

Furthermore, a light-emitting display unit such as the light-emitting display unit 27L described in embodiment 1 may be provided on each of the display units for the linked cooking mode KM3 and the combined cooking mode KM2, so that when either one is emitting light, it is possible to know that the cooking mode that is emitting light is being used.

As described above, when the integrated control device MC receives an input for selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM3, if a display operation corresponding to the composite cooking mode or the linked cooking mode is performed, a configuration such as this may be provided with a cooking mode display unit (light-emitting unit).

The linked cooking mode is not limited to being composed of two cooking steps, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2. For example, cooking step 1 may be performed using the left heating section 17HL of the induction heating source 9, cooking step 2 may be performed using the microwave heating source 189, and the food may then be returned to the top plate 15, with cooking step 3 being provided for the purpose of compensating for insufficient heating, making adjustments, adding seasonings or other cooking liquids, etc. This cooking step 3 is performed using the induction heating source 9. Note that in this case, it is not necessary to unify cooking steps 1 and 3 into the same heating sections 17HL and 17HR.

In one example, the final cooking process is carried out on the right heating section 17HR while being visually checked directly. In other words, the food that is almost finished in cooking step 2 is moved onto the right heating section 17HR and heated weakly for a long period of time to increase the degree of maturity of the meat, vegetables, and other ingredients, as well as the broth.

In the above explanation, the linked cooking mode automatically determines the heating sections (of the induction heating source 9) to be used and the order in which they are used when one cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) is specified, but this can be changed to give priority to the user's wishes.

For example, the cooperative cooking modes "Cooked item X" and "Cooked item Y" are used relatively frequently by users, and cooking step 1 for both of these modes is performed using the right heating unit 17HR, so it is assumed that the user is accustomed to cooking using the right heating unit 17HR.

If the user subsequently selects "Cooked Food Z," one of the cooperative cooking modes, and the left heating unit 17HL is selected, it is expected that the user will be confused by the operation since they are not normally accustomed to using it.

Therefore, if the integrated control device MC determines that either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is acceptable, when the integrated cooking mode is first selected, the first specific screen 30SP may preferentially display the right heating unit 17HR, which the user is accustomed to using. In other words, for example, when selecting a heating unit, the "right heating unit" may always be displayed, and the user may then input to specify the left heating unit 17HR.

On the other hand, if the heating unit desired by the user cannot properly heat the food due to constraints such as the heat value for cooking the food or the induction heating current control pattern, cooking can be performed only with the heating unit specified (default setting) in the operation program on the integrated control device MC, preventing misuse or misunderstanding by the user. For example, if a heating unit with a relatively weak heat such as the central heating unit 17HM is provided in addition to the left and right heating units 17HL and 17HR, when the user selects it, the cooking device 1 can notify the user and guide them to correct the situation (move the heated food, such as a pan, to another heating unit).

In the first embodiment, there were two routes: an internal route that passed through the inside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an external route that passed through the outside of the heating chamber 113 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121. However, these routes may be interchanged and modified as follows.
(1) Internal path: A path that cools the inverter circuit board 121 using outside air drawn in by the third cooling fan 128 from the second air intake 152F, introduces the cooling air into the heating chamber 113, and leads to the exhaust duct 102.
(2) External path: A path that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 using outside air drawn in by the fourth cooling fan 129 from the second air intake 152B, guides the cooling air to the outside of the heating chamber 113, and finally reaches the exhaust duct 102.

Generally, the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122 is structured such that multiple heat dissipation plates (heat dissipation fins) are stacked together and cooling air passes through the narrow spaces between the heat dissipation plates to exchange heat (dissipate heat), resulting in a large pressure loss of the cooling air, or in other words, a large airflow resistance.
Therefore, the cooling air that passes through heat dissipation section 122H of magnetron 122 is exhausted without entering heating chamber 113 (the length of the air path is also shortened), thereby improving the balance between the internal and external paths. This is effective when third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 have the same performance. In other words, as explained in the first embodiment, this is one promising idea for realizing low procurement costs during manufacturing by aligning third cooling fan 128 and fourth cooling fan 129 with exactly the same structure, shape, and rated specifications.

In addition, after cooling the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, the internal path for the cooling air RF6 passing through the inside of the heating chamber 113 may be eliminated, and the cooling air RF7 after cooling the inverter circuit board 121 may be discharged directly to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 via the duct 307, simplifying the cooling air path inside the lower unit 200. By reducing the air path resistance, the rated air blowing capacity of the fourth cooling fan 129 can be changed to a lower level. This has the advantage of being more cost-effective.

For users who do not require both the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 at the same time as those shown in the first to eighth embodiments, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 are sold separately and installed separately on the kitchen furniture 2. The lower unit 200 is set as an optional item, for example. In such a case, convenience at the time of sale can be maintained by setting a separate packaging form for the set sale of the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 and a separate packaging form for the sale of only the upper unit 100.

The cooking device 1 of the present disclosure does not necessarily require the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 to be configured in separate housings as shown in the first to eighth embodiments. Therefore, the upper unit 100 and the lower unit 200 may be configured in a single housing (main body case HC) from the beginning.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 are formed from thin metal plates. However, either the upper case 16 or the lower case 101, or both, may be formed from a plastic material. For example, they may be formed from a thermoplastic plastic material. One example of a material is PET, PA, PP, or ABS. "PET" stands for polyethylene terephthalate. "PA" stands for polyamide, and "PP" stands for polypropylene. The material can be determined taking into consideration the heat resistance temperature and durability as a structure. Also, only a portion of the upper case 16 and the lower case (lower housing) 101 may be formed from plastic, and the remaining portions may be formed from metal plates.

The induction heating circuit may use various drive methods, such as a half-bridge circuit or a full-bridge circuit, depending on the shape and number of IH coils 17L and 17R. For example, a full-bridge circuit is proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6130411 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 617h23.

In addition, the IH coil is not limited to a doughnut-shaped configuration, and may be an induction heating unit that includes a circular main heating coil and flat first and second sub-heating coils that are arranged close to both sides of the main heating coil and have a width dimension smaller than the radius of the main heating coil, as shown in Japanese Patent Publication No. 5538546.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when induction heating is started, the induction heating operation starts under default conditions (heat value or heat level) without the need to set the heat, and the user then decides the desired heat. However, other methods are also acceptable. For example, an operation method may be adopted in which the desired induction heating source and heat value (watts) or heat level (one of a range of heat such as "high" to "low") are always decided after the main power is turned on, and then a start command is issued using a specified input key, etc., and such a method is not essentially different from the effect expected from the configuration of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, there are two lower air passages during microwave heating: an air passage (internal path) for the cooling air that cools the heat dissipation section 122H of the magnetron 122, and an air passage (external path) for the cooling air that cools the inverter circuit board 121. These two air passages are finally gathered in one exhaust duct 102 and then discharged to the outside of the cooking appliance 1 via a common exhaust port 20.

However, it is not necessary to route the exhaust air through one (common) exhaust duct, nor is it necessary to collect the exhaust air at one exhaust port 20. For example, a second exhaust port separate from the exhaust port 20 may be provided at a different position (directly below the exhaust cover 19), and the cooling air from either the internal or external route may be exhausted from the second exhaust port. In particular, in the embodiment in which the rear of the upper unit 100 is divided into front and rear by the partition plate 52 (embodiment 1), it is preferable to have the exhaust port face the gap GP1 formed behind the partition plate 52.

In the first embodiment, the operation key 98 of the main power switch 97 is located on the input operation unit 40 (including the operation key 98) exposed on the top surface of the main body case HC, and is operated from above the main body case HC. Note that the operation key 98 is sometimes called an operation button, but it is basically the same structure.

However, the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure is not limited to such a form of the input operation unit 40. For example, the input operation unit 40 does not need to be constantly exposed when viewed from above the main body case HC, and may be stored inside the main body case HC when not in use. Known storage forms include a type that moves horizontally like a drawer and a type that rotates around a single fulcrum.

The method of storing by rotating is called the operating part of the kangaroo pocket mechanism, and is proposed, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-28569, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845, and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 3-2h26. The main power switch 97 may also be a seesaw-type switch, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2004-3845.

Even though the input operation unit 40 is stored by rotating in this manner, it can be operated from above (the direction of) the main body case HC during use. In other words, the user can turn on the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 while standing near the front of the cooking appliance 1, so there is no problem in realizing the cooking appliance 1 of the present disclosure. In addition, the user is not forced into an awkward posture, and operability is good.
The input operation unit 40 that rotates and is stored in this manner may be provided, for example, on the right-side front cover 112 described in the first embodiment.

For example, JP 2017-172941 A proposes a cooking device that has a heating section (such as a gas burner) exposed on the top plate and a heating section in the heating chamber (grill compartment), and employs a kangaroo pocket mechanism for the operation section, which rotates and stores the operation section.

In the first to eighth embodiments, a magnetron is used as the microwave generating source 122, but microwaves may be generated by other means. For example, a cooking device using a semiconductor oscillator is proposed in JP-A-2019-509587 and JP-A-51-9562.

In JP2019-509587A, the microwave generator includes a small signal generator (one or more) configured to generate a high frequency signal at a first power level, and a solid-state high frequency signal amplifier (solid-state amplifier, one or more) that amplifies the high frequency signal from the small signal generator. The solid-state amplifier amplifies a first high frequency signal having a first low power level to a second high frequency signal having a second high power level, and supplies the second high frequency signal to a heating chamber containing an object to be cooked (food).
When realizing the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, a microwave generating source constituted by such semiconductor elements may be used.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that the operation of the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 is performed independently of the heating operation by the induction heating source 9 of the upper unit 100. In other words, when the induction heating source 9 is used, it has been explained that the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are not operated when the upper (first) cooling fan 60 for cooling is operated, but this does not mean that the (first) cooling fan 60 and the lower (third and fourth) cooling fans 128 and 129 are never operated simultaneously.

For example, as explained in FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, at the stage of checking for abnormalities at startup before selecting the heat source to be used (see step ST2 in FIG. 38), all cooling fans may be test-run for a short period of time, and the integrated control device MC may check whether abnormal currents, voltages, etc. are occurring in the circuit. In this case, the cooling fans 60, 61, 128, 129 may be started all at once for a certain short period of time, or they may be started one by one for a short period of time. Doing so does not in any way impair the essential effect of the present disclosure.

In the first embodiment, the user needs to select either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL (FIG. 79, step STR5). That is, first, either the right heating unit 17HR or the left heating unit 17HL is selected by the input key 43M2.
However, in the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure, such a heating unit selection step is not necessarily required.

For example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 6230712 and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2014-44852 state:
The heating device includes a plurality of heating coils regularly arranged adjacent to each other below a top plate on which an object to be heated is placed, an inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the heating coils, a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether an object to be heated is placed directly above the heating coils, an input operation unit provided on an upper surface of the main body, and a control device,
The control device displays a number of icons corresponding to the objects to be heated in a display area of the display screen based on a result of the object to be heated placement determination unit determining that the object to be heated is placed on the heating coil,
The control device discloses an induction heating cooker that operates to input heating and cooking conditions for a first heated object by detecting that the user has touched a first icon corresponding to the first heated object.

In addition, Japanese Patent No. 5202064 states:
The heating device comprises a top plate on which an object to be heated, such as a pan, is placed, a plurality of induction heating coils distributed under the top plate, a sensor for detecting the object to be heated, a band-shaped operation and display means continuously arranged in a predetermined area near the top plate, and a control means;
An induction heating cooker is disclosed in which the control means identifies the occupied area on the top plate of the heated object based on the output of the sensor, further drives the induction heating coil corresponding to the identified occupied area and its surrounding area to identify the area of the heated object, estimates the center position and size of the identified occupied area, and displays the operation means in a specific area of the operation display means based on the estimation result, enabling the operation means and making it accessible by external operation.

In other words, rather than cooking by placing a heated object N, such as a pot, in a specific position on the top plate 15, a technology has been proposed in which the heated object N can be placed relatively freely over a wide area on the top plate 15, and cooking can begin when the control device detects the position of the heated part.

The above-mentioned technology can also be applied to the cooking device 1 of the present disclosure. In other words, it is no longer necessary to display the right heating unit selection mark 334R or the left heating unit selection mark 334L, which indicates that driving is permitted on the integrated control device MC side, on the first specific screen 30SP as described in the first embodiment.

In addition, it is no longer necessary to first select either the right heating section 17HR or the left heating section 17HL using the input key 43M2, further improving usability.

In addition, in the cooking appliances 1 of the first to eighth embodiments, in order to provide multiple functions, the input operation unit 40 is provided with a large number of input keys 43MC, 43M1 to 43M3, 43R1 to 43R4, 43L1 to 43L4, etc. Therefore, there is a concern that a user who is not accustomed to the operation may not be able to easily perform a desired operation.
Therefore, for users who do not want to use all the functions from the beginning, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the input keys themselves is turned off and the input functions of the input keys are disabled when a specific switch is operated, thereby creating a visual effect as if the number of input operation units 40 had been reduced. Note that a cooking device that limits the functions that can be used according to such user wishes has already been proposed in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2009-243771.

It is also possible to set either the linked cooking mode or the combined cooking mode so that it cannot be used by user operation. In that case, the setting may be made using the input key 43KP described in the first embodiment, or an input key or push button switch or the like may be provided that allows the user to limit and expand functions simply by touching it.

Of the processes described in the embodiments, all or part of the processes described as being performed automatically can also be performed manually. Also, all or part of the processes described as being performed manually can also be performed automatically using a known method.

In the first to fourth embodiments, there are two induction heating sections 17H, a left heating section 17HL and a right heating section 17HR, and the inverter circuits 81L, 81R are arranged corresponding to each of the two heating sections, but this may be changed to the following form.
(1) When a large object to be heated is placed over two adjacent heating sections, the induction coils of the two adjacent heating sections are driven in a coordinated manner (see Japanese Patent No. 5,188,215 for a typical example).

(2) A system that includes four induction coils of approximately the same shape and size, wound in the same direction, and arranged in close proximity to each other on approximately the same plane below the top plate 15, and two inverter circuits that supply power to the four induction coils, in which the four induction coils are divided into two coil groups, and power is supplied to each of the two induction coil groups from the two inverter circuits (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5299590 as a representative example).

(3) A system having a circular IH coil (central IH coil) arranged below the top plate 15 and (multiple) auxiliary IH coils arranged to surround the circular IH coil, a first inverter circuit that supplies power to the central IH coil, and a second inverter circuit that supplies power to the auxiliary coils (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5257542 as a representative example).

(4) A heating device comprising: a main IH coil for heating an object to be heated placed on a top plate; a sub-IH coil group consisting of a plurality of sub-IH coils each installed adjacent to the outside of the main IH coil; a main inverter circuit for supplying high-frequency current to the main IH coil; a sub-inverter circuit group for independently supplying high-frequency current to each of the sub-IH coils in the sub-IH coil group; a heated object placement determination unit for determining whether the same object to be heated is placed on at least one of the main IH coil and the plurality of sub-IH coils; and a current control circuit for controlling the output of the main inverter circuit and the sub-inverter circuit group, wherein the sub-IH coil is A plurality of sub-IH coils are provided around the main IH coil with a predetermined insulating space between them, and the outer diameter shape of the sub-IH coil is such that the side edge adjacent to the outer periphery of the main IH coil is curved along the outer periphery of the main IH coil, and the current control circuit controls the output of the main inverter circuit and the output of the sub-inverter circuits to a predetermined distribution so that the heating power value set by the user is achieved, and then when the number of sub-IH coils performing the cooperative heating operation increases or decreases, or is switched to another sub-IH coil, the output distribution before the change is maintained (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 5642168 as a representative example).

The circuits, parts, and components of the devices shown in the figures are conceptual and functional, and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as shown. Furthermore, the integrated control device MC, microwave heating control unit 130, heating chamber control unit 159, and display unit drive circuit 63 described in particular in Figures 30 and 141 allow the functions of these devices and circuits to be distributed and integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that shown, and all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed and integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating conditions, etc.

The functions of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 (90M1, 90M2) are realized by processing circuits. The processing circuits that realize the functions may be dedicated hardware or may be processors that execute programs stored in memory.

When the processing circuit is a processor, each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 is realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device MM, which is memory. The processor realizes each function of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device MM.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the integrated control device MC and the IH control unit 90. The memory device MM is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, EEPROM, etc.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs of the memory device MM and memory device 90R shown in FIG. 30 may not be stored in the cooking appliance 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooking appliance 1 obtains the necessary data and program information by accessing the external recording medium (storage server).

Furthermore, the operating programs of the integrated control device MC, microwave heating control unit 130, heating chamber control unit 159, and display unit drive circuit 63 described in particular in FIG. 30 may be updated to appropriately improved versions at the request of the user or the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, for example, a correction program may be obtained via the wireless communication unit 49.

One of the heating parts 17HL, 17HR of the induction heating source 9 (first heating means HM1) for cooking on the top plate 15 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Also, the induction heating source 9, the microwave heating source 189, or the oven heating source 188 may be replaced with a gas-fired burner.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the input operation unit 40, the left operation unit 40L, the cooperative operation unit 40MC, and the right operation unit 40R have all been described as "contact input" operation units in which the user touches input keys to give input commands, but a non-contact method in which input is performed by detecting the movement of the user's fingers or hands in a non-contact manner may also be used. Furthermore, a voice input method in which the user's voice is recognized and input may also be used in combination. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and voice receiving unit for receiving the user's voice and converting it into a voice recognition signal corresponds to the input operation unit.

In the first to eighth embodiments, the input operation unit 40 was used as the means for selecting the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 30SC, the second specific screen 30SP, and the third specific screen 30ST, but the means may be provided within the display screen of the integrated display unit 30 or the left and right display units 31L and 31R, which are display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes a technique for composite cooking, proposes a technique in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of the composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user selects a menu by touching the menu selection section directly with their finger.

Therefore, the menu of dishes possible in the composite cooking or linked cooking mode, the names of the foods to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc. may be displayed on the first specific screen 30SC or the second specific screen 30SP, and the user may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with his/her finger to select the menu of the linked cooking mode, etc.

In the first embodiment, the wireless communication unit 49 receives command signals transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits each operation signal and command signal L1 to L10 to the outside, but it may also transmit information indicating the progress of cooking step 1, cooking step 2, such as the start and end of cooking step 2. The user can know this progress information on the portable terminal device 418, etc., improving convenience.

In addition, in the first embodiment, command signals, operation signals, etc. are sent and received between the wireless communication unit 49 and the home gateway 411 inside the house HA, but power line carrier technology (also known as "PLC technology") may also be used.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the home gateway 411 having a function of receiving search result data of the inventory information of the refrigerator 401 is used as the information management device, but the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 401 may each be connected to the Internet (wide area communication network) 416 and connected to an external server 417 via the Internet 416. In that case, the external server 417 may store and hold the inventory information of the refrigerator 401.

Furthermore, the external server 417 stores recipe information for various cooking methods that can be used with the cooking appliance 1. The system may then be configured to search for recipe information in response to a request from the cooking appliance 1 or the information and communication terminal device 418, and provide the extracted recipe information to the cooking appliance 1 or the information and communication terminal device 418.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The substantial scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking device disclosed herein can be widely used not only in the kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking appliance 2 Kitchen furniture 2A Installation opening 2B Front opening 2G Step 2P Upper surface of rim 2S Right side 3 Surface material 4 Surface material 5 Surface material 6 Surface material 7 Frame 8 Wall 9 Induction heating source (first heating means HM1)
10 Upper unit body 11 Partition member (partition wall)
12 Partition plate 13 Partition plate 14 Partition wall 15 Top plate 16 Upper case (upper housing)
16A Flange 16B Rear vertical wall 16BL Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BR Auxiliary exhaust hole 16BX Horizontal bent portion 16F Front vertical wall 16L Side vertical wall 16R Side vertical wall 16S Bottom wall (bottom wall surface)
17C Coil base (coil support frame)
17CH Arm 17CL Coil wire 17H Induction heating section 17HL Left heating section (second heating section)
17HM Center heating section 17HR Right heating section (first heating section)
17L IH coil (induction heating coil)
17M IH coil (induction heating coil)
17R IH coil (induction heating coil)
18 Opening 19 Exhaust cover 20 Exhaust port 21 Decorative frame 22 Reinforcement plate 23 Right-side input control device 24 Left-side input control device 25 Decorative frame 26 Cushioning material 27 Light-emitting display section 27L Light-emitting display section 27M Light-emitting display section 27R Light-emitting display section 27L1 to 27L4 Individual light-emitting sections 27M1 to 27M6 Individual light-emitting sections 27R1 to 27R5 Individual light-emitting sections 28 Power switch control device 29 Support plate 30 Integrated display section (central display section)
30A Display text 30AD Additional screen 30B Display text 30C Two-dimensional information 30D Display screen 30E Caution display 30F Explanation text 30G Caution text 30H Recommendation text 30J Specific text 30K Heating source display section 30L First area 30M Second area 30MY Microwave heating time information 30N Common information during standby 30GY Heating time information for grill cooking 30P Guidance information 30P1 Guidance information 30Q Text information (additional information)
30R Third area 30S Heating time information 30SA Guide screen 30T Target temperature information 30V Information showing output level 30W Display window 30X Output value (watt value) information 30Y Candidate display section
31L Left side display section (individual display section)
31LW Display window 31R Right side display section (individual display section)
31RW Display window 32 Central operation board 33 Rectifier circuit 34 Power supply circuit A
35 Rectifier circuit 36 Power supply circuit B
37L Drive circuit 37R Drive circuit 38 Exhaust window 39A Signal line 39B Signal line 40 Input operation unit 40L Left operation unit (second individual operation unit)
40M Central operation unit 40VR Audio signal receiving unit 40VS Audio signal analyzing unit 40R Right operation unit (first individual operation unit)
41 Operation board
41L Left touch key board 41R Right touch key board 42 Input key 43H Display unit (for central heating unit)
43L1 to 43L4 Input keys 43M1 Input key 43M2 Input key 43M3 Input key (Guide key)
43KP Input key 43L1 to 43L4 Input keys 43M1 Input key (second cooking mode selection section)
43M2 Input key 43R3 Input key 43MC Input key (first cooking mode selection section)
43MS Input key (start part)
43MT Input key (end part)
43P Display unit 43R1 to 43R4 Input key 43MX Input key 44L Input key 44R Input key 45L Input key 45M Input key 45R Input key 46L Window 46R Window 47 Input key 48 Infrared transmission unit 49 Wireless communication unit (wireless communication module)
50 Holder 51 Screw 52 Partition plate 52A Exhaust window 52B Exhaust window 53L Exhaust port plate 53R Exhaust port plate 54 Filter circuit board 55 Power supply circuit board 56 Choke coil 57 Transformer 58 Capacitor 59 Diode bridge circuit (diode module)
60 First cooling fan (upper cooling fan)
60A Air outlet 60C Fan case 60F Rotor 60FL Cooling air 60H Intake port 60M Motor 60P Drive circuit 60T Rotor shaft 61 Second cooling fan 61A Air outlet 61C Fan case 61F Rotor 61M Motor 61P Drive circuit 62 Cooling fan drive circuit 63 Display drive circuit 63CS Display command unit (for second specific screen)
63SP Display command unit (for 1st specific screen)
63ST Display command unit (for 3rd specific screen)
64 Ventilation hole
64S Auxiliary ventilation hole 65 Right exhaust port 66 Antimagnetic ring 67L Heat power display 67H Keep warm display 67R Heat power display 68 Heat source display 68L Display 68M Display 68R Display 69 High temperature warning 70 Cover 70A Front cutout 70B Hanging wall 70E Extension 71 Support plate 72 Power control section (demand control section)
73 Signal transmission section 74 Drive circuit 75 DC power supply circuit 75M DC power supply circuit 76 Resonant capacitor 76m Resonant capacitor 77a Input current detection section 77am Input current detection section 77b Output current detection section 77bm Output current detection section 78a Diode bridge 78am Diode bridge 78b Reactor 78bm Reactor 78c Smoothing capacitor 78cm Smoothing capacitor 79a IGBT
79am IGBT
79b IGBT
79bm IGBT
79c Diode 79cm Diode 79d Diode 79dm Diode 80 Inverter circuit board 80F First inverter circuit board 80M Second inverter circuit board 81 Inverter circuit 81L Inverter circuit (first inverter circuit)
81M Inverter circuit (third inverter circuit)
81R Inverter circuit (second inverter circuit)
82 Heat sink 82B Heat sink (second heat sink)
82B1 Heat sink (rear first heat sink)
82B2 Heat sink (rear second heat sink)
82F Heat sink (first heat sink)
82F1 Heat sink (front first heat sink)
82F2 Heat sink (front second heat sink)
82FN Heat dissipation fin 82M Heat sink 82MF Heat dissipation fin 82MF1 Heat dissipation fin 82MF2 Heat dissipation fin 83 Power control switching element 84 Vibration sensor 85 Electrical component 86 Water receiving member 87 Outer case 87A Ventilation hole 87B Drainage hole 88 Inner case 88A Ventilation hole 88B Hole 89 Insertion hole 90 IH control unit 90M1 Microcomputer 90M2 Microcomputer 90R Memory device 91 Power supply circuit 92 DC power supply conversion unit 93 Temperature detection circuit (abnormality detection unit)
94L Induction heating circuit 94R Induction heating circuit 95 Voice synthesizer (voice notification unit)
95S Speaker 96 Clock circuit 97 Main power switch 98 Operation button or operation key of main power switch 99 Commercial power supply (commercial AC power supply)
100 Upper unit 101 Lower case (lower housing)
101A Flange 101B Rear wall (rear vertical wall)
101C Inclined portion 101F Front plate 101H Body portion 101U Bottom plate 101L Side vertical wall 101R Side vertical wall 101T Front horizontal wall 102 Exhaust duct (first exhaust duct)
102A: Internal passage 102B: Internal passage 102E: End portion 102S: Separator (partition plate)
104 Cavity 105 Control device 106 Power cord 106A Plug 108A Connection port (connection terminal)
108B Connection port (connection terminal)
109A Output terminal section 109B Output terminal section 109C Output terminal section 110 Main body 111 Inclined section 112 Front cover 112P Mounting leg 113 Heating chamber 113A Opening 113B Rear wall (rear wall surface)
113T: recess 114: door 115: handle 117: through hole (guide hole)
118 Connecting member (reinforcing member)
119A Electric wire 119B Electric wire 120 Microwave heating device 120P Power supply circuit section 121 Inverter circuit board 121A Inverter circuit (drive circuit)
122 Magnetron (microwave source)
122A Oscillator 122H Heat Dissipation Section 123 Waveguide 124 Antenna Case 125 Antenna 126 Antenna Drive Motor 126A Rotating Shaft 127 Power Supply Circuit Board 128 Third Cooling Fan (Lower Cooling Fan A) (Cooling Fan A)
129 Fourth cooling fan (lower cooling fan B) (cooling fan B)
130 Microwave heating control unit 131 Door open/close detection mechanism 132A Latch switch 132B Door switch 133 Monitor switch 134 Pin 135 Pin 136A Interlocking rod 136B Interlocking rod 137 Support plate 138A Communication port 138B Communication port 139 Closure detection unit 140 Oven heating device 141 Space (ceiling space)
142 Space (side space)
145 Tray 150 Case A
151 Case B
152B Air intake (second air intake)
152F Intake port (second intake port)
152S1 Auxiliary intake port 152S2 Auxiliary intake port 153 Duct 154 Case C
154A Lid 154B Body 158 Non-contact temperature measuring unit (infrared temperature measuring unit)
159 Heating chamber control unit 160 Temperature sensor 161 Detection window 162 Cooking dish 163 Heater 163A Upper heater 163B Lower heater 164 Vent (first air intake)
165 Recess (intake duct)
166L Left side partition plate 166R Right side partition plate 167 Upper heat shield plate 168 Lower heat shield plate 169 Upper case 170 Lower case 171 Partition plate 172 Passage 173 Communication port 174 Communication port 176 Hinge 178A Relay 178B Relay 180 Power supply port 181 Cover 182 Relay 184 Sealing material 185 Radio wave sealing chamber 186 Screw 188 Oven heating source (heating chamber heating source) (second heating means HM2)
189 Microwave heating source (second heating means HM2)
190 Frame 191 Cover 192 Inner frame 192W Viewport (opening)
193 Inner seal frame 194 Choke chamber 195 Seal plate 196 Seal plate 197 Upper shield plate 199 Air direction plate 200 Lower unit 201 Inlet 226 Leg 264 Ventilation hole 300A Upper space 300B Lower space 301R Right gap (third gap)
301L Left gap (third gap)
302 Front gap (third gap)
303 gap 304 support metal fitting 304V vertical portion 304H horizontal portion (flange portion)
305 Vent hole 306 Communication window 307 Exhaust duct (second exhaust duct)
308 Vertical portion 309 Communication window 310 Spacer (cushion material)
311 Lower gap (third gap)
320 Exhaust port 326 Cushioning material 330 Identification information 331 Additional information 332 Cooking process information (display section of cooking process)
333 Time-saving information 334 Refrigerator display 335D Symbol 335U Symbol 336D Symbol 336U Symbol 337 Display guide 338 Recommended information (recommended cooking)
339 Individual ingredient information 340 Fourth area 350 Touch panel input device 351 Operation panel 352 Operation information input unit 353 Touch gesture determination device 354 Operation determination unit 355 Gesture mode discrimination unit 356 Gesture input information determination unit 357 Gesture area determination unit 358 Reference parameter storage unit 359 Notification unit 360 Reference information 361 Menu display unit 362 Reference information storage unit 363 Cooking menu display information 400 Home appliance 401 Refrigerator 402 Television receiver 403 Air conditioner 404 Air purifier 405 Ventilator 406 Electric rice cooker (electric jar rice cooker)
408 Microwave oven 409 Lighting equipment 410 Kitchen 411 Home gateway 412 Main body case 413 Environment detection unit 413A Sensor unit 413H Human detection unit 414 Power meter 415 Power line (main line)
416 Wide area communication circuit network 417 External server 418 Information and communication terminal device 419 Wireless router 420 Ceiling wall surface 422 Range hood 423 Exhaust port 424 Duct 425 Hood 425A Intake port 426 Electric fan 429 Blower fan 430 Filter 431 Air guide plate 432 Intake port 433 Air outlet 434 Odor sensor 435 Communication unit 436 Vertical wall surface 440 Temperature monitoring device 441 Temperature detection unit 442 Communication unit 443 Temperature determination circuit 444 Light receiving unit 445 Alarm device 446 Communication unit (transmitter/receiver)
447 Central control unit 448 Power amount control unit 449 Input unit 450 Storage device 451 Schedule management unit 452 Human detection sensor 453 Environmental sensor 500 Boiler (steam generator)
501 First information 502 Second information 503 Third information 507 First identification information 508 Second identification information 509 Third identification information 509L Third identification information 509R Third identification information 510 Display unit 511 IC tag 512 Reader (information reading unit)
513 Touch key (sensing part)
514 Touch key (sensing part)
515 Touch key (sensing part)
516L display unit 516M display unit 516R display unit 517 touch key (sensing unit)
517 Touch key (sensing part)
517 Touch key (sensing part)
520 Input key 521 Input key 522 Input key 523 Dial type selection means 524 Fourth specific information 525 Heat power display band 530 First cooking mode selection means (input key)
530A Operation unit (operation surface)
530B Linked display unit 540 Second cooking mode selection means (input key)
540A Operation unit (operation surface)
540B Composite display unit 550 Third cooking mode selection means (input key)
550A Operation unit (operation surface)
550B Heating means display section 560 Display content display section AH Upper air passage AL Exposed range of top plate AN Notification section BL Straight line (reference line)
BH Depth dimension BT1 Dedicated power supply (built-in battery)
CK IH coil installation space D5 Maximum dimension of upper case in front-to-back direction D6 Maximum width dimension in front-to-back direction D7 Distance between opposing sides DP1 Depth (dimension)
EM Abnormality detection unit F1 First air duct F2 Second air duct FA1 to FA10 Reference information FG User's fingertip FI Inlet FL1 Air outlet line FL2 Air outlet line FO Outlet GD1 Step GP1 Gap GP2 Gap (first gap)
GP5L gap GP5R gap GP6 gap GP7 gap GP8 gap GP9 gap GP10 gap GP11 gap GP12 gap (second gap)
GP13 Distance between the top plate and the cover GP14 Gap with the first cooling fan GP16 Space GP17 Gap GP18 Gap HC Main body case H1 Maximum height dimension H2 Height dimension H3 Height dimension H4 Height dimension H5 Height dimension H6 Height dimension H7 Height dimension H8 Height dimension HA House HB Reference bottom surface HP1 First horizontal plane HP2 Second horizontal plane HV Effective height dimension HX Maximum height dimension IP1 Touch information (input operation information)
IP2 Input information IP3 Selection value signal IP4 Selection value signal IP5 Image signal JC Human detection sensor LA Protrusion dimension LD1 Distance LD2 Distance LF Exhaust port dimension MC Integrated control device MM Memory device N Heated object QC Seismic sensor RF1 Cooling air RF2 Cooling air RF3 Cooling air RF4 Cooling air RF4L Cooling air RF4R Cooling air RF5 Cooling air RF6 Cooling air TR Transition period UH Lower air duct W1 Width dimension of installation port W2 Maximum width dimension of installation space W3 Maximum width dimension of cooking device W4 Maximum dimension in left-right direction W5 Maximum width dimension in left-right direction of upper case W6 Length of inverter circuit board 80 W7 Width of inverter circuit board 80 W8 Maximum (width) dimension in left-right direction inside of upper case W9 Distance between opposing hanging walls 70B (dimension of space in the front-rear direction)
W10 Distance W11 Diameter W12 Distance W13 Distance W14 Installation interval WB Depth dimension WH Inside width dimension (frontage dimension)
XB Intersection XF Intersection XG Intersection.

Claims (4)

A first heating means for heating the object to be heated by a heating section;
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources with different heating methods for cooking in a heating chamber located separately from the heating unit;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
a notification means having a voice notification unit and a display unit;
a control unit that receives a command from the input operation unit,
The input operation unit includes a first cooking mode selection unit and a second cooking mode selection unit,
The first cooking mode selection unit selects an associated cooking mode in which cooking is performed in a predetermined order by using the first heating means and the second heating means having a plurality of heating sources having different heating methods in combination,
The second cooking mode selection unit selects a composite cooking mode in which cooking is performed by using a plurality of heating sources of the second heating means having different heating methods in combination ,
When a main power source is supplied, the control unit notifies the first information identifying the first cooking mode selection unit and the second information identifying the second cooking mode selection unit by the audio notification unit.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. A main body having a heating chamber built therein and a top plate on an upper surface thereof;
An induction heating source that induction heats an object to be heated placed on a heating portion installed at a plurality of positions on the top plate from below the top plate;
An oven heat source for heating an object to be cooked placed inside the heating chamber;
A microwave heating source that supplies microwaves to the inside of the heating chamber;
a display means for displaying operation information of the induction heating source, the oven heating source, and the microwave heating source,
A control unit that controls the induction heating source, the oven heating source, the microwave heating source, and the display means;
An input operation unit that inputs a command from a user to the control unit,
The control unit, in the display means,
(1) Display the initial screen during standby,
(2) after displaying the standby initial screen, a guide screen is displayed on which first information specifying a first cooking mode selection section for selecting a first cooking mode and second information specifying a second cooking mode selection section for selecting a second cooking mode are displayed in a list form;
(3) A cooking menu or a control menu is displayed by waiting for a selection operation of the first cooking mode selection unit or the second cooking mode selection unit.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. A main body with a built-in heating chamber;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated that is placed in a location separate from the heating chamber;
A second heating means having a plurality of heating sources for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber;
A display means;
a control unit that controls the first heating means, the second heating means, and the display means;
An input operation unit that inputs a command from a user to the control unit,
The control unit, in the display means,
(1) Display the initial screen during standby,
(2) Then, first information specifying a first cooking mode selection unit for selecting the first cooking mode, second information specifying a second cooking mode selection unit for selecting the second cooking mode, and third information specifying a third cooking mode selection unit for selecting the third cooking mode are displayed in a list state;
(3) Furthermore, when the first cooking mode selection unit is selected, a first specific screen is displayed, when the second cooking mode selection unit is selected, a second specific screen is displayed, and when the third cooking mode selection unit is selected, a third specific screen is displayed.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. The main body,
A heating chamber formed inside the body;
A first heating means for heating an object to be heated in at least two heating sections arranged on the left and right sides of the upper surface of the main body;
A second heating means having a plurality of heat sources for cooking in the heating chamber;
an input operation unit for inputting drive conditions of the first heating means and the second heating means;
A display means for displaying information;
a control unit that receives a command from the input operation unit,
the input operation unit has an individual operation unit corresponding to the heating unit and a common operation unit corresponding to both the first heating means and the second heating means,
the display means includes an integrated display section corresponding to the common operation section and an individual display section corresponding to the individual operation section,
The input operation unit includes a first cooking mode selection unit and a second cooking mode selection unit,
After a main power source is supplied, the control unit displays, on the integrated display unit and the individual display unit, a standby initial screen that displays information common to the first heating means and the second heating means, and subsequently displays a guide screen instead of the standby initial screen;
The guidance screen displays first information specifying the first cooking mode selection unit and second information specifying the second cooking mode selection unit in a list state or in a switchable manner.
A heating cooker characterized by the above.

Images